JP7319583B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine has been known as one of gaming machines (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2016-214434 A

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance as a gaming machine.

Having a first display capable of displaying character ratio information,
having a start switch,
having "N" reels,
having "N" stop switches,
Having a second display capable of displaying information about an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Having a third display capable of displaying information about an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch,
In a predetermined game in which the operation of the start switch is accepted at the first timing before the minimum game time elapses and the result of the specific lottery is determined, the second display displays information on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. After that, it is configured to be able to display information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch on the third display,
In the specific game in which the operation of the start switch is accepted at the second timing after the minimum game time has passed and the result of the specific lottery is determined, the third display device displays information regarding the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. After that, the second display is configured to be able to display information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
The first display has a first display, a second display, a third display, and a fourth display,
The first display has a plurality of segments including a DP segment,
The second display has a plurality of segments including a DP segment,
The third display has a plurality of segments including a DP segment,
The fourth display has a plurality of segments including a DP segment,
A test pattern can be displayed on the first display,
The test pattern includes a first situation in which all of the plurality of segments of the first display section, the second display section, the third display section, and the fourth display section are turned on; 2, the third display unit, and the second state in which all of the plurality of segments of the fourth display unit are turned off.

According to the present invention, performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, in the present embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view for explaining how a medal inserted from the medal slot passes through an insertion sensor in the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a voltage drop when a power failure occurs in the first embodiment (A) using a time chart; In the first embodiment (B), it is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the insertion sensor and the passage of medals. In 1st Embodiment (B), it is a figure explaining ON/OFF of an injection|throwing-in sensor with a time chart. In the first embodiment (C), it is a schematic diagram when medals are discharged from the medal payout device. In the first embodiment (C), it is a schematic diagram showing the state of ON (detection) / OFF (non-detection) of the payout sensor when medals are delivered from the medal payout device. In 1st Embodiment (C), it is a figure which shows the on/off of a payout sensor with a time chart. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing an outline of a main control board and a board case in the second embodiment; In the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view showing a board case containing a main control board. (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA showing Example 1 of the gate trace. (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A--A showing example 2 of gate traces. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating the flow of processing when disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board in the third embodiment; In the fourth embodiment, it is a sectional view (schematic diagram) explaining the movement of the stop button of the stop switch, (a) shows a no-load state, (b) is when the detection sensor is turned on from off. (c) shows the state when the stop button is pushed all the way down, and (d) shows the state when the stop button is released and the detection sensor turns off from on. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the relationship between the movement of the stop button and the excitation state of the motor in a time chart, (a) shows example 1, (b) shows example 2. FIG. FIG. 12 is a time chart showing the relationship between power on/off and voltage level in the fifth embodiment, where (a) shows the power off after starting the main program, and (b) shows the time before starting the main program. Indicates power off. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state before the last discharged medal touches the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state before the last discharged medal touches the fixed shaft and the movable shaft. FIG. 10 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state before contact with the movable shaft and a state in which the hopper disc has advanced in rotation from (a). In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the last discharged medal is in contact with the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a movable medal pushed by the last discharged medal. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the token payout device showing a state in which the shaft has moved; In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the token payout device showing the moment the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section, and (b) is a plan view showing the state after the last ejected medal is ejected. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the token payout device showing a state where the rotation of the hopper disc is stopped; FIG. 14 is a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal for the hopper motor, the drive state of the hopper motor, and the discharge state of medals from the discharge unit in the sixth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the main control board, the drive state of the hopper motor, the detection state of the payout sensor, and the ejection timing of the medals in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a modified example of the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a side sectional view of the slot machine with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board and the sub-control board; FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitors on the sub control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment; ) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. FIG. 12C is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitors on the sub control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment; ) shows Example 3, and (d) shows Example 4. FIG. 22 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front portion of the housing of the slot machine (part A in FIG. 22) with the front door closed in the eighth embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the gap between the cabinet and the front door. be. In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of special bonuses (accessories) and end conditions, and (b) is a diagram showing the types of game states and the specified number of each game state, (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation determination table used in common by non-RT and RT (non-AT) in 9th Embodiment. It is a diagram showing an effect determination table commonly used inside the RB and inside the BB in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example 1 of test pattern display of management information display LEDs in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing Example 2 of test pattern display of management information display LEDs in the tenth embodiment; In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate, (B) is a diagram showing management information display LEDs, and (C) is a diagram showing set value display LEDs. is. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing output ports in the eleventh embodiment; In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter values, digit signals, and segment signals. (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, names, etc. of data stored in RWM; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the concept of a difference counter value, (a) showing example 1 and (b) showing example 2; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous interval, (a) showing example 1 and (b) showing example 2; 4 is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board; FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 in FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S213. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing game start set processing (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG. In FIG. 41, it is a flow chart showing AT game number counter update processing in step S281. 41. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous area transition lottery process in step S283 in FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing advantageous section transition processing in step S347 of FIG. 44; FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in step S355 of FIG. 45. FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing AT initial game number determination processing in step S363. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing a push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. 41; FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing medal payout processing (MS_WIN_PAY) due to winning in step S294. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing game end check processing (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. 41; FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing Example 1 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50; FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR); FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. 53; FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S453. 29 is a flowchart showing sub-difference number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing sub-difference number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 56 . In the twelfth embodiment, (A) shows the role condition device and the operation end condition, (B) shows the specified number for each RT, and (C) shows the winning number for each winning number. It is the front view, the top view, and the right view which show the outline|summary of a structure containing the reel and stop switch in 13th Embodiment. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (A). 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (A). FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (B); FIG. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (B); FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (B). FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (C); FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) due to winning in the fourteenth embodiment (C); FIG. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (C); FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (C). FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (D); FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (D). 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (D). FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (E); FIG. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (E); FIG. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (E); FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view showing an outline of a configuration including a reel, an operation instruction lamp and a stop switch in the fourteenth embodiment (F); 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (F). FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (F); FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (G). 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (G). FIG. 20 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (A). FIG. 32 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (B). FIG. 22 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (C). FIG. 21 is a schematic front view of a medal selector, a shoot path 48, and a shoot sensor 49 in a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a front view of a passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a rear view of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a left side view of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 85 of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing main RWM storage areas described in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a time chart (example 1) showing output timings of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a time chart (example 2) showing output timings of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart (example 1) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 344 is a flowchart (example 1) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 344 ; FIG. 20 is a flowchart (example 2) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart (example 3) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine in the nineteenth embodiment (A); 19 is a time chart showing the relationship between a setting change state, a setting change end sound, a lamp effect, and one game time, which will be described later, in the nineteenth embodiment. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine viewed from the front side (player side). It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the back side. It is a block diagram in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart for explaining the flow of startup after power-on of the pachinko gaming machine. 101 is a flowchart showing setting change processing in step S702 of FIG. 100; It is a flow chart showing the flow of one game in the pachinko game machine. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the board case (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as seen from the front side; FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the board case (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as seen from the rear side; FIG. 4 is an external perspective view showing a state in which a main control board is housed in a board case; FIG. 4 is a front view of a state in which a main control board is housed in a board case, viewed from the front side; FIG. 4 is a front view of the state in which the main control board is accommodated in the board case, viewed from the rear (rear) side; FIG. 4A is a side cross-sectional view showing a fitted state of an upper case and a lower case, where (a) shows a temporary fitted state (before sliding movement) and (b) shows a final fitting state (after sliding movement); . FIG. 10 is a plan view of the vicinity of the side wall seen from the side of the lower case in the temporarily fitted state; FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a state in which a harness is connected to a connector of the main control board; It is a front view which shows harness and its connector terminal in detail. It is a perspective view which shows the example which hides the lead wire regarding starting. FIG. 4 is a side cross-sectional view showing the positional relationship between the upper case of the substrate case, the cover, the setting key insertion opening, and the setting change (reset) switch. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a pattern arrangement of reels in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing display windows, effective lines, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram (1) showing a symbol combination for a winning combination, the number of payouts, and the like in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (2) showing a symbol combination for a winning combination, the number of payouts, and the like in the twenty-third embodiment; It is a diagram (3) showing a symbol combination of a winning combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 24 is a diagram (4) showing a symbol combination of a winning combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment; It is a diagram (5) showing a combination of symbols for a winning combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a diagram (6) showing a combination of symbols for a winning combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing a conditional device and a winning combination in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a diagram (4) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number table (non-RT) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number table (RT1) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an entry table (during 1BB operation and RB non-inside) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a numerical table (during operation of 1BB and inside RB) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a numerical table (during 1BB operation and RB operation) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing RT transitions in the twenty-third embodiment; It is a diagram showing the transition of the main game state in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram (1) showing contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (2) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (3) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 24 is a diagram (4) showing contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (5) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 26 is a diagram (6) showing contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing start switch acceptance processing (M_START_CTL) in the twenty-third embodiment. 19 is a flow chart showing a symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a stop acceptance specification table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1) and a stop acceptance specification table 2 ((TBL_ORD_INF1)) in the twenty-third embodiment; It is a flow chart showing the start of standby effect (M_TARPIC_EXE) in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing reel effect execution timer tables 1 to 8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1 to TM8) in the twenty-third embodiment; 23 is a flow chart showing reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 139. It is a flowchart which shows the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S753 of FIG. 148. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of completion|finish of a main game state game in FIG.148 S941. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STBY) in step S957 of FIG. 149; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) in the twenty-third embodiment; 19 is a flow chart showing reel control data address setting (C_RLDAT_SET) in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 155 is a flowchart continued from FIG. 154; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) in the twenty-third embodiment; 19 is a flow chart showing reel drive pulse update (I_PULSE_INC) in the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a reel driving pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing deceleration start check (I_REDUCE_CHK) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an immersion prevention output in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing confrontation effect output control in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining volume setting in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing volume setting in administrator mode in the twenty-third embodiment.

In this specification, the meanings of terms are as follows.
A “bet” is a bet of medals (game media) to play a game. To bet medals, the actual medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, or the bet switch 40 is operated to bet credited (stored) medals.
On the other hand, "credit (also referred to as "reservation")" is different from the above-described "bet" and refers to the accumulation of medals inside the slot machine 10 . As used herein, the term "credit" does not include "bet."
Furthermore, "throwing in" refers to betting or crediting medals.
Also, the “specified number” refers to the number of bets that can be started (executed) in the game. For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the bet number of "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the bet number of "1".
For convenience of explanation, the "specified number" may also be referred to as the "bet number".
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to anything other than the "specified number". For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3", the bet number is "1" (the bet number at that time) when one medal is inserted (before the game starts).

“Maintenance” means that the player inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 47 (described later).
“Handling bet” means that the player bets on medals by handing over the medals from the medal slot 47 .
“Cleaning credit” means that the player credits medals (adding credits) by cleaning the medals from the medal slot 47 .
“Bet medals” means the medals that are bet on.
“Reserved Medals” means Medals that are credited (reserved).

A "reserved bet" is a bet that a player operates a bet switch 40 (described later) to bet part or all of the credited medals within the range that can be betted in the game in order to play the game. It means to
“Automatic bet” means that the number of medals that were betted in the previous game is automatically betted by the control processing of the slot machine 10 when the replay wins.
Here, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination has been stopped and displayed (meaning that the symbol combination has stopped on the active line; the same shall apply hereinafter), this is referred to as "winning a small combination". On the other hand, in the "Regulations Concerning Approval and Type Examination of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as "rules")", when the symbol combination corresponding to replaying is stopped and displayed, the conditional device for replaying is activated. are interpreted as not “winning”. However, in the present application (this specification, etc.), replay is also treated as one of the combinations (replay combination), and stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to replay may be referred to as "replay win".
“Settlement” means paying out bet medals and/or accumulated medals to a player. In this embodiment, the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

“Payout” refers to paying out medals to a player based on winning a winning combination or paying out medals through the above settlement. When paying out medals to the player based on winning a role, the medals are stored as credits (adding the stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)) and paying out the medals. This includes both dispensing actual medals from a mouth (not shown). The payout of medals is controlled such that, for example, "50" is credited as the limit number of medals, and medals exceeding the credit number of "50" are actually paid out to the player.
Note that "payout" may also be referred to as "grant". Therefore, the "number of payouts" may also be referred to as the "number of awards."

The "game medium" is medals in this embodiment, but electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the game medium in the case of, for example, an enclosed (ECO) gaming machine. It should be noted that "electronic information" means that, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is used to play a game on a game machine. It is possible to credit the game machine as a game medium for performing.
Note that the "game medium" may also be referred to as "game value".

Further, when the game medium is electronic information, "payout of medals" means crediting (adding) to a game medium credit device provided in the gaming machine. Therefore, "payout of medals" does not mean only that the medals are actually paid out from the hopper 35 (described later). addition) is also included.

``N-1'' game, ``N'' game, ``N+1'' game, . When it is a number, the game of the "N"th game is called "this time game". Also, the game of the "N-1"th game is referred to as the "previous game". Furthermore, the game of the "N+1"th game is referred to as the "next game".

In this specification, numbers with "(B)" at the end of numbers (especially 8 bits) mean binary numbers. Similarly, a number with "(H)" at the end of the number means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numeric value representing "16" in decimal is represented as "00010000 (B)" in binary and "10 (H)" in hexadecimal. Numerical values representing decimal numbers are written as "16(D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether it is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, the trailing symbols of "(B)", "(D)", and "(H)" may be omitted respectively. .

The "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing (timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the activated line).
In addition, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means that in a game in which the game result (symbol combination that stops on the active line) is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, there is a payout or a large number of payouts. An operation mode in which a symbol combination stops, an operation mode in which a symbol combination that shifts (promotes) to an advantageous RT stops, or an operation mode in which a symbol combination that does not shift (falls) to a disadvantageous RT stops. The "advantageous operation mode" is also called a correct operation mode or a correct pressing order.

"A game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42" is, for example, a game in which one of the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. game). Also, although not shown in FIG. 58, for example, in a game in which multiple types of replays have been won (when duplicate replays have been won; a game in which a so-called "push order replay" has been won), the RT may be shifted depending on the type of replay won. is also equivalent.

The “instruction function” means a function of instructing the player how to operate the stop switch 42 . The instruction function is, in principle, a function of instructing the player on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 .
In other words, "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
It should be noted that "display" is to show the content of the "instruction" in a visible manner, and "notification" is to inform the player of the content of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function".

Further, there is a possibility that notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not limited to notification of the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous may be the "activation of the instruction function", but the notification of any operation mode including the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous is the "operation of the instruction function". It may also be referred to as "activation".
For example, if the pressing order bell shown in winning numbers "3" to "8" in FIG. 1, but instead assume that you get either 1, 3, 4, 10, or a dropout (no win), depending on the order of pushing.
Here, informing of the pressing order for winning the 10-card combination is informing of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and of course corresponds to "activation of the instruction function".
On the other hand, the notification of the pushing order for winning the one-hand, three-hand, or four-hand, may be regarded as "notification of advantageous operation mode (operation of instruction function)", and "advantageous operation mode It does not have to be "notification of

The pressing order for winning the 4-card winning combination is the pushing order for not winning the 10-card winning combination, so it is not the most advantageous operation mode. However, the number of payouts is "4" for the number of bets of "3", and the number of difference in the game is "+1".
Similarly, the pushing order for winning the 3-card hand is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pushing order for not winning the 10-card hand. However, since the number of payouts is "3" for the number of bets of "3" and the difference number is maintained at the current state (the difference number is not decreased), it is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.

Furthermore, similarly, the pushing order for winning a winning combination of 1 is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is a pushing order that does not win a winning combination of 10 cards. Further, in this operation mode, the number of payouts is "1" for the number of bets of "3", and the difference number is reduced. However, since it can be said that it is an operation mode that does not miss a role, it may not be said to be a disadvantageous operation mode.

In this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated when the winning order of the bell is won, the operation mode (correct order of pressing) in which the winning combination with the largest number of payouts wins is reported.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit value ("2400 (D)"), but the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (advantageous section clear counter value described later) has a margin. , when winning the push order bell, it is conceivable to notify the pushing order for winning, for example, a 3-card hand or a 4-card hand as described above, and control the difference counter value to maintain the current state.

Also, in this embodiment, the activation of the pointing function is limited to one defined number. For example, assume that the specified number for activating the pointing function is set to "3". In this case, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3" in AT, when the game is started with the bet number of "3" and the pushing order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the number of bets "2", the instruction function cannot be operated even if the winning order bell is won.

The "game section" includes a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section". In addition, the 5.9 machine had a "waiting section" (a game section that was won in the advantageous section lottery but has not yet moved to the advantageous section), but the current regulations for the 6 machine do not include "waiting section" etc. is not provided. However, it is not limited to this, and game sections other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
"Normal section" means that a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a pushing order instruction number and a prize and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct pushing order), which will be described later, is sent to a peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80). ) and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery for the role, it is possible to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous section (lottery etc.).

Since the instruction function must not be activated in the normal section, the pressing order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the instruction function cannot be displayed. Therefore, the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 cannot display (notify) an advantageous operation mode.

On the other hand, the "advantageous section" is a game section having performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be operated). It refers to a game section in which a signal relating to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be operated), that is, a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output an effect that contradicts the content of the instruction given by the main control board 60 or the received signal related to the instruction function.

In addition, even if the advantageous section is a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function does not need to be activated.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, in a game where the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function may always be operated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
AT (notification game state) is a game state in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 . Therefore, AT is always in the advantageous interval and AT is never executed in the non-advantageous interval.

In addition, in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the AT may always notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (at 100%), but the ball output rate in a predetermined period It is conceivable not to notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in order to keep the game within the range defined by the rules.
For example, when the upper limit value of the difference number counter is approached during AT, but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is temporarily not reported from the viewpoint of extending the life of the AT. (not activating the indicating function) is also conceivable.

In addition, various settings can be made for the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT. For example, the first method is to set “advantageous section=AT”. In this case, winning the advantageous section and winning the AT are equivalent. Then, AT is started from the first game in the advantageous section. Also, the AT ends when the advantageous section ends.

Secondly, it is possible to set "AT≠advantageous section".
In this case, simply shifting to an advantageous section does not satisfy the AT start (execution) condition, and on the condition that it is in an advantageous section, it is decided by lottery or the like whether or not to execute AT, and AT is started. When it is decided to execute, the AT is executed until a predetermined termination condition of the AT is satisfied. In addition, when it is non-AT when shifting to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to normal section, omen, CZ (chance zone (a period in which AT is likely to win)) or the like.

When shifting to the sign after shifting to the advantageous section, the game may be shifted to the main sign without fail, and after the predetermined number of games of the main sign is completed, the game may be shifted to AT. Alternatively, at the time of transition to the advantageous section or after the transition to the advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery or the like whether it is a real omen or a false omen, and when it is determined to be a real omen, it may be shifted to AT after the main omen is completed. . Further, when it is determined to be a false precursor, after the false precursor ends, the advantageous section may be maintained, or the section may be shifted to the normal section.
Furthermore, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated when the AT termination condition is satisfied. Alternatively, although the AT ends, if the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not satisfied, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when AT is started at the same time as the advantageous section.

Further, the number of times of playing the advantageous section is determined when the advantageous section is started, and a lottery or the like regarding the advantageous section is not executed during the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when starting the advantageous section, the initial number of games in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, it is decided (lottery, etc.) whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section. Things are mentioned.
Furthermore, a predetermined termination condition is set for the advantageous section, and when the predetermined termination condition for the advantageous section is satisfied, even if there is a remaining number of games in the advantageous section (or remaining number of AT games), at that point Ending the advantageous section with

Here, the “predetermined condition for ending the advantageous interval” means that the difference counter value (to be described later) exceeds “2400 (D)” or the advantageous interval clear counter (to be described later) (the number of games played during the advantageous interval) is “ 1500 (D)”. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, it is determined that the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to the normal section (non-advantageous section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, the AT ends at the same time as the advantageous section ends.

In an advantageous section, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as a "section indicator") 77, which will be described later, is lit. The advantageous section display LED 77 may always be illuminated during the advantageous section, or may be illuminated when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after shifting to the advantageous section.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" is, for example, when the instruction function is activated in a game state in which the area Sim is in an advantageous area and the area Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1". It should be noted that once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.

In addition, the "interval Sim (simulation) ball payout rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even if the combination of "PB ≠ 1" is won, the symbols corresponding to the combination is stopped), and when there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell, the highest payout is achieved). This is the payout rate when it is assumed that the display is stopped. The calculation of the section Sim ball-out rate does not include the number of balls (number of payouts) due to the operation of the accessory (1BB operation, etc.). In addition, in the game winning the replay, when the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts is counted as "0", and in the replay based on the winning of the replay (the next game of the game winning the replay), the number of bets It is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts for the game winning the replay and the number of bets for the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the “game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds “1”” includes RT and the main game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate is set to exceed “1”.
Here, RTs with a section Sim payout rate exceeding "1" include, for example, RTs with a high replay winning probability.
Assuming that CZ (chance zone), AT, pullback section, etc. are usually provided as the main game state, AT can be mentioned as the main game state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1".

When the advantageous interval ends, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is extinguished during, for example, a game end check process, which will be described later, or a game start setting process in the next game of the last game in the advantageous interval. do. When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished in subsequent interrupt processing by executing the processing for initializing the advantageous section display LED flag, which will be described later.

The “process related to the advantageous section” includes, for example, the following processes.
1) Advantageous section (transfer) lottery 2) Advantageous section clear counter update (subtraction, clear)
3) Updating the difference counter (calculation, clearing)
4) Update of advantageous section type flag 5) Control of advantageous section display LED 77 (update of advantageous section display LED flag)

Also, the “processing related to the instruction function” includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (activation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of a game number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the number of remaining games becomes "0"), updating the AT game number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing)
4) In the case of the difference number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the remaining difference number becomes "0"), updating the AT difference number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing)

According to the current rules, both the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in one prescribed number in one gaming state (RT), except for the following. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the specified number "3" enables execution of the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function, and the specified number "2" makes it impossible to execute the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function. and
However, during the advantageous interval, it is necessary to update the advantageous interval clear counter and update the difference number counter regardless of the specified number.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the combination lottery result is non-winning (for example, when the winning number is "0" in FIGS. 26 and 58, which will be described later), in other words, in the game when the conditional device is not activated, It is determined that the processing related to the advantageous section (advantageous section transition lottery) is not executed. However, this is not the only option, and the processing relating to the advantageous section may be executed even if the combination lottery result is non-winning.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the winning lottery is non-winning, if the probability of non-winning is a predetermined value or more (when the probability is not extremely low, for example, "1/17500" or more), the instruction function Processing (AT lottery processing) can be executed.

Furthermore, as a result of executing the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone), when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the next game will be the advantageous zone. Therefore, it is not possible to execute the advantageous zone transition lottery (process related to the advantageous zone) and execute the correct pressing order (process related to the instruction function) in the game in which the advantageous zone is won.
However, it is permissible to perform the advantageous zone transition lottery (process related to the advantageous zone) and the AT lottery (process related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section and AT may be determined (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also called "role ratio monitor" or "ratio indicator") 74 consists of four LEDs, for example, as shown in FIG. LED for displaying which item among the items by a predetermined symbol or the like) and a two-digit ratio segment (LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratio of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Either the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (7U.) or the instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Role ratio (cumulative) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the role ratio (total), when the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the role ratio (total) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Show on ratio segment.
Here, "total" refers to the total sum of the numbers that have been counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, the number of games is counted until it reaches at least "175000" games. When the total number of games is less than "175000", the ratio is displayed by, for example, blinking display, and when the total number of games is "175000" or more, the ratio is displayed by lighting display, for example. Even after the cumulative number of games reaches "175000" or more, the cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
Also, "6000 games" is the total number of games played for 15 sets of "400" games for one set.

The “advantageous section ratio” refers to the ratio (proportion) of staying in the advantageous section to the total game section (non-advantageous section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section therebetween is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
Further, the "instruction-inclusive role ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the role is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated, by the total number of payouts. In the case of a slot machine in which no role is installed, the "indicated role ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum total of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is operated is counted by the instruction-inclusive role-thing counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated" is based on the operation of the stop switch 42 according to the pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function, for example, the winning number " When 10 bells from 3 to 8 are won, 10 is added to the instructed accessory counter.
On the other hand, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, when one bell in the example of FIG. "1" is added to
Similarly, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an order different from the displayed order of pushes, and the winning combination is not obtained (when the combination is not won), the indicated role counter is displayed. is not added to In other words, the count value in the previous game remains unchanged.

In the example of FIG. 26, which will be described later, when the common bell (winning number "3") is won during AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when the winning order of the bell is won, and the winning number display LED 78 is pressed. There are a case where forward instruction information (dummy) is displayed and a case where the instruction function is not activated. When the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.

On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the number of payouts in the game is not added to the instruction-included accessory counter. However, the total number of payouts is added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct key pressing order by image or sound.

"Continuous bonus ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the first class special bonus (RB) to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of payouts".
For example, when the total number of payouts in the number of games played is "6000" is "2000", and the number of payouts when the "first class special bonus (RB)" is activated is "500". Ratio (6000 games)” becomes “25 (%)”.

Further, the "accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the accessory to the total number of payouts. Here, the "accessories" include, in addition to the above-mentioned first class special accessories, second-class special accessories (CB) and MB (also referred to as 2BB. Second-class accessory continuous operating device. CB is continuous operation.), SB (single bonus) is included.
In addition, in the above five items, if the game machine does not have the function corresponding to the item, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as "--".
For example, if "RB (first class special role)" is not provided, there is no continuous role ratio, so when ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is set to "-- ” lights up.
As described above, five types of ratios are displayed on the management information display LED 74. As shown in FIGS. do.

In addition, it is stipulated by regulation that the advantageous section ratio and the instructed accessory ratio should be 70% or less. Further, it is stated that the role product ratio should be 70% or less, and it is stipulated that the continuous role product ratio should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the legal range.

Note that a game machine with a specification of 70% or less advantageous section ratio is called a "7U" type, and a game machine with a specification of 70% or less instruction-inclusive role ratio is called a "7P" type. A gaming machine with an advantageous section is either a "7U" type or a "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous section ratio (total) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instructed accessory ratio (total) is displayed.
In the '7U' type, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game section should be '70'% or less, but in the '7P' type, the total number of payouts due to the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the accessory is The number of payouts may be 70% or less, and for example, the entire period or most of the game sections may be advantageous sections.

For example, when moving to a non-advantageous section, set so that you will win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of 100%, and set it so that you will win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of almost 100% (for example, about 98%). Alternatively, it may be set so that the advantageous section lottery is won with a high probability (for example, 70%).
The "7U" type cannot refer to the setting value itself to perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery), but the "7P" type refers to the setting value itself and performs processing related to the instruction function. Is possible.
In the twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, most of the inside of the BB2 is in an advantageous section, and a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not AT is to be executed in this advantageous section.

Also, the management information display LED 74 can be applied to a pachinko game machine as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, as in the case of the slot machine (rotary game machine). Then, the real-time (measured) base value for every 60,000 out balls (the 'base value' indicates how many safe balls are out of 100 out balls), and 60,000 ”, the base values of 1, 2, and 3 times before are displayed in sequence. For example, the identification seg of the real-time base value is displayed as "bL.", the identification seg of the previous base value is displayed as "b1." is displayed, and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko game machines among game machines.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram common to the first to fifth embodiments.
A main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80 are provided as representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10 .
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and is equipped with an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (not meant to include only those shown in FIG. 1). The appearance of the main control board 50 and how the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 will be described in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10).

In FIG. 1 , a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52 . The input port 51 is a connection portion to which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port 52 is a connection portion to transmit signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32 .
In FIG. 1, input peripherals are indicated by arrows from which signals from the peripherals are directed to the main control board 50, and output peripherals are indicated by arrows from the main control board 50 to the peripherals. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on game progress and the like.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data table) necessary for progressing the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (an IC having a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game. , and payout at the time of winning.

Also, on the main control board 50, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55 and an MPU including registers are mounted. Note that the RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including the RWM 83, the ROM 84, and the sub CPU 85 is also mounted on the sub control board 80, which will be described later. It should be noted that the RWM 83 and ROM 84 may be provided externally instead of being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medal inserted from the medal slot 47 is sent inside the medal selector.
The movement of medals inserted from the medal slot 47 within the medal selector will be described later with reference to FIG. 2 and the like.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector is provided with a path sensor 46, a blocker 45, and an insertion sensor 44 (a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b) (but not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
A medal inserted from the medal slot 47 is first detected by the path sensor 46 .

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46 . The blocker 45 permits/disallows insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 from the payout port. do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is allowed, a medal passage is formed to guide the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35 . The blocker 45 is, for example, a switching member that forms a medal passage for guiding medals to the hopper 35 side by closing an opening (opening leading to a medal return opening) formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector. and an actuator for driving the switching member.

Here, the blocker 45 prohibits the insertion of medals during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 stop, and when the payout corresponding to the winning combination ends). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits insertion of medals at least when no game is played.

Further downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal selector, an insertion sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided. The insertion sensor 44 is composed of a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance in this embodiment. is configured to be detected by Then, based on the timing at which the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on/off, it is determined whether or not the correct medals have been inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes, as operation switches operated by the player, a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a A settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the "operation switch (or simply "switch")" is based on the operation of the operation body by the player (operator) (receiving external force) to switch on / off of the electric signal. It refers to a device (including electric circuits and/or electric parts), and does not limit the shape of an operating body operated by a player.

When the operation switch is in the off state, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to enter the light receiving element (while the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the off state). When the player or the like operates the operation switch (the operation body of the operation switch), the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal is sent to the main control board 50 indicating that the operation switch is turned on. Contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, the light is turned on. You may

In the present embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is a lever (bar) shape (therefore also referred to as "start lever (switch) 41"), and includes a bed switch 40, a stop switch 42, and an adjustment switch. The operation body 43 is in the shape of a push button (thus, it is also called "bet button (switch) 40", "stop button (switch) 42", and "settlement button (switch) 43"). In addition, in the fourth embodiment described later, the operation body of the stop switch 42 (the part that the player presses) is called a "stop button 42a".

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operation body of the operation switch and/or around or near it. When the operation of the operation switch is permitted, for example, an LED or the like corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light. By emitting red light from an LED or the like, the permission/non-permission state of the operation switch is indicated to the player.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit blue light to notify the player that the operation is possible. shown in When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to be stopped. After that, the rest of the stop switches 42 become operable only when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 controlled to stop is terminated and the detection sensor 42e (4th sensor 42e to be described later) of the operated stop switch 42 is terminated. embodiment) is turned off. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to that stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned off. The LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have not yet been operated, while still emitting red light, are caused to emit blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting the accumulated medals for the current game. In this embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number, specified number) medals are provided.
A bet switch for betting two cards may be provided without being limited to this.

In addition, the specified number is determined in advance depending on, for example, when the accessory is not activated/when the accessory is activated. Concretely, it is set such that when the accessory is not activated, when the SB is activated, when the 1BB is activated, there are 3 sheets, and when the 2BB is activated, there are 2 sheets. Two medals can be inserted by operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice, and three medals can be inserted by operating it three times. Also, when the prescribed number is 3, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows 3 medals to be inserted at once, and when the prescribed number is 2, operating the 3-bet switch 40b. Two medals can be inserted at a time. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when less than the specified number has already been bet, the bet processing is performed so that the number of bets is 3.

Also, the start switch 41 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle and right reels).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are to be stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) the medals betted and/or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50 . In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 1, illustration of the relay board is omitted. As described above, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Further, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other boards (relay boards, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 .

The display substrate 75 is mounted with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78 .
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals accumulated (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, upper digits and lower digits.

The winning number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the payout number (the player's winning number) when a winning combination is won, and is composed of upper and lower digits, similar to the credit number display LED 76. .
Note that the acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be extinguished when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may be displayed as "0".

Also, the acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying pressing order instruction information (notifying an advantageous pressing order) in a game that notifies the pressing order during AT. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquired number, the error content, and the pressing order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a dedicated LED or the like for displaying the pressing order instruction information.
It should be noted that, during AT, notification of an advantageous pressing order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80 .

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (a stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 and the like of the pattern display device.
The symbol display device includes (three in this embodiment) reels 31 that display symbols, motors 32 that drive the respective reels 31 , and reel sensors 33 that detect the positions of the reels 31 .

The motor 32 serves as driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by reel control means 65, which will be described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31. A stop switch 42 operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped, a stop switch 42 is operated. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42 , and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42 .

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of kinds of patterns (symbols constituting a combination of patterns corresponding to a role) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel 31 .
Also, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided, for example, in a convex shape on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one revolution, and the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33 . A signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Then, when the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

In addition, the symbols on the reference position at the instant when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 are stored in the ROM 54 in advance. As a result, it is possible to detect the pattern on the reference position at the moment the index is detected. Furthermore, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, by how many pulses the (stepping) motor 32 is driven, the symbol counted from the symbol on the reference position can be stopped on the effective line. can be identified.

A medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting the paid out medals from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cleaned and accepted (determined to be normal) from the medal slot 47 are formed to be accommodated in the hopper 35 .
The payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 consists of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance in this embodiment. Then, when the medals are paid out, the predetermined moving member (movable piece 39a in FIG. 7 to be described later) is moved by the medals. The payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by movement of a predetermined moving member. Based on whether the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off within the range of the predetermined time, it is determined whether or not the medals have been correctly paid out.

For example, when it is not detected that the pair of payout sensors 37 are ON even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output the ON signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.
Details of these operations will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8. FIG.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals that have been credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (stored bet), or inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 47 (repair bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with the prescribed number of medals for the game being bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) performs a lottery by the combination lottery means 61, drives and controls all the motors 32, and rotates all the reels 31. Control to rotate. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reels 31 are moved up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

By pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65, which will be described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 so that the lottery result of the combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so as to correspond to the result determined by means).

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to one of the winning combinations stops on the activated line (when the winning combination is won), the payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is provided with the following winning lottery means 61 and the like. Each means below in this embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 lotteries (determines and selects) winning numbers. Here, the "lottery of the winning numbers by the role lottery means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the regulations of the Entertainment Business Act (regulations regarding certification of gaming machines, model testing, etc.; hereinafter simply referred to as "rules"), The result of the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also called "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the rules.
When the winning number is determined by the combination lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the accessory condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device that becomes operable in the game, In addition, the accessory condition device is determined. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also called condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.

The combination lottery means 61 includes, for example, a lottery random number generation means (hardware random number, etc.), a random number extraction means for extracting the random number generated by the random number generation means, and a random value extracted by the random number extraction means. winning number determination means for determining a winning number.

The random number generating means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number in which a counter that counts once every 200 n (nano) seconds continues to count the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle. continue to count.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number belongs by collating the random number extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table described later.

The winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the result of the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 . In this embodiment, a win flag is provided for each role for all the roles. Then, when any winning combination is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of that combination is turned on (a winning flag is set). Note that the winning of a combination includes the case where there is one winning combination (single winning) and the case where there are multiple winning combinations (double winning).

The pressing order instruction number selection means 63 selects a pressing order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct pressing order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the role lottery means 61 (when the pressing order bell or the pressing order replay is won). decision).
The "pressing order" of the pressing order instruction number selected here means a pressing order (correct pressing order) that is advantageous for the player. For example, when the winning order of the bell is won, the order of pushing the high bell (correct order of pushing) indicates the winning order. In addition, at the time of replay duplicate winning, it refers to a pushing order that promotes to an advantageous RT or a pushing order that does not fall to a disadvantageous RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique pushing order instruction number.
Then, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50 displays the above-described acquired number display LED 78 with the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically " =*” (“*”=1, 2, . . . ). Thus, the function of displaying push order indication information upon activation of a conditional device with an advantageous push order is also referred to as an indication function.
Also, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50, at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined), the sub control board 80, a command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the correct key pressing order on the image display device 23 .

It should be noted that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section (AT). Therefore, even if the pressing order instruction number is selected by the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the pressing order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Note that it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number in the normal section.

The effect group number selection means 64 selects a number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80, which is the effect group number corresponding to the winning number.
Here, an effect group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. When the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 selects the selected effect group. The number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning combination based on the received effect group number. The effect group number is selected for each game and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, unlike the pressing order instruction number.

Also, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80 . Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number every game, it is possible to output the effect based on the received effect group number. However, even when the pressing order bell or pressing order replay is won, the correct pressing order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct pressing order based on the effect group number. . On the other hand, during AT, when winning the push order bell or push order replay, the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80 . As a result, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment. .
Furthermore, after the win number is determined by the combination lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off of the win flag in the current game, and refers to the stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off of the win flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is operated Drive control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is ON, the reel control means 65 validates a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination (a combination in which the winning flag is ON) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that they can be stopped on the line, and the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than the winning combination (the winning flag is turned off) is not stopped on the effective line.

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)). means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed of about 80 times per minute.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for a predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) during MB operation. is set to Thus, in the present embodiment, the maximum moving symbol number from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 4 symbols, except for the predetermined reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. Thus, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum moving symbol number from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 1 symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line.
That is, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, if the pattern of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the predetermined effective line, the reels 31 are not stopped until the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, and the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number stops on the effective line, the reels 31 are stopped when the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of the stop control, control is performed so as not to stop the symbol combination of the combination that does not correspond to the winning number on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won (for example, when the bell is won in the pressing order), the order of priority of the winning combinations is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. In accordance with a predetermined order of priority, the drawing-in stop control of the symbol associated with the highest priority combination is performed.

The winning judgment means 66 judges whether or not the symbol combination of the reels 31 stopped on the active line corresponds to any winning combination when the reels 31 are stopped.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the activated line. Specifically, from the conditional device operated in the game, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, the symbol combination that stops on the effective line before the reel 31 actually stops is set in advance. Alternatively, the symbol combination stopped on the activated line after the reels 31 are stopped is determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the effects output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80 .
The control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a pressing order instruction number (only during AT and when a winning number having a correct pressing order is won). , effect group number, RT (game state) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on winning combination, and the like.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection, output, etc. of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is unidirectionally transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) required for output.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, and may be serial communication, or both serial communication and parallel communication may be used.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to performance peripheral devices such as the following performance lamps 21 as shown in FIG. However, the peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data and the like taken in when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
In addition, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing a program, various data, etc. for performing a lottery related to an effect as data for effect.

The effect lamps 21 are made up of LEDs, for example, and light up in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. The effect lamps 21 are arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and are used to illuminate the patterns displayed on the reels 31 (three patterns that are vertically continuous and visible from the display window) from behind. Fluorescent lamps that illuminate symbols on the reels 31 from above, and frame lamps that are arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blink when winning a winning combination are included.

Also, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various effects images during the game (correct pressing order, effects corresponding to the conditional devices that operate in the game, etc.). , and game information (such as the number of games played during the operation of the accessory, the number of games won during the advantageous section (AT), the number of winnings, etc.).

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing how the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and is a schematic diagram seen from the front. In FIG. 2, the inside of the medal selector is shown. Also, the medals M indicate M1 to M4 according to their positions. The position of M1 indicates the state in which the medal M is placed on the medal placement portion 47b of the medal slot 47 (the state before being released). That is, at the position M1, the lowest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b are in contact with each other when viewed from the front.
In addition, in FIG. 2 (and FIG. 4 to be described later), it is assumed that the entire substantially square portions displayed as the input sensors 44a and 44b are the light receiving and emitting ranges (sensor eyes) of the input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively. not the housing of the input sensors 44a and 44b).

Also, the position of M2 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M becomes invisible when viewed from the front. That is, the position M2 is a position where the highest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placement portion 47b overlap. For example, assuming that the player releases the medal M when the medal M is at the position M1, the medal M drops from the position M1. Therefore, at the position of M2, it is released from the player's hand and is falling (moving) downstream.
It should be noted that the "upstream side" indicates the medal slot 47 side, and the "downstream side" indicates the side of the insertion sensor 44b (hopper 35 side). In terms of the positions of the medals M, the order is M1->M2->M3->M4 from the upstream side to the downstream side.

In the example of FIG. 2, the path sensor 46 is arranged so that the medal M is detected by the path sensor 46 when the medal M is positioned at M2.
Further, the position of M3 indicates the position at the moment (ON) when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. The position of M4 indicates the position at the moment (OFF) when the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

The medal insertion slot 47 is a portion for inserting medals M into the inside of the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when the player bets or credits the medals M as game media. The medal slot 47 includes a medal guard portion 47a and a medal placement portion 47b. The medal placing portion 47b has a substantially curved surface (having a slightly larger curvature than the peripheral edge of the medal M) extending in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing so that a plurality of (up to about 10) stacked medals M can be placed at the same time. curved surface).

The substantially curved surface of the medal placing portion 47b and the surface of the medal guard portion 47a with which the medal M contacts (the surface visible in FIG. 2) are formed to intersect substantially perpendicularly.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, an opening through which one medal M can flow is provided at the intersection of the medal placing portion 47b and the medal guard portion 47a. When two medals M are stacked, the medal M does not drop from the opening, but when the thickness is one medal M, the medal M is formed to flow down from the opening. Therefore, the player places, for example, a plurality of stacked medals M on the medal placing portion 47b, presses the plurality of medals M toward the medal guard portion 47a, and strengthens the pressing force. By weakening it, the medals M placed on the medal placing portion 47b can be dropped into the medal selector one by one through the opening.

When the medal M is inserted (released downward) from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M flows down the passage in the medal selector. A passage sensor 46, an insertion sensor 44a, and an insertion sensor 44b are provided in the medal selector from the upstream side. Further, the above-described blocker 45 is provided between the path sensor 46 and the entry sensor 44a (under the entry sensor 44a in FIG. 2).

When the medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the path sensor 46 . The path sensor 46 is a sensor provided for determining the presence or absence of medal clogging or fraud. Furthermore, when the medal M is no longer detected after the lapse of a predetermined time, it is determined that the operation is normal. On the other hand, when the path sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after the predetermined time has elapsed after detecting the medal, it is determined that a medal retention error has occurred. Further, when the passage sensor 46 stops detecting the medal M before a predetermined time elapses after detecting the medal M, it is determined that the medal M is illegally passed.

When the medal M flows down in the medal passage, it reaches the position of the blocker 45. - 特許庁The blocker 45 is arranged on the lower side of the medal passage. When the blocker 45 is in the ON state (the output port related to the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is ON), the medal flow path is formed so that the medals M can be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, it has the role of sending the medals M that have moved from the upstream side to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b without sending them out of the medal passage.

On the other hand, when it is in the OFF state (out of the output ports 52, the output port related to the blocker 45 is OFF), the blocker 45 moves so as to be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the plane of the drawing in FIG. to form an opening (pitfall) in the medal passage. As a result, when the blocker 45 is in the OFF state, the medal M drops from this opening just before reaching M3 and is sent out of the medal passage (M5 in FIG. 2). The medal M dropped from this opening is returned to a medal return port (not shown) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a.

For example, when the specified number of games has already been betted and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, the blocker 45 is controlled to be in an OFF state because no more bets and credits can be made. As a result, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47 in this state, it falls from the opening and is returned to the medal return slot.
On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the opening is blocked by the blocker 45, so that the medals M flowing down the medal passage pass over the blocker 45 and are detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Can move sideways.

In this embodiment, the blockers 45 are arranged as shown in FIG. 2, but the arrangement is not limited to this. Regardless of whether the blocker 45 is on or off, the passage sensor 46 can detect the medal M, and when the blocker 45 is on, the medal M can be guided to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and When the blocker 45 is in the OFF state, it is sufficient that the medals M can be sent to the medal return port without being detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, the blocker 45 should be positioned between the path sensor 46 and the entry sensor 44a.

Further, the path sensor 46 may be positioned upstream of the blocker 45, and is arranged at a position where the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 can be detected even when the blocker 45 is in the OFF state. All you have to do is In FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that it can detect the medal M when the medal M is positioned at M2. It is also possible to arrange the path sensor 46 so as to detect the medal M when it moves to the right.

The inserted sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting the medals M that have passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed with a predetermined distance therebetween. First, when the medal M reaches the position of M3, the insertion sensor 44a on the upstream side becomes capable of detecting the medal M (turns from off to on). When the medals M further flow down, the insertion sensor 44b next detects the medals M (turns from off to on). By judging the ON/OFF timings of these two insertion sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether or not the inserted medals M are normal. When the medal M reaches the position of M4, it is no longer detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. The medals M that have passed through the insertion sensors 44 a and 44 b are sent to the hopper 35 .

In FIG. 2, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, when the medal M is positioned at M2, that is, when the medal selector is viewed from the front, the medal M is positioned at M4, that is, at the moment when the medal M is no longer detected by the inserted sensor 44b. (the movement locus is indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 2) is set to time T2. Note that the value is obtained when the hand is released from the medal M (with an initial speed of "0") when the medal M is positioned at M1, and the medal is released downward. Therefore, the speed when the medal M is positioned at M2 exceeds "0".

Also, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from the position of M2. On the other hand, in FIG. 2, an impact member (not shown in FIG. 2) is provided at a portion where the medal passage bends from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. When the medal M comes into contact with this impact member, the speed of the medal M is decelerated toward the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
Then, the time from the moment the medal M is positioned at M3 (the moment when it is detected by the insertion sensor 44a) to the moment when it is positioned at M4 (the moment when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b) is set as time T3. .

<First Embodiment (A)>
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a time chart for explaining the first embodiment (A) of the present embodiment.
FIG. 3 shows voltage levels when the slot machine 10 is powered off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or when a power failure occurs).
In FIG. 3, the voltage when the power supply is normally turned on is assumed to be the supply level V0. In the state of supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

FIG. 3 shows an example in which a power failure occurred (an event in which power supply was interrupted occurred) at time S11. In this embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the voltage drops to the power failure detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from when the power failure occurs (time S11; supply level V0) to when the power failure is detected (time S12; power failure detection level V1) is at least 20 interrupts (1 interrupt time 2.235 ms x 20 interrupt = 44.7 ms) or longer.
A voltage monitoring device (power failure detection circuit) (not shown) is provided on the main control board 50 . When the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined power supply interruption detection level V1, a power supply interruption detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51. By detecting whether or not the signal has been input, the power supply is detected. Detect disconnection.

When the voltage further drops from the power-off detection level V1 and becomes less than the driving voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
In the example of FIG. 3, at time S13, the voltage level reaches the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, and then drops to Low. The main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off process when the voltage becomes less than the drive voltage limit V2. is set to

Power-off detection is executed in interrupt processing executed every 2.235 ms, but when power-off is detected two consecutive interrupts, power-off processing is executed in the next interrupt processing. Therefore, in FIG. 3, time S12 is the timing at which it is determined that the voltage is equal to or lower than the power-off detection level V1 two times in a row by interrupt processing, and that power-off has occurred. Then, power-off processing is executed in the next interrupt processing.
In addition, in the interrupt processing, the following processing is executed. First, it is determined whether or not a power cutoff has been detected, and when a power cutoff has been detected, the process proceeds to power cutoff processing (without transitioning to normal interrupt processing). In the power-off process, first, the output port 52 is turned off. The processing of turning off the output port 52 turns off the blocker 45 . In addition, stack pointer saving processing, power-off processing completion flag (flag for determining whether or not power-off has been performed normally) setting processing, RWM 53 checksum execution processing, RWM 53 write prohibition processing, etc. After sequential execution, it enters a reset wait state (loop processing state). This reset waiting state is designed so that no processing is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, in the interrupt process subsequent to the interrupt process (time S12) in which the power-off is detected, the power-off process is executed and the blocker 45 is turned off.
It should be noted that the power-off process is not limited to being executed in the interrupt process subsequent to the interrupt process that detected the power-off, and the power-off process may be executed within the interrupt process that detected the power-off. In this case, "T1=S12-S11".

On the other hand, FIG. 3 also shows medal positions (M2, M4) after the medals are inserted. In FIG. 2, it is assumed that the player releases the medal M while the medal M is positioned at M1. In this case, the medal M falls at an initial speed of "0". As a result, the medal M is released into the medal selector. In FIG. 3, the time S11 at which the power failure occurred coincides with the time at which the medal M reaches the position of M2.

As shown in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M4 is set to T2. It is assumed that the medal M is later positioned at M4.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed to satisfy the relationship "T2>T1".

Therefore, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process is executed before the medal M reaches M4, and the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M. Therefore, when a power failure occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M is sent to the medal return port (lower tray) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44b. Therefore, the medal M does not normally pass through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the medal M is swallowed, but after the power failure occurs (after time S11), the processing of adding "1" to the medal M (adding "1" to the bet or credit) is executed. not. This eliminates the possibility that the bet or credit processing will be executed after the power failure occurs.

For example, in the case where the power is cut off at the moment the medal M is positioned at M2, when the time T1 has passed (at the time of the power cut-off process), when the medal M is positioned immediately before M4 in FIG. has passed the position of M3), the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, but is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.
Also, in the case where the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the time T1 has passed (at the time of the power cut-off process), the medal M is positioned upstream from the position of M3 in FIG. At that time, the medal M is turned off without being detected by either the insertion sensor 44a or the insertion sensor 44b.

Also, in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M3 is time T2'.
In this case, it is preferable to design so as to satisfy the relationship "T2'>T1".
In the case where the relationship is designed as described above, if the power is turned off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the medal M reaches M3, the blocker 45 is turned off by executing the power shutdown process. ing. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a, and sent to the medal return port.

Here, the difference between the prior art and the first embodiment (A) will be described.
Conventionally, when the power interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b when the power interruption is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off. Therefore, after the power failure occurred, the medal "1" addition processing (bet processing or credit processing) was executed. However, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process after power failure occurs. This is because all the processes related to the progress of the game should be stopped immediately after the power failure occurs.
Therefore, if configured as in the first embodiment (A), even if the player inserts the medal M from the medal insertion slot 47 and the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 (immediately after insertion), , the medal "1" addition processing is not executed, so the function of the slot machine 10 can be enhanced.

<First Embodiment (B)>
The first embodiment (B) defines the relationship between the input sensors 44a and 44b and power off.
FIG. 4 is a front view showing the process from when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b. In FIG. 4, the direction of the arrow indicates the advancing (flowing down) direction of the medals M. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 4(a) shows the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off, and the closing sensor 44b remains off. This position corresponds to M3 in FIG.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left side in FIG. 4 and enters the state shown in FIG. become. Therefore, in FIG. 4B, the input sensor 44a is on, and the input sensor 44b is turned on from off.
In FIG. 4, even when the inserted sensors 44a and 44b overlap the medal M, both the inserted sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are shown by solid lines. It does not represent the positional relationship of 44b. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged on the front side or the back side of the medal M in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG.

When the medal M progresses further and becomes the state of FIG. 4(c), the medal M is detected by both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the input sensor 44a in this case is on, and the input sensor 44b is also on.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 millimeters (so-called 25 pies (φ)) in general specifications, and 30 millimeters (so-called 30 pies (φ)) in special specifications. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the insertion sensors 44a and 44b so that the state of FIG. 4(c) can be obtained. Here, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not the state of FIG. 4(c), that is, the time during which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are ON (detecting medals M) is within a predetermined range. determines whether or not to determine a medal insertion error. Therefore, the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b also varies depending on how the time during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b are ON is set.

When the medal M further advances from the state of FIG. 4(c), the insertion sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M as shown in FIG. 4(d). In this case, the input sensor 44a is turned off from on at the moment, and the input sensor 44b remains on. When the medal M advances further, the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M as shown in FIG. 4(e). Therefore, in this case, the input sensor 44a remains off, and the input sensor 44b is turned off from on. The position of the medal M in FIG. 4(e) corresponds to M4 in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a time chart showing ON/OFF of the input sensors 44a and 44b. In FIG. 5, time S21 is the moment when the input sensor 44a turns on from off (while the input sensor 44b remains off), which corresponds to the timing of FIG. 4(a).
Next, let S22 be the moment when the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns on from off) (FIG. 4(b)). Furthermore, let S23 be the moment (FIG. 4(d)) when the insertion sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (changed from on to off). Further, the time when the inserted sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (changed from on to off) (FIG. 4(e)) is S24.

Here, if the time Ta (from time S21 to S23) during which the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M is within a range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts) (Condition 1), the main control board 50 judges that the medal M passes normally, and judges that a medal passing error occurs when it is out of this range.

In addition, the time Tb (from time S22 to S23) during which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M is within a range of 4.47 ms (2 interruptions) or more and less than 118.455 ms (53 interruptions). If so (Condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is out of this range, it determines that there is a medal passing error.

Furthermore, if the time Tc (from time S22 to S24) during which the inserted sensor 44b detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 3), the main control board 50 judges that the medal M passes normally, and if it is out of this range, it is regarded as a medal passing error.
If all of the conditions 1 to 3 described above are satisfied, it is determined that the passage of the medal M is normal, and if at least one of the conditions is not satisfied, a medal passage error is determined.

Also, as shown in FIG. 5, when both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), the input monitoring counter is decremented by "1".
Here, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "+1" when the passage sensor 46 described above detects the medal M, and when the medal passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b normally (both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). →When ON→OFF (that is, at time S24), the counter is decremented by "1". That is, during normal operation, "1" and "0" are repeated.
On the other hand, when the path sensor 46 does not detect the medal M and only the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1" and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error. do.

Further, when the path sensor 46 detects the medal M (insertion monitoring counter=“+1”) and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, the path sensor 46 further detects the medal M. When the insertion monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "2" or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error has occurred. For example, when the normal value of the insertion monitoring counter is set to "0" to "2", the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal clogging error when the insertion monitoring counter reaches "3" or more. be done.
The input monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 is turned on from off.

In FIG. 5, at time S24, the insertion sensor 44b is turned off from on, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by "1", and when it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 inserts the medal. Execute the transaction (bet transaction or credit transaction). For example, if the number of bets is less than the specified number at that time, the number of bets is added by "1". Specifically, when the prescribed number in the game is "3" and the bet number at that time is "0", the bet number is increased from "0" by adding "1" to the bet number. Update to "1".

At that time, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of "50", the number of credits is added to "1". For example, if the number of credits at that time is "10", the number of credits is updated to "11".
When the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the main control board 50 turns the blocker 45 off. Thereby, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M is returned. In other words, in that case, even if medals M are inserted, they are not detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In FIG. 5, in addition to the ON/OFF states of the on/off sensors 44a and 44b, the timings when power failure occurs and when power failure is detected are displayed. In FIG. 5, examples 1 and 2 are shown, both of which are examples of the case where power failure occurs at the timing (time S21) when the input sensor 44a is turned on from off.
In Example 1, power failure is detected after time T1 has elapsed from time S21 when the power failure occurred. Here, in example 1, it is set to "T1>T3". Therefore, when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at the moment when the power is cut off, when the power cut-off process is started, the "1" addition process for the medal M has already been executed.

Here, the time T3 from time S21 to S24 can be expressed as "Ta+Tc-Tb". Therefore, the minimum time for time T3 is 8.94 ms, which corresponds to 4 interrupts.
Also, the maximum time of time T3 corresponds to 113 interrupts and is "252.555 ms".
Then, in Example 1, it is set so that the power-off process is always executed after time S24 has elapsed. Therefore, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of power failure (time S21) to the execution of power failure processing is set to be 114 interrupts or more.

With the above settings, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M (time S21), the power cut-off process is executed after the "1" addition process for the medal M is executed. , the medal M is normally bet or credited. Therefore, swallowing of medals M can be prevented.

Further, Example 2 is an example in which the power-off process is executed before the medal M addition process of "1" is executed, contrary to Example 1. That is, in Example 2, the setting is made so as to satisfy the relationship "T1<T3".
Time T3 from time S21 to time S24 corresponds to four interrupts at the minimum time, as described above. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship of "T1<T3", it is necessary to execute power-off processing within three interrupts from the occurrence of power-off. However, since it is difficult to set the power-off processing to be executed within 3 interrupts from the occurrence of power-off, the minimum time of time Tc is set to be longer than 4 interrupts. For example, setting the minimum time of time Tc to 15 interrupts. If the time T1 from the occurrence of power failure (time S21) to the power failure process is set to about 10 interrupts, when the power failure occurs at time S21, the power failure process is executed before time S24. becomes possible.

After the power-off process is executed, the process of adding "1" to the medals M (bet or credit) is not executed. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at time S21 (when the power is cut off), the processing of adding "1" to the medal M1 is not executed. As a result, there is a demerit that the medal M is swallowed. , the power-off process can be executed as quickly as possible.

<First Embodiment (C)>
The first embodiment (C) defines the relationship between the payout sensors 37a and 37b and power off.
When adding the medals to be paid out to the credits, the hopper motor 36 is not driven, and the credit number storage area provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated. Further, the value indicated by the credit number display LED 76 is updated so as to correspond to the credit number stored in the storage area.

When the medals are to be paid out after the number of credits reaches the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out the medals from the hopper 35 (discharge from the payout port). In this case, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are configured to detect ON/OFF each time one medal is paid out. When the on/off detection result by the payout sensors 37a and 37b is within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and when the detection result is not within the normal range, the medal M is not paid out correctly, and the main control board 50 judges that there is a medal payout error.

FIG. 6 is a plan view for explaining the operation when medals M are paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in FIG. 6 , a hopper disk (a substantially disc-shaped rotating disk) is attached to the bottom of the hopper 35 , and the hopper disk is rotated by driving the hopper motor 36 . A plurality of openings capable of holding the medals M are formed along the outer periphery of the hopper disc. The medal M in the hopper 35 is configured to enter the opening of the hopper disk. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disk rotates and the medals M held in the opening of the hopper disk are discharged one by one. A new medal M in the hopper 35 enters into the empty opening after the medal M is discharged.

In FIG. 6, the medal M positioned at M1 is shown immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk. Both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are parts constituting the medal payout device. The fixed shaft 38a is a shaft that does not move when the medals M are paid out. On the other hand, the movable shaft 38b is a shaft that reciprocates each time one medal M is paid out. In an unloaded state, the movable shaft 38b is arranged at the position indicated by the solid line in the drawing, and is fixed to the fixed shaft by a spring (not shown in FIG. 6, which corresponds to the spring 39b in FIG. 7 described later). 38a side is biased. The medal M (M1) immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk comes into contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
In addition, when the medal M is placed at the position (M1) indicated by the solid line in FIG. Narrower than diameter. Therefore, at this time, the medal M cannot pass through between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

A pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M ejected from the opening of the hopper disk. Then, when the pushing force in the F1 direction acts on the medal M, the medal M becomes movable in the F1 direction, and the pushing force pushes the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in the figure. Note that the fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the F2 direction in the figure while maintaining the state of contact with the medal M. As shown in FIG. Further, the movable shaft 38b moves to a position where the medals M can pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is indicated by a chain double-dashed line in the figure.

As a result, the medal M passes through between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and is ejected in the F1 direction (toward the medal payout port) in the drawing. The medal M at this time is indicated by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. 6 (M2). When the medal M is ejected, the force pushing the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction is released. As a result, the movable shaft 38b is again returned to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6 by the force of the spring.

FIG. 7 is a plan view for explaining the on (detection)/off (non-detection) states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when the medals M are paid out as described above in the medal payout device. FIG. 7 shows how the movable piece 39a moves in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d)→(a) each time one medal M is paid out.

FIG. 7(a) shows the state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is arranged at the position (initial position) indicated by the solid line in FIG. The movable piece 39a is attached so as to be rotatable around the central axis in the drawing, and is biased clockwise by a spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in the drawing, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 6 is biased toward the fixed shaft 38a in the drawing.
In a state in which the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in FIG. 7 by the spring 39b and no force other than the tensile force of the spring 39b acts on the movable piece 39a, the movable piece 39a is held by a predetermined stopper (not shown). ), it stops at the position shown in FIG. 7(a).

As shown in FIG. 7A, payout sensors 37a (upper side in the drawing) and 37b (lower side in the drawing) are arranged on the left side of the movable piece 39a. The movable piece 39a is formed so as to extend toward the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b, and when it is stopped at the position shown in FIG. ing.
In FIG. 7, both of the payout sensors 37a and 37b show the housings of the sensors, and the light emitting/receiving parts (eyes of the sensors) are omitted from the illustration. In this respect, it is different from the insertion sensors 44a and 44b of FIGS. 2 and 4, in which only light receiving/emitting parts (sensor eyes) are illustrated.

Here, the dispensing sensor 37a is in the ON state (for example, FIG. 7A) when the movable piece 39a is detected, and is in the OFF state (for example, FIG. 7B) when the movable piece 39a is no longer detected. is set to be
Similarly, the payout sensor 37b is turned off when the movable piece 39a is not detected (for example, FIG. 7(a)), and turned on when the movable piece 39a is detected (for example, FIG. 7(c)). is set to
In the state of FIG. 7A, the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is on, and the payout sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39a and is off.

As described with reference to FIG. 6, when the pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M, the movable shaft 38b starts to move in the F2 direction in FIG. When moved, the movable piece 39a starts to rotate counterclockwise in FIG. 7(a) against the biasing force of the spring 39b. When the movable piece 39a moves to the position shown in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out of the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the dispensing sensor 37a does not detect the movable piece 39a, and is turned off. Further, even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(b), the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is off.

In FIG. 6, when the movable shaft 38b moves further in the F2 direction and reaches the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a further rotates counterclockwise and reaches the position shown in FIG. 7(c). As a result, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b detects the movable piece 39a. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(c), the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state and the payout sensor 37b is in the ON state.

In FIG. 6, when the medal M is further ejected from the position M2, the force that urges the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in FIG. return. The return force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b in FIG. As a result, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise in FIG. 7, the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out of the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b stops detecting the movable piece 39b. FIG. 7(d) shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 7(d), the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state.

When the movable piece 39a further rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37a, and the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a. This returns to the state (initial state) of FIG. 7(a). In the state of FIG. 7(a), as described above, the payout sensor 37a is in the ON state and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state. Also, when returning to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG.

FIG. 8 is a time chart showing ON/OFF of the payout sensors 37a and 37b.
In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the medal payout process has started and the hopper motor drive signal is on.
In FIG. 8, before time S31, the state is shown in FIG. 7(a). When time S31 is reached, the state shown in FIG. 7B is reached, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off (the payout sensor 37b is in the off state). Next, when time S32 is reached, the payout sensor 37b is turned on. This state is the state shown in FIG. 7(c). In FIG. 8, the time from time S31 to S32 is Td.

The state where the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is on continues until time S33, at which time the payout sensor 37b is turned off. This state is the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S33 is Te. Then, when time S34 is reached, it returns to the state (initial position) of FIG.
a is turned on. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S34 is Tf.

In the payout process, the main control board 50 monitors the on/off time of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and determines that a medal payout error has occurred when the time is not within a predetermined time range.
For example, in FIG. 8, time Td is set to less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Therefore, when the payout sensor 37b is turned on by the 12th interrupt after the payout sensor 37a is turned off, it is determined to be normal, but if the payout sensor 37b is not turned on by the 12th interrupt. If not, it is regarded as a medal payout error.

Also, the time Te during which the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is on is set to 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) or more and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when the time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b is turned off is monitored. , the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal payout error.

Furthermore, after the payout sensor 37b is turned on (time S32), the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b is turned off to when the payout sensor 37a is turned on (time S34) is 11.175 ms (5 interrupts ) and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, at time S32 (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the time Tf until the payout sensor 37a is turned on is monitored. If the time is not within the predetermined time range, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

In addition, in FIG. 8, similarly to FIG. 3 and FIG. 5, the time from occurrence of power failure to power failure processing is also displayed.
First, it is assumed that a power failure occurs at the timing of time S31, that is, at the timing when the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, in the example of FIG. 3, an example of detecting a power failure by the 20th interrupt was explained, but in the example of FIG. When T1 elapses), power-off is detected and power-off processing is set to be executed.

Here, since the maximum time (normal time) of the time "Td+Tf" is "12+27=39" interrupts, the time T1 from when the power is turned off until the power-off process is executed is set to 40 interrupts (89.4 ms), for example. set. With this setting, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the power cutoff process can be started after the payout process of one medal is normally completed. That is, it can be set to "(Td+Tf)<T1".

Conventionally, power outages (power outages, etc.) may occur during medal payout processing. In this case, depending on the timing of the medal payout process and the power shutdown, it may be determined that the medals have been paid out even though the medals have not been paid out, causing a loss to the player.
In contrast, in the first embodiment (C), medals can be paid out correctly even if the power is cut off during the medal payout process.

In particular, when the medal payout process is started, that is, even if the power is cut off at the timing of time S31 in FIG. Therefore, for example, when the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state or at the timing when the payout sensor 37b is in the ON state, the power-off processing is not executed. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the medal payout process before the (one) medal payout process normally ends due to the power cutoff process being executed in the middle of the medal payout process.

If the time T1 is set longer than necessary, there is a risk that the next medal payout process will be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is executed at least before the next medal payout process is executed. In FIG. 8, for example, assuming that the cycle of one medal payout process is time T4 and that the payout sensor 37a changes from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing of time S35, "T1<T4" is set.

<Second embodiment>
The second embodiment relates to gate traces formed on the board case of the main control board 50 .
In the prior art, the shape, size, position, and the like of the gate mark on the substrate case were determined by the mold designer when the mold was manufactured, solely for the convenience of mold manufacturing.
However, since the trace of the gate is an uneven surface, even if a hole is made aiming at the trace of the gate, there are cases where it cannot be visually recognized (not noticed).

If the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is arranged directly below the trace of the gate, the main CPU 55 can be accessed by making a hole in the trace of the gate and inserting a wire through the hole. be done). In particular, if the gate marks are formed to be thinner than the other portions, it becomes easier to make holes than the other portions.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent cheating by using the gate mark of the substrate case.

FIG. 9 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 56 (upper cover 57 and lower cover 58) in exploded form.
The substrate case 56 is composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, both of which are (injection) molded products of transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is housed inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be visually confirmed clearly from the outside of the board case 56 .

On the main control board 50, there are electronic components such as the above-described main CPU 55, management information display LED 74 (4-digit LED, also called "role ratio monitor" or "ratio indicator"), and set value display LED 73. is installed. Although many electronic components such as the RWM 53 and ROM 54 are mounted on the main control board 50, they are not shown in FIG. In addition, although not shown in FIG. 9, the main control board 50 is equipped with bed switches 40a and 40b, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a passage sensor 46 in the medal selector, and LEDs for failure confirmation of insertion sensors 44a and 44b. It is Note that the failure confirmation LED is not limited to this.
For example, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is extinguished when the start switch 41 is off, and is turned off when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects that it is on). ), the LED is turned on (lit).

The failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and the failure confirmation LEDs of other operation switches and sensors, which will be described later, are extinguished when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects that it is on), and when it is off. It may be configured to light up.

In addition, the failure confirmation LEDs of the bed switches 40a and 40b are
Two LEDs, one for use and one for 40b, are turned off when the bed switch 40 is not operated, and are turned on when the bed switch 40 is operated and an electric signal is received at that time.
Furthermore, the path sensor 46 and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are provided with a total of three failure confirmation LEDs for each sensor. LEDs.
Then, for example, the administrator operates the start switch 41 and confirms whether the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is on/off. can be confirmed. The same is true for other switches or sensors.

The failure confirmation LED may be turned on/off by operating the start switch 41 or the like when the front door is opened during normal operation (not during setting change and setting confirmation). . Alternatively, after the front door is opened and a door open error occurs, a predetermined operation may be performed to enable failure confirmation. Further, the light may be turned on/off by operating the start switch 41 or the like at all times (even during setting change or setting confirmation).

Also, the model number of the board is displayed (printed, etc.) on the main control board 50 . Although not shown in FIG. 9, model numbers and the like are similarly displayed on the upper surfaces of the RWM 53 and ROM 54 .
Further, screw holes 50a for passing screws are formed in the four corners of the main control board 50. As shown in FIG.
On the other hand, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at the four corners on the inner side of the lower surface of the lower cover 58. As shown in FIG. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw holes 50a and the bosses 58c overlap, and screws are passed through the screw holes 50a and screwed to the bosses 58c, thereby fixing the main control board 50 to the lower case 58. can do.

When the upper cover 57 is placed on the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed in a shape to be fitted (in FIG. 9, the specific shape of the fitting portion is omitted from illustration). ) Further, crimped portions 57a are provided on both left and right sides of the upper cover 57 in the figure. Similarly, crimped portions 58a are provided on the left and right sides of the lower cover 58 in the figure. In FIG. 9, illustration of the specific shape and detailed shape of the crimped portions 57a and 58b is omitted.

After the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together and crimped using the crimped portions 57a and 58a, at least a part of the crimped portions 57a and 58a must be destroyed (plastically deformed). The cover 57 and the lower cover 58 cannot be opened.
Thereby, the security of the main control board 50 can be ensured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, gate traces 57b are provided at two locations on the outer side of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. As shown in FIG. In the board case 56 (the state in which the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together), the side on which the main control board 50 is accommodated is called the "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is called the "outside". .
In FIG. 9, the gate traces 57b are provided at two locations, but they may be provided at any number of locations.

Here, the "gate" is the sprue when resin (hot water) is poured into the mold during resin molding, and the gate mark is the mark that remains at the boundary between the gate and the molded product after resin molding. be.
When the substrate case 56 (upper cover 57, lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in FIG.
As for the mold, it is possible to reduce the cost by using a mold that is vertically divided in FIG. 9 . In the case of a multi-cavity mold, it is preferable to use a pin gate, and from the viewpoint of the fluidity of the resin (hot water), it is preferable to provide the gate near the center of the molded product. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed on the upper surface instead of the side surface in FIG.

Furthermore, considering the cutting of the protrusions of the gate traces during molding, it is preferable to provide the gate traces on the outside.
As described above, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided on the outer side of the upper surface.
For the same reason as above, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outer side of the lower surface (the surface opposite to the visible surface in FIG. 9). In FIG. 9, the gate traces 58b of the lower cover 58 are provided at two locations like the gate traces 57b of the upper cover 57, but they may be provided at one location, or may be provided at three or more locations. good too.

In addition, when the resin (hot water) flows from the gate into the mold, if the resin (hot water) spreads unevenly in the mold and a cooling time difference occurs, the molded product may warp. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the gate position of the molded product at a position where the resin (hot water) spreads uniformly in the mold. Furthermore, when gates are provided at a plurality of locations, it is preferable to make the distance from the end of the molded product to the gates and the distance between the gates as uniform as possible.

10A is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 of the board case 56, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58, and the main control board 50. FIG. FIG. 10A shows a state in which the main control board 50 is accommodated in the board case 56 (a state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together). ) is viewed from above. Also, the main control board 50 is shown as seen through from the upper surface side of the upper cover 57 .

Furthermore, (b) shows Example 1 of a cross-sectional view taken along AA in FIG. (a), and (c) shows Example 2 of a cross-sectional view taken along AA in FIG. indicate. In these cross-sectional views, hatching is omitted from the viewpoint of ease of viewing the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 10(a), when the main control board 50 is accommodated in the board case 56, the vertical direction of the upper cover 57 (to the side of the main control board 50) (directly below) from the two gate traces 57b is: The model number display, management information display LED 74, setting value display LED 73, and main CPU 55 (socket) are set so as not to be positioned. As described above, the RWM 53, the ROM 54, and the failure confirmation LED are also mounted on the main control board 50, but it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not positioned directly above them.

The reasons for arranging the gate marks 57 as described above are as follows.
Even after the slot machine 10 is placed on the market, the main control board 50 needs to be visually checked to see if it has been tampered with. In particular, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the main CPU 55 and the like (including the RWM 53 and ROM 54; the same shall apply hereinafter) are conforming, and whether or not they have been altered by cheating. Furthermore, since the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 and the board case 56 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually check the main control board 50 from the outside of the board case 56. be.
The board case 56 containing the main control board 50 is mounted inside the housing of the slot machine 10, for example, inside the rear surface thereof. This is because the numerical values displayed by the set value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 are mounted at positions where they are easy to see.

Therefore, it is considered that the administrator of the slot machine 10 looks at the substrate case 56 (main control substrate 50) from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the upper cover 57. FIG. That is, it is considered that the board case 56 (main control board 50) is visually observed as shown in FIG. 10(a). Therefore, if the main CPU 55 and the like are arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b, the gate trace 57b may hinder the visibility. In particular, the information displayed (printed, etc.) on the upper surface of the main CPU 55 or the like is also made visible without impeding visibility.

Since the entire upper cover 57 is molded from a transparent resin, visibility is not completely hindered even if it is directly below the gate marks 57b. However, as shown in FIGS. 10(b) and 10(c), the cross section of the gate trace 57b becomes an uneven surface, which reduces the visibility directly below the gate trace 57b (worse than a flat surface). It is certain. In addition, in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 10(b), since the upper end surface of the projection 57d is a cut surface, it may be whitened due to stress during cutting of the resin. Therefore, in this case as well, the visibility directly below the gate mark 57b is obstructed.

Moreover, since the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is transparent and has no irregularities except for the gate mark 57b, even if a hole is made by shoveling, it can be easily noticed visually.
On the other hand, the gate mark 57b is an uneven surface obtained by cutting the resin. For this reason, if the gate hole 57b is pierced and then sealed with, for example, a resin material, it may not be possible to visually determine whether or not the gate trace 57b has been pierced. For this reason, there is a possibility that a goto act using the gate mark 57b will be performed.

On the other hand, if a hole is made in the gate mark 57b, if the main CPU 55 and the like are positioned in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b, it is easy for the player to cheat. Therefore, if the main CPU 55 and the like are not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b, it becomes difficult to access the main CPU 55 and the like, and it is possible to make it difficult to do something.

In addition, since the model number displayed (printed, etc.) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information for checking whether there is any fraud, the model number display A gate trace 57b is prevented from being arranged right above the area. Furthermore, when there is a gate mark 57b directly above the model number display, in order to prevent unauthorized modification of the model number display by opening a hole in the gate mark 57b to access the inside of the board case 56, The gate marks 57b are not arranged right above the model number display.

Furthermore, it is necessary to see the numerical value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 when changing the setting or confirming the setting. Also, regarding the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to see the numerical values displayed in order to confirm whether the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio, and the like are within appropriate ranges. Therefore, the traces of the gate 57b are not arranged right above these LEDs. Furthermore, in the same manner as described above, holes are made in the gate traces 57b by using the gate traces 57b, and the LEDs in the substrate case 56 are accessed through the holes. The gate mark 57b is prevented from being arranged thereon.

Further, regarding the above-described failure confirmation LED, the administrator of the slot machine 10 operates the operation switch to confirm whether or not the failure confirmation LED corresponding to the operation switch lights up. For this reason, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located right above the failure confirmation LED. In the same manner as described above, the failure check LED is not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b to make it difficult for cheating to occur.

In FIG. 10, cross-sectional views of Example 1 shown in (b) and Example 2 shown in (c) have the same outer shape of the gate marks 57b. In Example 1 of (b), the inner side of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b remains flat. On the other hand, in example 2 of (c), the inside of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b is formed in a protruding shape (thickness).
The outside of the gate mark 57b has a protrusion 57d at its center and a depression 57c formed so as to sink into a cylindrical shape at its outer periphery. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected during molding, and this boundary is cut by a cutter when separating the molded product from the mold. Therefore, the upper end surface of the projection 57d is the cut surface by the cutter. There are two methods for cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product: automatic cutting by a molding machine during injection, and cutting in a post-process.

Here, when cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, processing the cut surface into a completely smooth surface, in other words, making the height of the projection 57d almost "0" to a smooth surface reduces the cost. high and difficult. Therefore, the depression 57c is formed so that the projection 57d does not protrude above the upper surface of the upper cover 57 even if the projection 57d has some height. As a result, for example, when an assembling worker touches the upper cover 57, it is possible to prevent injury due to the projections 57d.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the recessed portion 57c is provided in the gate mark 57, the thickness of the upper cover 57 is reduced accordingly. In this way, if there is even a portion with a thin wall thickness, there is a risk that it will be easy to make a hole in the recessed portion 57c and access the inside of the substrate case 56. FIG.
Therefore, in example 2 of FIG. 10(c), a projection 57e is provided on the opposite side (inner side) of the upper surface outer side where the gate mark 57b is provided, and the thickness of the recessed portion 57c is prevented from becoming thin. there is If the projecting portion 57e is not provided to provide a thinned portion, it is possible to make it difficult to make a hole in the recessed portion 57c.

In addition, the protrusion 57e not only contributes to fraud countermeasures by preventing a portion of the thickness of the gate mark 57b from becoming thin, but also functions as a dimple (hot water pool) during molding. In FIG. 10 ((b)), when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate (position corresponding to the protrusion 57d) of the mold, and the resin (hot water) collides with the inside of the upper surface, the resin (hot water) There is a risk that the flow will suddenly change and it will not be possible to flow stably. Therefore, by providing a dimple (hot water pool) at a position facing the tip of the gate, when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate, it reduces the sudden change in the flow of the resin (hot water), (Hot water) becomes able to flow stably. The protrusion 57e may have various shapes such as a square cross section, a triangular cross section, a trapezoidal cross section (in the case of FIG. 10(c)), and a dome cross section. Any shape may be used as long as the shape can prevent this.

Regarding the visibility of the gate trace 57b in the vertical direction (directly below), a smooth lower side of the gate trace 57 is superior to an uneven shape. Therefore, the shape shown in FIG. 10B is superior to the shape shown in FIG. Also, the shape of FIG. 10B simplifies the shape of the mold as compared with the shape of FIG. lower cost).

Further, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outer side (lower side in FIG. 9). Furthermore, a projection 57d and a depression 57c shown in FIG. 10(b) are formed on the outside. This is because, as described above, it is convenient in terms of molding to provide the projection 57d and the recess 57c on the outside of the molded product.
Then, when the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 , the pin positions of the main CPU 55 and the like of the main control board 50 are set so as not to be positioned in the vertical direction of the gate mark 58 b of the lower cover 58 . This is because a hole is made in the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 to prevent access to the pins of the main CPU 55 and the like.
When the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 has the shape shown in FIG. 10C, the protrusion 57e in FIG. Needless to say, the pins protruding from the lower surface side of the control board 50 and the protrusions 57e are formed so as not to interfere with each other (contact).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10(a), when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together, the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction. It is preferable to dispose (shift) so as not to In particular, in the case of the gate traces 57b and 58b shown in FIG. 10(b), the thickness of a portion of the gate traces 57b and 58b (recessed portion 57c) is thin, but the thinner portion is the upper cover. By arranging the 57 and the lower cover 58 at positions that do not overlap each other, it is possible to prevent overlapping of parts that are likely to be targeted.
Further, when the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction, the position of the gate mark of the other cover can be known by just looking at one cover. turn into. In order to prevent this, the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 are arranged not to overlap in the vertical direction.

<Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is temporarily disabled (disconnection). After that, it relates to processing when communication is restored, when communication fails due to the influence of noise, etc.).
As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 commands such as the pressing order instruction number and the information of the operated stop switch 42 . Then, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect based on the command received from the main control board 50, and updates the effect according to the operation of the operation switch during the game.

Here, there is a possibility that the connection between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 will be disconnected and communication will be disabled. Possible causes include poor contact and radio-controlled goto. When the sub-control board 80 stops receiving commands from the main control board 50, the effect stops at the current state. Neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 determines the presence or absence of disconnection in communication between them. Therefore, even if a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 can continue to progress the game (operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42). etc.) to continue the command transmission process to the sub-control board 80 . On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command from the main control board 50, it maintains the rendering state at that time.
Even when the line between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is broken, for example, during AT, the main control board 50 operates the instruction function to display the number of acquisition LEDs 78 in the pressing order. Display instructional information. As a result, even when the sub-control board 80 does not function normally, the player can see the pressing order instruction information and operate the stop switches 42 in the correct pressing order.
Furthermore, since the player can compare the pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 with the effect content (correct pressing order) displayed as an image on the image display device 23, the information of the two is contradictory. If so, it can be known that the image display by the sub-control board 80 is defective.

For example, when disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game and communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80 can receive commands sent from the main control board 50. Occasionally, the presentation cannot be suddenly switched to the "N+1" game. Even when the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (a command for notifying the start of the game), and notifies that the "N+1" game item has started. This is because it cannot be determined. Therefore, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, the player may be misunderstood depending on the content of the presentation.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, the performance is given a sense of incongruity while minimizing misunderstandings for the player. Outputs a rendition that does not exist.

11 shows the operation of the main control board 50 in the third embodiment (referred to as "main action" in FIG. 11) and the display of effects by the sub-control board 80 (referred to as "sub-display" in FIG. 11). .), and shows five examples consisting of pattern 1 (example 1) to pattern 5 (example 5).
Patterns 1 to 5 each show an example in which communication becomes impossible (disconnection occurs) in the middle of the "N"th game, and communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1"th game.
In addition, in the main operation of FIG. 11, "bet" means when the bet switch 40 is operated and the specified number is effectively betted. Further, "start" means that the game is started by operating the start switch 41 after the specified number has been betted. Furthermore, for example, "right stop" means that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 is stopped).

Further, in the sub-display, "pressing order effect" means, for example, in a game in which the pressing order bell or pressing order replay is won, the correct pressing order is displayed as an image. Specifically, for example, "right-left-middle display" means an effect for notifying that the correct pressing order is "right-left-middle". For example, "left middle display" is an effect after the left stop switch 42 is operated, indicating that the second stop switch to be operated is the left and the third to be operated the middle stop switch. It means a performance to inform.
Furthermore, for example, the "right stop effect" is a effect that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 has been operated is received. means.

In pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated in the "N" game, the main control board 50 draws a winning combination as described above. In this game, "right, left, middle" is an example of winning the pressing order bell, which is the correct pressing order. In this case, the main control board 50 transmits a pressing order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct pressing order "right, left, middle" to the sub control board 80 during AT. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it outputs to the image display device 23 a pressing order presentation that displays the correct pressing order of "right, left, middle".
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the correct pressing order "right, left, middle" on the acquired number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function).

Next, it is assumed that the player operates the right stop switch 42 as the first stop (right stop) after seeing the correct pressing order. As a result, the right reel 31 stops and a command to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it outputs an effect (right stop effect) in which the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 is stopped), and displays right-left center display, left-center display (in addition, other , such as "-left center", "x left center", etc.).
Pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection occurs after the right reel 31 stops and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 becomes impossible (sub disconnection). That is, this is an example in which communication becomes impossible in the middle of a game.

Even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 becomes impossible (even if the sub-control board 80 does not function), the game can proceed. The example of pattern 1 shows an example in which the left and middle stop switches 42 are respectively operated (the left and middle reels 31 are stopped) after the disconnection occurs in the "N" game (left middle stop ).

Next, it is assumed that a bet operation for the "N+1" game is performed and the start switch 41 is operated. In the "N+1"th game, as in the "N"th game, "right, left, middle" shows an example of winning the push order bell (or push order replay), which is the correct push order. In addition, in the "N+1" game, similarly to the "N" game, an example is shown in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the right, left, middle pressing order. Any role lottery result may be used.

When winning the push order bell (or push order replay) having the correct push order in the "N+1" game, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78. - 特許庁Therefore, even if the image display device 23 does not display the image of the correct pressing order, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order according to the pressing order instruction information displayed on the winning number display LED 78. Become.

In the "N+1" game, the player operates the right stop switch 42 first. After that, it is assumed that communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is restored before the second left stop switch 42 is operated.
Accordingly, when the player operates the left stop switch 42 which is the second stop switch 42 , the command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the image display so as to correspond to the received command. That is, an image indicating that the left stop has been performed is displayed (left stop effect). Here, the sub-control board 80 updates the effect that has already been displayed, that is, the effect of the "N"th game.

Therefore, actually, the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N+1" game is operated, but the sub-control board 80 indicates that the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N" game is Outputs the effect when operated. Since the second correct pressing order in the "N"th game is left, in this example, the operation is performed in the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (the pressing order correct effect) and outputs the final middle display effect.

Then, in the "N+1" game, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. - 特許庁When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it outputs an effect corresponding to the third stop of the "N" game, that is, an intermediate stop effect.
Even if a winning combination having the correct order is won in the "N+1" game, and the correct order is other than right, left, middle, under the situation of pattern 1, the effect is output as described above. be done. That is, in the "N+1" game, when the pressing order operated by the player is right, left, or middle, even if the pressing order corresponds to the incorrect pressing order, the pressing order fails as in pattern 2 described later. No performance is output.

Furthermore, in the "N+1" game, if a winning combination that does not have a correct pressing order is won, or if the winning combination is not won, if the pressing order operated by the player is right, left, middle, the above-mentioned The same effect as is output. That is, even if the "N+1" game item does not have the correct pressing order, the sub-control board 80 (in the example of pattern 1) pushes the left stop switch 42 after communication is restored.
When a command indicating that is operated is received, a left stop effect (pressing order correct effect) is output, and a middle display is output.

Next, when a bet for the "N+2" game is made and the "N+2" game is started by operating the start switch 41, the main control board 50 instructs the sub control board 80 to say " N+2" transmits a command corresponding to the start of the game. As a result, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect at the start of the "N+2" game. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, commands for the effect group number and the pressing order instruction number are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives these commands, it performs a push order effect and a display of the correct push order as at the start of the "N" game.

As described above, in pattern 1, until the third stop of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80, based on the command received from the main control board 50 ("N+1" game), continue to output, and when the 'N+2' game is started, the 'N+2'game's effect is updated.
In addition, when the game ends, the main control board 50 may transmit a command indicating the number of winning coins to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 may also display an image of the number of winning coins during the AT. In such a case, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command for the winning number at the end of the "N"th game, that is, during disconnection. ” The number of coins obtained at the end of the game will remain displayed. Then, when the communication is restored and the command for the winning number is received at the end of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display so that the number obtained at the end of the "N+1" game is displayed. .

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as in pattern 1. Also, the disconnection timing is the same as pattern 1, but the communication recovery timing is different from pattern 2. FIG. Pattern 2 is an example in which communication is restored after the left stop, which is the second stop, in the "N+1" game.
In pattern 2, the main action and sub-display in the "N" game are the same as in pattern 1, so the description is omitted.
Next, in the "N+1" game, the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of right, left, middle, and communication is restored after the left second stop.

Immediately before the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect for the "N" game item and the middle left display. In this state, communication is restored, and when the player operates the stop switch 42 (third stop) during the “N+1” game, the command is sent to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the middle stop command while displaying the middle left, the sub-control board 80 determines that the pressing order is incorrect, and outputs a pressing order failure presentation. Note that, in the third embodiment, after the pressing order failure effect is output, the subsequent pressing order effect is not output.

It should be noted that, in the "N + 1" game, when it is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the middle left and right, communication is restored after the middle left stop, and the right stop command is sub-controlled by the right stop after that. Also when it is transmitted to the substrate 80, the pressing order failure effect is output in the same manner as described above. Since the sub-control board 80 is in the process of outputting the right stop effect and the left center display, if the right stop command is received at this time, it means that the same stop command has been received twice in one game. . Even in such a case, it is processed as failure in the pressing order without performing error notification or the like, and the effect is output.
When the "N+2" game is started in the same manner as in pattern 1, a command for starting the "N+2" game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Thereby, the sub-control board 80 starts the effect of the "N+2" game.

In pattern 3, the main action and sub-display of the "N"th game are the same as in pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop in the "N+1" game. Therefore, in the "N+1" game, after communication is restored, a left stop command, which is the third stop, is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. FIG. Since the sub-control board 80 outputs the "left center display" for the "N" game, when the command for left stop is received in this state, it is judged as the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (correct pressing order effect) and then outputs a middle display.

However, on the main control board 50 side, the "N+1" game ends with the left third stop. Next, when the game shifts to the "N+2" game, and a command for starting the "N+2" game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command and receives the "N+2" game. Switch to the performance at the start. Therefore, the left stop effect and middle display that have been output until then are cancelled. Also, even if a command for the start of the "N+2"th game is received while the middle display is being output, no error notification or the like is performed, and an effect for the start of the "N+2"th game is output according to the received command. .

Pattern 4 is an example of displaying the number of remaining games during AT in the sub-display. Also, in pattern 4, the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing are the same as in pattern 3. FIG.
The main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game. When the sub-control board 80 receives a command for the remaining number of AT games from the main control board 50, it updates the display of the remaining number of AT games. During the AT, the display of the number of remaining games is not performed independently, but is output together with pattern 3's pressing order effect.

In pattern 4, when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game), the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of remaining games during AT to the sub-control board 80 . Here, in the "N"th game, it is assumed that the remaining number of AT games is 10 games.
The sub-control board 80 displays the number of remaining games during AT (10 remaining games) based on the command received from the main control board 50 at the start of the "N"th game.
Then, if the disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game, and the disconnection state continues at the start of the "N+1" game, the main control board 50, at the start (at the start) of the "N+1" game, Although processing for transmitting a command for the remaining number of games played during AT (9 games) is executed to the control board 80, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (due to disconnection). Therefore, in the "N+1"th game, the "remaining 10 games" of the "N"th game remains displayed.

Then, when the communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game (after the left middle stop) and the game shifts to the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 changes to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. In response, a command for the number of remaining games (8 games) during AT is transmitted. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display of the remaining 10 games to the display of the remaining 8 games.

Pattern 5 is the same as pattern 4 in the main action, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing, but is an example in which the "N" game is the remaining AT game.
The main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 a command indicating the number of remaining games during AT (one remaining game) at the start of the "N" game (when the start switch 41 is operated). When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display to one remaining game (from the display of two remaining games up to that point).
When disconnection occurs after the right stop of the "N" game, the main control board 50 determines that the number of remaining games during AT is 0 at the start of the "N+1" game (when the start switch 41 is operated). A command indicating that it is a game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, but the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the "N+1" game, the display indicating that there is one AT game remaining is continued.

Further, the sub-control board 80 outputs an AT end effect when ending the AT. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on receiving (at the start of the game) a command to the effect that the number of remaining games during the AT is 0 games.
However, in the example of pattern 5, the sub-control board 80 does not receive the command indicating that the number of remaining games during the AT is 0, so the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, even when the "N+1" games are finished, an effect indicating that there is one AT game remaining is output.

When the "N+1" game is completed and the "N+2" game is started, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating normal game (non-AT) to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. Send. Upon receipt of this command, the sub-control board 80 erases the display of "1 game remaining" and outputs normal (non-AT) effects.
At the end of the AT, an image such as "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game machine for moderate enjoyment" is displayed in order to prevent addiction. However, in the case of pattern 5, since the sub-display has not returned to normal at the end of the "N+1" game, the image cannot be displayed. Therefore, as a countermeasure against this, the game history is managed on the side of the sub-control board 80, and when the next game ("N+2" game in the example of FIG. 11) is started across the end of AT, The image display may be performed at the start of .

In the above patterns 1 to 5, when disconnection occurs in the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the effect immediately before the disconnection in the "N" game until the communication is restored, and "N+1 ' When the communication is restored in the middle of the game, the continuation of the effect output as the 'N' game is output based on the command received at the 'N+1' game. Therefore, for example, in pattern 1, when a left stop command is received after communication is restored in the "N+1" game, regardless of whether the stop switch 42 was actually operated in the correct order, the correct answer is received. The pressing order effect is output.

On the other hand, in pattern 1, for example, in the "N+1"th game, if a command for intermediate stop is received after communication is restored, the order of pressing the effect output at that time, that is, the "N"th game Since the incorrect pressing order is displayed for the middle left display, the pressing order failure presentation is output regardless of whether the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct pressing order. However, even if the pushing order failure effect is output in the "N+1" game, if the player operates the stop switch 42 according to the correct pushing order in the "N+1" game, the symbols are advantageous to the player. Since the combination is stopped and displayed, the player is not disadvantaged.

As described above, when the communication is restored in the "N+1" game, in the "N+1" game, the effect that takes over the effect before disconnection ("N" game) is output, and the "N+2" game is output. Reset rendition at start (return to correct rendition). As a result, it is possible to minimize the output of an unnatural performance in both the game in which the disconnection occurs and the game in which the communication is restored, and to prevent the player from being misunderstood as much as possible.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 11, after the disconnection occurred in the "N" game, the communication was restored in the "N+1" game. However, it is the same as in FIG.
For example, if a disconnection occurs in the "N" game and communication is restored in the "N+a" game (a = "2" or more), the disconnection in the "N" game will continue until the "N+a-1" game. The effect just before the previous one continues to be output. Then, in the "N+a"th game in which the communication is restored, the continuation of the "N"th game effect that has continued the output is executed based on the command received after the communication is restored. Next, at the start of the "N+a+1" game, the effect (correct effect) at the start of the "N+a+1" game is updated.

<Fourth Embodiment>
When rotating and stopping the reel 31, the motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stop processing, all of which are in an excited state. When the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, the four phases are simultaneously excited for a predetermined time (time T11 to be described later) (hereinafter referred to as "four-phase excitation state").
The fourth embodiment relates to the time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 is stopped.
FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that hatching is omitted in FIG. 12 from the viewpoint of visibility of the drawing. Moreover, FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that the actual product has the structure shown in FIG. In FIG. 12, the process from when the stop button 42a is pushed to when it returns is illustrated in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d). In the drawing, the upper side is the player's side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10 . In the drawing, the side above the front door 12 is the side seen by the player.
Furthermore, the line along which the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is indicated by a dotted line. It is assumed that the moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line is the moment when the detecting sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 12(a), the stop button 42a is the operating body of the stop switch 42, and is operated (pushed inside the slot machine 10) when the player turns on the stop switch 42. As shown in FIG. The player side of the stop button 42a is arranged to protrude from the front door 12 provided on the front surface of the housing of the slot machine 10 by about several millimeters. When viewed from the front of the player side, this portion has a substantially cylindrical shape. In the unloaded state, the stop button 42a is urged in the F3 direction (outward direction, player direction) in FIG. The player-side end of 42 a protrudes from the front door 12 . In this state, the bottom surface of the stop button 42a (hereinafter referred to as "flange-shaped portion") and the front door 12 are in contact with each other.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided inside the front door 12 (inside the housing), and contacts the stop button 42a when the stop button 42a is pushed, prohibiting further movement of the stop button 42a. is.

A movable piece 42d that can be moved integrally with the stop button 42a is provided on the bottom side of the stop button 42a in the drawing. Furthermore, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is arranged directly below the moving piece 42d. In the no-load state shown in (a) of the drawing, when the stop button 42a is biased toward the front door 12 by the biasing force of the coil spring 42c, the tip (lower end in the drawing) of the moving piece 42d is It is arranged at a position away from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state of (a) in the drawing, the detection sensor 42e does not detect the moving piece 42d, and is in the OFF state.

Next, as shown in (b) of the drawing, when the player stops the rotation of the reels 31, the player pushes the stop button 42a in the F4 direction. As a result, the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing against the biasing force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing, the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a also moves downward in the drawing. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d enters the detection sensor 42e. Then, when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state. FIG. 12(b) shows the position of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state. At the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on, the flange-like portion of the stop button 42a is not yet in contact with the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

When the stop button 42a is further pushed from the state of FIG. 12(b), as shown in FIG. 12(c), the flange-like portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the stopper 42c. This position is the deepest part when the stop button 42a is pushed. In addition, in the state of FIG. 12(c), the detection sensor 42e is in the ON state because the tip of the moving piece 42d is being detected by the detection sensor 42e.

When the player releases the push of the stop button 42a from the state of FIG. 12(c) (excluding the force in the F4 direction in FIG. 12(c)), the stop button 42a is pushed by the urging force F3 of the coil spring 42c. A force is applied to return to the initial position. As a result, the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a move upward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d is no longer in contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (FIG. 12(d)).

FIG. 12(d) shows the arrangement of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned off from the on state. In the state of FIG. 12(d), the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further released from the state of FIG. 12(d), the stop button 42a comes into contact with the flange-like portion of the front door 12, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state shown in FIG. 12(a), which is the no-load state of the stop button 42a.
The state of FIG. 12(b) showing the timing when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state and the state of FIG. 12(d) showing the timing when the detection sensor 42e is turned off from the on state are generally different. Although they are the same, there is no particular problem even if there is a slight deviation.

13A and 13B are time charts showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excitation state of the motor 32, etc., in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13A shows Example 1, and FIG. show.
In FIG. 13(a), the stop button 42a is at the initial position (FIG. 12(a)) in the no-load state, and the moment when the stop button 42a is pressed is set to S41. S42 is the time when the stop button 42a is pushed and the detection sensor 42e is turned on from off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12(b) is reached. Further, the stop button 42a is pushed from that position, and the time when the stop button 42a reaches the deepest portion (the state shown in FIG. 12(c)) is defined as S43. The times S41, S42, and S43 described above depend on the pressing speed of the player and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pushed slowly, the time from time S41 to S43 is lengthened, and if the stop button 42a is pushed quickly, the time from time S41 to S43 is shortened.

Next, at time S44, the depression of the stop button 42a is released. It is assumed that the stop button 42a is positioned at the deepest position at time S44.
When the stop button 42a is released from being pushed, the spring force of the coil spring 42c acts to return the stop button 42a to the initial position, as described above. It is assumed that the operator of the stop button 42a does not touch the stop button 42a from the moment the stop button 42a is released.
S45 is the time when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12(d) is reached. Here, the time from time S44 to time S45 is assumed to be T11.

The time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (travel distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e is turned off. In Example 1 of (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed so that the time T11 is 100 ms.

On the other hand, when the turn-on of the stop switch 42 (specifically, the turn-on of the detection sensor 42e) is detected (in the state of FIG. 12(b)), the reel control means 65 controls the reel corresponding to the stop switch 42 The stop control of 31 is executed, and the reel 31 is stopped at a position corresponding to the result of the combination lottery by the combination lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means). The time from when the stop control of the reel 31 is started (after the detection sensor 42e is turned on) to when the reel 31 is stopped is, as described above, (except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB game). It is set within 190 ms (when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21, the number of moving frames is within 5, and when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 20, the number of moving frames is within 4). Therefore, the time from the start of deceleration of the reel 31 to the stop of the reel 31 is not constant because it varies depending on the winning combination lottery result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Further, after the reel 31 is moved to the predetermined position, the reel control means 65 causes the motor 32 to be in a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited (brakes are being applied) for a predetermined period of time (the four-phase excitation state described above). ).
Here, the motor 32 in this embodiment is a four-phase stepping motor, and during rotation of the motor 32 (reel 31), for example, 1-2 phase excitation is performed (note that it is not limited to 1-2 phase excitation). do not have). Therefore, even while the motor 32 is rotating, there is one excitation state. When stopping the rotation of the motor 32, the four-phase excitation state is set.
When performing a bound stop after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position (when making it appear that the reel 31 is vibrating at the stop position), for example, the 3-phase excitation state should be set instead of the 4-phase excitation state. is also possible.

The moment the motor 32 stops rotating, there is a risk that the motor 32 and the reel 31 will go over the desired stop position due to the inertia of the motor 32 and the reel 31 during rotation. By setting a four-phase excitation state and generating a static torque, it is prevented from moving from the stop position by inertia. When the motor 32 is in the four-phase excitation state, acceptance of the next operation of the stop switch 42 is not permitted. At the time of the first or second stop, acceptance of the operation of the next stop switch 42 is permitted only when the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 changes from the on state to the off state (returns to the state of FIG. 12(d). ), and when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 whose rotational drive is stopped ends.

The reason for such control is as follows.
In order to hold the reel 31 at the stop position, the motor 32 is controlled to be in a four-phase excitation state. It's getting bigger. Therefore, in order to reduce this load, after the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32 is finished, it is possible to accept the operation of the next stop button 42a.

In example 1 of FIG. 13(a), when the winning combination lottery result by the winning combination lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means) is a predetermined result (for example, when the bell is won in the order of pushing), the four-phase excitation state is established. The excitation time T12 from start to finish is set to 90 interrupts (2.235×90=201.15 ms). Here, the reason why the excitation time T12 in the four-phase excitation state is set to "90 interrupt" when the winning combination lottery result is a predetermined result is that the excitation time T12 is always constant regardless of the winning combination lottery result. It means that it is not necessarily

Therefore, in example 1 of the fourth embodiment, it is set to be "T11<T12".
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from time S42, the reel 31 stops within 190 ms. As described above, when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "21", the number of moving frames during the stop control is within 5 frames (minimum of 1 frame), or when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20" Since the number of moving frames during the stop control is within 4 frames (minimum 1 frame), the reel 31 stops within about "40" to "190" ms from time S42.
On the other hand, the time from when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state until the stop button 42e reaches the deepest position and the pressing force of the stop button 42e is released (time from time S42 to time S44) is , "40" to "180" ms. Therefore, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is started and the time S44 when the depression of the stop button 42a is released are close to each other (almost at the same time).

Therefore, in Example 1, the four-phase excitation state is started at the timing (time S44) when the depression of the stop button 42a is released. It is designed so that the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (time T12 elapses). Therefore, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.
In this way, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to be turned off before the end of the four-phase excitation state, it is possible to permit acceptance of the next operation of the stop button 42a when the four-phase excitation state is ended. . This allows the game to proceed at high speed.

On the other hand, in example 2 of FIG. 13(b), from the moment when the push of the stop button 42a reaching the deepest part is released (time S44) until the detection sensor 42e turns off (at time S45). This is an example in which the time T11 (until arrival) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is three times longer than in Example 1. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in example 2, the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
In Example 2, as in Example 1, the four-phase excitation state is started at the moment (time S44) when the stop button 42a that has reached the deepest position is released. It is designed so that the detection sensor 42e is turned off after the excitation state ends. Therefore, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, by designing the four-phase excitation state to end when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, acceptance of the next operation of the stop button 42a is permitted when the detection sensor 42e is turned off. can do. This allows the game to proceed at high speed.
As described above, both Example 1 and Example 2 have advantages in terms of control.
Examples 1 and 2 of FIG. 13 show examples in which the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is different. However, for example, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, if "T11<T12", the next stop button 42a can be accepted when the four-phase excitation state ends. Therefore, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, the game can be completed at a higher speed in Example 1.

<Fifth Embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to the relationship between power on/off and program activation.
FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an outline of control in the fifth embodiment.
In FIG. 14, (a) is a diagram showing a state when a power failure occurs after starting the main program (program of the main control board 50). It is assumed that the power is turned on at time S51 and then turned off at time S55.
When the power is turned on at time S51 (when the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1), power supply starts to both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, and the main control board 50 and The voltage level on the sub-control board 80 gradually increases and reaches the supply level V0 (the level when the power is on). In FIG. 14, the voltage supply level V0, the power failure detection level V1, and the drive voltage limit V2 are the same as in FIG. 3 (first embodiment (A)).

S52 is the time when the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 reach the supply level V0 after the power is turned on at time S51. After that, the sub-program by the sub-control board 80 is activated from time S53 when time T22 has elapsed from time S52. Thereafter, the main program by the main control board 50 is activated from time S54 when time T23 (T23>T22) has elapsed from time S52. In this way, the sub-program is started first and then the main program is started when the main control board 50 transmits the first command after power-on to the sub-control board 80. , the sub-control board 80 side to be ready to receive the command.

Next, when a power failure (the power switch 11 is turned off, a power failure, or the like) occurs at time S55, the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level drops, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 can execute power-off processing as long as the voltage is equal to or higher than the driving voltage limit V2.
Further, when the power failure occurs at time S55, the voltage becomes the power failure detection level V1 at time T0 (20 interrupt) as in FIG. 3, and the power failure is detected (time S56). Further, after detection of the power-off, the power-off process is executed, for example, after one interrupt, as in FIG. It is assumed that the power-off process ends at time S57.
After that, when time S58 is reached, the voltage falls below the drive voltage limit V2, and the program (process) cannot be executed. Therefore, control is performed so that the power-off process is completed before reaching time S58.

When the main program starts at time S54, the main CPU 55 is set, the RWM 53 is checked, whether or not the previous power-off was normal, confirmation of the setting key switch state, etc. are performed, and then interrupt processing is started. . When the setting key switch is off, the power failure recovery process (initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM 53, etc.) is executed after starting the interrupt process. On the other hand, when the setting key switch is on, the setting change process is started after the interrupt process is activated.
Then, as shown in FIG. 14(a), when power is cut off after starting the main program, when the setting key switch is off, the power cut-off process is executed after the power cut-off recovery process is completed. do. This allows the program to terminate normally.
On the other hand, if the power is turned off after the main program is started, and the setting key switch is on, the power is turned off without starting the setting change process. This is because a problem may occur if the setting change process is executed after a power failure occurs.

In order to execute the main program normally, the setting of the main CPU 55 and the check of the RWM 53 are always executed even when the power failure is detected at the same time as the start of the main program.
Furthermore, after starting the main program, even if the power supply is turned off after that, the program is always executed until the interrupt start. This is for detecting power interruption in interrupt processing. As in the first embodiment (A), for example, at the "N"th interruption, a voltage drop (power interruption detection level V1) at which it is determined that a power interruption has occurred is detected, and the next "N+1" game is detected. However, when the voltage drop is detected, power cutoff is detected at the "N+1" interrupt (determined as power cutoff). Then, power-off processing is executed from the "N+2" interrupt.

In the example of FIG. 14(a), the main program is started at time S54, and the power is turned off at time S55. However, even if the power is cut off at the same time as the time S54 (startup of the main program), the power cutoff process can be completed before the voltage reaches the driving voltage limit V2.
Note that in FIG. 14(a), the time T21 from when the power is turned on (time S51) until the voltage reaches the supply level V0 (time S52) is when the voltage goes low after the power is turned off (time S55). is set to be shorter than the time T24.
Also, the time T23 (the time from when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 to when the main program starts up) is set to be shorter than the time T24.

FIG. 14(b) shows an example when the power is cut off before the main control board 50 starts the main program. In the example of FIG. 14B, the power is turned on at time S51 and turned off at time S59. Here, time S59 is earlier than time S54 in FIG. 14(a). That is, after the power supply (supply level V0) necessary for starting the main program is supplied, the power supply is interrupted before the predetermined time (time T23) elapses (before the time S54 is reached), and the voltage drops. For example. In such cases, the main program will not start. Therefore, after that, the voltage gradually decreases, and finally the power supply becomes Low level.
In the example of FIG. 14(b), when the power is turned on again, it can be started normally.
Also, although not shown in FIG. 14, it is conceivable that the power failure occurs immediately after the subprogram is activated (after time S53) and before time S54 (before the main program is activated). be done.
When the power is turned off at the above timing, the subprogram executes the power-off processing of the subprogram. Then, it is possible to end the power-off processing of the subprogram before the voltage supplied to the sub-control board 80 reaches the driving voltage limit V2.
Also, since the power cutoff at the above timing is the power cutoff before the start of the main program, the main program is not started as described above.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In this embodiment, the passage sensor 46 is provided. This is because the passage sensor 46 is effective as an anti-fraud countermeasure as well as increasing the precision of medal insertion determination. However, the passage sensor 46 may not be provided, and only a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect the medals M moving in the substantially horizontal direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the medal M is dropped substantially vertically downward, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b may detect the medal M. As shown in FIG.
(3) In FIG. 2, the blocker 45 is arranged on the lower side of the medal passage, but it is not limited to this. Any mechanism may be used as long as it has a function of ejecting the medal M out of the medal passage before the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are shown to detect a slightly higher position than the central position of the medal M when viewed from the front, but the actual product may be configured in this way. does not mean The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged in any manner as long as they are arranged so as to reliably detect the passing medals M.

(4) In FIG. 3, the time T2 is the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M4, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the medal M is at the position M1 in FIG. 2, the time from the moment it is released until it reaches M4 may be set to T2, and "T2>T1" may be set. Alternatively, the time required for the medal M to reach M4 from any predetermined position between M1 and M2 may be T2, and "T2>T1" may be set.

(5) In the first embodiment (A), when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process is executed until the medal M reaches M4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed until the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44a due to the power-off processing.
Alternatively, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches the insertion sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, but is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power-off process is executed.

(6) Furthermore, in the first embodiment (A), a power failure occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, and the time T1 until the power failure is detected and the power failure process (blocker off) is executed. is set shorter than the time required for the medal M to reach the position where the blocker 45 is installed from the position of M2 (this time is referred to as "T2'"). With this setting, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the medal M reaches the position of the blocker 45 from the position of M2, the blocker 45 is already turned off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal from passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
In the above description, the position of the medal M2 may be the moment the hand is released at the position of M1, or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in FIG. 3, in the first embodiment (A), the power-off processing (blocker off) is executed in the interrupt processing subsequent to the interrupt processing in which the power-off is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set so that the power-off processing (blocker off) is executed after, for example, "2" to "5" interrupt processing counting from the interrupt processing that detected the power-off. Alternatively, power-off processing (blocker off) may be executed in interrupt processing that detects power-off.
(8) In the first embodiment (A) of FIG. 3, the time T0 required for the voltage to reach the sustain level V1 from the supply level V0 when power failure occurs is set to 20 interrupts, but it is limited to this. Various settings can be made depending on the performance of the power supply.

(9) In the first embodiment (C) of FIG. 7, the payout sensors 37a and 37b detect the movable piece 39a when the medals M are paid out by the medal payout device. However, not limited to this, the payout sensors 37a and 37b may detect the medals M themselves to be paid out. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged like the insertion sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 4 to detect the passage of the medals M (to be paid out).

Further, when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged in such a manner, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Payout sensor 37a ON, payout sensor 37b OFF (time S31')
Payout sensor 37a ON, payout sensor 37b ON (time S32')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b on (time S33')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b off (time S34')
follow the course of
Then, the time from time S31' to time S34' is set to be shorter than the time T1 (the time from occurrence of power failure to execution of power failure processing).

(10) In the second embodiment, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the projection 57d and the depression 57c are on the outside. is also possible. The gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also the same. In this case, if the gate marks 57b are shaped as shown in FIG. 10(b), the outside of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58 becomes a smooth surface. On the other hand, if the shape shown in FIG.

(11) In the second embodiment, as an example of the board case 56, an example in which the main control board 50 is housed inside has been given. However, it is possible to apply the second embodiment not only to the main control board 50 but also to other control boards for which it is desired to prevent fraud, such as the board case of the sub-control board 80 . As shown in FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 also includes the RWM 83, the ROM 54, the sub-CPU 85, and the like. For example, the CPU 85 is not arranged, and the RWM 83 and ROM 54 are also not arranged. Similarly, the model number display area of the sub-control board 80 should not overlap in the vertical direction (directly below) the trace of the gate.

(12) In the third embodiment, the pressing order effect during AT and the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reel 31) and the remaining number of games during AT are given as examples. The third embodiment can be applied even in the case of displaying the number of obtained coins in a game (BB game, etc.) and the number of remaining obtainable coins.
For example, the acquired number at the start of the "N" game is "200", the acquired number at the start of the "N+1" game is "209", and the acquired number at the start of the "N+2" game is "218" sheets. Also, the main control board 50 is assumed to transmit a command regarding the winning number to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game.
Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that disconnection occurs during the "N"th game, and communication is restored during the "N+1"th game.

In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays "200" as the winning number in the "N" game. Also, at the start of the "N+1" game, the command regarding the number of winning cards is not received (due to disconnection), so the display of the number of winning cards of "200" is maintained even in the "N+1" game. Next, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command regarding the number of wins at the start of the "N+2" game, it updates the display to the number of wins of "218" based on the command.

(13) FIG. 11 of the third embodiment shows an example in which the image display is returned to normal at the start of the "N+2" game. However, without being limited to this, the image display may be returned to normal after the “N+1” game is completely stopped or when a bet operation is performed after that. Alternatively, it is also possible to restore the image display to normal at a predetermined timing based on a command sent to the sub-control board 80 during or after a full stop.

(14) In the third embodiment, for example, in the middle of the disconnection "N+1" game, there is a case where the player wins a lottery that adds the number of cards that can be acquired during AT or the number of games played (addition). In this case, since the "N+1" game is disconnected, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command based on winning the additional lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, at the start of the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the result after the addition (addition) lottery, and at the start of the "N+2" game, the sub control board 80 Displaying game information (the number of obtainable numbers and the number of games played) after addition.

(15) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), for example, when disconnection occurs after the right first stop of the "N" game, and communication is restored before the first stop switch 42 of the "N+1" game is operated. can be considered. Then, in the "N+1" game, it is assumed that the player makes the right first stop. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives the right first stop command in the "N+1" game, it means that it has received the stop command for the stop switch 42 that has already been operated. Output. Then, at the time of the betting operation after the "N+1" game is completely stopped or at the start of the "N+2" game, the image display can be restored to the normal one.

(16) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), when the acquired number is displayed as an image during AT, the following method can be given as an example of the update processing of the acquired number of images before and after disconnection.
The main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of acquired coins to the sub control board 80 when there is a payout process. Here, when disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the winning number of the "N" game. It is assumed that the sub-control board 80 displays "100" as the winning number during the AT immediately before the disconnection of the "N" game. In addition, the "N" game eye and the "N+1" game eye in AT are assumed to win 10 cards.
In this case, the number of coins acquired during the AT at the end of the "N"th game should originally be "110", but remains "100" (because the wire is broken). Then, it is assumed that the communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can restore the winning number during the AT to the normal value based on the winning number command received during the payout process for the "N+1" game. Here, the value may be returned to the normal value at the time of the payout process of the "N+1" game, or may be returned to the normal value at the start of the "N+2" game as in the example of FIG. Further, it may be updated to "110" at the time of payout processing for the "N+1" game, and updated to "120" at the start of the "N+2" game.

(17) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines, for example. In a pachinko machine, the starting gate (the winning gate that starts the pattern variation by the symbol variation display device and triggers the acquisition of random numbers for the jackpot lottery), the electronic chew winning gate (when the game ball wins, the next winning To make it easier, there is a prize opening that opens for a certain period of time and then closes.In addition, the electric chew is not limited to a tulip shape. be provided. The first embodiment (B) can be applied to these winning slots.

Specifically, for example, at the starting port, there are a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a game ball that has entered the starting port) and an ejection sensor (a sensor that detects a game ball after it has been detected by the winning sensor). is provided. In addition, the attacker is provided with a V-winning sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball that has won the attacker's prize first) and an ejection sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the V-winning sensor). .
For example, in the case of the starting port, when power is cut off at the moment a game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the game ball is set to be detected by the ejection sensor before the power cut-off process is executed. As a result, even if the power supply is interrupted at the moment the game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the prize balls can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from not being paid out even though the game balls have entered the prize winning opening. The same applies to the attacker's V winning sensor and discharge sensor.

(18) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of a game machine. (so-called "pachi-slot gaming machines"), but can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and sealed gaming machines (medal-less gaming machines) that do not use medals for games as game media.

Here, an enclosed game machine (medal-less game machine) can eliminate, for example, the medal payout device (a unit including the hopper 35, the hopper motor 36, and the payout sensor 37) in FIG. Also, the medal slot 47 and the medal selector can be eliminated. Then, all the electronic medals (electronic game media) granted by winning a winning combination are stored in the credit amount display LED 76 . In this case, it is conceivable that the credit amount display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (up to "99,999" electronic medals can be stored).
The present invention can be applied to all of the above-described embodiments and the following embodiments, except for the first embodiment, even in such casino machines and enclosed-type gaming machines (medalless gaming machines).

<Sixth Embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to control of the medal payout device 15 by the main control board 50. FIG.
Here, FIGS. 15 to 17 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the position of the hopper disk 101, the position of the tokens, and the drive control of the hopper motor 36 in the sixth embodiment.
Also, FIG. 15(a) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing the state before the last discharged medal touches the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 15(b) is a plan view of the last discharged medal. Fig. 10 is a plan view of the token payout device 15 showing a state before contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and showing a state in which the hopper disk 101 has advanced in rotation from (a).

Furthermore, FIG. 16(a) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the last discharged medal is in contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 16(b) is a plan view of the last discharged medal. FIG. 11 is a plan view of the token payout device 15 showing a state in which the movable shaft 38b is moved by being pushed;
Furthermore, FIG. 17(a) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing the state at the moment when the last discharged medal is discharged from the discharge part, and (b) is a hopper after the last discharged medal is discharged. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the token payout device 15 showing a state in which rotation of the disc is stopped;

In the sixth embodiment, the medal dispensing device 15 includes a hopper 35 that stores medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 that rotates the hopper disk 101. Also, the fact that the medal payout device 15 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 is the same as in the first embodiment. The main control board 50 controls driving of the hopper motor 36 .

As shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disc shape, and has a holding portion which is an opening capable of holding medals stored in the hopper. 102 are provided along the outer circumference of the hopper disk 101 .
Furthermore, each holding portion 102 is formed in a circular hole shape penetrating from the upper surface to the lower surface of the hopper disk 101 . The medals stored in the hopper 35 are formed so as to enter each holding portion 102 from the upper opening of each holding portion 102 and be held by each holding portion 102 .

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, when the hopper motor 36 is driven during the medal payout process, the hopper disc 101 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 rotates clockwise. Then, when the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise, the medals held in each holding portion 102 move clockwise along with the hopper disk 101 in an arc, and are sequentially discharged from the discharge portion 103 .
When the medals are ejected from the ejection section 103, the holding section 102 holding the medals is emptied. Then, other medals stored in the hopper 35 newly enter into the empty holding portion 102 .

Further, as described in the first embodiment (C), the medal payout device 15 has a fixed shaft 38a and a movable shaft 38b. In the sixth embodiment, a discharge portion 103 from which medals are discharged is provided between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
As shown in FIG. 16(b), when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, and when the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, the medal moves toward the fixed shaft 38a. and the movable shaft 38b. At this time, medals are ejected from the ejection section 103 .
Also, the moment when the medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6), the medal is ejected from the ejection section 103. moment. When the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the medals have been discharged from the discharge section 103. FIG.

In one payout process, the last medal to be discharged from the discharging section 103 will be referred to as the "last discharged medal". Emission medals.
15 to 17, medals are indicated by two-dot chain lines. The medal with the character "A" is the last discharged medal in one payout process, and the medal with the letter "B" is the first discharged medal in the next payout process.

Further, the position of the holding unit 102 where the last discharged medal was held at the moment when the last discharged medal was discharged from the discharging unit 103 in one payout process is referred to as a "first position", and is referred to as a "first position". The position of the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process at the moment the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103 in the process is referred to as the "second position".
FIG. 17(a) shows the state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 (the hopper disk 101, each holding section 102, each medal marked with letters "A" to "D", and the fixed shaft 38a). , and the positional relationship of the movable shaft 38b). In FIG. 17(a), the position of the holding portion 102 where the medal with the letter "A" was held is the first position, and the medal with the letter "B" is held. The position of the holding portion 102 is the second position.

In the sixth embodiment, when one payout process ends, the main control board 50 moves the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process to the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in the state of being positioned between .
FIG. 17(b) shows a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 has stopped after the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejection section 103. FIG. In FIG. 17(b), the first position and the second position are indicated by dashed lines. Also, in FIG. 17(b), the medals marked with the letter "B" are the first ejected medals in the next payout process. Then, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the hopper disk 101 is rotated while the holding portion 102 holding the medals marked with the character "B" is positioned between the first position and the second position. has stopped rotating.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36 .
Therefore, at the end of the payout process, the main control board 50 supplies the hopper motor 36 with a current in the direction opposite to that when the medals are ejected, thereby suddenly stopping the driving of the hopper motor 36 and causing the hopper disk 101 to rotate. can be stopped suddenly.

Further, as described above, when the medals are ejected from the ejecting portion 103 and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that effect.
Therefore, when the payout sensor 37 detects that the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejecting section 103, a current in the opposite direction to that used when ejecting the medals is supplied to the hopper motor 36 to rotate the hopper disk 101. When suddenly stopped, the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process can be stopped at the second position.

Also, by supplying a current to the hopper motor 36 in the direction opposite to when the medals are ejected, the hopper motor 36 can be driven in the opposite direction, and the hopper disk 101 can be rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise rotation). .
Therefore, even if the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process has passed the second position at the end of the payout process, the hopper is supplied with a current in the direction opposite to when the medals are ejected. The hopper disk 101 can be reversely rotated and returned to the second position by flowing the motor 36 .
By returning the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal to the second position, the first ejected medal can start moving from the same second position each time. As a result, the same operation can be performed for each payout process, so that the first ejected medal can be stably ejected.

Here, when a constant current is supplied to the DC motor as the hopper motor 36, the rotation of the drive shaft is gradually accelerated from a stopped state, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the drive state of the hopper motor 36, and the discharge state of medals from the discharge section 103 in the sixth embodiment.
In FIG. 18 , the upper line indicates the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 , the middle line indicates the drive state of the hopper motor 36 , and the lower line indicates the discharge state of medals from the discharge section 103 .

The drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is a digital signal that is output from a predetermined output port provided on the main control board 50. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 turns from off to on, a constant current is supplied to the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 turns from ON to OFF, the current flowing through the hopper motor 36 becomes "0".
Furthermore, in FIG. 18, the drive state of the hopper motor 36, "stop", indicates a state in which the drive shaft stops rotating, and the drive state of the hopper motor 36, "constant speed", indicates that the drive shaft is (constant speed) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually increases from "stopped" and then reaches "constant speed".
In addition, the part where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 slopes upward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates.

In this way, the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor gradually accelerates the rotation of the drive shaft when the drive signal is turned on from off.
Therefore, if the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal is stopped at the second position, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerated until the holding portion 102 reaches the first position. Therefore, it takes a longer time than the medal discharge interval at constant speed.
That is, when the holding portion 102 that holds the first discharged medal is stopped at the second position, the time required from the start of driving the hopper motor 36 until the first discharged medal is discharged from the discharging portion 103 is 36 is rotating at a constant speed, it is longer than the medal discharge interval.
As a result, the player may feel that the discharge of the first (first) medal is delayed.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, when one payout process ends, the main control board 50 moves the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process between the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in the positioned state.
When the holding part 102 holding the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, the distance to reach the first position becomes shorter than when it stops at the second position. . As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when it stops at the second position. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the ejection of the is delayed.

Also, when the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, as shown in FIG. A portion corresponding to between is positioned in front of the discharge portion 103 .
As a result, an illegal act such as a wire or the like is inserted from the medal dispensing opening provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and an illegal act (a fraudulent act) of trying to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disc 101 with this illegal implement is committed. Even if the hopper disk 101 is broken, the portion of the hopper disk 101 corresponding to between the two adjacent holding portions 102 can serve as a barrier to prevent access to the holding portions 102 by unauthorized instruments.

Further, when the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is "constant speed", the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise at a constant speed. At this time, the medals held in each holding section 102 are sequentially discharged from the discharging section 103 at regular intervals.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off from on, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases from "constant speed" and then reaches "stop".
In FIG. 18, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 is slanted downward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerated.

In this way, the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor gradually decelerates the rotation of the drive shaft when the drive signal is turned off from on.
Then, the last discharged medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (discharging portion 103), and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, whereby the last discharged medal is discharged from the discharging portion 103. When this is detected by the dispensing sensor 37, the main control board 50 turns the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 from ON to OFF.
As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerated, and the holding portion 102 holding the first discharged medal in the next payout process is positioned between the first position and the second position. Then, the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18 , when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, the main control board 50 then transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80 . This payout start command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has started the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 starts processing regarding the output of the payout sound. After that, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18 , when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the main control board 50 then transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80 . This payout end command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has ended the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout end command, it ends the processing related to the output of the payout sound. As a result, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 ends.

Here, the "payout sound" means a sound output from the sub-control board 80 in accordance with the payout of medals. As the payout sound, for example, a sound such as “purururu” can be output from the speaker 22 .
In addition, the "process related to the output of the payout sound" refers to a series of processes such as a process of selecting a sound to be output, a process of selecting a channel for outputting the selected sound, and a process of outputting the selected sound from the speaker 22. It means By executing this series of processes, the payout sound is actually output from the speaker 22 .

When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a payout start command to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 processes the output of the payout sound. is started, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be started before the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103 .

When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the main control board 50 transmits a payout end command to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the payout end command, the sub-control board 80 processes the output of the payout sound. , the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be terminated when the discharge of medals from the discharge unit 103 is stopped.
This can give the player the impression that the payout of medals and the payout sound are synchronized.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the main control board 50, the drive state of the hopper motor 36, the detection states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and the timing of discharging medals from the discharge section 103. As shown in FIG.
When a winning combination with a payout is won, the main control board 50 sets payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 .
For example, when 10 medals are won and 10 medals are paid out, "10" is set as payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
That is, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is set as payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

Further, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 is "started" (starts driving) from the "stopped" state, goes through "acceleration", and reaches "constant speed".
At the end of one payout process, the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is stopped between the first position and the second position. At the start of , the hopper motor 36 reaches a "constant speed" by the time the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal reaches the first position.
That is, the stop position of the holding portion 102 holding the first discharged medal is set so that the hopper motor 36 reaches the "constant speed" before the holding portion 102 holding the first discharged medal reaches the first position. are doing.

Then, after the hopper motor 36 reaches "constant speed" through "stop" through "acceleration", the holding part 102 holding the first discharged token reaches the first position. The medals are surely discharged from the discharge part 103. - 特許庁
Furthermore, at the timing of (a) in FIG. 19, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both off.
The timing of (a) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Also, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active unlike the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37a is set to be off when the movable piece 39a is detected, and to be on when the movable piece 39a is not detected.
On the other hand, the payout sensor 37b is set to be highly active as in the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37b is set to be off when the movable piece 39a is not detected, and to be on when the movable piece 39a is detected.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned off at the timing of (a) in FIG.
In the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active, and the payout sensor 37b is set to be high active. waveform is turned on and off.

At the timing of (b) in FIG. 19, the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b to move the movable shaft 38b, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is turned off.
The state of (b) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (b) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Furthermore, at the timing of (c) in FIG. 19, the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is also turned on. Become. At this time, medals are discharged from between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (discharging portion 103).
The state of (c) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (c) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Furthermore, at the timing of (d) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is being biased by the spring 39b and is in the process of returning to its original position, the payout sensor 37a is in the ON state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state. becomes.
The state of (d) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
At the timing (e) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is urged by the spring 39b to return to its original position, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 determines that one medal has been discharged, and updates the payout number data.
The state (e) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

When paying out "N" medals, (a) to (e) in FIG. 19 are repeated until it is determined that the "N"th medal has been discharged.
Then, when determining that the “N”th medal has been ejected, the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 .
Further, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 is "decelerated" and then "stopped".
As a result, the process of paying out "N" medals is completed.

FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment.
In the payout process by the main control board 50, payout number data is first set in step S101. This process is a process of storing payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 . For example, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is stored as payout number data. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S102.

At step S<b>102 , the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 . When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 is started. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S103.
In step S103, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active, and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected (the state in which the movable shaft 38b is pushed by the medal and moved) is ON. is set to be

If "Yes" in step S103, the process proceeds to next step S104, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Here, when "Yes" in step S104, the process proceeds to the next step S105. On the other hand, if "No" in step S104, an error occurs.
Here, if the payout sensor 37b is already on when the payout sensor 37a is turned on from off, the result in step S104 is "No". In this case, it is conceivable that the ejection portion 103 is jammed with medals (medal jam error). Also, when a medal clogging error occurs, the error continues until the jammed medals are removed (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, remove the jammed medals and operate the reset switch to clear the error.

Although not shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, if "No" continues for a predetermined period of time ("No" remains unchanged for a predetermined period of time), an error occurs. In this case, it is conceivable that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty (hopper empty error). Further, when a hopper empty error occurs, the error continues until the hopper 35 is replenished with medals (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, when the hopper 35 is replenished with medals and the reset switch is operated, the error is canceled.
At step S105, the main control board 50 again determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, when "Yes" in step S105, the process proceeds to the next step S106. On the other hand, if "No" in step S105, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104.

In step S106, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is on. Then, when "Yes" is determined in step S106, the process proceeds to the next step S107, and the main control board 50 determines again whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, when "Yes" in step S107, the process proceeds to the next step S108. On the other hand, if "No" in step S107, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104 or S105.

Proceeding to step S108, the main control board 50 now determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Then, when "Yes" is determined in step S108, the process proceeds to the next step S109, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is off. Further, when the result of step S109 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S110, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off.
If "Yes" in step S110, the process proceeds to next step S111. On the other hand, if "No" in step S110, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in steps S104, S105 or S107.

In step S111, the main control board 50 updates the payout number data. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the payout number data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and storing the data after the subtraction as new payout number data.
In the next step S112, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout number data is "0". Here, when "Yes" in step S112, the process proceeds to the next step S113, and the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor . When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 stops. Then, the payout process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when "No" in step S112, the process returns to step S103. As a result, the next medal will be paid out. Then, the process of returning from step S112 to S103 is repeated until the payout number data becomes "0".

Here, the medals ejected from the ejection section 103 are normally guided to the medal receiving tray through a path called a medal chute.
However, in rare cases, the medals ejected from the ejecting section 103 may hit the inner wall of the medal chute and bounce back to the ejecting section 103 . At this time, the bounced medal may hit the next medal to be ejected from the ejecting section 103 and push back the medal to be ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, like steps S103 to S110 in the flowchart of the payout process of FIG. 20, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are repeatedly turned on/off in the order of "payout sensor 37a" → "payout sensor 37b". do.
This makes it possible to detect an error in which the medals about to be ejected from the ejecting section 103 are pushed back.

For example, suppose that one medal is about to be discharged, and this medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, causing the movable shaft 38b to move, and the payout sensor 37a to turn on and the payout sensor 37b to turn off. (Timing of (b) in FIG. 19). At this time, it is assumed that the medal paid out in front of this medal bounces back, hits this medal, is pushed back, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, it becomes "No" at step S105 of FIG. 20, and an error occurs.
Also, for example, assume that the medal is pushed back at the timing of (c) in FIG. 19 and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, it becomes "No" in step S107 of FIG. 20, and an error occurs.

<Modified Example of Sixth Embodiment>
Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with eight holding portions 102, but the number of holding portions is not limited to eight. can be set as appropriate.
(2) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disk shape, but the hopper disk 101 may be formed in a sprocket shape, for example. That is, the holding portion 102 is not limited to a circular hole shape as long as it can hold a medal.

(3) In the sixth embodiment, the rotating direction of the hopper disc 101 during the payout process of medals is clockwise. The medals held in the tray may be sequentially ejected from the ejection section 103 .
(4) In the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36, but the hopper motor 36 may be a stepping motor, for example.

(5) The flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the flow chart of FIG. 20, but may be the flow shown in the flow chart of FIG. 21, for example. Even with such a flow of payout processing, ejection of medals can be detected. However, in such a flow of payout processing, it is not possible to detect an error in which the medals bounced off the inner wall of the medal chute push back the medals to be ejected next.
20 and 21, the same step number is given to the same process.
(6) The first to sixth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Seventh embodiment>
It relates to the arrangement of the main control board 50 attached inside the cabinet 13 and the sub-control board 80 attached to the rear surface of the front door 12 .
FIG. 22 is a side cross-sectional view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80. As shown in FIG.

The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an opening on the front side, and a front door 12 attached to open and close the opening of the cabinet 13. - 特許庁
The cabinet 13 is configured in a box shape with an open front side by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a right side plate, a left side plate, a top plate, and the like.
Furthermore, a medal payout device 15 is arranged in the lower part of the inside of the cabinet 13 (on the bottom plate 13a). This medal dispensing device 15 is for dispensing medals, and includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disc 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disc 101. I have it.

Furthermore, a plate-shaped reel base 110 supported by the back plate 13b, the right side plate, and the left side plate is provided above the medal payout device 15 inside the cabinet 13. A display device 14 is arranged.
The symbol display device 14 also has a rectangular frame-shaped reel frame 14a, and three reels 31 are arranged side by side inside the reel frame 14a.

Furthermore, a motor 32 is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, each motor 32 is fixed to a reel bracket, and each reel bracket is supported by the reel frame 14a.
Further, a transparent reel board case 121 is arranged on the reel frame 14a, and a reel control board 120 is accommodated in this reel board case 121. As shown in FIG. This reel control board 120 controls driving of the three motors 32 .

A transparent main board case 56 is arranged above the pattern display device 14 inside the cabinet 13 . More specifically, the main substrate case 56 is fixed at a position above the pattern display device 14 on the front side of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 (the inner surface side of the housing). The main control board 50 is accommodated in the main board case 56 .
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, the main control board 50 includes a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a symbol display device 14, a medal payout device 15, a reel control board 120, and a sub control board via an input port 51 or an output port 52. 80 and the like are electrically connected.

Further, the front door 12 is attached so as to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 so as to be able to open and close the opening of the cabinet 13 . More specifically, the left side of the front door 12 is attached to the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 via a hinge. By rotating the front door 12 around the hinge, the front opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.

A transparent display window is provided in the central portion of the front door 12 . This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the pattern display device 14 . The player can visually recognize the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window.
A bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, an adjustment switch 43, a medal slot 47, and the like are arranged on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window. .

Furthermore, in the lower part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, there is a medal payout opening through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 15 pass, and medals paid out from the medal payout opening are received. A medal receiving tray is arranged.
Furthermore, an effect lamp 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, and the like are arranged above the front side (player side) of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.

A transparent sub-board case 87 is arranged on the upper part of the rear surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the sub-board case 87 is fixed at a position corresponding to the back side of the front door 12 (inner side of the housing), above the pattern display device 14, and on the back side of the image display device 23. ing. The sub-control board 80 is accommodated in the sub-board case 87 .
Also, the sub-control board 80 controls the effects, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub-CPU 85, an electrolytic capacitor 86, and the like. Also, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the effect lamp 21 , the speaker 22 , the image display device 23 , the main control board 50 and the like via the input port 81 or the output port 82 . Then, based on the control command received from the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 determines at what timing and what kind of effect is to be output. It controls the output of the image display device 23 .

As described above, the main board case 56 is arranged above the pattern display device 14 inside the cabinet 13 , and the main control board 50 is accommodated in the main board case 56 .
A sub-board case 87 is arranged above the pattern display device 14 on the rear surface of the front door 12, and the sub-control board 80 is accommodated in the sub-board case 87. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 22, when the front door 12 is closed, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are arranged to face each other.
The distance between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 when the front door 12 is closed is set wider than the width of the reel control board 120 in the depth direction.

Here, an electrolytic capacitor 86 for power storage is arranged on the sub-control board 80 . Also, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is filled with an electrolytic solution. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 ruptures due to a malfunction, the filled electrolytic solution may scatter. At this time, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, when the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction, the scattered electrolyte will It may adhere to the main CPU 55 and cause the main CPU 55 to malfunction. Moreover, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 will be damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 explodes.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, electrolytic capacitors 86 are arranged on the sub-control board 80 at positions other than the position facing the main CPU 55 .
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution scatters, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, thereby preventing the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning. be able to. Also, the main CPU 55 can be prevented from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 explodes.
Also, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86 may cause the main CPU 55 to malfunction. To prevent malfunction of the main CPU 55 due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86 by arranging the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the control board 80 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. - 特許庁can be done.

23A shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing Example 1;
In FIG. 23( a ), the circle indicated by the dashed line is the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 projected onto the main control board 50 .

In example 1 shown in FIG. 23(a), there is one electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80, which is arranged above the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the vertical direction and the main CPU 55 in the horizontal direction. It is arranged on the left side of the main CPU 55 on the control board 50 .
By arranging the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 at different positions in both the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, The position of the electrolytic capacitor 86 can be set at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 .

<Modified example of the seventh embodiment>
Although the seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is not limited to one, and may be, for example, two as shown in FIG. 23(b).
FIG. 23(b) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing Example 2;

In FIG. 23(b), similarly to FIG. 23(a), the projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 onto the main control board 50 is indicated by a dashed line.
In FIG. 23B, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the upper left and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the lower right are arranged at different positions both vertically and horizontally with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 .
23(b), the two electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. As shown in FIG.

(2) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be four, for example, as shown in FIG. 24(c).
FIG. 24(c) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing Example 3;
23A and 23B, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is projected onto the main control board 50 and indicated by a dashed circle.

In FIG. 24(c), the sub-control board 80 has four electrolytic capacitors 86, three of which are located at different positions in both the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. are placed. The remaining one electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction as the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, although the horizontal direction is different.
Even with this arrangement, the four electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are located at positions other than those facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 .

(3) The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be arranged at a position separated from the main control board 50, for example.
FIG. 24(d) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing Example 4;
23(a), 23(b) and 24(c), the projected electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is indicated by a dashed circle.

In FIG. 24(d), as in FIG. 23(a), the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, but unlike FIG. 86 is arranged at a position separated from the main control board 50 .
Thus, even when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position separated from the main control board 50, it is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. There will be

Then, as shown in FIGS. 23A, 23B, 24C and 24D, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is placed on the main control board 50 at positions other than those facing the main CPU 55 . By arranging at the position of , even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution scatters, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and the main CPU 55 will eventually malfunction. You can keep it from happening.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of the second embodiment, a management information display LED 74 (also called a "role ratio monitor") is arranged on the main control board 50. FIG. This management information display LED 74 displays management information such as an advantageous section ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a character ratio.
In addition, the "advantageous section ratio" means the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game section (normal section + waiting section + advantageous section), and the "continuous accessory ratio" is the number of medals acquired. Means the ratio of the number of medals obtained when the special role (RB) is activated, and the "percentage of medals" means the ratio of the number of medals obtained when the role is activated to the total number of medals obtained.

Also, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and at a position other than the position facing the management information display LED 74. good.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution scatters, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the management information display LED 74. Information can be kept from becoming unverifiable.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures.
(5) The first to seventh embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to seventh embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, but can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Eighth embodiment>
The eighth embodiment relates to the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 in the lower part of the housing of the slot machine 10. FIG.
FIG. 25 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front portion of the housing of the slot machine 10 (part A in FIG. 22) with the front door 12 closed, and explains the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 25, the lower portion of the cabinet 13 is provided with a first closing portion 13c that protrudes toward the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed.
That is, the first closing portion 13c is a plate-like protrusion that protrudes forward from the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. When the front door 12 is closed, the direction in which the first closing portion 13c protrudes is is in the direction of the front door 12.
Further, the first closing portion 13c is formed horizontally from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. As shown in FIG.
Furthermore, the first closing portion 13c is made of sheet metal and fixed to the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 with screws.

As shown in FIG. 25, a second closing portion 12a protruding toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed is located below the first closing portion 13c in the lower portion of the front door 12. is provided.
In other words, the second closing portion 12a is a plate-like protrusion that protrudes rearward from the lower back surface of the front door 12. When the front door 12 is closed, the direction of protrusion of the second closing portion 12a is 13 direction of the cabinet.

The second closing portion 12a is arranged below the first closing portion 13c.
Furthermore, the second closing portion 12a is formed horizontally from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Further, like the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a is also formed of sheet metal, and is fixed to the lower back surface of the front door 12 with screws.

As shown in FIG. 25, a third closing portion 12b projecting toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed is located above the first closing portion 13c in the lower portion of the front door 12. is provided.
That is, like the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is a plate-like projection that projects rearward from the lower back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the third closing portion 12b can The protruding direction of the 3 closing portion 12b is the direction of the cabinet 13. As shown in FIG.

Similarly to the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is formed oblong from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Furthermore, unlike the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is arranged above the first closing portion 13c.
Furthermore, the third closing portion 12b is also formed of sheet metal, like the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, and is fixed to the lower back surface of the front door 12 with screws.

When the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
For this reason, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 in the lower part of the housing is curved like a U-shape left and right reversed, as shown in FIG. shape. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (such as fraudulent acts) in which a wire is passed through the space between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 to access the medal payout device 15 or the like.

A door sensor for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 . This door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light emitting/receiving section, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
Furthermore, on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, there is provided a detection piece that can be moved in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12. As shown in FIG. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece protrudes forward by being biased by a spring.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed rearward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in the state of detecting the detection piece, and is in the OFF state. That is, the door sensor is set to be low active.
On the other hand, when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece is urged by the spring to protrude forward and out of the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor does not detect the detection piece and is turned on.

The main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is off, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is on.
In this manner, the opening/closing of the front door 12 is detected by moving the detection piece in the front-rear direction and turning on/off the door sensor.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the detection piece moves forward from the state of being pushed in, goes out from the state of entering the door sensor, and turns the door sensor from the off state to the on state.
The position of the front door 12 when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 is referred to as the "detection start position".
Further, when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 means the moment when the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.

In the eighth embodiment, not only when the front door 12 is closed, but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position, the first closing portion is positioned between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. 13c are arranged.
That is, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b even at the moment when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state and the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state. is formed as

Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened from a closed state, the door sensor is first turned on from an off state, and then the first closing portion 13c is removed from between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. It will be.
When the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is open, and transmits a door open command to the sub control board 80. The sub control board 80 transmits the door open command. is received, the fact that the front door 12 is open is notified by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. As a result, the hall clerk can be notified that the front door 12 is open.

Therefore, the first closing portion 13c does not come off from between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b before the notification that the front door 12 is open is started, and the front door 12 is opened. Since the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 has a curved shape even at the position where the notification to the effect that the wire is started is started, the wire cannot be inserted into the housing from the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act (a fraudulent act) of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing it through.

In the sixth embodiment, by stopping the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal between the first position and the second position, a The corresponding portion can be positioned in front of the ejection portion 103, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or the like from the medal ejection port to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disk 101. As described above, by providing the configurations of both the sixth and eighth embodiments, it is possible to more firmly prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or the like to access the medal payout device 15 .

Here, the distance between the first blocking part 13c and the second blocking part 12a is defined as "h1", the distance between the first blocking part 13c and the third blocking part 12b is defined as "h2", and the second blocking part 12a and the third blocking part 12a are defined as "h2". Let "h3" be the distance from the third blocking portion 12b, and let "w" be the projection width (depth) of the second blocking portion 12a.
Let "d" be the diameter of the medal and "t" be the thickness of the medal.
A typical medal size is 24.5 to 25.5 mm in diameter and 1.5 to 2.0 mm in thickness.
In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness "t" of the medal is set to satisfy "h2>t". ing.

Here, when the hall clerk opens the front door 12 to refill the hopper 35 with medals, the medals may drop onto the bottom plate 13 a of the cabinet 13 .
In particular, since the hopper 35 is replenished with medals through the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13, the medals may drop near the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, that is, near the first closing portion 13c.

At this time, if it is set so as to satisfy "h2>t", even if the front door 12 is closed while the medals have fallen near the first closing portion 13c, the medals that have fallen near the first closing portion 13c will not be removed. , enters between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. - 特許庁In addition, the front door 12 does not become unable to be closed due to the token being caught between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter "d" is set to satisfy "w<(d/2)". It is
By setting so as to satisfy "w<(d/2)", it is possible to prevent medals from being placed on the second closing portion 12a.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed while the medals are placed on the second closing portion 12a. 12 and the cabinet 13 can be prevented from being damaged.

<Modified example of the eighth embodiment>
Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light emitting/receiving unit.
Further, even when the door sensor is configured using the proximity sensor, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b can be detected not only when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position. The first closing portion 13c is arranged between the .

(2) In the eighth embodiment, a detection piece is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12 . When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. I tried to go outside from inside the door sensor. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, a door sensor for detecting opening of the front door 12 may be provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, and a detection piece may be provided at a position on the front door 12 corresponding to the door sensor. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 goes out of the door sensor. can be

(3) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is provided on the cabinet 13 side, but it is not limited to this and may be provided on the front door 12 side, for example.
(4) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is turned off when the detection piece is detected, and turned on when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor was set to be low active. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the door sensor may be turned on when the detection piece is detected, and turned off when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor may be set to high active.
In this case, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is on, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is off. configured as follows.

(5) In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c is formed horizontally from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. As shown in FIG. In addition, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are formed oblong from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the first closing portion 13c may be composed of two members, a first member extending from the right end to the center of the bottom plate 13a and a second member extending from the center to the left end of the bottom plate 13a. You may comprise from three members which carried out.
Similarly to the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be composed of two members or may be composed of three members.
Thus, the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a, and the third closing portion 12b are not limited to being composed of one member, and may be composed of a plurality of members.

Further, the first closing portion 13c does not extend from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and for example, the first closing portion 13c is provided near the right end or near the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. You may have a part which does not have.
Similarly, the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 may have a portion where the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are not provided.
In this way, even if there is a portion where the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a, and the third closing portion 12b are not provided, the inside of the housing from the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 is prevented from entering. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by inserting a wire or the like.
Also, the first closing portion 13c may be part of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, or may be a separate member from the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. As shown in FIG.
Similarly, the second closing portion 12 a and the third closing portion 12 b may be part of the front door 12 or may be separate members from the front door 12 .

(6) In the eighth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
At this time, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, or the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a may be in contact with each other.
Similarly, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b, or the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b may be in contact with each other.
Alternatively, the entire first closing portion 13c may be arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b, or a part of the first closing portion 13c may be arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. good too.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c may contact a position on the rear surface of the front door 12 between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. .
Further, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c may be provided on the front door 12 side, and the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be provided on the cabinet 13 side.
That is, a first closing portion 13c projecting from the lower back surface of the front door 12 toward the cabinet 13 is provided. A protruding second closing portion 12a may be provided, and a third closing portion 12b may be provided that protrudes toward the front door 12 from a position above the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.

(7) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness "t" of the medal is set to satisfy "h2>t". .
However, the setting is not limited to this, and may be set so as to satisfy "h2<t", for example.
If set so as to satisfy "h2>t", when the front door 12 is closed with medals falling near the first closing portion 13c, the medals falling near the first closing portion 13c will move to the third closing portion. 12b is pushed into the cabinet 13 against its rear end. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. - 特許庁In addition, the front door 12 does not become unable to be closed due to the token being caught between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b.

(8) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter "d" is set so as to satisfy "w<(d/2)". bottom.
However, the setting is not limited to this, and may be set so as to satisfy "(d/2)<w<d", for example.
By satisfying "(d/2)<w", a medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "w<d", even if an attempt is made to close the front door 12 with medals placed on the second closing portion 12a, the medals will be placed on the second closing portion 12a before the front door 12 is closed. Since the placed medal hits the front end of the cabinet 13, the front door 12 does not close.
As a result, it is possible for the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing portion 12a. It can be removed to close the front door 12 .

(9) The relationship between the protrusion width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter "d" of the medal, and the distance "h1" between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal The relationship with the thickness “t” may be set so as to satisfy “(d/2)<w” and “h1<t”.
As described above, by satisfying "(d/2)<w", medals can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "h1<t", even if an attempt is made to close the front door 12 with medals placed on the second closing portion 12a, the medals will be placed on the second closing portion 12a before the front door 12 is closed. Since the placed medal hits the front end of the first closing portion 13c, the front door 12 does not close.
As a result, it is possible for the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing portion 12a. It can be removed to close the front door 12 .

(10) The relationship between the protrusion width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter "d" of the medal, and the distance "h1" between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal The relationship with the thickness "t" may be set so as to satisfy "d<w" and "h1>t".
By satisfying "d<w", the entire medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. That is, the medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a without part of the medal protruding from the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "h1>t", a medal can be inserted between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with medals placed on the second closing portion 12a, the front door 12 closes with the medals placed between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a. It will be. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. - 特許庁In addition, the front door 12 does not close due to the tokens placed on the second closing portion 12a hitting the first closing portion 13c or the front end portion of the cabinet 13.
(11) The first to eighth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being carried out independently, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Ninth Embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side and the control of the effect output on the sub control board 80 side.
FIG. 26(a) is a diagram showing the types of special bonuses (accessories) and end conditions, and FIG. 26(b) is a diagram showing the types of game states and the specified number of each game state. (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), in the ninth embodiment, as special bonuses (accessories), BB (first-class bonus continuous operation device; first-class big bonus), RB (first-class special bonus ; regular bonus), and MB (second type role continuous operation device; second type big bonus).
Here, BB is a device capable of continuously operating RB. That is, the RB game is continuously executed during the BB game. Also, during the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. Furthermore, when the number of medals to be paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends. Furthermore, when the number of paid out medals during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends.

Also, MB is a device that can continuously operate CB (second class special role). That is, the CB game is continuously executed during the MB game. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the result of the lottery by the lottery lottery means 61, all minor winnings are repeatedly won, and the stop switch 42 is operated for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the instant when the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (maximum moving frame number is 1 frame). Furthermore, the CB game ends after one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(b), in the ninth embodiment, there are seven game states: non-RT, RT, RB inside, BB inside, RB game, BB game, and MB game. there is The main control board 50 controls the transition of these game states.
Here, the "specified number" means the number of inserted medals at which the start switch 41 can be operated (game can be started). In the ninth embodiment, the specified number in MB is set to "1", and the specified number in game states other than MB is set to "3".

In addition, "RT" means that the type (number) of condition devices (accessories, replays, small winnings) to be selected by lottery and the winning probability thereof are unique.
Furthermore, "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but means that the type of conditional device to be the lottery target and its winning probability are different from RT.
When the RT start condition is satisfied in any game state, the next game shifts to RT, and when the RT end condition is satisfied in RT, the next game shifts to non-RT.

Also, when a special role is won, winning information of the special role is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the won special role stops on the effective line.
A game in which the special role is not won is called "non-internal", and the special role is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to the won special role is not stopped on the effective line, that is, the special role is won. A game in which information is carried over is called "internal".

Also, the probability that a desired pattern to be stopped and displayed on the activated line can be stopped on the activated line during the period from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops (the maximum number of moving frames) is called "pull-in." rate (PB)”.
If the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the effective line (effective line). line) is called "PB≠1".
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (drawn) on the effective line. It is called "PB=1".

Also, when BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the effective line (BB wins), the BB game is started from the next game although no medals are paid out in the current game.
During the BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination is increased by continuously executing the RB game. Then, when the number of paid out medals during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game is terminated, and the next game returns to the game state before shifting to the BB game.
Furthermore, if BB is won but the pattern combination corresponding to BB does not stop on the effective line, the winning information of BB is carried over to the next game until the pattern combination corresponding to BB stops on the effective line. A game state in which winning information of BB is carried over is called "inside BB".
It should be noted that the transition timing into the inside of the BB can be appropriately set. For example, in the game in which the BB is won, after all the reels 31 are stopped, it may be moved to the inside of the BB. You can move inside.

Also, when RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on the effective line (RB wins), the RB game is started from the next game although no medals are paid out in the game this time. During the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. Then, when the number of paid out medals during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game is terminated, and the next game returns to the game state before shifting to the RB game.
Furthermore, if RB is won but the pattern combination corresponding to RB does not stop on the effective line, the winning information of RB is carried over to the next game until the pattern combination corresponding to RB stops on the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of RB is carried over is called "inside RB".
It should be noted that the transition timing into the inside of the RB can be appropriately set in the same manner as the timing of transition into the inside of the BB. For example, in the game in which the RB is won, after all the reels 31 are stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to the inside of the RB. You can move inside.

Also, when the MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the effective line (MB wins), no medals are paid out in the game this time, but the MB game is started from the next game. During the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. When the number of medals to be paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game is terminated, and the next game returns to the game state before shifting to the MB game.

Furthermore, when the MB is won but the pattern combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on the effective line, the MB winning information is carried over to the next game until the pattern combination corresponding to the MB stops on the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of the MB is carried over is called "inside the MB".
In the ninth embodiment, since the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is set to "PB=1", when the MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is always stopped on the active line in the current game. , and MB.

Further, the condition device (role) of the ninth embodiment is roughly classified into a special prize (role product), a replay (replay prize), and a small prize.
Furthermore, there are three types of special roles, BB, RB, and MB, two types of replays, Replay 1 and Replay 2, and small roles of common bell, left correct bell, and middle correct bell. , right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2.
The left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell are collectively referred to as "push order bell".
Further, the "condition device" is operated corresponding to the winning number determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61. - 特許庁When one winning number is determined, one or a plurality of conditional devices corresponding to the winning number are activated, and winning flags corresponding to the activated conditional devices are turned on.

As shown in FIG. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, one winning number from "0" to "16" is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, and corresponds to the determined winning number. Any conditional device from non-won to MB will be activated.
Both of the two types of replays are individually elected, and do not overlap with other conditional devices (roles).
In addition, there are four types of bells: a common bell, a left correct bell, a middle correct bell, and a right correct bell.

Furthermore, Watermelon has a case where it is elected alone and a case where it is concurrently elected with BB.
Furthermore, Cherry 1 has a case of winning alone and a case of double winning with BB, and Cherry 2 has a case of winning alone, a case of double winning with RB, and a case of double winning with BB. .
In addition, BB has a case where it wins alone and a case where it wins more than once with watermelon, cherry 1, or cherry 2, but RB never wins alone, it only wins more than once with cherry 2, and MB can only be elected alone, and will not be elected in duplicate with other roles.

In addition, "dividend" means the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination corresponding to each conditional device is stopped (the winning combination is won).
In the ninth embodiment, regarding the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell, the payout differs between the prescribed number of 3 (game state other than during MB) and the prescribed number of 1 (in MB). The payout is the same for the specified number of 3 and the specified number of 1.

In addition, the left correct bell is a push order bell in which the left first stop is the correct push order and the rest of the left stop is the incorrect push order. , one medal is paid out in the order of pressing the wrong answer, and with the prescribed number of 1, 14 medals are paid out in the order of pressing the correct answer, and 15 medals are paid out in the order of pressing the wrong answer.
Similarly, for the middle correct bell, the middle first stop is the correct pushing order, and for the other than the middle first stop, the incorrect pushing order. For the right correct bell, the right first stop is the correct pushing order. , Right first stop is the pressing order bell that is the incorrect pressing order.
Note that the common bell is a bell that pays out eight medals regardless of the order in which it is pressed.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61). The combination lottery means 61 draws lots for winning numbers. Then, when the winning number is determined by lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
Also, the winning number lottery by the role lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) may be referred to as "internal lottery".
As shown in FIG. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, one of winning numbers "0" to "15" is determined by lottery by the combination lottery means 61. FIG. Also, the winning numbers "0" to "15" correspond to the condition devices "non-winning" to "MB", respectively. Then, when the winning number is determined, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.

For example, if the winning number "1" is determined, the "replay 1" condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" is activated. Also, when the winning number "8" is determined, the "watermelon + BB" condition device corresponding to the winning number "8" is activated.
As described in the first embodiment, the combination lottery means 61 includes random number generation means, random number extraction means for extracting the random number generated by the random number generation means, and random number extraction means based on the random number extracted by the random number extraction means. A winning number determining means for determining a winning number is provided, and when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
Then, for example, the random number extracted by the random number extraction means may be the same between the non-internal and the internal, and the operating condition device may be the same. The conditional equipment used may be different.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 has the winning flag control means 62 . The winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the winning number lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61 .
In the ninth embodiment, winning flags are provided for each combination for all combinations. Then, when the winning number is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number (sets the winning flag). .

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag of "replay 1" included in the condition device of "replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" It is turned on, and other winning flags are turned off.
Similarly, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device of "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10" , are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.

In addition, since winning information for roles other than special roles (BB, RB, MB) is not carried over, even if a winning flag for a role that does not carry over winning information is won in the game this time and the winning flag for that role is turned on, that role will not be carried over. The winning flag is turned off at the end of the game this time regardless of whether or not the player has won a prize.
On the other hand, since the winning information of the special role (BB, RB, MB) is carried over, when the special role is won in the game this time and the winning flag of the special role is once turned on, the special role will be played. The winning flag is kept on until winning, and when the special combination wins, the winning flag is turned off.

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device of "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10" However, if "BB" did not win in the game this time, regardless of whether "Cherry 1" won in the game this time, "Cherry The win flag of "1" is turned off, and the win flag of "BB" is kept on. In this case, from the next game, it shifts to inside the BB.

In addition, for example, when the winning number "9" is determined by the lottery by the winning lottery means 61 in the BB, in addition to the winning flag of "BB" carried over, "Cherry" corresponding to the winning number "9" is added. The winning flag of "cherry 1" included in the condition device of "1" is turned on. That is, the two winning flags "Cherry 1" and "BB" are turned on.
For this reason, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 (double winning "Cherry 1 + BB"), and when the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is made in the BB, the winning number "9" ” (single winning for “Cherry 1”), the ON/OFF state of the winning flag is the same.

Also, during the MB game, the winning flag control means 62 sets the winning flags of all the small winning combinations (common bell, left correct bell, medium correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2). turn on. Therefore, although it is not won by lottery by the role lottery means 61, it is in the same state as winning all the minor roles.
For example, during the MB game, when the winning number "0" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, none of the roles are included in the "non-winning" corresponding to the winning number "0", but all The winning flags of the small wins (the seven small wins mentioned above) are turned on.
Also, for example, during the MB game, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, "Replay 1" included in the condition device of "Replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" In addition to the win flags, the win flags for all minor wins (the above seven minor wins) are turned on.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 has reel control means 65, and this reel control means 65 has a plurality of stop position determination tables corresponding to ON/OFF of the winning flag. Prepare. Each stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated.
A winning number is determined by a lottery by the combination lottery means 61, and when the winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number, the reel control means. 65 selects a stop position determination table corresponding to ON/OFF of the winning flag.

When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the selected stop position determination table and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.
The stop position determination table selected when the winning flag for Replay 1 is ON and the winning flags other than Replay 1 are OFF is such that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 1 is stopped on the effective line, and The stop position of each reel 31 is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than Replay 1 does not stop on the activated line.

Furthermore, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of the left correct bell is ON and the winning flags other than the left correct bell are OFF is that when the stop switch 42 is operated for left first stop, , When the symbol combination for paying out 8 medals stops on the effective line and the stop switch 42 is operated other than the left first stop, the symbol combination for paying out 1 medal stops on the effective line. , the stop position of each reel 31 is determined.

In addition, the column of "internal lottery set number" in FIG. 26(c) shows the set number of each winning number in each game state. Dividing the internal lottery number by "65536" gives the winning probability.
For example, since the winning number "4" in non-RT is "3000", the winning number "4" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT, and the "left" corresponding to the winning number "4" The probability that the conditional device of "correct answer bell" is activated is "3000/65536".

Also, in the column of "internal lottery setting" in FIG. 26(c), the "*" mark indicates that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Here, the “advantageous section” means a game section having performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be operated).
Also, the "instruction function" means a function of displaying (informing) the player of an "advantageous operation mode".
Furthermore, "activation of the instruction function" includes displaying the correct order of pressing when the winning order of the pressing bell is won.

Furthermore, "advantageous section lottery" means a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section.
Then, when winning in the advantageous section lottery and moving to the advantageous section, it becomes possible to activate the instruction function, and it is possible to notify the correct pushing order when the pushing order bell wins.
For example, the set number "8000" of the winning number "3"("commonbell") in non-RT is marked with "*". If the winning number "3"("commonbell") is determined by the lottery, it means that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT, when the winning number "0" (non-winning) is determined, and the winning numbers "4" to "6"("left correct bell", " When it is determined to be "middle correct bell" or "right correct bell"), the advantageous section lottery is not executed, but in other cases, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Furthermore, within RT, RB, and within BB, when the winning numbers "4" to "6"("left correct bell", "middle correct bell", or "right correct bell") are determined Except, when non-RT and set numbers are determined to be the same winning number, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Also, inside the BB, the winning information of the BB is carried over, so when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined inside the BB, and in non-RT (non-internal) The ON/OFF state of the winning flag is the same as when the winning number is determined to be "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1+BB").
In addition, the number of winning numbers "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1 + BB") in non-RT (non-internal) and the number of winning numbers "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") in BB are set to the same "200".
Therefore, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined in the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number "9"("Cherry1" wins alone) is determined in the RB, the "Cherry 1" winning flag and the carried-over "RB" winning flag are turned on. .
Furthermore, “BB” and “RB” are both special roles (accessories), and the winning number “10” (double winning of “Cherry 1 + BB”) in non-RT (non-inside) The registered number and the registered number of the winning number "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") in the RB are set to the same "200".
Therefore, it is possible to execute the advantageous section lottery even when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined in the RB.

Also, when the winning number "12" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + RB") or winning number "13" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + BB") is determined in non-RT, and during RB or BB When the number "11" (single winning of "Cherry 2") is determined, the winning flag of "Cherry 2" and the winning flag of the special role (accessory) are turned on.
In addition, the winning number "12" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + RB") and winning number "13" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + BB") in non-RT are added up to "300", inside RB and BB Matches the number "300" of the winning number "11" (single win of "Cherry 2") in the interior.
Therefore, even when the winning number "11" (single winning of "Cherry 2") is determined in the RB and the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, the column of "advantageous section lottery set number" in FIG. 26(c) shows the set number of each winning number. The odds of winning can be obtained by dividing the winning lottery number by "16384".
For example, in non-RT, inside RB or inside BB, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is It becomes "20/16384".
Also, for example, in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "8" (double winning of "watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is "10000/16384 ”.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB=1".
In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(c), MB lottery is performed in non-RT and RT. The game is shifted to the MB game from the next game without being inside the game.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), during the MB game, a lottery for replay 1 or replay 2 is carried out, and regardless of the lottery result by the lottery means 61, all the small wins are repeatedly won. Become.

For this reason, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "Replay 1" and all small combinations (common bell, left correct bell, middle Winning flags of the correct answer bell, right answer bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2) are turned on.
Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "replay 2" and the winning flags of all minor combinations are turned on.

Then, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "replay 1") is determined during the MB game, that is, when the winning flag of "replay 1" and the winning flags of all minor combinations are turned on. , the same stop position determination table as when only the win flag for the left correct bell is ON is selected. However, during the MB game, the specified number is 1 (1 card is inserted), and the payout is different from non-RT, etc., and 14 or 15 cards are paid out.
As a result, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "replay 1") is determined during the MB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the left first stop (when the pressing order is correct), 14 When the symbol combination that pays out 15 medals stops on the effective line and the stop switch 42 is operated other than the left first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the symbol combination that pays out 15 medals is stopped. Stop on a valid line.

Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the right correct bell is ON is selected. At the first stop (when the pressing order is correct), 14 cards are paid out, and at times other than the right first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), 15 cards are paid out.
In the first game during the MB game, the pressing order for paying out 14 cards is notified, and in the second game during the MB game, the pressing order for paying out 15 cards is notified.
As described above, the termination condition of the MB game is set to the fact that the number of paid out medals exceeds 14, so by performing such notification, 29 medals are paid out during the MB game. can be made In addition, since the specified number is set to "1" during the MB game, the player can acquire 27 medals obtained by subtracting the inserted number "2" from the payout number "29".

Also, in order to inform the player of the pushing order that is advantageous to the player during the MB game, it is necessary to shift to the advantageous section.
For this reason, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "15" (single winning of "MB") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, winning the advantageous section lottery The probability is set to "16384/16384", that is, "100%".

Also, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 has the effect group number selection means 64 . This effect group number selection means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
As shown in FIG. 26(c), an effect group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. Specifically, the effect group numbers "0" to "3" are determined corresponding to the winning numbers "0" to "3", and the effect group number "4" corresponding to the winning numbers "4" to "6". ” are determined, and effect group numbers “5” to “13” are determined corresponding to winning numbers “7” to “15”.
Then, when the winning number is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the determined winning number.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 has the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 . This pressing order instruction number selecting means 63 selects the winning number corresponding to the pressing order bell (left correct bell, middle correct bell, right correct bell) by lottery by the lottery lottery means 61. This is for selecting a pressing order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct pressing order) corresponding to the .

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 has the control command transmission means 71 . The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the effects output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80 .
In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 includes, as control commands, information when the bed switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, a pressing order instruction number (during AT and correct pressing). (only when the winning number corresponding to the conditional device with order is determined), the effect group number, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on the winning combination, etc. In addition, the game state (non-RT, RT , inside RB, inside BB, inside RB, inside BB, inside MB), effect group number, etc. are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .

As a result, the sub-control board 80 side determines the game state on the main control board 50 side and the condition devices (excluding the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell) operated by the winning lottery means 61. be able to.
On the side of the sub-control board 80, it can be determined by the effect group number that one of the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, or the right correct bell has been won. It is not possible to judge which one of the winners (correct answer order).
Also, during AT, the correct pressing order can be notified by the pressing order instruction number.

Further, the sub-control board 80 controls selection, output, etc. of effects during the game and during the game standby.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is unidirectionally transmitted to the sub-control board 80 with information ( control command).
Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
Also, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21 , the speaker 22 , the image display device 23 and the like via the input port 81 or the output port 82 .

Furthermore, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 is provided with effect output control means 91 and the like, and the ROM 84 of the sub control board 80 is provided with a effect determination table and the like.
Furthermore, the effect determination table defines the effect to be output, and is provided in a plurality. control to output
That is, the effect output control means 91 determines at what timing and what effect to output based on the control command received from the main control board 50 and one of the effect determination tables. Accordingly, the outputs of the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 are controlled.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an effect determination table commonly used for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal), and FIG. 28 is a effect determination table commonly used for inside RB and inside BB. It is a figure which shows.
As shown in FIG. 27, in the ninth embodiment, 18 types from "no effect" to "continuous effect" are provided as effect patterns. In addition, each production pattern from "character production (lively)" to "continuous production" defines production with different contents.
For example, the "fixed effect" is a effect that allows the player to know that the special combination has been won, and the "notification effect after the first stop" is the effect after the first stop (after the first stop switch 42 is operated). ``Left first stop effect'' is a effect that instructs that the left stop switch 42 should be operated first; This is a production that is output by

In addition, the column of "effect pattern allocation number" in FIG. 27 shows the allocation number of each effect pattern when each effect group number is received. The selection probability of each effect pattern is obtained by dividing the effect pattern allocation number by "256". In addition, in FIG. 27, the name of the corresponding condition device is described under each production group number.
For example, in non-RT, the winning number "1" (single winning of "replay 1") is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, and the selection probability of "no effect" when the effect group number "1" is transmitted is The probability of selection of "character production (lively)" is "20/256", the selection probability of "conversation production (lively)" is also "20/256", and the probability of selection of "cut-in production" is "128/256". (strong effect)” is “0/256”.

As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 sends information indicating the gaming state (non-RT, RT, inside RB, inside BB, during RB, during BB, during MB) to the sub-control board 80, and Send the performance group number.
Then, the effect output control means 91 of the sub-control board 80 selects the effect determination table corresponding to the game state based on the information indicating the game state received from the main control board 50, and selects the effect determination table and the main control board. Based on the performance group number received from the control board 50, the performance of any performance pattern is determined, and the outputs of the performance lamp 21, the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 are controlled according to the determination.

Here, in non-RT (non-inside), when the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, and the effect group number "12" is transmitted, effect output The control means 91 selects the effect determination table shown in FIG. 27 that is commonly used for non-RT and RT (non-AT), and places the column of effect group number "12" ("BB" wins alone) in this effect determination table. Using the numbers, it is determined which of the production patterns to output the production. As shown in FIG. 27, when "BB" is won alone in non-RT, for example, "continuous effect" is selected with a probability of "40/256".

On the other hand, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number "0"("non-winning") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the effect group number "0" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 Select the effect determination table used in common inside the RB and inside the BB shown in FIG. Determines whether to output pattern effects. As shown in FIG. 28, when "non-win" within the BB, for example, "determined effect" is selected with a probability of "80/256".
In this way, the performance output control means 91 is for the game in which ``BB'' is won alone by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT (non-inside), and the game in which the role lottery means 61 wins ``non-win'' in BB. A performance to be output is determined by using a different performance determination table for a game. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Also, in the non-RT mode, when the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side sets the winning number "14". , the win flag of 'BB' included in the condition device of 'BB' corresponding to ' is turned on, and the other win flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the stop position determination table corresponding to when the "BB" win flag is on and the other win flags are off. This stop position determination table will be referred to as a "BB single stop position determination table".

The "BB single stop position determination table" is used to stop each reel 31 so that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped on the activated line and the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than BB is not stopped on the activated line. position is determined.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 controls the stop switch 42 based on the "BB single stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

In addition, when the winning number is "0"("non-winning") in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61 inside the BB, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side displays the carried over "BB". 's win flag remains on, and the other win flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the stop position determination table corresponding to when the "BB" win flag is on and the other win flags are off. That is, the same "BB single stop position determination table" as when "BB" is single-won by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT is selected.
Therefore, when "not won" by the combination lottery means 61 inside the BB, the stop control of the reels 31 is performed in the same way as when "BB" is won alone by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT. Further, "stop control of the same reel 31 is performed" means that when each stop switch 42 is operated in the same manner (push order and operation timing), each reel 31 stops at the same position, and the same reel 31 stops at the same position. Means that the stop roll is displayed.

In this way, when "BB" is won alone by the winning lottery means 61 in non-RT and when "non-winning" is won by the winning lottery means 61 inside the BB, on the side of the main control board 50, the same The stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31, but on the sub-control board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
Thus, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, and the effects can be diversified.
Further, even if the stop control of the same reel 31 is performed on the main control board 50 side and the same stop number is displayed, a different effect is output on the sub control board 80 side, so that a special combination is won. It is possible to make it possible for the player to guess that it is inside (inside).

Furthermore, by selecting different effect determination tables on the side of the sub-control board 80 when non-RT "BB" is won alone and when "non-win" inside BB, "BB" alone in non-RT can be selected. At the time of winning, a performance determination table with a low selection probability of the fixed performance (a performance that the player can understand that the BB has been won) is selected, and at the time of ``not winning'' in the BB, a performance with a high selection probability of the fixed performance. A decision table can be selected.
As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that "BB" has been won in the game in which "BB" has been won. By making it easy for the player to understand, it is possible to make the player aim for the winning of 'BB', prevent the inside of the BB from continuing indefinitely, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Also, in non-RT, when the lottery by the role lottery means 61 determines the winning number "8" (double winning of "watermelon + BB"), and the effect group number "6" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 The effect determination table shown in FIG. 27 that is commonly used for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal) is selected, and the effect group number "6" ("Watermelon + BB" duplicate winning in this effect determination table is selected. ) is used to determine which effect pattern effect is to be output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "watermelon + BB" double winning in non-RT, for example, with a probability of "50/256", "character effect (lively)", "conversation effect (lively)", or "cut-in effect (lively)" "strong effect)" is selected, and "continuous effect" is selected with a probability of "30/256".

On the other hand, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "watermelon") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the effect group number "5" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 selects the effect determination table shown in FIG. 28 that is commonly used inside the RB and inside the BB, and uses the number set in the column of the effect group number "5" (single winning of "watermelon") in this effect determination table. , determines which of the production patterns to output the production. As shown in FIG. 28, when "watermelon" in the BB is won alone, for example, "character effect (lively)" or "conversation effect (lively)" is selected with a probability of "73/256", and "20 /256” to select a continuous effect.
In this way, the effect output control means 91 can be used for a game in which "watermelon + BB" is repeatedly won by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT (non-inside), and a game in which "watermelon" is won alone by the role lottery means 61 in BB. A performance to be output is determined by using a different performance determination table depending on the game played. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In addition, during the non-internal mode, by showing the player a continuous effect over a plurality of games, in order to sustain the player's expectation for winning "BB" for a long time, selection of continuous effect at the time of duplicate winning of "Watermelon + BB" Set a high probability.
On the other hand, in the BB, if the player is shown a continuous effect over a plurality of games, the winning of the "BB" will be delayed and the medals of the player will be reduced. The selection probability of the continuous performance at the time of ``non-winning'' is set to be high in order to make the player aim for the ``BB'' prize at an early stage.
It should be noted that the winning probability of each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning may be set in the BB so that the player's medals do not decrease, and then the selection probability of the continuous effect may be set high.

Also, in non-RT (non-inside), when the winning number "8" (double winning of "watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side , two winning flags of "watermelon" and "BB" included in the condition device of "watermelon + BB" corresponding to the winning number "8" are turned on, and other winning flags are turned off. Also, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags of "Watermelon" and "BB" are ON and the other winning flags are OFF. This stop position determination table is called a "watermelon + BB duplication stop position determination table".

The "watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" is designed so that the symbol combination corresponding to watermelon or BB can be stopped on the active line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than watermelon and BB is not stopped on the active line. It defines the stop position of the reel 31 .
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 determines the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated based on the "watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" and the stop switch 42. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

Further, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "Watermelon") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 keeps " While maintaining the win flag of "BB" on, in addition, the win flag of "Watermelon" included in the condition device of "Watermelon" corresponding to the win number "7" is turned on, and "Watermelon" and "BB" are turned on. ” is turned off. As a result, the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" are turned on. Also, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags of "Watermelon" and "BB" are ON and the other winning flags are OFF. That is, the same "watermelon + BB stop position determination table" as when "watermelon + BB" is won by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT is selected.

Therefore, when "watermelon" is won alone by the role lottery means 61 in the BB, the stop control of the reels 31 is performed in the same way as when "watermelon + BB" is won by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT. .
In this way, when "watermelon + BB" is won by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and when "watermelon" is won alone by the combination lottery means 61 in the BB, on the main control board 50 side, The same stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31, but on the sub-control board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Also, when "Cherry 1 + BB" is won in non-RT, and when "Cherry 1" is won alone in BB, when "Watermelon + BB" is won in non-RT and in BB Similar to the case where "Watermelon" is won alone, on the main control board 50 side, the same stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31, but on the sub control board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used. Use to determine the effect to output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Furthermore, when "Cherry 2 + BB" or "Cherry 2 + RB" are won in a non-RT, and when "Cherry 2" is won alone in BB or RB, "Watermelon + BB" in non-RT As in the case of double winning and the single winning of "watermelon" in the BB, the main control board 50 side determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table. On the board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
Thus, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, so that the effects can be diversified.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, when "watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "watermelon" is won alone in BB, the allocation numbers of each production pattern are the same. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same.
However, when "watermelon" is won alone in non-RT, the "watermelon" winning flag is on, and the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the other winning flags are off, When "watermelon" is won alone during BB, the two winning flags of "watermelon" and "BB" are on, and the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the other winning flags are off. do. Therefore, the stop control of the reels 31 is different between when "watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "watermelon" is won alone in the BB.
In this way, the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same on the side of the sub-control board 80 when "watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "watermelon" is won alone in the BB. , the stop control of the reel 31 is different on the main control board 50 side.

As described above, in a plurality of game states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the combination lottery means 61 are the same, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determination means of the combination lottery means 61 are the same. When the same condition device is activated, the stop control of the reels 31 for each game state (selected stop position determination table) is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table ) are different.

Further, in a plurality of game states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determination means of the combination lottery means 61 are the same. When the device is activated, the reel 31 stop control (selected stop position determination table) is the same for each game state, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table) may differ. .

Furthermore, in a plurality of game states, the random number extracted by the random number extraction means of the combination lottery means 61 is different, and the winning number determined by the winning number determination means of the combination lottery means 61 is different. is activated, the reel 31 stop control (selected stop position determination table) is the same for each game state, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table) may differ.

<Modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) Types of wins, types of conditional devices, types of game states, specified numbers in each game state, dividends at the time of winning each win, allocation of internal lottery numbers, and advantageous zone lottery positions shown in the ninth embodiment The allocation of numbers, the types of effect patterns, the allocation of allocation numbers for each effect pattern, and the like are merely examples, and can be appropriately set according to game contents.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, only the number tables for the internal lottery and the advantageous section lottery in setting 1 are shown. A number table for the lottery and the advantageous section lottery can be provided.
(3) In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the game state and the effect group number to the sub-control board 80 . Thereby, the sub-control board 80 side judges the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side, and selects an effect pattern with a probability corresponding to the game state and the condition device. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the control command transmitting means 71 may transmit a winning number determined by an internal lottery to the sub-control board 80, and transmit information indicating a condition device corresponding to the winning number determined by an internal lottery. good too. Then, on the sub-control board 80 side, the condition device on the main control board 50 side may be judged based on the information indicating the winning number and the condition device received.

Also, for example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the condition device determined by the internal lottery and information on the winning combination to the sub-control board 80 . Then, the sub-control board 80 side may determine the gaming state on the main control board 50 side based on the information indicating the condition device and the information on the winning combination.
Furthermore, for example, the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating that "BB" has been won, but if it does not receive information indicating that "BB" has won, the game state on the main control board 50 side will be changed. It can be determined that it is inside the BB.
Then, based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined by the sub control board 80 side, and the information indicating the effect group number, winning number, and condition device received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 side A production pattern may be selected.

(4) For example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information indicating ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each combination and information on the winning combination. and,
On the sub-control board 80 side, the game state and condition device on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the information indicating ON/OFF of the winning flag and the information on the winning combination.
For example, if the information indicating that the win flag of 'BB' is on is received but the information indicating that 'BB' has won is not received, the gaming state on the side of the main control board 50 is in the middle of BB. can be determined.

Further, since the "BB" lottery is not performed inside the BB, when the information indicating that only the winning flag of "BB" is ON is received inside the BB, the internal lottery on the main control board 50 side is performed. , it can be determined that the winning number "0"("notwinning") has been determined.
Then, based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined by the sub control board 80 side and the condition device on the main control board 50 side similarly determined by the sub control board 80 side, the effect pattern on the sub control board 80 side may be selected.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, "single winning" means winning only for a role other than a special role, and not winning a special role at the same time. , It is used in the sense that a special role and a role other than the special role are elected at the same time.
For example, the winning of "watermelon + control role 1" in the BB is a double winning in the sense that multiple types of roles are being won at the same time, but only the winning role other than the special role is won. Since they are not elected at the same time, in the sense of the ninth embodiment, they are elected singly.

In addition, when "Watermelon + Control 1 + BB" in non-internal wins (double win) and when "Watermelon + Control 1 in BB" wins (single win), on the main control board 50 side, Since the ON/OFF state of the winning flag is the same, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table. A performance to be output is determined using a different performance determination table.
The "control combination" is a combination for changing the stop position determination table to be selected by changing the on/off state of the win flag, thereby making the stop control of the reel 31 different. It's not a role for.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, when the winning number "11"("Cherry2" is won alone) is determined in the RB and BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed. The advantageous section lottery may not be executed when a winning combination that is duplicated with the special winning combination is won.
(7) The first to ninth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Tenth Embodiment>
The tenth embodiment relates to display control of the management information display LED 74. FIG.
The main CPU 55 is in a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress) and a setting confirmation state for 5 seconds from a predetermined timing (for example, when the power is turned on, when the first interrupt process is started, when the program is started, etc.). In (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation) and in the RWM abnormal error state, control is performed so that all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
As described in the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 is composed of 4-digit LEDs, so when all the LEDs are turned on, "8888" is displayed. As a result, it is possible to check whether there is any problem with the LEDs of the management information display LEDs 74 .

If the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on, the setting change state is entered in which the setting value can be changed. Furthermore, when shifting to the setting change state, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
The 5 seconds from the predetermined timing based on power-on is set to be longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state if the setting key switch is turned on at power-on. there is

Here, for example, assume that the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to a time shorter than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state. In this case, first, all LEDs of the management information display LEDs 74 are turned on, after which the management information is once displayed on the management information display LEDs 74, and then all the LEDs of the management information display LEDs 74 are turned on again. For this reason, there is a possibility that the administrator (hall clerk) may suspect that there is some kind of problem with the gaming machine.

Therefore, the lighting period of all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to 5 seconds.
Note that the lighting period of all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is not limited to 5 seconds, and may be any time longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state. can be set to

The test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 will be further described below.
In the tenth embodiment, the four-digit LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are referred to as "digit 6", "digit 7", "digit 8", and "digit 9" from the left.
Also, of the four-digit LEDs of the management information display LED 74, the left two LEDs (digits 6 and 7) are referred to as "identification segments", and the right two LEDs (digits 8 and 9) are referred to as "ratio called "Seg".

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Identification Seg High Digit Digit 7: Identification Seg Low Digit Digit 8: Ratio Seg High Digit Digit 9: Ratio Seg Low Digit.
Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, each LED (digit) of the management information display LED 74 is an 8-segment LED consisting of segments A to G and segment DP.

The display of the test pattern on the management information display LED 74 is for checking whether all the segments (segments A to G and DP) are correctly lit and extinguished. Therefore, during the period (time) during which the test pattern is displayed, all segments are set to have a lighting state and a lighting-out state.
When the test pattern is displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is displayed at one of the following timings.
(1) Within 5 seconds from the specified timing based on power-on (2) Within 5 seconds from setting change start processing (3) Setting change (mode) in progress (4) Setting confirmation (mode) in progress (5) RWM abnormal error in progress

As a test pattern, first, a predetermined display is switched every second and displayed for 5 seconds. The time for which one display is maintained is not limited to 1 second, and the display time of the test pattern is not limited to 5 seconds (other than 5 seconds may be acceptable).
Then, the test pattern is set so that all the segments of all the LEDs have a lit state and an extinguished state during the test pattern display time of 5 seconds.
Secondly, the test pattern is to blink all segments of all LEDs. Even with this setting, all segments of all LEDs can be turned on and off with one flashing (lighting and extinguishing).

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example 1 of test pattern display of the management information display LED 74. As shown in FIG.
In the test pattern display of FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, which will be described later, lit segments are indicated by solid lines, and unlit segments are indicated by dotted lines. In addition, the segment DP indicates the lighting state with a black circle, and indicates the lighting state with a white circle.
Further, in the following description, "." indicates that the segment DP is in the lit state, and "." indicates that the segment DP is in the extinguished state.

In example 1 shown in FIG. 29, two types of display of each LED of the test pattern are provided.
One of them is a pattern that displays "0.". More specifically, it is a pattern in which segments A to F and DP are lit and segment G is unlit.
The other is a pattern that displays "-.". More specifically, it is a pattern in which segment G is lit and segments A to F and DP are unlit.
Therefore, '0.' and '-.' have a reverse relationship in terms of lit and unlit segments, respectively.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 29A, "0." is displayed in the identification segment upper digits and the ratio segment upper digits, and "-." is displayed in the identification segment lower digits and the ratio segment lower digits.
Furthermore, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, the display state shown in FIG. 29(a) is maintained for one second. Note that the count for one second can be measured by the number of interrupt processes. For example, when the display of FIG. 29(a) is started, "447 (D)" is set in the counter, and "1" is decremented for each interrupt processing. Terminate the display of a). As a result, the display of FIG. 29A can be maintained for "2.235×447=999.045ms".

When the display of FIG. 29(a) for about 1 second ends, the display of FIG. 29(b) follows.
In addition, the display of FIG. 29(b) is obtained by replacing the LED displaying "0." and the LED displaying "-." in the display of FIG. 29(a). That is, the display of FIG. 29(b) displays "-." is displayed as "0."
Furthermore, as in the case of FIG. 29(a), the display state shown in FIG. 29(b) is continued for one second (447 interrupts).

The display contents of FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b) are switched and displayed every one second, and are executed for five seconds. Therefore, in FIG. 29, (c) and (e) are the same display contents as (a), and (d) is the same display contents as (b).
When the display of the test pattern (for 5 seconds) ends, the normal ratio display is performed.
In FIG. 29, (f) shows an example in which "7.U.5.0." and the advantageous section ratio are displayed. In addition, instead of the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio may be displayed.

As described above, when "0." and "-." or the light cannot be turned off) can be easily determined visually.
When displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment is displayed as "0.-." or as "-.0.". Therefore, there is no risk of confusion between the test pattern and the original ratio display.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing Example 2 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74. As shown in FIG.
In example 1 of FIG. 29, the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds, with the display contents changed every second. As described above, such a test pattern is suitable for display within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on or within 5 seconds from setting change start processing.
On the other hand, the test pattern display example 2 shown in FIG. 30 is suitable when the test pattern is displayed until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, such as during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM abnormal error. .
It goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 29 may be used when the display is continued until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied.
Similarly, the test pattern display of FIG. 30 may of course be used in the case where it is displayed within a predetermined period from when the test pattern display start condition is satisfied.

In example 2 of FIG. 30, "8.8.8.8." is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned on, and "*" is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned off. *.*.*."("*" indicates that segments A to G are turned off) are alternately repeated. In other words, it is a pattern that flashes "8.8.8.8.".
In Example 2 of FIG. 30, all segments are maintained in the ON state shown in FIG. 30(a) for 0.3 seconds, and then all segments are maintained in the OFF state shown in FIG. 30(b) for 0.3 seconds. By repeating the lighting state shown in FIG. 30(a) and the lighting-out state shown in FIG. 30(b), the flashing state is obtained.

In the tenth embodiment, the blinking interval is set to 0.3 seconds. For example, "134 (D)" is set as the initial value of the timer, the timer value is decremented by "1" every 2.235 ms of interrupt processing, and when the timer value becomes "0", the lighting time or It is judged that the light-out time has passed. Thus, by counting the number of interrupts "134", "299.49" ms can be counted.

In the example 2 of the test pattern display in FIG. 30 as well, it is possible to create the lit state and the extinguished state for all the segments by "8." and "*.". Therefore, it is possible to easily visually determine whether the segment is defective (cannot be turned on or turned off).
Also, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment is displayed as "8.8.". For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the display blinks regardless of the ratio, but in that case, "8.8." On the other hand, in the display of "8.8.", since the segment DP is also illuminated, the two cannot be confused.

Each ratio displayed on the management information display LED 74 is updated (calculated) at the end of the game (after all the reels 31 stop and the payout process ends). Then, the updated ratio is displayed in subsequent interrupt processing. Here, if the power is interrupted immediately before updating the ratio and the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds after the power is restored, the update (calculation) process of the ratio is performed during the 5 seconds during which the test pattern is displayed. to run. Then, when the display of the test pattern is finished and the ratio display is started, the ratio updated after the power-off is restored is displayed.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
FIG. 31(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board 75 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 31(B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the eleventh embodiment. Further, FIG. 4C is a diagram showing the setting value display LED 73 in the eleventh embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 31A, the credit display LED 76 is composed of digit 1a (upper digit) and digit 2a (lower digit). The acquisition number display LED 78 is composed of digit 3a (upper digit) and digit 4a (lower digit).
Here, "digit" means a display unit (display), and particularly in this embodiment, it is composed of a seven-segment LED (so-called seven-segment).
These digits 1a-4a are all seven-segment displays with dot segments (segment P). In particular, the segment P of the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) functions as the advantageous section display LED 77.

The digit 5 a is composed of six dot LEDs, and these six dot LEDs are collectively referred to as status display LEDs 79 . In FIG. 1, the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 are shown, but the status display LED 79 is not shown. However, actually, as shown in FIG. 31A, the display board 75 is provided with a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79. FIG.
In the status display LED 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs for displaying the number of medals betted at that time. When one medal is bet, only the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b light up. When three medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c are all lit up.

The game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when medals are inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, it does not light up when medals are not bet (or replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when medals can be inserted. That is, after the game is over, it lights up before the medals for the next game are inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. It should be noted that even after the replay has been activated, it lights up when it is possible to bet according to the number of credits. When the number of bets reaches the maximum (when no more bets can be made), the insertion display LED 79e is extinguished.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up when a replay win is made, and when an automatic bet is made based on the replay win, the replay display LED 79f lights up to notify the player of the automatic bet state.
As the status display LED 79 not shown in FIG. 31(A), for example, a settlement display LED (an LED that lights up during settlement processing) can be cited, but illustration thereof is omitted in FIG. 31(A).

In FIG. 31B, the management information display LED 74 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 10, 29 and 30, and consists of four digits 1b-4b. These digits 1b-4b are seven-segment displays with dot segments (segment P), similar to digits 1a-4a described above. The digits 1b to 4b indicate upper information type, lower information type, upper numerical value, and lower numerical value, respectively.
Also, the segment P of the digit 2b (information type lower order) functions as a digit separator display LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clarify the separator between the information type and the numerical value.

Also, the segment P of the digits 1b to 4b can be illuminated when the test pattern is displayed, as shown in FIGS.
Furthermore, in FIG. 31(C), the setting value display LED 73 is the same as that shown in FIG.
digit) digit 5b.
Also, as shown in FIG. 10, the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) are mounted on the main control board 50. FIG.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in this embodiment.
A digit consisting of 7 segments is a 7 segment composed of 7 bar-shaped segments A to G and 1 dot-shaped segment P. FIG. An LED composed of segments A to G without segment P may be referred to as "7 segments", and an LED composed of eight segments including segment P may be referred to as "8 segments". In the book, the term "7 segments" is used to include an LED composed of eight segments.

As shown in FIG. 32, of the digit 1a, for example, the segments A to G form 7 segments of the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76, and the segment P is unused. Similarly, segments A to G of digits 2a and 3a constitute the lower digits of the credit number display LED and the upper digits of the earned number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.
The segments A to G of the digit 4a constitute the lower digit seven segments of the winning number display LED78, and the segment P constitutes the advantageous section display LED77.

The digit 5a is an LED that constitutes the status display LED 79. FIG. As shown in FIG. 32, segment A of digit 5a corresponds to 1-bet display LED 79a, segment B corresponds to 2-bet display LED 79b, . . . segment F corresponds to replay display LED 79f. Also, segments G and P of digit 5a are not provided.

Digits 1b to 4b form a management information display LED 74, and segments 1b and 2b display information types of the management information. Segments 3b and 4b display numerical values corresponding to information types displayed in segments 1b and 2b among the management information. Segments P of digits 1b, 3b, and 4b are normally unlit, but as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, illuminate when the test pattern is displayed. In addition, the segment P of the digit 2b functions as a digit separator display LED to clarify the boundary between the digits 1b and 2b indicating the information type and the digits 3b and 4b indicating the numerical value and to facilitate confirmation. While the test pattern is being displayed, the digit separator display LED may be repeatedly lit and extinguished in the same manner as the segments P of other digits, or may be lit all the time.

Further, among the digits 5b, segments A to G constitute seven segments of the set value display LED 73, and segment P is an LED that lights up during setting change. That is, when the segment P of the set value display LED 73 is turned off, it indicates that the setting is being checked, and when the segment P is lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. The segment P of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment P of the setting value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the setting value is confirmed during setting change.

Also, FIG. 32 illustrates the configuration of the segment data. The segment data is 1-byte data, and the D0 bit corresponds to the segment A, the D1 bit corresponds to the segment B, . . .
For example, when displaying "0" in the digit 1a, the segments A to F are lit and the segments G and P are extinguished, so the segment data is "00111111(B)".

When "1" is displayed in the digit 4a and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the segments B, C, and P are lit, so that the segment data becomes "10000110(B)".
Furthermore, when three medals are betted before the start of the game and the game can be started, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, and the game start display LED 79d are lit. The segment data of 5a is "00001111 (B)".

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the output port 52 in the eleventh embodiment. Note that the types of output ports are not limited to those shown in FIG.
As the output ports 52 of the eleventh embodiment, one output port (output port 2) for transmitting digit signals and two output ports (output ports 3 and 4) for transmitting segment signals are provided. .
The output port 3 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 (digits 1a to 5a).
Output port 4 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and setting value display LED 73. FIG.

For output port 2, digits 1-5 are assigned to bits D0-D4, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digit 2-5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a "1" signal is output from the D0 bit of output port 2, both digit 1a (credit number display LED 76 (upper digit)) and digit 1b (management information display LED 74 (information type upper)) A drive signal is provided.

Also, in output port 2, bits D5 to D7 are unused.
Output port 3 is an output port for segment A to P signals of digits 1a to 5a, and segment A to P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7, respectively.
Similarly, output port 4 is an output port for segment A to P signals of digits 1b to 5b, with bits D0 to D7 assigned to the segment A to P signals, respectively.
Furthermore, the output port 5 outputs external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal.

Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hall computer 200, data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external common terminal board 100. FIG. Specifically, for example, an advantageous section, an AT, a specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that the accessory is in operation, an external signal 4 indicating that an error occurred in the slot machine 10 or that the power supply was interrupted, etc. , an external signal 5 indicating the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 is provided.

A data strobe signal is a signal to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Upon receiving the data strobe signal, the sub-control board 80 performs control to acquire the sub-control data signal from the buffer provided in the sub-control board 80 based on the rising edge of the data strobe signal.
Output ports (not shown) other than the output ports 2 to 5 shown in FIG. , a sub-control data signal, a test signal, and the like are output.

FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter values, digit signals, and segment signals in the eleventh embodiment. In addition, FIG. 4B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag.
In this embodiment, as the processing of the main control board 50, the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41 described later) performed for each game, and in parallel with this main processing, an interrupt processing ( I_INTR) (FIG. 53 to be described later) is executed.

The LED display counter is 1-byte data and is a counter that is continuously updated for each interrupt. The LED display counter is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) should be lit. As for each bit of the LED display counter, the D0 bit is assigned to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit to the digit 2 signal, . . . , and the D4 bit to the digit 5 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so as to light the digit corresponding to the bit "1" in the LED display counter.

The LED display counter of this embodiment takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter value by shifting it to the right by one digit as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to . . . (for each interrupt). In addition, in FIG. 34, in the interrupt next to the interrupt "5", the LED display counter becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting one digit to the right. Set the LED display counter to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter repeats the values "5"→"4"→...→"1"→"5"→"4"→... for each interrupt process. That is, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+6" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the eleventh embodiment, digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b are turned on with five interrupts forming one cycle. Specifically, in FIG. 34A, for example, when the interrupt is "1", that is, when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", the digit 5 signal is output. The output of the digit 5 signal enables digits 5a and 5b to be illuminated. Therefore, the status display LED 79 and the set value display LED 73 can be turned on. At the time of the next interrupt "2", the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digits of the acquisition number display LED D78 and numerical lower digits of the management information display LED 74 can be illuminated. .

FIG. 34B is a diagram showing the data configuration of the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is data indicating a digit whose lighting is permitted. As shown in FIG. 34B, the LED display request flag is 8-bit data corresponding to the digit 1 signal at the D0 bit, the digit 2 signal at the D1 bit, . . . , the digit 5 signal at the D4 bit. be. Each bit of the LED display request flag matches the bit of output port 2 .
As shown in FIG. 34(B), digits 1 to 5 can be illuminated during normal operation, digits 3 to 5 can be illuminated during setting change, and digits 1 to 5 can be illuminated during setting confirmation. be. note that. "Normal" refers to game standby and game play.

Then, in the interrupt process, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the "1" bit becomes the digit to be lit in the current interrupt process.
For example, if the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)" and the LED display request flag is "00011111 (B) (normal)", the AND operation of the two results in "00010000 (B)". Only the signal becomes "1". However, during normal operation (during game standby and during game play), a segment signal is output from the output port 3 to enable lighting of the status display LED 79, but no segment signal is output from the output port 4, and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is controlled not to light up.

On the other hand, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)"), the segment signal is output from the output port 4, and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is turned on. Lighting is possible.
Also, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 or 4 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00000100 (B)" or "00001000 (B)"), the digit 3 signal (acquisition number display LED 78 (higher digits) and a digit 4 signal (lower digits of the acquired number display LED 78) are output to cause the acquired number display LED 78 to display "88" (content indicating that the setting is being changed).

Furthermore, at the interrupt timing when the LED display counter is "00001000 (B)" (interrupt "2" in FIG. 34), when generating the segment signal for output port 3, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is referred to. by Then, when the advantageous section display LED flag is ON, a value obtained by ORing the generated segment signal and "10000000 (B)" is output from the output port 3 as a segment signal. As a result, the segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a can be lit.

FIG. 35 shows the address, label name, number of bytes, name and content of data stored in the RWM 53. FIG.
Note that the data shown in FIG. 35 is for use in the explanation of the eleventh embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

Address "F000(H)" is a storage area for set value data (_NB_RANK). When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. In this embodiment, it has set values "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0 (H)" to "5 (H)" is stored as the set value data.
Then, the set value display LED 73 displays "N", which is obtained by adding "1" to the set value data, as the set value.

Address "F010(H)" is a storage area for credit amount data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit amount data is data to be displayed on the credit amount display LED 76 . In this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50(D)" is stored as the credit amount data.
Here, in the present embodiment, a value obtained by converting the credit amount into a decimal number is stored as the credit amount data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29(H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored at address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digit of the credit number ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are , is data for displaying the upper digits (“2” in this example) of the number of credits. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is "50 (D)", so the data value to be stored is in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 for storing the credit amount data itself is not provided, and the credit amount data is provided as the display data of the credit amount display LED 76 .

The address "F011(H)" is a storage area for acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT). Acquisition number data is data to be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 . In the acquisition amount data, similarly to the credit amount data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digits, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are for displaying the upper digits. Data.
In this embodiment, when a small winning combination is won, the payout number data corresponding to the winning minor winning combination is stored as the winning number data in order to display the payout number corresponding to the winning minor winning combination on the winning number display LED 78.例文帳に追加Specifically, when a small win is won and medals are paid out, the win number data is added as the medals are paid out, and the display of the win number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "01".

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F040 (H)" described later, for example, "8 (H)" is stored when an 8-card hand is won, and the payout number data is stored at the time of medal payout ( (including addition to credits) is decremented by "1" according to the number of payouts, such as "8"→"7"→...→"0".
On the other hand, the winning number data stored at the address "F011(H)" is "0"→"1"→"2"→ . . . , "1" is added each time one medal is paid out. Therefore, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 also counts up like "0"→"1"→"2"→...→"8".

In addition, in this embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 during the setting change. Therefore, during setting change display data for displaying "88" is stored as acquisition number data during setting change. By displaying "88" on the winning number display LED 78, it is possible to recognize from the front side of the game machine that the setting is being changed. Furthermore, by lighting "88" and all segments, it is possible to confirm that there is no segment defect (that there is no segment that cannot be lit). Since the upper limit of the payout number of medals is 15, it can be understood that when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it is not the display of the payout number.

Furthermore, in a twelfth embodiment to be described later, when the condition for designating the specified number (the number of medals to bet in the game this time) is satisfied, the before the acquisition), instruct (display, notify) the specified number to the acquired number display LED 78 . In this embodiment, "0A" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 to indicate the specified number "2". Therefore, when instructing the specified number, the specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the obtained number data. Although the details will be described later, the specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is "0B(H)".

Further, when winning a push order bell or the like during AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . The pressing order instruction information corresponding to winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. 58 to be described later is "=1" to "=6", respectively. Therefore, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the pressing order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data. Although the details will be described later, the pressing order instruction numbers corresponding to the pressing order instruction information "=1" to "=6" are "A1(H)" to "A6(H)", respectively. For example, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, the pressing order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the win number data. As a result, the push order instruction information “=1” corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1(H)” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .

Also, when a predetermined error occurs, the error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as the acquired number data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", the error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as the acquired number data.

The address "F030(H)" is a storage area for the action status flag (_FL_ACTION). The operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replays and accessories are operating. For example, when 1BB is activated, the D2 bit of the activation status flag is set to "1".
This operating state flag is updated in the game start setting process described later (step S317 in FIG. 42). For example, in step S313 of FIG. 42, the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag, which will be described later, is read, and when it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, and the operating state is reached. Set the D0 bit of the flag to "1".
The replay operation status flag (D0 bit) is cleared at step S413 in FIG. 50 (game end check process), which will be described later.
In addition, the operating state flag of the accessory is also cleared in the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 50).

The address "F031(H)" is a storage area for the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN). The symbol combination flag is a flag for judging the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, and in this embodiment, Replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D2 bit. Therefore, the replay and 1BB bits of the symbol combination display flag are assigned to the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned to the operating state flag, respectively.
During the main process of FIG. 41, in step S291, the prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the combination has been stopped. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the stopped symbol combination. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, specifically at step S279 (start switch acceptance process) during the main process of FIG.

Address "F040(H)" is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined (step S293 in FIG. 40). When a minor winning combination is won, payout number data corresponding to the winning minor winning combination is stored, and medal payout processing is executed. Here, the payout number data is subtracted by "1" each time one medal is paid out ("1" is added to the number of credits or one actual medal is paid out (from the hopper 35)). That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. Thus, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The address "F041(H)" is the storage area of the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not decremented for each medal payout process, and the initially stored value is maintained. Then, the value is maintained until the medal payout number update process (step S293 in FIG. 41) in the next game. For example, 8
When a small winning combination of payout is won, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and when the winning combination is not won in the next game, "0" is overwritten as the payout number data buffer. be.

The address "F042(H)" is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet upon winning a replay, and stores "2" or "3" in this embodiment.
The automatic bet number data is set at step S325 during the game start setting process of FIG.
Address "F043(H)" is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored. The bet number data is processed in medal management processing (detecting inserted medals and performing bet processing and credit addition processing) in step S276 during the main processing in FIG.

The address "F051(H)" is the storage area of the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter is the one shown in FIG. 34A, and is updated each time an interrupt process is performed, as described above.
The address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag is the one shown in FIG. 34B, and takes a value corresponding to normal operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation.

Address "F061(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores "00000000 (B)" in the normal section, and the D0 bit becomes "1" when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section.
The timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

The address "F062(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag is "0", and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section display LED flag is "1".
The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be turned on.
Specifically, firstly, there is a case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but is turned on afterwards (during the advantageous section).
Secondly, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit when transitioning to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied before the condition for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on once. The advantageous section may end without lighting.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in a game state in which the interval Sim is in an advantageous interval and the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1", when the instruction function is activated (when the correct pressing order is notified), the advantageous interval is displayed. LED 77 is lit.
Furthermore, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.
Also, during the game end check process in the final game of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 7
7 is turned off. Specifically, when the advantageous interval end condition is satisfied, the advantageous interval display LED flag storage area is initialized (the advantageous interval display LED flag is cleared). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished in subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit in a game that activates the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reel 31 starts rotating, the reel 31 until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, it is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted,
3) when at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating;
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the relevant game is finished) and before the settlement switch 43 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit in a game in which the instruction function is activated, it is necessary to determine the winning combination in the game, so the time before the start switch 41 is operated (before the combination lottery) is excluded. .
When the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit in the game in which the instruction function is activated, the start switch 41 is operated and the lottery for the winning combination is executed. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before reaching the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

The address "F063(H)" is the storage area for the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous interval clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games played during the advantageous interval. The advantageous section clear counter is "0" during the normal section, and is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value when shifting to the advantageous section. Also, the advantageous interval clear counter is set to be decremented by "1" per game not only during the advantageous interval but also during the normal interval. However, the minimum value is "0". Therefore, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0", even if "1" is subtracted, the value after subtraction is "0". Therefore, during the normal section, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-advantageous section).

Further, when the game is shifted to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so that the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)" in the next game.
Note that the advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at maximum, and thus consists of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous interval clear counter, it is an advantageous interval.

The address "F065(H)" is the storage area for the difference number counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference number counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the number of difference coins during the advantageous interval, and is also called "MY counter".
The difference number counter does not simply store the accumulated value of the difference number of sheets, but stores the "value corresponding to" the accumulated value of the difference number of sheets. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "accumulated value of difference number ≠ difference number counter value".
The difference number counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets during the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the difference number counter consists of a 2-byte storage area.

It is sufficient for the difference number counter to count the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets at least during the advantageous interval, and it is not necessary to count during the non-advantageous interval (normal interval).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that the game is in the advantageous section, it is necessary to perform a process of determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous section for each game. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the update of the difference counter value is executed including during the non-advantageous section (normal section). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated without determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous section every game, so the processing can be simplified.

Furthermore, even when the difference number becomes negative in the game this time and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number becomes the carry-down data, the difference number counter value is updated. However, if the result of the calculation is that the difference counter is the data that is carried down, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example (assuming that the difference number counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)" and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)".
Second game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "9", difference counter after calculation "0006 (H)" (no correction)
3rd game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference number counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
Fifth game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
is updated as
Even if the difference counter of the previous game is "0 (H)" and the difference counter of the current game is "0 (H)", the difference counter value reflecting the difference of the game is changed again. Since it is a calculated result, such a case also corresponds to "update" of the difference number counter.

As described above, when the post-calculation difference counter value is a value that has undergone a carry-down, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value "0" is set). A method of determining whether or not a digit has been digitized will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this manner, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses, for example, when the number of payouts is greater than the number of bets, that is, when the difference number is increasing. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example, in a game during a normal period, the difference counter value is increased by the number of payouts when a payout based on winning a small combination is made, but after that, the number of payouts is increased. falls below the number of bets, it eventually becomes "0".

36A and 36B are diagrams (slump graphs) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. FIG. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis is the number of games played, and the vertical axis is the number of differences.
Example 1 shows an example in which the differential number initially progressed in the negative direction as the game progressed, but then turned upward in the middle of the game, for example, when AT was started. Since the difference number counter counts the moment when the difference number becomes the lowest value in the progress of the game as "0", the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is counted by the difference number counter as the amount of increase in the difference number. be done. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section ends (the next game is controlled to be a normal section game).

In addition, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied. does not meet the conditions for ending the advantageous section.
In the next game, assuming that the maximum number difference in the gaming machine is obtained, the bet number is "1" and the payout number is "15", so the difference number in the next game is "+14". The difference counter value at the end of the next game is "2414 (D)". When the difference counter is "2414 (D)", it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is met.
Therefore, the maximum possible value of the difference number counter is "2414 (D)".

Whether or not the difference counter has exceeded "2400 (D)" can be determined not only by reading the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53, but also by temporarily storing it in a register for updating. It also includes determining the value of the difference number counter (same below).
Further, when it is determined whether or not "2400 (D)" has been exceeded based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, when it is determined that "2400 (D)" has not been exceeded, The register difference counter value is stored (saved) in the RWM 53 . On the other hand, when it is judged that it exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference counter value is not stored in the RWM 53, and the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 is controlled to be cleared. is also possible.

Further, Example 2 shows an example in which, as in Example 1, the difference number progresses in the negative direction as the game progresses, but the difference number turns to increase as, for example, AT is started in the middle of the game. . In example 2, even when the differential number counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the cumulative value of the differential number is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous section ends. That is, irrespective of the cumulative value of the difference number accompanying the progress of the game so far, if the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" counting from the time when the difference number reaches the minimum value, the advantageous section (The next game is controlled to be a normal section game).

When the difference counter is updated during the normal section, the difference counter may exceed "2400 (D)" even during the normal section. For example, such a situation can occur when a special role is won many times and the special game is repeated. In such cases,
1) A method of updating the difference counter value as it is until the advantageous section starts;
2) When "2400 (D)" is exceeded, a method of temporarily resetting the difference counter value to "0" at that time.
For example, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous interval, the difference counter is cleared based on the end of the advantageous interval. If the process is executed regardless of whether or not, it is cleared even when the difference number counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal interval.

On the other hand, if the processing for clearing the difference counter is specific to the advantageous section, the difference counter will not be cleared even if the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal section.
When starting the advantageous section (the first game of the advantageous section), the difference counter is cleared (set to the initial value "0". Step S354 in FIG. 45 to be described later). Therefore, it does not matter how many difference number counters there are before the start of the advantageous section.
and,
1) When the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous section,
2) When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games,
satisfies the termination condition of the advantageous section.
When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the difference counter is cleared (initialized). The reason why the difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous interval is to prevent data (values) relating to the advantageous interval from being carried over to the normal interval when the advantageous interval ends and the normal interval is entered. Clearing of the difference number counter is executed in step S435 in FIG. 51, which will be described later.

FIG. 37 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous interval, (a) showing example 1 and (b) showing example 2. FIG.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the difference number decreases as the game progresses, and the difference number further decreases from the time when the advantage section starts ("A" in the figure) until it progresses to "B" in the figure. example. In addition, AT does not start at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and the beginning of the advantageous section is CZ, omen, AT preparation (for example, when the RT state is a low probability state, the RT state is changed from a low probability state to a high probability (While waiting for a replay to win), the difference may decrease even after the advantageous section starts. Further, even when AT is started, if the winning order bell continues to be difficult, the difference may decrease.

Since the difference counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it becomes "0" at "A" in the figure. In addition, as described above, the difference number counter value is maintained at "0" under the condition that the difference number is decreasing. Therefore, the difference counter value remains "0" from point "A" to point "B" in the figure.
Also, an example is shown in which the number of differences turned to increase from point "B". This also increases the difference number counter value. Then, when it is determined that the difference counter value has exceeded "2400 (D)" (when the point "C" is reached in the figure), it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, and the advantageous section ends. (Moving to normal section).

In this way, the positive count by the difference number counter starts at the point when the difference number becomes the lowest value after the start of the advantageous section, not the difference number from the start of the advantageous section. Tokens will not be given to the player beyond the range where the number of balls is increased (the range from "B" to "C" in FIG. 37(a)). As a result, it is possible not to arouse the gambling spirit of the player.

The above point will be described more specifically with numerical examples.
For example, if the specifications are such that AT is started by lottery after the start of the advantageous section, the difference number may decrease as the game progresses in the advantageous section and non-AT.
For example, it is assumed that the player X wins the advantageous section and the advantageous section starts, but the AT does not start and the game is stopped when the difference becomes "-200".

Next, it is assumed that when the player Y starts playing the game on the gaming machine and the difference becomes "-50", the AT is won and the AT is started. After starting the advantageous section, when the advantageous section (AT) is continued until the difference number exceeds "+2400", Player Y will be able to obtain "2400+250=2650" medals. .
Therefore, as described above, after starting the advantageous section, by setting the end condition as "from the time when the difference number reaches the minimum value to when it exceeds '+2400'", for example, other players can It prevents you from being able to acquire it, including, so as not to arouse the gambling spirit.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 37(b) shows an example in which the number of differences decreases in the normal section, becomes positive at point "D" on the way, and furthermore, the advantageous section starts at point "E". In such a case, as described above, when the difference counter value is updated including the normal section, the difference counter value is positive at time "E" in the figure. However, at the start of the advantageous section (“E” in the figure), the difference counter value is initialized (cleared, ie, updated to “0”).
Therefore, the increment before the advantageous section (the increment from "D" to "E") is not counted by the difference number counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to be positively counted from point "E", and when it exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section ends.

Returning the description to FIG.
The address "F067(H)" is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT and to "1" during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when the AT lottery is won, and this is executed in step S364 of FIG. 46, which will be described later. Also, the AT flag is turned off at the end of the final game of the AT, for example, in a game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50), which will be described later. Further, the data cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section includes an AT flag.

The address "F068(H)" is the storage area of the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). The AT game number counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games during AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous section clear counter, the AT game number counter stops counting (decrementing) after it reaches "0".
The AT game number counter is updated (decremented) during AT after the start switch 41 is operated during the main process (step S281 in FIG. 41 to be described later).

In addition, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", the AT game number counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the number of AT games is maximum "255 (D)" or less, the AT game number counter may be composed of a 1-byte counter.
When starting AT (or when shifting to AT preparation), the initial value is set to the AT game number counter. The initial value may be a constant value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when AT is won. Moreover, after determining the initial value, the number of AT games may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT, the number of AT games may be added, and when winning an additional lottery, the number of AT games may be increased. In this case, the increment is added to the AT game number counter.
This AT game number counter is also included in the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, since the number-of-games management type AT is exemplified, an AT game number counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of the AT game number counter. Then, at the start of AT, the initial value of the obtainable difference number is set. Also, when winning the addition, the number of additional winnings is added. Then, each time a payout is made, the difference number of the game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT is terminated.

Next, each process during a game will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50 . When the power is turned on, the program start processing in FIG. 38 is executed.
In FIG. 38, when the program is started in step S201, the main control board 50 initializes registers in the next step S202. Specific processing includes, for example, the setting of the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, the setting of the type of interrupt (for example, setting to maskable interrupt, etc.), and the parity bit to be added to the control command to be transmitted. setting (for example, setting to even parity, etc.). In other words, initial values necessary for normal operation of the slot machine 10 are set in various registers.

Next, proceeding to step S203, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off processing completion flag is a normal value. In this embodiment, when power is turned off, a power-off processing completion flag is stored (step S484 in FIG. 54, which will be described later). This power-off processing completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was performed normally when the power was turned on. When it is determined that the power-off processing completion flag has a normal value, the process proceeds to step S204, and when it is determined that the value is not normal, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S204, the checksum of the RWM 53 is calculated. Specifically, the checksum is calculated for the same range as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed during the power-off process (for example, the work area used by the program, the unused area, and the stack area).
In step S205, it is determined whether or not the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM 53 where the current checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the next address is the address for which the checksum is to be calculated. If it is determined that the checksum calculation has not ended, the process returns to step S204 to continue the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum is completed, the process proceeds to step S206.

Also, in the subsequent processing, when data stored in multiple ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 are to be initialized, the same processing is executed in the range of the designated RWM 53 in this embodiment.
When it is determined in step S203 that the power-off processing completion flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as power-off recovery data without executing the checksum calculation of the RWM 53 .

At step S206, the main control board 50 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (eg, B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completion flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 is normally completed, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off processing completion flag is an abnormal value ("No" in step S203), or when it is determined that there was an abnormality during the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 in step S204, power-off Abnormal values are stored as recovery data.

In the next step S207, the level data of a prescribed input port 51 is stored in a prescribed register (for example, A register). Next, proceeding to step S208, it is judged based on the level data of the predetermined input port 51 whether or not the designated switch is on. In this embodiment, the "designated switch" means a signal of a door switch (switch that turns on when the front door 12 (housing) is opened) of the predetermined input ports 51, a setting door switch (The door provided on the setting key switch. The setting door may be omitted.) Signal of the setting key switch (switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted and rotated in a predetermined direction) signal There are three.

The door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is open), the setting door switch signal is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch signal is on. Allow setting changes only at certain times. When all three designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change processing of step S212, but when at least one designated switch is not turned on, it is not permitted to shift to the setting change processing of step S212. .
That is, even when the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed) or when the setting door switch signal is off (the setting door is closed), the setting key switch signal cannot be turned on, and there is a high possibility of fraud, so transition to setting change processing is not permitted.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S208 that all the designated switches are on, the process proceeds to step S209, and when it is determined that they are not on, the process proceeds to step S211.
In step S209, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data is abnormal. This power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S206.

When it is determined that the power failure recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212, and when it is determined not to be abnormal, the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, it is determined whether or not the setting change prohibition flag is ON. Here, the setting change disable flag is one of the data stored in the RWM 53, and is disabled from the start switch acceptance process (step S279) to the game end check process (step S301) in FIG. 41, which will be described later. is a flag that When the setting change prohibition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S211, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of step S212.
In addition, although the setting change disable flag is provided in the present embodiment, the setting change disable flag does not have to be provided when the configuration is such that the setting change is always possible. In that case, the processing corresponding to step S210 becomes unnecessary.

In step S211, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S209. Then, when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S213 to perform power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, an "E1" error occurs, and the process advances to step S214 to perform unrecoverable error processing.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 of FIG.
First, in step S221, a "predetermined range" is stored in a register as an initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53. FIG. Here, "within the used area" refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data relating to the progress of the game. The ranges shown in FIG. 35 are all within the use area. On the other hand, "outside the use area", which will be described later, refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data irrelevant to the progress of the game. Specifically, there is a storage area in which data relating to the display of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is stored.

Further, the "predetermined range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally, and includes set value data (address "F000 (H)"), game state (for example, RT state), winning The initialization range that does not initialize the flags of the special roles that have the "predetermined range".
Therefore, in a twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, when the BB2 is inside (when the winning flag of the BB2 is ON) before the power is turned off, if the power is turned off normally, the setting change process is executed. However, the winning flag of BB2 is maintained.
On the other hand, the "predetermined range" does not include data on advantageous sections or AT. Therefore, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 35 are to be initialized here.

Next, proceeding to step S222, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When the power-off recovery data is determined to be a normal value, the process proceeds to step S224, and the "predetermined range" stored in step S221 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S222 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S223.
In step S<b>223 , the main control board 50 stores “specific range” in the register as an initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53 . Here, the "specific range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power failure is not normal, and is the entire range within the use area including the set value data (address "F000(H)").

Then, in step S224, the predetermined range set in step S221 or the specific range set in step S223 is initialized (within the use area of the RWM 53). In the next step S225, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S224 has ended. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S226.

In step S226, the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) are saved. Although the AF register is originally intended to be saved in the F (flag) register, the AF register is saved for the convenience of the instruction. Then, in step S227, a predetermined range outside the use area is stored as the initialization range of the RWM 53. FIG. Also, the "predetermined range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally.

In the next step S228, similarly to step S222, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When the power-off recovery data is determined to be a normal value, the process proceeds to step S230, and the "predetermined range" stored in step S227 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S228 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S229.
In step S<b>229 , the main control board 50 stores “specific range” in the register as an initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53 . Here, the "specific range" is a range to be initialized when it is determined that the power failure is not normal, and is the entire range including a ring buffer storing the number of games and the number of payouts for ratio display.
Then, in step S230, initialization of the predetermined range set in step S227 or the specific range set in step S229 (outside the use area of the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S231, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S230 has been completed. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S232.
At step S232, the AF register saved at step S226 is restored. In the next step S233, start setting of interrupt processing is performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt process specified in step S202 are set. Since timer interrupt processing is used as interrupt processing in this embodiment, processing for setting the period of timer interrupt (“2.235 ms” in this embodiment) is included. After the processing of step S233, interrupt processing is executed. In other words, the interrupt processing is not executed before the "interrupt activation".
In the next step S234, an output request is set at the start of setting change. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in a register in order to inform the sub-control board 80 of starting the setting change process.

"Output request setting" means a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. FIG. Also, the control command here means not only the command to be actually transmitted, but also the command that is the source of the command to be actually transmitted.
Next, proceeding to step S235, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. FIG. This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

Next, proceeding to step S236, the main control board 50 executes 2-byte time waiting processing (wait processing) for starting the setting change. In this embodiment, it waits until the number of interrupts "224" is counted (until the set number of interrupts becomes "0" by subtracting "1" for each interrupt number). This waiting is also called delay processing or waiting processing because the main processing does not proceed. It should be noted that during this waiting time (during 2-byte time waiting processing), the main processing is prevented from proceeding, but the interrupt processing is executed.

Thus, the reason why the two-byte time waiting process (wait process) is executed in step S236 is that the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side ends in a relatively short time, whereas the sub control board 80 side Since the initialization process of the RWM 83 takes time, the main control board 50 side executes a two-byte time waiting process. In particular, the main control board 50 side cannot know whether the initialization process has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, while the sub-control board 80 is still in the process of being initialized, the main control board 50 has already completed the initialization, and the process proceeds further. 80 can be prevented from being out of sync with the progress of the control process.
After executing the output request set and the control command set 1 at the start of the setting change, the sub-control board 80 starts initialization of the RWM 83, and a sufficient time for completing the initialization of the RWM 83 is set as a wait time. do. As a result, after the RWM 83 is initialized on the sub-control board 80 side, the main control board 50 side proceeds to step S238 and subsequent steps.

Note that the control command for starting the setting change set in steps S234 and S235 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236. However, while the 2-byte time wait process is being executed in step S236, the process after step S237 does not proceed (the main process does not proceed).

After the end of the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236, the process advances to step S237 to store setting change display data as acquisition number data. Next, in step S238, the value "00011100 (B)" corresponding to the setting being changed is stored in the LED display request flag.

By the processing of steps S237 and S238, when interrupt processing is executed after these processing, lighting of the digits 3a, 4a, and 5b (acquisition number display LED 78 and set value display LED 73) becomes possible.
Specifically, in the interrupt process executed after the process of step S238, "8" can be displayed for each of the digits 3a and 4a ("88" can be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78), and the digit b5 (setting value display) can be displayed. The current set value can be displayed on the LED 73).
Note that the obtained number data and the LED display request flag are initialized by the initialization processing in the use area of the RWM 53 in step S224, so the values before step S237 are "0".

Next, the process advances to step S239 to execute an interrupt waiting process. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. Then, after one interrupt time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S240.
In step S240, it is determined whether or not operation of a setting change switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been detected. Here, whether or not the setting change switch is turned on is determined by judging rising data of the input port 51 including the setting change switch. When it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S241, and when it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S242.
In step S241, the set value data of the RWM 53 (address "F000(H)") is stored (updated). When the interrupt process is executed after the set value data is updated, the set value display LED 73 displays the updated value.

In the next step S242, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during setting change, the setting value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S243, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S239.

In the above processing, step S239 (interrupt wait) is provided to clear rising data of the setting change switch.
For example, if the process of step S239 is not provided, if it is determined that the rise data of the setting change switch is ON in step S240, the set value data is updated in step S241, and the start switch 41 is turned ON in the next step S242. If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S240, and it is determined whether or not the rise data of the setting change switch is ON.

After it is determined to be ON in step S240, if the interrupt process is executed even once, the rising data of the setting change switch is turned OFF. However, until the interrupt process is executed, it continues to be determined that the rising data of the setting change switch is ON in step S240. As a result, the set value data continues to increase by "2" or more just by operating the setting change switch once. Therefore, in step S239, an interrupt waiting process is executed.

In step S243, it is determined whether or not a setting key switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off, the process advances to step S244 to clear the acquisition number data (to "0"). This is to erase the display of "88" indicating that the setting is being changed. Next, the process proceeds to step S245 to store the value "00011111 (B)" corresponding to normal in the LED display request flag.

The display of the digits 3a and 4a (acquisition number display LED 78) changes from "88" to "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S244.
In addition, "0" is displayed on each of the digits 1a and 2a ("00" is displayed on the credit number display LED 76) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S245. Also, since the bit corresponding to digit 5 of the LED display request flag is "1", digit 5a (status display LED 79) can be lit. On the other hand, the digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) is not lit because the setting is not being changed or confirmed.

Next, in step S246, similarly to step S234, an output request setting at the end of setting change is performed. This process ends the setting change process, and transfers data corresponding to the determined setting value (specifically, setting value data stored at address "F000(H)") to the sub-control board 80 side. This is a process of setting a control command to notify to. Next, proceeding to step S247, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 as in step S235. Then, the process proceeds to step S248 and shifts to the main process (M_MAIN).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG.
First, in step S251, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power failure (eg, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when power failure occurs. Of these, it indicates the area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S252, the setting value data is read, and whether the range of the setting value data is normal (within the range of setting values 1 to 6), in other words, "F000 (H)" It is determined whether or not the set value data is within the range of "0 (H)" to "5 (H)". When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S253, and when it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an "E6" error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S264 to shift to unrecoverable error processing. .

Proceeding to step S253, an unused area in the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register as an initialization range. Then, in the next step S254, initialization of the RWM 53 within the range set in step S253 is executed. Here, it is conceivable that a value may be stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. In the unlikely event that a value is stored in an unused area, it may lead to fraudulent acts, so please initialize the unused area when the power is turned on (usually once a day). there is
In the next step S255, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area within the used area) has been completed.

In step S256, the AF register is saved. This process is the same as the process of step S226 described above. In the next step S257, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S258, initialization of the RWM 53 within the range set in step S257 is executed.
In the next step S259, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area outside the used area) has been completed. In step S260, the AF register is restored. This process is the same as the process of step S232 described above.

In the next step S261, a predetermined input port 51 is read. This processing is processing for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port 51 before power-off to the latest data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S262 to activate an interrupt. This process is, for example, the process of setting the cycle of the timer interrupt, and is the same process as the step S233 described above.
Next, in step S263, the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, that is, set to "0". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In the above program start processing, setting change processing, and power recovery processing,
1) In the program start process of FIG. 38, if "No" is determined in step S203 (when the power-off processing completion flag is an abnormal value), or if there is an abnormality during the checksum calculation in step S204, step In S206, the abnormal value is stored as recovery data after power failure. In this case, since it is determined as "Yes" in step S209, the process advances to the setting change process (FIG. 39) in step S212.
Then, in the setting change process of FIG. 39, since it is judged "No" in steps S222 and S228, the entire range inside and outside the use area of the RWM 53 is initialized, that is, after "F000(H)" is initialized.

2) In the program start processing, when the power-off processing completion flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum calculation is performed normally, when the setting change processing is performed, steps S222 and Since "Yes" is determined in S228, the process proceeds to steps S224 and S230, respectively, and the specified range (within the use area and outside the use area) of the RWM 53 is initialized.

3) In the program start processing, when the power-off processing completion flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum calculation is performed normally, if the setting change processing is not performed, the power restoration processing ( 40). In this case, if the set value is normal in step S252 in FIG. 40, the RWM 53 is initialized (within and outside the use area) at the time of normal power-on. This initialization is a process of initializing the unused area of the RWM 53 as described above.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in this embodiment. The main processing is processing for one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated every game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. As described above, the stack pointer is an area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power failure (for example, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when power failure occurs. Setting the stack pointer is the process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53 .

In the next step S272, game start set processing (M_GAME_SET) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 42, which will be described later, and is a process of generating, updating, storing, etc. an operation state flag.
In the next step S273, bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are currently bet, and reads bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, it is determined whether or not there are bet medals based on the number of bets read in step S273.

When it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and when it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform medal insertion waiting processing, and then proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on.
In step S276, management processing of inserted medals is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the medals have been cleaned, whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated, and the like.

In the next step S277, update processing of soft random numbers is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" each time) a processing random number for processing (computation processing) the random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the combination lottery means 61 . A soft random number is a 16-bit random number with a range from '0' to '65535(D)'. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to the value before updating may be executed.

At the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number for the game, it is determined "No" in step S278.

In step S279, a process for accepting a start switch is executed. This process is a process of setting a setting change prohibition flag, setting an output request at the start of rotation of the reel 31, and setting the number of times of output for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer or the like. .
In the next step S280, the acquisition number data is cleared. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, even if the specified specified number display data and the payout number data were stored as the acquisition number data before that, they are cleared.
Here, although the details will be described later, in the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where a specified number is instructed (displayed) on the acquired number display LED 78 before the game is started. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, there is a case where the instruction specified number display data is stored as the acquisition number data. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquisition number data is cleared, and the acquisition number display LED 78 is displayed with "00" (or extinguished).
Also, at the time of step S280, when the payout number data of the previous game is stored as the winning number data, the payout number data is cleared at this step S280.

Next, the process proceeds to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes a process of updating the number of AT games. This process is a process shown in FIG. 43 to be described later, and is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
Further, during AT, whether or not to add the number of AT games is performed based on the combination lottery result of the combination lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare combination is won, the number of times AT is added to the game may be determined. Therefore, when the AT game number is added and the addition amount is added to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (illustration is omitted in FIG. 41).
It should be noted that after the start switch reception (step S279), the AT game number counter is updated in step S281, but not limited to this, after the combination lottery process in step S282, after all reels 31 stop (step S290 and later) AT game number counter update may be performed.
In addition, in the specifications of the difference number management type AT, when the AT difference number counter is provided, after all the reels 31 are stopped and after the medal payout process due to winning is completed (after step S300), the AT difference number counter to update.

In step S282, the combination lottery means 61 executes a combination lottery (corresponding to the above-described "internal lottery") at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number at the time of lottery is obtained in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process of determining whether or not the obtained random number value corresponds to any winning combination is performed using the combination lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes an advantageous section shift lottery process. This process is the process of FIG. 44, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, an AT lottery is executed together with the advantageous section transition lottery. As shown in FIG. 44, which will be described later, when it is in the advantageous section but not in AT (for example, when the main game state is CZ), in step S348 in FIG. 44, AT lottery processing is executed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284 to set the push order instruction number (M_ORD_INF). This process is the process shown in FIG. 48. During AT, when the instruction function is activated in the game (the push order instruction number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78), the push order instruction number is generated, This is the process of displaying the pressing order instruction information.

In the next step S285, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process executes a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has passed, and proceeds to the next step S286 if the minimum game time has passed.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time (not shown in FIG. 35), and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms×1834≈4099 ms)". is. If it is determined in step S279 that the minimum game time is "0", the initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum game time (timer value). Then, the minimum game time is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. When proceeding to step S285 of the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time is "0", and when it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S286.

At step S286, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 to start the reel 31 to rotate. Then, when the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, acceptance of operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, it is checked whether the reel 31 has been stopped. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the lottery result of the combination and the position of the reel 31. is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S287. .

In step S290, the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, by activating the instruction function during AT, there is a case where the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S290.
It should be noted that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be extinguished. Specifically, "00010011 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for extinguishing may be provided as segment data and the data may be output.

In step S291, the display determination of the pattern is performed. Here, the prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination has stopped on the activated line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. When it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304, and when it is determined that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 normally does not stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, when a symbol (kicking away symbol) which should not be displayed on the active line is displayed, it is determined to be abnormal ("E5" error), and the process proceeds to step S304. Execute unrecoverable error handling.

When it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred and the process proceeds to step S293, the payout number is updated. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as the number-of-payout data and the number-of-payout data buffer described above.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals (M_WIN_PAY) corresponding to the winning combination. This process is the process shown in FIG. 49, which will be described later. Next, the process advances to step S295 to perform an interrupt waiting process. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is prohibited. The interrupt is prohibited immediately after the interrupt by the processing of these steps S295 and S296.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to step S256 in FIG. Next, the flow advances to step S298 to execute ratio setting processing. This "ratio setting process" is a process of updating various counter values, calculating ratios, etc., in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). Then, when the process proceeds to step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and the interrupt is permitted (restarted) in the next step S300. In this way, when the ratio setting process is executed, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited.

The reason why interrupt processing is prohibited during the execution of ratio set processing is that the ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the usage area, and when the program outside the usage area is being executed in the main processing. This is because if an interrupt process is entered in , the program in the used area and the program outside the used area will coexist, and the processing will become complicated.

Next, the process advances to step S301 to perform game end check processing (_M_GAME_CHK). This process is a process shown in FIG. 50, which will be described later, and clears a condition device (winning combination) flag. Then, in step S302, an output request is set at the end of the game, and in the next step S303, a control command is set 1. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
When the process of step S303 is completed, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the game start set process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG.
First, in step S311, a game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). Since the game standby display time in this embodiment is set to "26846" interrupt (≈60000 ms, ie, about 60 seconds (1 minute)), "26846" is set in the predetermined storage area of the RWM53. When the game standby display time is set in step S301, the value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process from this point.

When the game standby display time becomes "0", the acquired number data is cleared in step S275 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. FIG. For example, even if the number of medals paid out to the game last time is "8" and the player completes the game by operating the settlement switch 43, "00" will be displayed after about one minute. be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of vacant machines by recognizing them as vacant machines by hall clerks and other players.
In addition, instead of displaying "00" on the acquisition number display LED 78, the acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digits and lower digits) may be extinguished, or the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78 may be extinguished and the lower digits may be turned off. may display "0". In any case, it suffices if the display is executed so that the hall clerk or another player can recognize the empty table.

Next, the process proceeds to step S312, and initialization processing of the pressing order instruction number is executed. This processing is processing for clearing the push order instruction number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
In the next step S313, the data of the symbol combination display flag is obtained. In the next step S314, it is determined whether or not the 1BB actuation symbol is displayed. In this processing, when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the data of the symbol combination display flag is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and when it is "0", it is determined as "No". When it is determined that the 1BB operation pattern is displayed, the process proceeds to step S315, and when it is determined that it is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S315, the obtainable number of coins when 1BB is activated (during 1BB game) is saved. This process is a process of storing the maximum number of wins that can be obtained in the 1BB game in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53 . Then, the process proceeds to step S316.
In step S316, an operating state flag is generated. This process is a process of generating the value of the operating state flag based on the symbol combination display flag.
Furthermore, in the next step S317, the operating state flag is updated, and in the next step S318, the operating state flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the generated operating state flag (stored in, for example, the A register at this time) in the address "F030 (H)" of the RWM 53 . As a result, the information on the operating state flag up to that point is replaced with the information on the operating state flag updated in step S317.
For example, when a 1BB symbol combination is displayed (at the time of 1BB winning), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag changes from "0" to "1".

In the next step S319, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has started. In the present embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of two games (or two wins), but when the end condition of the 1BB game is not met ( When the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is "1"), it is set to "1" in this game start set process. When it is determined in step S319 that it is time to start the RB operation, the process proceeds to step S320, and when it is determined that it is not the time to start the RB operation, the process proceeds to step S321.

In step S320, the number of games played and the number of prizes won when RB is activated are saved. This process stores (stores) "2 (H)" in the number-of-games counter (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 when RB is activated, and This is a process of saving (storing) "2(H)" in the winning number counter (not shown in FIG. 35). Then, the process proceeds to step S321.

Both the number-of-games counter when RB is activated and the number-of-wins counter when RB is activated are set to "2 (H)" as an initial value, and each time the number of games or the number of winnings increases by "1", A counter that is decremented by "1" each time. However, not limited to this, the initial value of these counter values is set to "0", and each time the number of games played or the number of wins increases by "1", the counter values are incremented by "1", and these counter values are set to "2 ( H)” may be determined.

In the next step S321, it is determined whether or not the condition specifying the specified number is satisfied. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, there is no case where the specified number is instructed. However, in a twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, there is a case where a prescribed number is instructed at the start of a game, so this processing is included in this flow chart. If it is determined that the condition for designating the specified number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and if it is determined that the condition for designating the specified number is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S323.
In step S322, the instruction specified number display data is stored as the acquisition number data. In the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where the prescribed number "2" is instructed, and when the prescribed number "2" is instructed, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "0A". Then, the instruction specified number display data for displaying "0A" is defined as "0B (H)" (details will be described later), and in this step S322, "0B (H)" is obtained as the acquisition number data. memorize
The reason why "0A" is displayed instead of "02" when the specified number "2" is displayed is to avoid confusion with the number of payouts, the error number, and the pressing order instruction information.
The display of the number of payouts is any one of "01" to "15", and "A" is not displayed in the lower digits. Also, the error number is not displayed with "A" in the lower digits.

Here, the error number (the number displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 when an error occurs) in this embodiment is as follows.
HP: Medal jam error HE: Medal empty error (no medal in hopper 35)
H0: Discharge sensor 37 error CE: Medal retention error CP: Medal illegal passage error CH: Passage sensor 46 error C0: Insertion sensor 44 error C1: Medal abnormal insertion error FE: Sub-tank (not shown in FIG. 1) Full dE: Front door open E1: Power failure recovery error E5: Display judgment error E6: Setting value error E7: Random number error

Note that the types of errors are not limited to the above. An error whose upper digit of the error number is "E" means an unrecoverable error.
As described above, since "A" is not displayed in the lower digits of the error number, there is no chance of confusion between the error number and the prescribed number of instructions.
Further, the pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function is "=1" to "=6". Therefore, there is no confusion between the pressing order instruction information and the prescribed number of instructions.

In addition, in step S322, before storing the specified specified number display data as the winning number data, there is a case where the payout number data in the previous game is stored as the winning number data (when a small winning combination was won in the previous game). ). Note that the payout number data is stored in step S399 of the medal payout process (see FIG. 49 to be described later) for winning a prize. Therefore, when storing the specified specified number display data, the payout number data up to that point may be overwritten. However, without being limited to this, a process of clearing the obtained number data may be provided before step S322 (for example, immediately before step S311).

In the next step S323, based on the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S313, it is determined whether or not the replay symbol combination is stopped. When it is determined that the symbol combination for replay has been stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S324, and when it is determined that the symbol combination for replay has not been stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S324, the main control board 50 reads bet medals. This process is a process of reading the number of medals betted in the previous game (bet number data). Next, in step S325, automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of storing the bet number read in step S324 in the automatic bet number data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S326 to set an output request for an operating state. In the next step S327, control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, it transmits to the sub-control board 80 information indicating that the replay has been activated or that the 1BB has been activated. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

It should be noted that before (meaning before the filing of the present application, not "known"; the same shall apply hereinafter), during the bet number addition process, specifically, during the main process of FIG. 41, in step S276 In the medal management process, the clearing process of the acquired number data was executed. As a result, even if a small winning combination was won in the previous game and the payout number data at the time of winning the minor winning combination was stored as the winning number data, the winning number data was cleared when the bet number was added.
However, in this embodiment, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied before the medal management process is executed, the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data.
Then, when the specified number is instructed, it is necessary to prevent the specified specified number display data from being cleared during bet processing. This is because, in the present embodiment, when the specified number is instructed, the specified number is maintained at least until the start switch 41 is operated.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the acquisition number data is not cleared in the medal management process, and the acquisition number data is cleared in the process of step S280 in FIG. 41 when the start switch 41 is operated.

However, not limited to this, when the prescribed number is instructed, the instructed prescribed number display data is cleared after the start switch 41 is operated, but when the prescribed number is not instructed, as before, when adding the bet number Acquisition number data may be cleared (by medal management processing). In this case, for example, in the process of adding the number of bets, before executing the clearing process of the acquired number data, it is determined whether or not the stipulated number has been instructed in the current game, and when it is determined that the stipulated number has been instructed. is not cleared, and clears the acquired number data when it is determined that the specified number is not specified.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing AT game number counter update processing in step S281 in FIG.
First, in step S331, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is on ("1"). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S332, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, if it is not in AT, the AT game number counter is not updated.

In step S332, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is "3". This process reads the bet number data or automatic bet number data of the RWM 53 and determines whether or not the bet number for the game is "3". When the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S333, and when the number of bets is not "3", the processing according to this flowchart ends. In this embodiment, during AT, only when the game is played with the number of bets (specified number) "3", the AT game number counter is updated (the process relating to the instruction function is executed). In other words, even during AT, when the game is started with the number of bets (prescribed number) "2", the AT game number counter is not updated.
On the other hand, as will be described later, the advantageous section clear counter and the difference number counter are updated regardless of the number of bets.

When proceeding to step S333, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the value of the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In the case of the difference number management type AT, similarly, when the AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is not decremented (updated) when the bet number is not "3" even during the AT.

FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the advantageous zone transition lottery process in step S283 in FIG.
In the present embodiment, the AT lottery process (step S348) is provided in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, but the process is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone transition lottery process and the AT lottery process are executed independently. may For example, in FIG. 41, only the advantageous section shift lottery process may be performed in step S283, and the AT lottery process may be executed after step S283.
First, in step S341, it is determined whether or not the number of bets (specified number) in the current game is "3". When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S342, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
Therefore, when the number of bets (predetermined number) is "3", the advantageous section transition lottery in step S345 and the advantageous section transition process (process related to the advantageous section) in step S347, which will be described later, can be executed, and step S348 is enabled. AT lottery processing (processing related to the instruction function) can be executed. However, when the number of bets (prescribed number) is not "3", these processes are not executed.

In step S342, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section type flag is "0". When it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "0" (non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S343, and when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section), step S348. proceed to When the advantageous section type flag is "1" (when already in the advantageous section), the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, but the AT lottery is performed.

In step S343, it is determined whether or not the combination lottery result in the current game is a target lottery result, that is, whether or not the winning combination for the lottery of the advantageous section is won. Here, detailed explanation is omitted, but for example, if you win a special role alone, if you win a special role and a small role, if you win a small role (rare small role), it is the target lottery result. to decide. In addition, the target lottery results do not include non-winners. This is because the process relating to the advantageous section is not executed in the game in which the combination is not won (the game in which the conditional device is inactive).
If it is determined in step S343 that the target lottery result has been obtained, the process proceeds to step S344. elected).

In step S344, it is determined whether or not the target lottery result is a specific lottery result. Here, although detailed explanation is omitted, for example, among the roles to be drawn, the middle stage cherry (single winning or double winning with special role) is set as a fixed role (a role that will always be won) in the advantageous section transition lottery. However, when the middle cherry is won, it may be determined that it is a result of a specific lottery.
When it is determined in step S344 that it is the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that it is not the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S345. In other words, when it is not a specific lottery result, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and when it is a specific lottery result, the advantageous section transition process (step S347) is executed without performing the advantageous section transition lottery (always transition to an advantageous section). do). It should be noted that it is also possible to execute the advantageous zone transition lottery even if the result of the specific lottery is determined, and to set such that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100%.

In step S345, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed. As the advantageous section transition lottery, for example, a lottery table in which numbers corresponding to the lottery result are predetermined is used to perform lottery in the same manner as the lottery lottery. For example, if the winning number is "A", there is a 35% chance of winning in the advantageous section, if the winning number is "B", there is a 60% chance of winning in the advantageous section, and so on. is mentioned.
If the winning combination lottery result is not eligible for the advantageous section lottery, the result is "No" in step S343. At times, in the advantageous section transition lottery, a lottery is performed using a lottery table having at least "1" or more. However, the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set to "1/17500" or more.

Next, in step S346, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has been won in the lottery in step S345. When it is determined that the advantageous section has been won, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that the advantageous section has not been won, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S347, advantageous section transition processing is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 45, and is the process of setting flags and counters based on the winning of the advantageous section.
At the next step S348, an AT lottery is conducted. This process is the process shown in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In addition, not limited to the example of the present embodiment, AT may always be started (without AT lottery) when shifting to an advantageous section. Alternatively, when shifting to the advantageous section, it is always non-AT, and after shifting to the advantageous section (for example, after playing a predetermined number of games), it may be determined whether or not to execute AT.

FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the advantageous section transition processing in step S347 of FIG.
First, in step S351, the main control board 50 turns on ("1") the advantageous section type flag. Next, proceeding to step S352, the main control board 50 sets the advantageous interval clear counter to the initial value of the number of games played in the advantageous interval "1500 (D)".

In the next step S353, "0" is set in the difference counter. If the difference counter continues to be updated during the normal section (non-advantageous section) and is always set to "0" at the end of the game when it is not the advantageous section, the process of step S353 is unnecessary. However, the initial value "0" may also be set for noise prevention.
At the end of the advantageous section, the initialization process including the difference counter is executed, so the difference counter is "0" at the start of the normal section. Therefore, if the specification is such that the difference counter is updated only during the advantageous interval, the difference counter at the start of the advantageous interval is "0", so it is possible to omit the processing of step S353. .
On the other hand, when the difference counter continues to be updated even during the non-advantageous section as in the present embodiment, the difference counter may be positive even immediately before the transition to the advantageous section. Therefore, the difference counter is set to "0" in step S353. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the AT lottery process in step S348 of FIG.
First, in step S361, an AT lottery is executed based on the combination lottery result. For this lottery, as in step S345, an AT lottery may be performed using a lottery table in which winning numbers are determined for each combination lottery result.
It should be noted that the AT lottery does not necessarily have to be executed, and for example, a combination lottery result that is not determined by the AT and a combination lottery result that is always determined by the AT may be provided.
In the next step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the AT has been won in the AT lottery in step S361. When it is determined that the AT has been won, the process proceeds to step S363, and when it is determined that the AT has not been won, the process proceeds to step S365.

In step S363, the main control board 50 executes AT initial game number determination processing. This process is the process shown in FIG. 47, which will be described later. Next, proceeding to step S364, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to AT and turns on the AT flag. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
Here, the main game state of the present embodiment includes normal (non-advantageous section), CZ (advantageous section and non-AT), AT, and 1BB operation. It should be noted that it is possible to provide an omen as a main game state after winning the AT and before starting the AT, but in this embodiment, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the AT is started immediately when the AT is won. and Information on the main game state is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53 .
On the other hand, when it is determined that AT is not won in step S362 and the process proceeds to step S365, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to CZ. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing AT initial game number determination processing in step S363 in FIG.
In FIG. 47, in step S371, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning combination lottery in the current game is winning of a fixed combination. As described above, a rare combination such as middle stage cherry is set as the fixed combination. When it is determined that the fixed combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S372, and when it is determined that the fixed combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S373.
In step S372, the initial number of AT games is set to "100 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. On the other hand, in step S373, the initial number of AT games is set to "30 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the example of FIG. 47, the specification is such that the number of AT initial games is distributed according to whether or not the winning combination is won. A lottery may be conducted. In other words, even if the lottery result is one combination, any number of games may be selected from a plurality of number of games.
In addition, even during AT, as an addition lottery for the number of AT games, the number of AT games determination process shown in FIG. 47 may be executed. When the lottery for adding the number of AT games is won, the determined number of additions is added to the AT game number counter.

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG.
First, in step S381, it is determined whether or not the instruction condition (the condition for operating the instruction function) is satisfied. When the relevant game is AT and a combination having an advantageous pushing order such as pushing order bell is won, it is determined that the indication condition is satisfied.
In addition, when winning the advantageous section in the game this time ("Yes" in step S346 in FIG. 44) and winning AT ("Yes" in step S362 in FIG. 46), the advantageous section from the next game , this time the game is not an advantageous section. Therefore, since the instruction function cannot be activated in the game this time, the result is "No" in step S381.
When it is determined in step S381 that the instruction condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S382, and when it is determined that the instruction condition is not satisfied, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S382, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the current game is "3". In this process, it is determined whether or not the bet number is "3" by reading the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the RWM 53 .
When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S383, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the condition for activating the instruction function (executing the process related to the instruction function) is set to the number of bets "3" (one prescribed number). Therefore, even if the game is started with the number of bets "2" during the AT, for example, and a winning combination with an advantageous push order (for example, the push order bell) is won, the instruction function does not operate (the correct push order is not reported).

In the next step S383, the winning number (condition device number) is set. The winning number (condition device number) determined in the winning lottery process is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53 . Then, in step S383, the value stored in this storage area is stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S384 to set a pressing order instruction number table (not shown). Here, the leading address of the pressing order instruction number table is stored in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S385.

In step S385, designated address data is set. In this processing, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning number (condition device number) is used as an offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the head address of the push order instruction number table is obtained. As a result, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is stored in the A register.
Then, in step S386, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (area for storing the push order instruction number; not shown in FIG. 35).
In the next step S387, the A register value (pressing order instruction number) is stored as the acquired number data.

In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery winning combination is the same as in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment) described later. Then, when the winning numbers "3" to "8" are won during AT, the pushing order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is set. The relationship between the winning number and the push order instruction number stored in the winning number data is as follows.
Winning number "3": Push order instruction number "A1 (H)"
Winning number "4": Push order instruction number "A2 (H)"
Winning number "5": Push order instruction number "A3 (H)"
Winning number "6": Push order instruction number "A4 (H)"
Winning number "7": Push order instruction number "A5 (H)"
Winning number "8": Push order instruction number "A6 (H)"

For example, when the winning number "3" is won during AT, the pushing order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the winning number data by the pushing order instruction number setting process of FIG. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 55, which will be described later.

After step S387, the process advances to step S388 to determine whether or not the advantageous section display LED flag is on (lit). When it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S389.
In step S389, it is determined whether or not the game state (RT or main game state) of the current game is a game state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1". It should be noted that whether or not the game state is such that the interval Sim payout rate exceeds “1” is preset, and here, it is determined whether or not the game state is the preset game state. Specifically, the data of the current RT and the main game state are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53. By reading this data, the game state of the current game exceeds the section Sim ball payout rate "1". Determine whether or not When it is determined that the game state is in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the process proceeds to step S390, and when it is determined that the section Sim ball output rate does not exceed "1", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. do. In step S390, the advantageous section display LED flag is turned on. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit by the interrupt processing executed after step S390. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As described above, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is not yet lit and the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1", the advantageous interval display LED 77 is turned on. Since the conditions for lighting are satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when winning the advantageous interval transition lottery, the advantageous interval display LED 77 may be lit before the start of the next game. Alternatively, after moving to the advantageous section, before activating the instruction function, or even if the section Sim ball output rate does not exceed "1", at any timing (when the arbitrarily set lighting condition is satisfied) ), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be lit.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S294 in FIG.
First, in step S391, the main control board 50 acquires payout number data. This process is a process of storing the value of payout number data in the A register.
Next, in step S392, it is determined whether or not medals are to be paid out. Specifically, it determines whether or not the payout number data (A register value) is "0". When it is determined to be "0", that is, when it is determined that no medals have been paid out, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", that is, when it is determined that medals will be paid out, the process proceeds to step S393.

In step S393, the value of credit amount data is obtained.
Next, proceeding to step S394, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the limit value. Specifically, when the credit amount data obtained in step S393 is "50 (D)", it is determined that the credit amount has reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S398. (D)", it is determined that the number of credits has not reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S395.

In step S395, a waiting time for credit addition is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 100 ms as the standby time, the number of times of interrupt processing is set to "46" (46×2.235 ms=about 100 ms). Specifically, "00000000 (B)" is set as the B register value, and "00101110 (B)" is set as the C register value.
Next, the flow advances to step S396 to execute 2-byte time wait processing. This process is a process of decrementing the BC register value for each interrupt process and waiting until it becomes "0".

When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S396 ends, the process proceeds to step S397 to add "1" to the value of the credit number data. As a result, the display of the credit amount display LED 76 becomes "+1" due to the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S397. For example, the display of the credit amount display LED 76 changes from "08" to "09". After the process of step S397, the process proceeds to step S399.

When the process proceeds from step S394 to step S398, a single medal payout process (a process of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. In this process, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, when the on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is detected at a predetermined timing, it is determined that one medal has been paid out correctly. to decide.
By the above processing, the number of credits is increased until the number of credits reaches the limit value, and when the number of credits reaches the limit, the processing of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 is executed.

In step S399, "1" is added to the acquisition number data. As a result, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "+1". For example, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "02" to "03".
In the next step S400, "1" is subtracted from the number-of-payouts data. In this step S400, only the payout number data is updated, and the value of the payout number data buffer is not updated.

Next, in step S401, it is determined whether or not medal payout has been completed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the updated payout number data has become "0". When it is determined that the number of payout data is "0", the processing according to this flow chart is terminated, and when it is determined that the number of payout data is not "0", the process returns to step S393 to continue the processing.

In the above payout process, when performing the payout process of adding "1" to the number of credits, a standby time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S395 and S396. As a result, the player can see that the display of the credit number display LED 76 counts up. For example, when the display of the credit number display LED 76 before credit addition is "08" and eight medals are added to this, "display "08"→100 ms standby processing→display "09"→100 ms Standby processing → . . . → 100 ms standby processing → display “16”. On the other hand, if a waiting time is not provided when adding "1" to the number of credits, the display will appear to change from "08" to "16" in an instant.
Then, as in this embodiment, when the number of credits is added, a 2-byte time waiting process is executed for each addition of "1". ”) can be synchronized with the counting up of the number of credits.

On the other hand, when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number of "50 (D)" and medals are actually paid out in the process of step S398, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S395 and S396 is not provided.
This is because the hopper motor 36 is driven to actually pay out one medal, and it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a two-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG.
First, in step S411, a process of clearing the flag of the condition device (also called winning information, stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) is performed. This processing is processing for clearing conditions other than the conditional device for the special combination, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the effective line, the processing for clearing the conditional device for the special combination is also executed. In the next step S412, the replay display LED 79f is extinguished. This process is a process of setting the bit corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 to "0". Next, in step S413, the replay activation flag is cleared. This processing is processing to set the D0 bit of the operating state flag to "0".

In the next step S414, it is determined whether or not the AT game number counter has become "0". Here, the AT game number counter is updated in step S281 (FIG. 43) during the main process of FIG. 41, as described above. Thus, in this embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated after the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 41), but not limited to this, for example, in FIG. check processing) or within the processing of step S301 (for example, before step S414 in FIG. 50).
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example of a game number management type AT that updates the AT game number counter is shown. determine whether it happened or not. Note that the AT difference number counter is updated after the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 41) due to winning.
When it is determined that the AT game number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S415, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S416. At step S415, the AT flag is turned off.
Next, the process advances to step S416 to execute advantageous section counter management. This process is a process of updating the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, etc., and is the process shown in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, which will be described later. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

51 and 52 are flow charts showing the advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. FIG. 51 shows example 1 and FIG. 52 shows example 2. FIG.
The following processing is executed in the advantageous section counter management.
1) Updating the advantageous section clear counter 2) Updating the difference counter 3) Determining whether or not the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied 4) When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, initialize (clear) )
Also, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of the number of bets (predetermined number).
In this embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether the section is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section (normal section). However, it may be configured such that it is judged whether or not it is in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section counter management is executed only when it is in the advantageous section.

In Example 1 of FIG. 51, in step S421, the address value of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "F063(H)" is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S422, "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register. The subtraction here is, for example, as follows.
"0010 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "000F (H)"
"0001 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (zero flag = 1)
"0000 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (carry flag = 1)

As described above, even if "1" is subtracted from "0000(H)", there is no digit reduction, and "0000(H)" is maintained. In this way, no matter what the value before subtraction is, it is one instruction (one step) that only subtracts "1". is unnecessary, and the process of adding the value of the carry flag after the subtraction is also unnecessary. Therefore, the time required for updating the count value can be greatly reduced. Further, by configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous interval from the value of the advantageous interval clear counter, and to determine whether or not the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied (for example, when the game in the advantageous interval reaches 1500 Judgment as to whether or not a game has been executed, whether or not an arbitrary termination condition has been satisfied, etc.) is also unnecessary.

In the next step S423, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section clear counter value before subtraction is "0". This process is determined by whether or not the carry flag has become "1" in the subtraction process of step S422.
When the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), the process proceeds to step S436; when the carry flag is not "1" (when the value before subtraction is not "0") The process proceeds to step S424. It should be noted that when the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), this game is not a game in an advantageous section (this game is a game in a non-advantageous section (normal section) is).

At step S424, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the subtraction result (after subtraction) at step S422 is "0". This process is determined by whether or not the zero flag has become "1" in the subtraction process of step S422. That is, it is determined whether or not the value before subtraction was "1".
When the zero flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S435, and when the zero flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S425. When the zero flag becomes "1" (when the subtraction result is "0"), the game in the advantageous section of the current game ends (the next game is a game in the non-advantageous section (normal section)). ) means that

In step S425, the value of the difference number counter is acquired. This process is a process of reading the value of the difference number counter and storing it in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S426, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the replay operation symbol is displayed in the current game (whether or not the replay wins). In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "1". When it is determined that the regame operation pattern is displayed, the process proceeds to step S434, and when it is determined that the regame operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S427.

In step S427, a payout number data buffer is acquired. This process is a process of reading the payout number data buffer and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S428, a process of adding the number of payouts to the difference number counter is executed. This process is a process of adding the A register value (payout number data buffer value) to the HL register value (difference number counter) and storing the added value in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S429 to acquire the value of the bet number data. This process is a process of reading the bet number data and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S430, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter. This process is a process of subtracting the A register value from the HL register value and storing the subtraction result in the HL register. Here, when the HL register value is less than "0", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S431, it is determined whether or not the subtraction result in step S430 is less than "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1" as a result of the subtraction in step S430. move on. On the other hand, when the carry flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not less than "0"), the process proceeds to step S433.

In step S432, a process of clearing (setting to "0") the HL register value is executed. Then, in the next step S433, the difference counter value is saved. This process is a process of storing the HL register value in the difference number counter. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S433 via step S432, the difference number counter becomes "0".
In the next step S434, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the difference number counter has exceeded the upper limit value. The upper limit value of the difference number counter is set to "2400 (D)". In this process, a comparison operation is performed between the HL register value and "2401(D)". In this comparison operation, the carry flag becomes "0" when the HL register value is larger, and becomes "1" when the HL register value is smaller. Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the HL register value is smaller), it is determined that the upper limit is not exceeded, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit is exceeded (when the carry flag is "0"), the process proceeds to step S435. When the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value, the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied.
In step S435, the RWM 53 initializes the storage area relating to the advantageous section (clears the data relating to the advantageous section). The data relating to the advantageous interval includes an advantageous interval clear counter, an advantageous interval type flag, a difference number counter, an advantageous interval display LED flag, an AT flag, an AT game number counter, and the like. Furthermore, there is information on the main game state. Note that the information about the advantageous section does not include the RT status number, the LED display counter, and the like. Specifically, in FIG. 35, "F000(H)" to "F052(H)" are not included.

For example, the data cleared in step S435 does not include the LED display counter.
Now assume that the LED display counter is cleared. In that case, the LED display counter becomes "0" due to the end of the advantageous section. Specifically, if the LED display counter is initialized when it is "00000010(B)", the LED display counter would normally be updated to "00000001(B)" in the next interrupt processing, and the LED Although the LED corresponding to the display counter (specifically, the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76) can be turned on, the LED display counter becomes "00010000 (B)". As a result, the display of the LED whose LED display counter corresponds to "00000001(B)" is delayed, so that it may appear as if it is turned off for a moment.

Furthermore, the data cleared in step S435 does not include, for example, the following data.
1) Excitation information of the motor 32 2) Error information when an error occurs 3) Data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (total number of games counter, total payout counter, etc.)
4) Timer value for minimum playing time (4.1 seconds) (set at step S285 in FIG. 41)
5) Input port 51 information 6) Control command buffer data 7) Stack area data 8) External signal information The above are examples of typical data, and the data that is not cleared is limited to the above data. It does not mean that you will be

Next, proceeding to step S436, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section type flag is "0" (normal section). When the advantageous section type flag is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not "0", especially when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section) in this embodiment, the process proceeds to step S437. The reason why the advantageous interval type flag is "1" at this time is that the advantageous interval transition lottery was won in the game this time, and the advantageous interval type flag was set to "1" at step S351 in FIG. In this case, it is judged as "Yes" in step S423, and the process proceeds to step S436. On the other hand, when proceeding to step S436 via step S435, since the advantageous section type flag has been cleared in step S435, it will not be determined as "No" in step S436.

In step S437, an initial value is set in an advantageous section clear counter. This process is a process of setting "1500 (D)" in the advantageous section clear counter. Here, "1500 (D)" is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that "F063 (H)" is set in the HL register in step S421. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In the above advantageous section counter management, when updating the difference number counter, the number of payouts is first added (step S428), and then the number of bets is subtracted (step S430). The reason for this processing is as follows.
For example, when the difference counter is "2 (D)", the number of bets is "3 (D)"
, that the number of payouts was "9(D)".
Here, when the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference number counter, it becomes "-1 (D) (actually, "FFFF (H)")", and the carry flag becomes "1". Adding the number of payouts adds "9 (D)" to "-1 (D)", resulting in "8 (D)", and the carry flag is "1" (the carry is that it will occur).

Since the difference number of the game this time is "+6", simply by adding the difference number "+6" to the difference number counter "2(D)" before the update, the carry flag becomes "1" and irregular situation arises. In other words, the process of step S431 (whether the subtraction result is less than "0") cannot be determined by whether the carry flag is "1". If the determination is made based on whether or not the carry flag is "1", it will be determined "Yes" in step S431 even though the carry flag has not occurred, and the difference counter will be initialized in step S432. It will set the value. The carry flag is set to "1" regardless of whether a carry or a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference number counter is "2 (D)", if the payout number "9 (D)" is added first, the difference number counter becomes "11 (D)" at that time, and then bet. Subtracting the number yields "8(D)". In this case, since no carry occurs, the carry flag is "0".
For the above reason, when updating the difference number counter, if the number of payouts is first added and then the number of bets is subtracted, the determination process of step S431 can be executed by a simple process using the carry flag.

Also, in the advantageous section counter management of this embodiment, the advantageous section counter subtraction process (step S422) is first executed, and when the value before subtraction is "0" ("Yes" in step S423, i.e. If it is a non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S436 without executing the difference counter updating process (steps S425 to S430). Therefore, in this embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether the section is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section. is not executed to improve processing efficiency. For this reason, the processing order is such that the subtraction processing of the advantageous section clear counter is performed first, and then the difference counter update processing is performed. Of course, it is determined whether it is in the advantageous section, and if it is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is decremented if the specification is to execute the subtraction processing of the advantageous section clear counter and the update processing of the difference number counter. It is also possible to execute the process of updating the difference number counter prior to the process.

Further, even when the determination in step S426 is "Yes" (when the replay wins), the process of step S434 is executed. By doing so, even if an abnormal value (a value exceeding 2400 (D)) is stored in the difference counter due to noise or the like at the end of the game, the answer at step S434 is "Yes". , can end the advantageous section. On the other hand, if such confirmation is unnecessary, the processing of this flowchart may be ended when "Yes" is determined in step S426.

Further, in the example of FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed in step S426. S430) is skipped to speed up the processing.
In particular, in a game in which the replay operation symbols are stopped and displayed, it is conceivable that the number of payouts in the relevant game is regarded as "0" (deemed number of payouts) and the number of bets in the next game is regarded as "0" and the difference counter is updated. . However, for example, SB (single bonus) is provided as a winning combination during an advantageous section, and when SB is won, one SB game with a bet number of "1" is executed in the next game, but this SB game There is a case where the replay is won and the replay operation pattern is stopped and displayed. In this case, since the next game is not an SB game, the bet number is "3" (a game other than the SB game cannot be played with the bet number "1"). However, in this case, the number of presumed payouts in the SB game does not match the number of bets in the next game, so how the difference counter should be counted becomes a problem.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above problem can be solved by not updating the difference number counter in the game in which the replay operation symbols are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. In FIG. 52, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG.
In Example 1 of FIG. 51, the number of payouts is first added to the difference counter, and then the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, and then the number of payouts is added to the difference counter.

In the example of FIG. 51, if the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter and then the number of payouts is added, the carry flag may become "1" even if there is no carry-over in the end. It has been explained that whether the carry flag is "1" or not cannot be determined whether it is "0" or not.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, after subtracting the number of bets from the difference number counter (step S430), the number of payouts is added (step S428), and in step S441, without referring to the value of the carry flag, It is determined whether the calculation result is less than "0".
Specifically, in step S441 of FIG. 52, step S441 determines whether or not the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register (register that stores upper digits) value of the HL register value is "1". is less than "0".

for example,
Difference number counter value (HL register value) = 0000 (H) (before operation)
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
Suppose that
In this case, the difference counter value after calculation is
0000(H)-3(H)=FFFD(H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.
Note that "/" indicates a delimiter for every 4 bits in binary notation.

In the above example, the HL register value before calculation is "0000 (H)", but the HL register value before calculation is not "0000 (H)"value", for example,
Difference number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = FFFE (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FE (H) (1111/1110 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, when the HL register value is not "0000 (H)" and "difference number in current game<HL register value", for example, firstly,
Difference number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D)) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FD (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.

Secondly,
Difference number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D)) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FC (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FC (H) (1111/1100 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, thirdly,
Difference number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D)) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 095D (H) (after operation)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value = 5D (H) (0101/1101 (B))
becomes.

On the other hand, the upper limit value of the difference number counter is "2400 (D)". Here, if "2400 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/0000 (B)"
becomes.
Since the upper limit value of the difference counter is "2400 (D)", when a value exceeding "2400 (D)" is stored in the difference counter, it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference number is The counter is cleared (step S435 in FIGS. 51 and 52).
At the end of the current game, the difference counter value reached "2400 (D)", but since it did not exceed "2400 (D)", it was determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous interval were not satisfied, and the next game was played. Suppose you migrate. In the next game, the difference number increases most when the number of bets is "1" and the number of payouts is "15 (D)".
)”.
Therefore, the difference number counter value in this case is "2414 (D)".
Here, if "2414 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)"
becomes.

Also, when the difference counter value reaches "2414 (D)", it exceeds "2400 (D)", so the difference counter is cleared in the game and becomes "0 (D)".
As described above, the maximum value that the difference number counter can take during the game is "2414 (D)", that is, "0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)".

Therefore, when the HL register value is "2414 (D)",
H register value = 0000/1001 (B)
L register value = 0110/1110 (B)
, and the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is "0".
Therefore, the D7 bit of the H register value is always "0" when the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value is in the range of "0(D)" to "2414(D)".

As described above, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is always "0" and never becomes "1", except for the case of carry-down.
In order for the D7 bit of the H register value to become "1", the difference number counter value must be "32768 (D)". The advantageous section will not continue until

On the other hand, as mentioned above,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference number counter) = 0000 (H) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is "FFFD(H)".
Here, "FFFD(H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1101 (B)"
is.

therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101 (B)
, and the D7 bit of the H register value becomes "1".
Similarly, before the operation,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference number counter) = 0002 (H)
, the HL register value becomes "FFFF(H)" when the difference number counter is updated.

Here, "FFFF(H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1111 (B)"
is.
therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
, and the D7 bit of the H register value becomes "1".
Thus, when a carry occurs, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes "1".

From the above, as a result of updating the difference number counter, if there is no carry-down, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0", and if there is a carry-down, the D7 bit of the H register value is " 1”.
Therefore, when determining whether or not the operation result is less than "0" in step S441 of FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the D7 bit of the H register value is "1". When the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it is determined that the operation result is less than "0".
In this way, it is possible to determine whether the operation result is "0" without determining whether the carry flag is "1" as a result of the operation.
Since it is determined whether or not the calculation result is "0" without using the carry flag, there is no problem even if the payout number is added after the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter value.

Further, as is clear from the above, even if the maximum value "2414 (D)" that the difference number counter can take is not limited to the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, the D6 bit, D5 bit, and The D4 bit is also "0".
On the other hand, when a carry-down occurs in the difference counter value, not only the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, but also the D6, D5 and D4 bits become "1".

Therefore, in step S441 in FIG. 52, instead of determining whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it may be determined whether the D6 bit is "1". , may determine whether the D5 bit is '1', and may determine whether the D4 bit is '1'. In either case, when the bit is "1", the operation result is less than "0", and when it is not "1", the operation result is not less than "0".
As is clear from the above, even in Example 1 (step S431) of FIG. It is also possible to determine whether there is

51 and 52, the advantageous section clear counter is updated (step S422), the difference number counter is updated (steps S428 and S430), and whether or not the advantageous section clear counter is "0" is determined. Determination (step S424), determination of whether or not the difference number counter has exceeded the upper limit (step S434), and initialization of information on the advantageous section (step S435) are performed regardless of the number of bets (prescribed number) in this game. , is executed. Therefore, even if the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0" or the difference counter exceeds the upper limit as a result of playing the game with the number of bets (prescribed number) "2", the advantageous section ends. do.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 53 in a 2.235 ms cycle (but not limited to this time cycle) in parallel with the main processing.
After shifting to interrupt processing in step S451, in step S452, as initial processing, register value saving and duplicate interrupt prohibition processing are performed. Here, since the registers of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing are used in the interrupt processing, the current register values are saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 . Furthermore, the interrupt disable flag is turned on so that the next interrupt processing is not started during the interrupt processing. This is because, for example, an execution request for interrupt processing may be made during execution of power-off processing.

In the next step S453, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, and is a process of detecting whether or not a power-off detection signal has been input.
In the next step S454, the interrupt counter value is updated. Note that the interrupt counter value is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. FIG.
In the next step S455, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has passed can be mentioned.

Next, the process proceeds to step S456 to perform LED display control (I_LED_OUT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, and is a process of lighting LEDs (digits 1 to 5) according to the state of the slot machine 10. FIG.
Errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include non-recoverable errors and recoverable errors. In the case of non-recoverable errors, an error display is output by the main processing (for example, step S304 in FIG. 41), but the error is recoverable. An error is displayed by this LED display control every time an interrupt is processed.

Next, in step S457, the input port 51 is read. As a result, whether or not the bed switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, switch signals, and input signals from various sensors are read, and data based on the input port 51 (level data, rise data, trailing edge data) is generated and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35).

In the next step S458, it is determined whether or not the set value is within the normal range. Here, the set value data stored at the address "F000(H)" is read, and whether the range of the set value data is normal (whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"). ) determines whether or not If it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and if it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S470 to shift to unrecoverable error processing. The error in this case is called an "E6" error in the present embodiment, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .

In step S459, internal random number check processing is performed. In this embodiment, a flag is provided that turns on when an error occurs in the internal random numbers, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random number for the combination lottery (such as when the random number update is slow) is detected, the error flag is turned on.
Then, in step S460, it is determined whether or not an error has occurred in the internal random number (whether the error flag is ON). If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process advances to step S470 to shift to unrecoverable error processing. The content of the error display at this time is "E7".

In step S461, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed for each reel 31 (left, middle, right), and includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, start of deceleration, and standby depending on the operating state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the flow advances to step S462 to perform port output processing. In this process, the excitation output of the (reel) motor 32 and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S463, an input error check process is executed. This processing is processing for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in various sensors.
In the next step S464, control command transmission processing is performed. This process is a process of transmitting the set control command (the untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53 ) to the sub-control board 80 .
Specifically, when the control command is set in the command buffer, in the subsequent interrupt processing (if the command buffer is empty, in principle, the next interrupt processing after that time), this step S464 A control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by .

In the next step S465, the data for the external signal stored in RWM 53 is stored in the register. Then, in the next step S466, an external signal is output from the output port 52 (output port 5 in FIG. 33) (the signal is transmitted to the external common terminal board 100).
Next, the flow advances to step S467 to perform ratio display preparation processing. This process is a process of updating a timer related to the ratio display of the management information display LED 74, outputting segment data, and the like.

In the next step S468, random number update processing is performed. Next, in step S469, the register value saved in step S452 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As shown in the above processing, the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, the status display LED 79 (79a to 79f), the set value display LED 73, and the management information display LED 74 are turned on/off by the interrupt processing every 2.235ms. controlled.
Furthermore, when a control command that has not been transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer for each interrupt process, the transmission process is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed during unrecoverable error processing (interrupt processing is interrupted until normal recovery is performed).
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 53 based on data from the input port, transmission of control commands to the sub-control board 80, etc.) is executed. In order to prevent this, the interrupt itself is prohibited.
If an unrecoverable error occurs and an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer, the command is not sent to the sub-control board 80 . This is because the control command stored in the buffer may not be correct.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG.
In step S481, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off detection signal was turned on in the previous interrupt process. Here, a voltage monitoring device (power failure detection circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50 detects a predetermined input voltage when the voltage drops below a predetermined value (V1 or less in the example of FIG. 3). Since a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit of the port 51, it is detected whether or not the signal has been input. Furthermore, when the power-off detection signal is turned on, it is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
When it is determined that the power-off detection signal is on in the previous interrupt processing, the process proceeds to step S482, and when it is determined that it is not on, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

At step S482, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is on in the current interrupt process. When it is determined that the switch is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S483.
When both of the above steps S481 and S482 are determined to be "Yes" (when the power failure detection signal is input in succession for two interruptions), it is determined that the power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps.
In step S483, the outputs of all output ports 52 are turned off. By this process, for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (while the reel 31 is rotating) or the hopper motor 36 is being driven (while medals are being paid out), the driving is stopped.
Next, in step S484, a power-off processing completed flag is stored in the RWM53. This process is a process of storing in the RWM 53 data indicating that normal power-off processing has been executed.

In the next step S485, checksum data of the RWM 53 is calculated. This process calculates a checksum including the work area (RWM 53) used by the program, and the target program use area includes the program work area, unused area, stack area, and the like.
Then, in the next step S486, it is determined whether or not the calculation of the entire range of the checksum has been completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the checksum calculation is completed, the process proceeds to step S487.

In step S487, the calculated checksum is stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address. Here, the data to be stored in the RWM 53 is 1-byte data (also called complement data) that becomes "0" when all the data in the program use area and the value stored in the predetermined address are added at the checksum of the RWM 53. ).
When the checksum of the RWM 53 is executed at the start of the program, all the data in the program use area of the RWM 53 in the same range as above and the checksum data are added. If the checksum data thus calculated is "0", it is determined to be a normal value, and if not "0", it is determined to be an abnormal value.
Next, the process advances to step S488 to enter a reset wait state. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50, so in step S488, the output of the reset signal is awaited.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S456 in FIG.
First, in step S491, output ports 2 and 3 (see FIG. 33) are turned off. This process is a process of outputting "00000000 (B)" from the output ports 2 and 3. FIG. In the next step S492, output port 4 (see FIG. 33) is turned off. This process is also a process of outputting "00000000 (B)" from the output port 4 in the same manner as the above process.

In step S493, the LED display counter is updated. In this process, the bit "1" of the LED display counter is updated by right-shifting by one digit.
At next step S494, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is "0". .
At step S495, an LED display counter is initialized. Here, processing is executed to change the LED display counter "00000000 (B)" to "00010000 (B)". Then, the process proceeds to step S496.
In step S496, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag stored in the RWM 53 are obtained. Here, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, and the LED
Store the value of the display request flag in the E register.

Next, in step S497, error number display data, LED display data, and bet display data are obtained. Here, in the storage area of the RWM 53, a storage area for storing error number display data when an error occurs, and LED display data indicating ON/OFF of the game start display LED 79d to the replay display LED 79f among the status display LEDs 79 are stored. Storage areas and storage areas for storing bet display data indicating ON/OFF of (1 to 3) bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are provided.
Specifically, the LED display data is configured as follows.
D0: Not used D1: Not used D2: Not used D3: "1" when game can be started, "0" when game cannot be started
D4: "1" when medals can be inserted, "0" when medals cannot be inserted
D5: "1" when replay winning, "0" when replay not winning
D6: Not used D7: Not used Bits D3 to D5 of the LED display data correspond to segments D to F of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.

Also, the bet display data is configured as follows.
When 0 bet: 00000000
When betting one card: 00000001
When 2 cards are bet: 00000011
When 3 cards are bet: 00000111
Bits D0 to D2 of the bet display data correspond to segments A to C of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.
Then, in step S497, the error number display data is read and stored in the B register. Also, the LED display data is read and stored in the A register, and the bet display data is read and stored in the C register.

In the next step S498, the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (BET display data) are ORed (synthesized), and the result of the calculation is set as segment data for the output port 3. FIG. An OR operation of the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (BET display data) provides data indicating whether the state display LED 79 is on or off. When there is a request to display digit 5 ("Yes" in step S516), this segment data is output from output port 3. FIG.
Next, in step S499, the register for setting the segment data for output port 4 is cleared.

In the next step S500, the value obtained by ANDing the LED display counter value (D register value) and the LED display request flag value (E register value) is stored in the D register, and whether or not the value is "0" is determined. to judge. When it is judged to be "0", it is judged that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S516. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be "0", it is determined that there is a display request, and the process proceeds to step S501.

In step S501, the LED segment table 2 is set. Here, the LED segment table of the present embodiment includes an LED segment table 1 that defines segment data when displaying an error number, and an LED segment table other than the error number (credit amount, payout amount, setting value, display during setting change, pressing order An LED segment table 2 defining segment data for displaying the instruction information and the prescribed number of instructions) is provided and stored in the ROM 54 in the usable area. Then, in step S501, the top address of the LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Here, offsets and segment data are defined as follows in the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.
Offset "0": Segment data to display "0" Offset "1": Segment data to display "1" Offset "2": Segment data to display "2" Offset "3": Display "3" Segment data Offset "4": Segment data that displays "4" Offset "5": Segment data that displays "5" Offset "6": Segment data that displays "6" Offset "7": Segment data that displays "7" Segment data to display Offset "8": Segment data to display "8" Offset "9": Segment data to display "9" Offset "A": Segment data to display "=" Offset "B": "A" segment data to display

For example, first, if payout number data "10 (H)" is stored in the acquisition number data, the offset of the upper digits of the number of payout data is "1" and the offset of the lower digits is "0". becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is illuminated, segment data indicating "1" is obtained, and when digit 4a is illuminated, segment data indicating "0" is obtained.
Secondly, for example, when setting change display data "88(H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digits of the setting change display data is "8", and the lower digits are offset. offset is "8". As a result, when the digit 3a lights up, the segment data displaying "8" is obtained, and when the digit 4a lights up, the segment data displaying "8" is obtained.

Furthermore, thirdly, for example, when the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored in the acquisition number data, the offset of the upper digit of the push order instruction number is "A", and the offset of the lower digit is "A". The offset is "1". As a result, when the digit 3a is illuminated, segment data indicating "=" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is illuminated, segment data indicating "1" is obtained.
Further, fourthly, for example, when the specified specified number display data "0B(H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit is "0" and the offset of the lower digit is "B". becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is illuminated, segment data indicating "0" is obtained, and when digit 4a is illuminated, segment data indicating "A" is obtained.

Next, the process proceeds to step S502, and first, set value data is acquired. Here, the set value data stored at the address "F000(H)" is read and stored in the A register. Next, "1" is added to the A register value to generate set value display data, which is stored in the A register. This setting value display data becomes an offset value when displaying the setting value.
As will be described later, the segment data stored in the address (of the LED segment table 1 or 2) of the value obtained by adding the offset value to the head address value of the LED segment table 1 or 2 is acquired.
Next, the process advances to step S503 to determine whether or not there is a request to display the set values. Here, when the D register value is "00010000 (B)" and the setting is being changed or confirmed, it is determined that there is a setting value display request. When it is determined that there is a request to display the set value, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no request to display the setting value, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, credit amount data is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S505, the upper digit offset is acquired. This process executes an operation of dividing the credit amount data (A register value) obtained in step S504 by "10 (D)", stores the quotient value in the A register, and stores the remainder value in the E register. processing.
In the next step S506, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit amount. This processing determines whether or not the D0 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 1a) of the D register value is "1", and determines "Yes" when it is "1". When it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit amount, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit amount. This process determines whether or not the D1 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 2a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", determines "Yes" and proceeds to step S513. . On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit amount, the process proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, the acquisition number data is read and stored in the A register. Here, payout number data is stored in the winning number data at the timing when medals are paid out based on the winning of a minor winning combination. Further, at the timing during setting change, display data during setting change "88 (H)" is stored. Furthermore, when it is time to instruct the specified number, the specified specified number display data "0B(H)" is stored. Further, at the timing when the instruction function is activated (the push order is notified), the push order instruction number "=x (x=one of 1 to 6)" is stored. Any of these data is acquired and stored in the A register.

In the next step S509, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the error display. In this process, the B register value (error number display data stored in step S497) is read, and it is determined whether or not it is "0". If it is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed, and the process proceeds to step S511.
In step S510, the LED segment table 1 for error display is set. A description of the specific configuration of the LED segment table 1 will be omitted. In step S510, a process of storing the top address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register is executed. Therefore, in this case, the head address of the LED segment table 1 is set (stored in the HL register) instead of the head address of the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.

In the next step S511, an offset for upper digits is acquired. In this process, when an error is displayed (when the B register value is not "0"), an operation is performed to divide the B register value by "10 (D)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is is stored in the E register. On the other hand, when the error is not displayed (when the B register value is "0"), the A register value (payout number data, setting change display data, prescribed number display data, or push order instruction number) is set to "10 ( D)" and store the quotient in the A register and the remainder in the E register.

In the next step S512, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED78. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 3a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S513.

Proceeding to step S513, the offset for the lower digits is obtained. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the E register in the A register. That is, the upper digit value and the lower digit value are exchanged between the A register and the E register. Then, the process proceeds to step S514.
In step S514, segment data is obtained. This process adds the data stored in the HL register (leading address of the LED segment table 1 or 2) and the data (offset value) stored in the A register, and corresponds to the address after the addition (LED segment This is the process of storing the segment data of table 1 or 2) in the C register.

In the next step S515, segment data for output port 4 is set. The data set here is segment data for displaying the set value (digit 5b). Since the digits 1b to 4b are lit in the ratio display process (step S522) described later, the segment data of the digits 1b to 4b are not set here.
Therefore, at step S515, when "Yes" (setting value display request is present) at step S503, and segment data for setting value display is acquired at step S514 and stored in the C register, the C register value is output. Set as segment data for port 4.

Next, in step S516, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display digit 5. Here, the display request for digit 5 is made when the D register value is "00010000 (B)". When it is determined that there is a request to display digit 5, the process proceeds to step S520, and when it is determined that there is no request to display digit 5, the process proceeds to step S517.

In step S517, segment data for output port 3 is set. Here, the C register value stored in step S514 is set as segment data for output port 3. FIG. When "Yes" is determined in step S516 (when there is a request to display digit 5), the data set in step S498 becomes the segment data for output port 3. FIG.

In the next step S518, the data for the advantageous section display LED 77 is set. Here, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the value is "0". If the value of the LED flag indicating the advantageous section is not "0", it is determined whether or not the digit to be lit in this interrupt process is the digit 4a. When the D3 bit of the D register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to light the digit 4a. In this case, the segment data set in step S517 and the data obtained by performing the OR operation of "10000000" are set as the segment data for output port 3. FIG. As a result, data is set that enables the segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a to light up.

Next, in step S519, the segment data for output port 4 set in step S515 is cleared. This is to prevent the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) from lighting when there is no request to display digit 5 ("No" in step S516).
Then, in step S520, the digit signal is output from the output port 2, and the segment signal is output from the output port 3. Here, the D register value is set as the digit data of the output port 2 and output from the output port 2 .
The data of the segment signal output from the output port 3 is the data set in step S498 (when digit 5 lights up) or the data set in step S517 (when digits 1 to 4 light up).

Next, in step S521, the segment signal is output from the output port 4. FIG. The segment signal data output from the output port 4 is the segment data set in step S515 (when setting value display is requested) or the data cleared in step S519 (when setting value display is not requested). In other words, when the segment data for output port 4 is cleared in step S519, output port 4 outputs "00000000 (B)".
Next, the process advances to step S522 to shift to ratio display processing (processing for lighting the management information display LED 74). Note that, in the present embodiment, description of the ratio display process is omitted. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous interval display LED 77 and power interruption (when power interruption occurs while the advantageous interval indication LED 77 is lit) will be described.
In interrupt processing, when a power failure is detected in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps. In this case, the data stored in the RWM 53 is retained even after the power failure.
After the power is turned on, in the program start process (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 38, if the setting key switch is off, it is judged "No" in step S208. The process proceeds to power-off recovery processing (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) in S213.

In the power-off restoration process of FIG. 40, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set in step S253, and this range is the unused area of the RWM 53, as described above. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the advantageous section display LED flag at address "F062(H)" is not subject to initialization. The same applies to the LED display counter at address "F051(H)".

In the power-off restoration process of FIG. 40, when the initialization of the RWM 53 is completed, an interrupt is activated in step S262. Therefore, after step S262, the interrupt processing of FIG. 53 is executed at intervals of 2.235 ms. When the interrupt process is executed, the LED display counter value is read in step S496 during the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. Further, when "No" is determined in step S512, it is when there is a request to display the digit 4a. In this case, when it is not an error display ("No" in step S509) and the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", in step S518, the D7 bit of the segment data is set to "1", and the segment Data is output (step S520). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
As described above, when the power is turned off while the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous interval indication LED 77 is lit again when interrupt processing is executed in the power failure recovery processing.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on after the power is turned off, the following occurs.
In the program start process of FIG. 38, when the setting key switch is on, the result of step S208 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET; FIG. 39) of step S212.
In FIG. 39, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is specified in step S221, and this initialization range also includes the advantageous section display LED flag of the address "F062(H)". When it is determined that the power-off recovery is not normal and the process proceeds to step S223, the entire range of the RWM 53 (including the address "F062(H)") is initialized.

Therefore, by the initialization of the advantageous section display LED flag, even if "1" indicating lighting has been stored, it becomes "0" indicating lighting off.
After that, in step S233 of FIG. 39, an interrupt is activated. When the interrupt is activated, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 when the lighting timing of the setting value display LED 73 comes in the LED display control (FIG. 55). Then, in step S240 in FIG. 39, the setting value can be changed (the setting value can be changed by turning on the setting change switch).

Also, in FIG. 39, when the interrupt process is activated in step S233 and the LED display control (FIG. 55) is executed, even when the lighting timing of the digit 4a comes, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is already " 0”, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.
As described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on and the setting change process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up. Further, even if the setting change process is ended and the main process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.

Also, in the main processing of FIG. 41, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and power is cut off during the loop from step S286 to step S289, that is, during rotation of the reel 31, the following will occur. .
When the interruption of the power supply is detected in the interrupt process, all the output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. As a result, the rotating reel 31 (motor 32) also stops due to the power cutoff.

Next, when the power is supplied, the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above is performed, and the state before the power interruption is restored. As a result, the drive signal for the motor 32 is output from the output port 52 in the same manner as before the power was turned off. Here, the drive signal for the motor 32 before power-off is a signal for maintaining a constant speed state. In this embodiment, when the motor 32 (reel 31) is in a constant speed state, one interrupt (2.235 ms) is assumed to drive one step. However, even if a constant-speed drive signal is output from the beginning to the motor 32 after it has stopped driving, the motor 32 cannot be driven because the rotational torque is weak.

Therefore, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the index sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 (the index is not turned off). When it is determined that the index is not detected for a certain period of time, it is determined that the reel 31 is not rotating, and the motor 32 is reaccelerated (restarted). The acceleration of the motor 32 is, for example, first driven by 1 step with 20 interrupts (20×2.235=44.7 ms), then driven by 1 step with 16 interrupts, then driven by 1 step with 12 interrupts, and so on. This is a method in which one step is driven in a gradually decreasing time. The acceleration state requires a time of about 100 steps, for example. Thereby, rotation of the reel 31 can be started.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on and an interrupt is activated in step S262 in FIG. 40, digits 1a to 5a are dynamically lit based on the value of the LED display counter. When the value for lighting 3a (“00000100 (B)” in FIG. 34) is reached, the LED display counter becomes “00001000 (B)” after 4 interrupts from that point, and the digit 4a (advantage zone display LED 77) lights up. The time has come.

On the other hand, the power is turned off before the index of the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33 (for example, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 in the remaining "1" to several steps), and after the power is turned on. Even if it is determined that the index of the reel 31 is not detected by the reel sensor 33 and acceleration is performed again, as described above, at least several tens of interrupts are required before the reel 31 (motor 32) reaches the constant speed state. need.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the reel 31 enters the constant speed state after the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up. That is, when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

Further, when the reel 31 stops at a position where the index of the reel 31 is relatively distant from the reel sensor 33, several to several tens of interrupts are required until it is determined that the reel sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 after the interrupt activation. requires. Therefore, in this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up before the motor 32 is accelerated again.
As described above, the advantageous section display LED 77 is set to light up until the reel 31 rotates again and returns to the constant speed state after the power is turned off.

Also, in the main process of FIG. 41, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and the power is cut off while the hopper motor 36 is being driven in the medal payout process for winning a prize in step S294, the following will occur. . In addition, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor.
49, in step S398, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and when the payout sensors 37a and 37b normally detect the movable piece 39a as shown in FIG. , S31 to S34), it is determined that one medal has been paid out normally. The hopper motor 36 continues to drive until it is determined that the medals corresponding to the number of payouts have been paid out.
During the payout of medals, if a power cutoff is detected in interrupt processing before all the medals are paid out, all the output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. The drive signal is also turned off. As a result, the medal payout process is interrupted.

Next, when the power is supplied, the power return process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above is performed, and then the main process (FIG. 41) of step S294 (the medal payout process for winning a prize) is returned to. As a result, the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the output port 52 in the same manner as before the power was turned off. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 41, the main process does not proceed until the payout process due to winning in step S294 is completed.
On the other hand, when the power is restored from the power-off, the lighting timing of the digit 4a (advantageous section display LED 77) arrives within 4 interrupts, as described above.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8, the time required to pay out one medal is approximately 100 ms, although it cannot be generalized. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up before the medal payout process due to winning is resumed after the power is turned off and the remaining medals are paid out. In other words, after the power is turned off, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at the time when the medal payout process due to winning is completed.

In addition, the following method can be used to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off momentarily when there is an instantaneous power interruption.
As shown in FIG. 54, when a power failure is detected, the outputs of all ports 52 are turned off in step S483. is not output. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77, which is the segment P of the digit 4a, is extinguished.

Therefore, the process proceeds to step S488 in FIG. 54, after waiting for reset, when the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", an ON signal of D3 bit (digit 4a) is output from the output port 2, and For example, an ON signal of D7 bit (segment P) is output from the output port 3 . In FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S488, and interrupt processing does not occur in the loop processing after waiting for reset. As a result, even if an instantaneous interruption occurs, the advantageous section display LED 77 can be prevented from turning off visually.
Alternatively, in the process of step S483 in FIG. 54, output ports 2 and 3 may not be turned off, but other output ports may be turned off. Even with this control, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off due to a momentary interruption.

In this embodiment, the segment P of the digit 4a is set as the advantageous section display LED 77, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is illuminated by dynamic lighting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section display LEDs 77 may be composed of separate and independent LEDs. If the advantageous section display LED 77 is statically lit and the output port corresponding to the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned off even when the power interruption is detected, the advantageous section display LED 77 is prevented from being extinguished at the time of momentary interruption. can do.

Next, the differential number display on the sub-control board 80 side will be described. The sub-control board 80 displays an image of the difference number on the image display device 23 during AT. Therefore, in this embodiment, the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 is provided with the following storage areas.
has:
1) AT flag 2) Sub difference number counter 3) Pullback flag 4) Pullback game number counter

The main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to ON/OFF of the AT flag to the sub control board 80 every game. It should be noted that the command may be transmitted only when the AT flag on the main control board 50 side turns from off to on or from on to off.
The sub-control board 80 receives information on/off of the AT flag from the main control board 50 and turns on/off the AT flag provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Further, the sub-control board 80 stores that the AT flag on the side of the sub-control board 80 has turned from off to on (AT flag rise data) and from on to off (AT flag fall data). .

Further, as described above, the main control board 50 updates the AT game number counter every game during the AT, and when the AT game number counter becomes "0", the AT ends. Furthermore, when the difference counter reaches "2400 (D)" or when the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0", the AT (and the advantageous section) is terminated.
Since the main control board 50 executes the initialization processing of the difference counter when ending the AT and advantageous section, the difference counter becomes "0" when the next game shifts to the normal section.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 has a sub-difference number counter for counting the difference number during AT. The sub-difference number counter is "0" at the start of AT (except when AT is won during a withdrawal period described later and AT is started), and after that, the difference number is updated every game. It should be noted that, unlike the difference number counter of the main control board 50, when a digit is digitized, the digit is not corrected to "0", and the digit is left as it is.

For example, when starting AT,
1st game: Non-winning role (difference number "-3")
Second game: Non-winning role (difference number "-3")
3rd game: winning the push order bell (difference number "+5")
4th game: Non-winning role (difference number "-3")
5th game: winning the push order bell (difference number "+5")
Suppose that
In this case, the sub-difference number counter (2-byte counter)
1st game: 0 (H) - 3 (H) = FFFD (H)
Second game: FFFD (H) - 3 (H) = FFFA (H)
3rd game: FFFA (H) + 5 (H) = FFFF (H)
4th game: FFFF (H) - 3 (H) = FFFC (H)
5th game: FFFC (H) + 5 (H) = 0001 (H)
and will be updated.

When the replay is won, the sub-difference number counter is not updated in the same way as the difference number counter. It should be noted that, without being limited to this, the number of payouts may be set to "0" in the game at the time of winning a replay, and the number of bets in the next game (during replaying) may be set to "0" to calculate the sub-difference number.
Furthermore, as described above, the difference number counter of the main control board 50 executes the initialization process when the advantageous section ends. Even if it ends, there is a case where the initialization processing is not immediately executed and the count is not stopped. The sub-control board 80 turns on (“1”) the withdrawal flag when ending the AT and continuing the counting of the sub-difference number counter.

The sub control board 80 judges the sub difference number counter value at the end of AT, and when the sub difference number counter value is less than (or less than) a predetermined value (for example, "2000 (D)"), the sub difference number counter continue counting. On the other hand, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds a predetermined value (or is equal to or greater than a predetermined value), the sub difference number counter is cleared. If the sub-difference number counter is close to the upper limit and the AT ends, and the AT is pulled back, the sub-difference number counter value may reach the upper limit immediately. , so as not to carry over the difference in the number of sheets to the next AT.

The pullback flag is a flag for determining whether or not the AT has been pulled back (whether or not it has been re-elected) within a predetermined number of games (“50” games in this embodiment) after the AT is finished.
At the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on, and "50 (D)" is set in the pullback game number counter. The pullback game number counter is for counting the number of games after the end of the AT (during the pullback period). At the end of AT, "50 (D)" is set in the pull-back game number counter, and thereafter, if AT is not won, "1" is continued to be decremented every game. Then, when the pullback game number counter becomes "0", the AT pullback fails, the pullback flag is turned off, and the sub-difference number counter is cleared (initialized).
After the end of AT, the sub-control board 80 updates the sub-difference number counter when the pullback flag is on.

Also, during the pullback period (when the pullback flag is on), if you win a special role such as BB and execute a special game such as a BB game, during the special game, the pullback game number counter is subtracted (updated )do not.
On the other hand, when the AT is won before the pullback game number counter reaches "0", the pullback of the AT is successful, and in the subsequent AT, the number of sheets which inherited the difference number of the previous AT is displayed as an image.
for example,
The difference in the number of cards in the first AT: +1000 The difference in the number of cards from the end of the first AT until winning the second AT: -100 If the difference in the number of cards at the start of the second AT is "+900" An image is displayed.

Also, an upper limit value that can be counted by the sub-difference number counter is set. In this embodiment, it is set as follows.
1) Upper limit in AT: 2414 (D)
2) The upper limit value when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped during AT and the number of wins (expected difference number) in the special game related to the special role is "250 (D)": "2414 (D )−250(D)=2164(D)”
3) Upper limit during withdrawal period: 2000 (D)

As shown in 1) above, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds "2414 (D)" during AT, the sub-difference number count is stopped and the sub difference number counter is cleared.
In this embodiment, the sub-difference number counter value and the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 are interlocked (matched). For example, when the sub-difference number counter reaches "1000 (D)" during AT, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "number of sheets obtained during AT: 1000".

As described above, when the difference counter of the main control board 50 exceeds "2400 (D)", the AT (and the advantageous section) is ended. Therefore, as described above, the maximum value that the difference number counter can take is "2414 (D)".
Therefore, the maximum countable value of the sub difference number counter on the sub control board 80 side is also set to "2414 (D)" in accordance with the difference number counter of the main control board 50 .
Since the maximum value of the sub-difference number counter is "2414 (D)", the maximum difference number of images displayed on the image display device 23 is "2414". As a result, it is possible to prevent the image display of an excessively large difference in the number of bets, and to prevent the image display that significantly arouses the gambling spirit.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (ninth embodiment), when the number of cards that can be obtained in the BB game is 250, the BB is won during the AT, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is selected. When is stopped and displayed, the value of the sub-difference number counter at that time is determined. When the sub-difference number counter value exceeds the above-described "2164 (D)", it exceeds "2414 (D)" at the end of the BB game. Clear the number counter (above 2)).

In this case, the image display device 23 displays images such as "Congratulations" and "Congratulations" as images corresponding to the number of difference. In this way, instead of displaying "Congratulations" or the like from the start of the BB game, the sub-difference number counter is not cleared at the start of the BB game, and the sub-difference number counter is not cleared until it exceeds "2414 (D)". The counter may continue to count, and when it exceeds "2414 (D)", the sub-difference number counter may be cleared and an image such as "Congratulations" may be displayed.

Furthermore, there is a possibility that the difference number of sheets increases during the withdrawal period. For example, as a result of winning a special combination during the withdrawal period and completing the special game, the difference number counter value may increase.
In particular, if the specifications are such that AT is won when a specific BB is won, AT is shifted to after the BB game is finished. On the other hand, when the sub-difference number counter is near the upper limit at the end of the BB game, even if the difference number is taken over at AT after the end of the BB game, the upper limit is reached immediately. Therefore, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" during the withdrawal period, the sub difference number counter is cleared. For example, during the AT withdrawal period, if you win a BB with AT and complete the BB game, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" at the end of the final game of the BB game, Clear the sub difference number counter. As a result, the display of the difference number starts from "0" in the AT after the BB is finished.

In addition, as described above, even if the game shifts to the special game during the pullback period, the pullback game counter is not decremented during the special game. Then, when a special role is won during the pullback period, updating of the sub-difference number counter may be continued or interrupted during the special game. As an example of interrupting the update, for example, when winning the BB with AT when the sub-difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1000 (D)", the sub difference number counter value is set to "1000 (D)". stop at . Even if "250" coins are obtained in the subsequent BB game, the "250" cards are not added to the sub-difference number counter. Therefore, when shifting to AT after the BB game ends, the number of difference starts from "1000".

On the other hand, as an example of continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, when the sub-difference number counter value during the pullback period is "1000 (D)", a BB with AT is won, and then in the BB game "250", the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes "1250 (D)". Then, when the AT is shifted to after the BB game ends, the number of difference starts from "1250".
Further, in the case of continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, when the sub-difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1800 (D)", the BB with AT is won, and "250" is reached in the subsequent BB game. When the number is obtained, the sub difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes "2050 (D)" and exceeds "2000 (D)". Therefore, the sub difference number counter is cleared by the end of the BB game, and the display of the difference number starts from "0" in the AT after the BB game ends.

In addition, the sub-difference number counter may update the difference number of the game regardless of the number of bets. Update the number.
Here, the difference number counter of the main control board 50 is updated regardless of the number of bets in the game.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the condition for updating the sub-difference number counter is defined to be when the number of bets (specified number) is "3", and when the game is started with the number of bets (specified number) of "2". does not update the difference number in that game.

Next, sub-difference number counter management processing will be described using a flowchart.
56 and 57 are flowcharts showing sub-difference number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart following FIG.
At step S531 in FIG. 56, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on (whether or not AT is currently being performed). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S532.

In step S532, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, when the AT is not in progress and the withdrawal flag is off, the sub-difference number counter is not updated.

In the next step S533, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a bet command has been received from the main control board 50. When the start switch 41 is operated and the number of bets for the game is determined, the main control board 50 transmits a bet command capable of determining the number of bets for the game to the sub-control board 80 . When it is determined that this bet command has been received, the process proceeds to step S534.

In step S534, it is determined whether or not the number of bets (specified number) is "3" based on the received bet command. When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S535, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. Thus, in the present embodiment, the sub difference number counter is updated only when the number of bets is "3". Therefore, even during the AT or pullback period, when the number of bets is other than "3", the sub-difference number counter is not updated in the game. As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the difference number counter on the main control board 50 side is updated regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in the game.

When proceeding from step S534 to step S535, the sub-control board 80 subtracts the bet number (“3”) from the sub-difference number counter. Next, proceeding to step S536, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a payout command has been received. During the main processing (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, after the display determination is performed in step S291, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 a payout command capable of determining the number of payouts.
When it is determined in step S536 that the payout command has been received, the process proceeds to step S537, and the sub-control board 80 adds the payout number to the sub-difference number counter.
In the next step S538, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on. If it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S539, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG.

In step S539, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is turned on in the current game (whether or not the AT flag is turned on). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned on in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S540, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned on in the game this time (the rise of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S543. Therefore, the process proceeds from step S539 to step S543 when it is AT from before the previous game.

In step S540, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S541, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flow chart ends. For example, when the AT flag is turned on in the current game (“Yes” at step S539) and the pullback flag is off (“No” at step S540, i.e. when it is not during the pullback period), the sub-difference number at this time Since the counter is "0", there is no need to update the sub-difference number-of-sheets counter, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

When proceeding from step S540 to step S541, the sub-control board 80 turns off the pullback flag. At the next step S542, the sub-control board 80 clears the pullback game number counter. Here, if "Yes" in step S539 and "Yes" in step S540, it corresponds to the case where the AT is won during the pullback period. Therefore, in this case, the pullback flag is turned off and the pullback game number counter is cleared.
Next, proceeding to step S543, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the sub-difference number counter exceeds the upper limit "2414 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S546. Then, in step S546, the sub difference number counter is cleared. This may occur when the number of difference sheets increases during the withdrawal period after the end of AT and the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S543 that the sub-difference number counter does not exceed "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S544, and the sub-control board 80 executes BB in the current game.
It is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the command is transmitted from the main control board 50 .
"Yes" in this step S544 is when the BB with AT is won during the withdrawal period. In this flow chart, it is assumed that the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is stopped and displayed in the game in which the BB is won.
When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stop-displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is not stop-displayed, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated.

In step S545, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)", the process advances to step S546 to clear the sub-difference number counter as described above and terminate the processing according to this flowchart. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S545 that the sub-difference number counter does not exceed "2164 (D)" (while maintaining the sub-difference number counter value), the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As described above, when the BB game of this embodiment ends with a payout of more than 250 coins as shown in FIG. When exceeding, it will exceed "2414 (D)" (upper limit) by the final game of the BB game. Therefore, in the example of this flowchart, when the BB game is started (before the start), it is determined whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value during the BB game. Before starting, the sub-difference number counter is cleared. Since the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is based on the sub-difference number counter, in the BB game after the sub-difference number counter is cleared, the difference number itself is not displayed or the difference number is not displayed. For example, "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" is displayed instead of displaying the number of sheets.

At step S538, it is determined that the AT flag is not ON, and when proceeding to step S547 of FIG. , that is, whether or not the AT has ended in the game this time). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned off in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S548, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned off in the game this time (falling of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S551. .

In step S548, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S549. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S557.

At step S549, the sub-control board 80 turns on the pullback flag. Next, proceeding to step S550, the sub-control board 80 sets the initial value "50 (D)" to the pullback game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
By the processing of steps S548 to S550 above, when the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on, and the initial value of the number of pullback games is "50 (D)". to set. The reason why "50 (D)" is set as the initial value of the number of pullback games is that the AT pullback within 50 games is the AT consecutive chan (the condition for handing over the sub-difference number to the next AT). Therefore, the number of pullback games can be variously set such as "30 (D)", "100 (D)", etc., in addition to "50 (D)".
Also, when the sub-difference number counter is "2000 (D)" or more at the end of the AT, even if the AT is pulled back afterward, the sub-difference number counter may exceed the upper limit value during the AT after the pull-back. is high, so the pullback flag is not set in such a case.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S548 that the sub difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)" and the process proceeds to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends. In other words, when the sub-difference number counter is greater than or equal to "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the sub-difference number counter starts from the initial value "0" even if the AT is performed after that.

Further, when proceeding from step S547 to step S551, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is in BB operation (BB game is in progress). 35 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. As shown in FIG.
When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is not in operation, the sub-control board 80 proceeds to step S552 and determines whether or not the pullback flag is ON. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S553, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In step S553, "1" is subtracted from the pullback game number counter. In other words, during the pullback period, when the BB is in operation (during the BB game), the pullback game number counter is not updated (decremented). In addition, the pullback game number counter may be subtracted even during the BB game during the pullback period.
In the next step S554, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback game number counter has become "0". When it is determined that the pullback game number counter is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pullback game number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S555.

At step S555, the pullback flag is turned off. In the next step S556, the pullback game number counter is cleared. When "Yes" in step S554, the pullback game number counter is "0", so the process of clearing the pullback game number counter in step S556 may be omitted. However, when it becomes "No" at step S560, which will be described later, the withdrawal game number counter is cleared via step S556.
Next, proceeding to step S557, the sub-control board 80 clears the sub-difference number counter. In this way, when the pullback flag is off and the pullback game number counter is "0" (cleared), the sub-difference number counter is cleared (set to "0"), and thereafter remains at "0" until the AT starts. maintain.

When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is in operation and the process proceeds to step S558, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the current game is the final game in the BB operation (BB game). Whether or not the BB game is the final game may be determined on the side of the sub-control board 80 by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game. You may decide based on the incoming command.
When it is determined that it is the final game of the BB game, the process proceeds to step S559, and when it is determined that it is not the final game, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated.

In step S559, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S560, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In step S560, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S561, and the pullback game number counter is reset to "50 (D)". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends. As a result, the BB game is executed when the pullback flag is on, and when the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game, the pullback period (50 games ) will be newly set. That is, when the number of pullback games is set to the initial value "50" after the end of AT, the BB game is executed during the pullback period, and the difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game. , the number of pullback games is reset to "50".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S560 that the sub-difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S555. After step S555, the pullback flag is turned off, the pullback game number counter is cleared, and the sub difference number counter is cleared. This ends the pullback period. Thus, in the final game of the BB game, the sub-difference number at that point in time is determined during the pull-back period, and when the sub-difference number is "2000 (D)" or more, the pull-back period is terminated. .

In the above sub difference number counter management, the sub difference number counter is updated at the timing of receiving the bet command. That is, the sub-difference number is updated before all the reels 31 are stopped. On the other hand, since the difference number counter is executed in the advantageous section counter management of the game end check process, the subtraction of the bet number is also executed after all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, for the sub-difference number counter as well, after all the reels 31 are stopped, subtraction of the number of bets and addition of the number of payouts may be executed in the same manner as the difference number counter.

Further, even if the difference number at the end of the game becomes negative (even if there is a carry-down), the sub-difference number-counter stores that value (a carry-down value). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the sub-difference number counter is negative at the end of the game (when a carry occurs) like the difference number counter, it may be corrected to "0".
Furthermore, even if the sub-difference number counter may become negative, the image display device 23 displays the difference number "0".

In this case, the following processing can be mentioned.
The sub-difference number counter is a 2-byte counter as described above, and its upper limit value is "2414 (D)", that is, "096E (H)". Therefore, the value of the most significant digit is "0(H)". Therefore, by determining whether the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)", it is possible to determine whether or not the digit has been digitized. Then, when it is determined that there is a digit drop (the value of the most significant digit is not "0 (H)"), the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is set to "0".

In the examples of FIGS. 56 and 57, BB is taken as an example, but the invention is not limited to this, and a sub-bonus (AT that looks like a bonus (BB)) can be applied in the same way. A sub-bonus is one in which the number of games played, the number of payouts, or the number of difference is set as an end condition. In this case, in step S544, it is determined whether or not the sub-bonus symbol is stopped. Also, in step S551, it is determined whether or not the sub-bonus game is being played. Furthermore, in step S558, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the sub-bonus game.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. The twelfth embodiment instructs a specified number (bet number) before starting a game when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The display of the pressing order instruction information is the operation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). Here, the "instruction function" is a device that facilitates winning. Therefore, the prescribed number of instructions is not the actuation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). However, without being limited to this, the prescribed number of instructions may be defined as one of the processes related to the instruction function.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the role product condition device, the specified number for each RT, and the winning number in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58(A), BB1 and BB2 are provided as the role item condition device (special role). When BB1 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops, the BB1 game is started. The BB1 game ends when more than 100 coins are paid out. After the BB1 game ends, it shifts to non-RT.
Also, when BB2 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops, the BB2 game is started. The BB2 game ends when 30 or more coins are paid out. After the BB2 game ends, it shifts to non-RT.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), RT includes non-RT, BB1 inside, BB2 inside, BB1 in operation, and BB2 in operation.
Non-RT continues until either BB1 or BB2 wins. If BB1 is won in non-RT, the game moves to inside BB1, and if BB2 is won, the game moves to inside BB2.
During the inside of BB1, it continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops inside BB1, the BB1 is in operation, that is, the BB1 game is entered. Similarly, during the inside of BB2, it continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops inside BB2, the BB2 is in operation, that is, the BB2 game is entered.
In addition, the special role which can carry over winning is restricted to one. Therefore, BB2 is not elected when it is inside BB1. Similarly, when BB2 is inside, BB1 is not won.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the specified number is limited to "3" while BB1 is in operation and BB2 is in operation (when the role product is in operation). A game cannot be started with the number of bets "1" or "2".
On the other hand, the prescribed number for non-RT, inside BB1, inside BB2, which is when the role product is not activated, is "2" or "3". As a result, the game can be started if the prescribed number is either "2" or "3".
In FIG. 58(C), the internal lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "65536". For example, the winning probability of winning number "1" (normal replay) in non-RT is "9000/65536". Also, the advantageous section lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "16384". Therefore, when the advantageous section lottery number is '16384', it means that the advantageous section is won with a probability of '16384/16384'.
Also, as shown in FIG. 58(C), in non-RT, BB2 is selected by lottery with the specified number "2", but BB1 is not selected by lottery. Conversely, with the prescribed number of "3", BB1 is drawn, but BB2 is not drawn.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when the specified number of non-RT is "3" or the specified number inside BB2 is "3", the lottery for the advantageous section is possible. In addition, in the lottery for the advantageous section, it is set so that the advantageous section is always won except when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to make the game section almost the advantageous section. In other words, the twelfth embodiment is the "7P" type specification described above.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game progresses inside the BB2 and with the prescribed number of "3". Then, an AT is drawn by lottery inside the BB2, and when the AT is won, the AT is executed. In addition, it is assumed that BB2, which has carried over winning, is not allowed to win.
For example, if you are currently non-RT, you need to move from non-RT to inside BB2 (win BB2 in non-RT). In order to win BB2 in non-RT, it is necessary to play the game with the prescribed number "2".
Therefore, if it is not RT at the present time, the game is played with the prescribed number of "2" to win the BB2, and the next game is shifted to the inside of the BB2. Furthermore, since the lottery for the advantageous section is received within the BB2 when the prescribed number is "3", the game proceeds with the prescribed number "3" inside the BB2.

In addition, BB2, who wins with the prescribed number of "2", cannot stop and display the symbol combination unless the prescribed number is "2". Similarly, BB1 who wins with the prescribed number of "3" cannot stop and display the symbol combination on the active line unless the prescribed number is "3".
For this reason, when BB2 is won with the prescribed number of "2" in non-RT, and when the game is progressing with the prescribed number of "3" while shifting to the inside of BB2, even when the role is not won, BB2 The symbol combination corresponding to is never stopped on the active line.
As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special role is stopped, the special game is started, and the medals are not increased in the special game. In other words, it is for creating the inside of the BB.

As shown in FIG. 58(C), in non-RT, BB2 can be won with a probability of about "1/5", so it is possible to shift from non-RT to inside BB2 at an early stage.
Also, in the BB2, when winning a small winning combination or replay, the player wins in the advantageous section with a probability of 100%. Therefore, inside BB2, most of the game period is an advantageous section. Of course, it is also possible to set the winning probability of the advantageous section to less than 100%.

In addition, the instruction function can be activated (execution of processing related to the instruction function) only when the game is played with one prescribed number, particularly in the present embodiment, the prescribed number "3". Therefore, when the AT is won during the advantageous section in the BB2 and the AT is executed, when the game is started with the specified number "3" and the pushing order bell is won, the instruction function is activated. , the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . On the other hand, when the game is started with the specified number (bet number) "2" during AT, even if the winning order bell is won, the instruction function is not activated.

Further, as in the eleventh embodiment, even when a game is played with the prescribed number "2" during AT, the difference number counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payouts in the game, and Update the advantageous section clear counter. However, the AT game number counter (in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) is not updated. On the other hand, when the game is played with the specified number "3" during AT, the difference number counter, the advantageous section clear counter, and the AT game number counter (in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) Update on everything.
In addition, regardless of the specified number, when the transition condition is satisfied (when the symbol combination satisfying the transition condition is stopped and displayed), the RT always transitions. On the other hand, the main game state (usually, CZ, AT, etc.) may be set to be transitionable to any specified number, or the game may be played with one specified number (for example, "3"). It may be set to enable migration only when

In the inside of BB2, when the game is started with the prescribed number "2" due to the player's operation error, and the combination is not won in the game, the symbol combination corresponding to BB2, which carries over the winning, can be stopped and displayed. becomes. On the other hand, when the game is started with the prescribed number of "2" due to the player's operation error, and any combination is won in the game, the winning combination won in the game is given priority. The symbol combination corresponding to BB2 which has winning is not stopped and displayed. However, when the replay is won in the game, the next game will also be played with the number of bets "2", so the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 which has the win will be stopped and displayed in the next game as well. there is a possibility.

If the game is started with the specified number "2" in the AT inside BB2 and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed, the BB2 game is started. Then, when the BB2 game ends, it shifts to non-RT (AT). In this non-RT mode, information corresponding to the prescribed number "2" is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 to inform the player that the game should be played with the prescribed number "2" (instruction of the prescribed number). . This is because the game is played with the specified number "2", the BB2 wins, and the BB2 shifts to the inside of the BB2. Therefore, in AT and non-RT, the specified number "2" is instructed until BB2 is won.

As described above, when displaying information corresponding to the specified number "2" on the obtained number display LED 78, "0A" is displayed. In addition, the specified number "2" instruction is not limited to "0A", and may be any other display if not confused with the number of payouts, the setting change display "88", the error number, and the push order instruction information. may be For example, since the maximum number of medals to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is "15", for example, "22" may be displayed as information corresponding to the specified number of "2".

Further, in this embodiment, the prescribed number is instructed only during AT, and the prescribed number is not instructed during non-AT. For example, after the BB2 game ends, when the game is shifted to non-RT, if it is not AT at that time, the specified number is not instructed. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary for the player to play the game with the specified number of "2" and shift to the inside of the BB2.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the case of a non-RT and non-advantageous section, if a game is played with the prescribed number of "3" and a small win or replay is won, the advantageous section is also won. Then, when it becomes a non-RT and advantageous section, the specified number "2" may be indicated (even if it is non-AT).
Furthermore, not limited to the above, when shifting to non-RT, the prescribed number "2" may be indicated regardless of AT/non-AT, advantageous section/non-advantageous section.

Also, in the non-RT mode, when the player has set the number of bets to "2", the specified number may not be indicated, and when the player has set the number of bets to "3", the specified number may be indicated. In the main processing of FIG. 41, the number of bets is determined in the medal management processing of step S276. (performs clear processing of winning number data), and when the current bet number is "3", instructs the prescribed number "2" (stores the instructed prescribed number display data as the winning number data). mentioned.

Further, when the BB2 game is ended and the game is shifted to non-RT, wait processing may be executed at the end of the final game of the BB2 game. During this wait process, the game cannot progress (progress of the main process shown in FIG. 41). For this reason, after the wait process is completed, the next game (non-RT) game start set process is performed, where the specified number is instructed.

In non-RT during AT, the instruction of the specified number "2" continues until BB2 is won. Therefore, there are cases where the game ends in one game, and there are cases where the game is played a plurality of times.
Also, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when a non-RT game is played with the prescribed number of "2", replays (normal replay, watermelon play, cherry replay) may be won. When winning the replay as a result of playing the game with the prescribed number of "2", it is optional whether or not to instruct the prescribed number of "2" in the next game. In non-RT and AT, until BB2 is won, regardless of whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to replay has stopped, the specified number "2" may be indicated before the game starts. Alternatively, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the player cannot arbitrarily select the prescribed number (bet number) in the next game (replay), so the player should not instruct the prescribed number in that game. can be

This is the same when, for example, in non-RT and AT, as a result of playing a game with the prescribed number of "3", the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed. The next game (replay)
Then, since the player cannot arbitrarily select the prescribed number (the number of bets), the prescribed number may not be designated in this case either. Alternatively, even if the number of bets in the game cannot be selected, the prescribed number "2" may be indicated for the purpose of calling attention.
In non-RT and AT, the game is played with the specified number "2", winning BB2, and when the next game moves to inside BB2, after that, unless it moves to non-RT again, the specified number is indicated is not performed.

In addition, the timing for instructing the prescribed number is after all the reels 31 have stopped and, if there is a payout based on the winning of a small win, after the payout process is completed, and the start switch 41 for the next game is operated. Before (for example, before betting on medals is possible (before acceptance of betting)). Therefore, after the payout based on the winning of the small win in the final game of the BB2 game, the specified number "2" is instructed before the next game (non-RT) starts. As shown in FIG. 42 (eleventh embodiment), in step S321 of the game start set process (MS_GAME_SET), the main control board 50 sets the specified number of instruction conditions when the game is non-RT and AT. determine that it satisfies

Then, when it is determined in step S321 in FIG. 42 that the specified number instruction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, where "0B" is added to the acquisition number data as specified instruction number display data corresponding to the specified instruction number "2". (H)” is stored.
As a result, in the subsequent LED display control (FIG. 55), at the timing of lighting the digit 3a (higher digits of the acquired number display LED 78), the higher digits of the instruction specified number display data "0B (H)" are displayed in step S511. segment data indicating "0" is obtained based on the LED segment table 2 in step S514. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "0" is displayed in the digit 3a (upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

Further, at the timing when the digit 4a (lower digits of the acquisition number display LED 78) is lit, the lower digit offset "B(H)" is acquired in step S513 from the prescribed specified number display data "0B(H)". In step S514, segment data for displaying "A" is acquired based on the LED segment table 2. FIG. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "A" is displayed in the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In the main processing (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the game start set processing in step S272 is processing before a bet is possible and before the start switch 41 is operated. Before the switch 41 is operated, the prescribed number of instructions is displayed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 42, after the commanded specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data in step S322, the automatic bet number data is set in step S325. Therefore, when instructing the stipulated number in the next game after winning a replay, the stipulated number is instructed before automatic betting. As a result, the specified number can be quickly instructed to the player.
Further, in FIG. 41, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S278, the obtained number data (indicated prescribed number display data) is cleared in step S280. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 in the interrupt processing after step S280.

Here, the information "0A" corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions "2" is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78, and when the game is played with the prescribed number "2", the instruction function is performed even during the AT. does not work.
In other words, even when winning the push order bell in the game, the push order instruction information is not displayed on the winning number display LED 78 . This is because, in the present embodiment, the processing related to the pointing function is limited to when the prescribed number is "3". Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated after the acquisition number display LED 78 displays the information "0A" corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions "2", the acquisition number display LED 78 is displayed at least until all the reels 31 are stopped. is "00".

On the other hand, in AT and non-RT, the information "0A" corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions "2" was displayed on the winning number display LED 78, but the game was played with the prescribed number "3" and the winning order bell was won. When it does, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . This process is executed in step S284 in FIG. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this case displays the information "0A" corresponding to the prescribed instruction number "2" before the start of the game, and when the start switch 41 is operated (with the prescribed number "3"), " 00" is displayed, and when the winning order bell is won, the pushing order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed.

Also, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is cleared at step S290 (after all reels are stopped) in FIG. Since the winning number data is cleared in step S280 after the start switch 41 is operated, the process of step S290 may be skipped in a game in which the pressing order instruction information is not displayed on the winning number display LED 78. FIG.
Then, when a small winning combination is won and the medal payout process due to the winning is executed in step S294, the winning number data is incremented by "1", and accordingly, the winning number display LED 78 displays the payout number. be.

Then, when the process proceeds to the game start setting process in step S272 of the next game, as described above, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays information corresponding to the specified specified number. When displaying the information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions, the prescribed number of instructions display data is stored as the winning number data. Therefore, the acquisition number data may be cleared before storing the information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions. For example, in FIG. 42, before step S311, the acquisition number data may be cleared.

In addition, in AT and non-RT, although the specified number "2" was instructed, it is ignored and the game is executed with the specified number "3", BB1 is won, and the game moves inside BB1, Furthermore, it is conceivable to execute a BB1 game.
In order to suppress such actions, for example, it is possible to not execute processing related to the instruction function within BB1. Also, the BB1 game may be set such that the ball output rate is less than "1", so that medals cannot be increased in the BB1 game.
It should be noted that since it is up to the player to decide which stipulated number of games to play, even if the stipulated number of ``3'' is played in a game in which the stipulated number of ``2'' is specified for AT and non-RT, No penalty will be imposed on the person.

In the above example, when the specified number is specified, the specified specified number is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 (on the main control board 50 side). In addition to displaying on the number display LED 78, the specified specified number may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like (on the sub-control board 80 side).
Here, the display start timing for displaying the prescribed instruction number on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like is set to be substantially the same as the display start timing for displaying the prescribed instruction number on the acquired number display LED 78 (before the game starts). be done.
Furthermore, the display end timing after displaying the specified number of commands on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like may be the same as or different from the display end timing after displaying the specified number of commands on the obtained number display LED 78 .
As the display end timing after displaying the prescribed number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like,
(1) When the start switch 41 is operated (2) When all reels 31 are stopped (3) When the start switch 41 is operated in a game with a specified number of "2" (4) All reels in a game with a specified number of "2" When 31 is stopped (5) After winning BB2 in a game with a specified number of "2" (6) When all reels 31 are stopped in a game with a specified number of "2" and winning in BB2.
Further, when the prescribed number of instructions is displayed on a dedicated display, it is possible to continue displaying the prescribed number of instructions on the image display device 23 or the like over a plurality of games.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is three.
In contrast, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four.
FIG. 59 is a front view, a plan view, and a right side view showing an outline of a configuration including reels 31 (31A-31D) and stop switches 42 (42A-42D) in the thirteenth embodiment. In the front view, the reels 31A to 31D are shown unobstructed by the front surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG. Further, in the plan view, the reel 31 positioned behind the front surface of the front door 12 is shown. Also, in the right side view, illustration of the medal slot 47 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 59, a control panel 12c is provided on the front surface of the front door 12, and the operation buttons 24 and the medal slot 47 are arranged on the control panel 12c. The medal slot 47 is the same as that shown in FIG. Also, although not shown in FIG. 1, the operation buttons 24 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 to enable two-way communication with the sub-control board 80 . For example, the operation button 24 is formed so that at least a portion thereof can be lit, and the lighting mode of the operation button 24 can be controlled under the control of the sub-control board 80 . Also, when the operation button 24 is operated, the signal is input to the sub-control board 80 .
Below the control panel 12c of the front door 12, a start switch 41 and four stop switches 42A to 42D are arranged.

In the front view of FIG. 59, a vertical line passing through the midpoints of the four reels 31A to 31D is defined as a line L1 (center line). Line L1 is located at an intermediate position between reels 31B and 31C. W1 (uniform) is provided between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D. Therefore, the reels 31A and 31B and the reels 31C and 31D are arranged symmetrically with respect to the line L1.
Also, the four stop switches 42A to 42D are all W2 (uniform) between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D. A line L1 is arranged to pass through an intermediate position between the stop switches 42B and 42C.

Also, the gap W2 between the stop switches 42 may be the same as the gap W1 (W2=W1), larger than the gap W1 (W2>W1), or smaller than the gap W1 (W2<W1).
Furthermore, in the front view, a vertical line passing through the left end of the leftmost reel 31A is defined as a line L2, and a vertical line passing through the right end of the rightmost reel 31D is defined as a line L3. In this case, the leftmost stop switch 42A is arranged on the right side (closer to the center) than the line L2, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is arranged on the left side (closer to the center) than the line L3.

Furthermore, in the front view, if the interval (center-to-center distance) of the reels 31 is W3, the distances between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D are all W3 (constant). is.
Assuming that the interval (center-to-center distance) of the stop switches 42 is W4, the distance between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D is W4 (constant ).

Further, as shown in the front view of FIG. 59, a part of the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged so as to cross the line L2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 may be arranged on the left side (outside) of the line L2 without intersecting the line L2, or may be arranged on the line L2 without intersecting the line L2. may be placed on the right side (closer to the center) of
Also, in the front view, the medal slot 47 is arranged so that the medal slot 47 and the line L4 intersect. However, not limited to this, for example, the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the right side (outside) of the line L4 so as not to cross the line L4. Alternatively, the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the left side (closer to the center) than the line L4.

The operation button 24 is formed horizontally, and the line in contact with the left end of the operation button 24 is defined as line L4, and the line in contact with the right end of the operation button 24 is defined as line L5.
In this case, the stop switch 42A is arranged so that a portion of the leftmost stop switch 42A intersects the line L4 in the front view. Further, the stop switch 42D is arranged so that a portion of the rightmost stop switch 42D crosses the line L5.

Further, as shown in the plan view, an index 12d is formed on the control panel 12c. The index 12d is formed by engraving, printing, or the like, and in the example of FIG. Furthermore, the left index 12d is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42A (it may be slightly deviated from the center line). Also, the index 12d on the right side is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42D (there is no problem even if it is slightly deviated from the center line).

With the arrangement described above, the player can operate the leftmost stop switch 42A using the left end of the operation button 24 as a guide. Similarly, using the right end of the operation button 24 as a guide, the rightmost stop switch 42D can be operated.
Alternatively, the player can operate the stop switch 42A using the left index 12d as a guide. Similarly, the stop switch 42D can be operated using the right index 12d as a guide.

When there are three reels 31 and three stop switches 42, as shown in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment), a maximum of "3!=6" push orders can be provided. On the other hand, when there are four reels 31 and four stop switches 42, a maximum of "4!=24" push orders can be provided.
Then, the greater the number of pressing order of the stop switch 42, the more the number of outs per 100 ins when the base during non-AT (when the role is not activated and during non-AT. For example, for 100 ins) If the number of outs is 50, the base is 50.) can be lowered.

Assuming that the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four, the pressing order bells drawn by lottery are 1234 bells (stop switches 42A→42B→42C→42D refer to the correct pressing order), 1243 bells, . , 4312 bells, and 4321 bells. Then, as shown in FIG. 58, if the winning numbers of the pressing order bells are the same, the winning numbers of the pressing order bells can be set to "1500". In this way, since the winning number of each pressing order bell can be set to "1/4", the probability that the pressing order operated by the player will match the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won is reduced accordingly. can do.

Here, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is three, images such as "123" or "left center right" can be displayed during AT. Therefore, it is easy to intuitively understand the order of pressing correct answers.
On the other hand, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four, the following method can be used as to how to inform the correct pressing order during AT.

For example, as a first method, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are set to "1", "2", "3", and "4", respectively, and the order of the stop switches 42 to be operated is notified. be done. For example, when the order of pressing the stop switches 42 is the order of the stop switches 42C, 42D, 42A, and 42B, "3412" is notified (at least one of image display, sound display, and lamp color notification is given). ) is mentioned. Alternatively, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D may be set to "A", "B", "C", and "D", respectively, and in the above example, "CDAB" may be notified.

As a second method, the base of the reel 31 and/or the stop switch 42 may be colored for identification.
For example, the color of the base of the reel 31A and/or the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the base of the reel 31B and/or the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the base of the reel 31C and/or the stop switch 42C is yellow, The color of the base of the reel 31D and/or the stop switch 42D is set to red (different colors, respectively). In the above example, instead of the notification "3412", "yellow, red, white, and blue" can be notified (at least one of image display, sound display, and lamp color notification).

Furthermore, as a third method, among the stop switches 42 to be operated first to fourth, the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth (last) is darkened (or hidden). are mentioned. In this case, "Brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated first>Brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated second≧Brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third Image brightness≧Image brightness corresponding to stop switch 42 to be operated fourth.
Then, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is darkened (or hidden), and the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth is displayed. For example, the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated thirdly is set to be approximately the same as the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third.
For example, as in the above example, when the pressing order of "3412" is displayed as an image, "3-12" is first displayed as an image. Note that "●" is an image corresponding to the "4"th pressing order, and may be darkened (concealed) so that the character "4" cannot be seen at all. The characters may be dimmed to the extent that they are identifiable.

When the image is displayed as "3●12", the image is displayed in the same manner as when 6 options are selected, so the player can intuitively understand the pressing order. Then, when the first stop switch 42C is operated, one of the following 1) to 3) is executed.
1) Change the display of "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to "●", and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "342".
2) The "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to "-" or "○", and the previous "●" is changed to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34-2" or "34∘2".
3) Change the "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to blank (no image), and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34*2"("*" means blank).

In addition, after the second stop, similarly to the above, images such as "34●●", "34--", "34○○", and "34**" may be displayed.
Further, after the third stop, images such as "●4●●", "-4--", "○4○○", and "*4**" may be displayed.
Alternatively, after the third stop, the push order image itself may be deleted.
As in the first method described above, even if all the pressing orders are displayed as "4312", after the stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is displayed. is erased as described in 1) to 3) above, the operated stop switch 42 becomes easier to understand, which is preferable. Specifically, after an image of "4312" is displayed, "43 2" (after operating the stop switch 42C)→"43 ●●" (after operating the stop switch 42D)→"4 ●●" (after operating the stop switch 42B) After the operation), an image is displayed (“●” may be “○”, “−”, or “*” as described above).

Furthermore, as a fourth method, a four-character idiom is used to notify the pressing order. For example, when "spring, summer, autumn and winter" is used as one of the four-letter idioms to indicate the pressing order, the correct pressing order is "spring→summer→autumn→winter".
Then, when the pressing order is "3412" as described above, "Autumn/Winter/Spring/Summer" can be reported (image display, voice display) as in the first method.
Alternatively, as in the third method, an image display of "Autumn Spring Summer" is displayed before the first stop, and an image display of "Autumn Winter Summer" is displayed after the first stop.
In any of the first to fourth methods, if an error in the order of pressing occurs in the middle of the process, the image of the order of pressing may continue to be displayed, or the image of the order of pressing may be displayed immediately after the error in the order of pressing occurs. You can erase the image.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when the 24-choice push order bell is provided as described above, 24 kinds of push order instruction numbers and push order instruction information are provided. For example, if the push order instruction information is "A1" to "A9", "AA", "AC", "AF", "F1" to "F9", "FA", "FC", and "FF", 24 types can be provided.

Although the eleventh to thirteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Eleventh Embodiment (1) In the non-advantageous section, the lottery for the advantageous section is performed only when the combination lottery result is the target lottery result. The reason for this setting is that, as described above, when the winning combination lottery result is not won (as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device does not operate), the advantageous section transition lottery, which is the process related to the advantageous section, is performed. This is because I thought it preferable not to do so. Therefore, it is not always necessary to set in this manner, and the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed when the winning combination is not won.

(2) In the eleventh embodiment, the AT lottery process is executed after the advantageous section transition lottery. Here, a combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined in the advantageous section is provided, and when the combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section transition process (Fig. 45) is executed without executing the advantageous section transition lottery. You may Similarly, a combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined by AT is provided, and when the combination lottery result is obtained, AT setting processing (steps S363 and S364 in FIG. 46) is performed without executing the AT lottery. may be executed.
In addition, a combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined by the advantageous section and AT is provided, and when the combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section transition lottery and AT lottery process are not executed, and the advantageous section transition process and AT set processing may be performed.
In addition, in the case where a combination lottery result (winning number) that does not win the advantageous interval transition lottery is provided, the advantageous interval transition lottery may be executed even when the combination lottery result is obtained. In this case, the number of wins in the advantageous section may be set to "0".

(3) When the AT is won, the initial number of AT games is determined, the game number is stored in the AT game number counter, and when the AT game number counter becomes "0", the AT is ended. However, the AT is not limited to such a game number management type AT, and may be a difference number management type AT. In the case of the difference number management type AT, when the AT wins, the initial value of the obtainable difference number is determined and stored in the AT difference number counter (different from the difference number counter). Then, the difference number is subtracted from the AT difference number counter each time there is a payout, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT is terminated.
Even in the case of such a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is decremented when the number is one specified number (eg "3"), but when the number is another specified number (eg "2"), the AT difference number counter is subtracted. Do not decrement the difference number counter.

(4) In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in FIG. 39, the setting change is enabled after the initialization process is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is on before the power is turned off, the advantageous interval indication LED 77 is extinguished before the setting change becomes possible when the setting change process is started. However, not limited to this, after ending the state in which the setting change is possible (after "Yes" in step S242 in FIG. 39), before proceeding to the main process (before step S248), the advantageous section display Clearing (initialization) processing of the LED flag may be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform control so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished after the set value is determined.

(5) One advantageous section clear counter and one difference counter are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two advantageous section clear counters and difference number counters (important counters) may be provided to confirm consistency.
For example, as the advantageous section clear counters, a first advantageous section clear counter and a second advantageous section clear counter are provided. During the advantageous interval, both the first advantageous interval clear counter and the second advantageous interval clear counter are updated each time the game is completed. Further, for example, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, in the determination of step S424, the first advantageous section clear counter is determined. When it is determined that the first advantageous section clear counter is "0", whether or not the value of the second advantageous section clear counter is "0", or whether the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear It is determined whether or not the counter has the same value. If it is determined to be "0" or the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

The difference number counter is the same as above.
A first difference counter and a second difference counter are provided as difference counters. Then, each time a game is completed, both the first difference counter and the second difference counter are updated. Further, for example, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, in the determination of step S434, the first difference counter is determined. When it is determined that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit, it determines whether the second difference counter exceeds the upper limit or whether the first difference counter and the second difference counter have the same value. determine whether If it is determined that the value exceeds the upper limit value or is the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

By determining the advantageous interval clear counter value and/or the difference counter value in the above manner, even if the counter value becomes an abnormal value (illegal value) due to the influence of noise or the like, the advantageous interval clear counter value is "0" and/or whether the difference counter value has exceeded the upper limit.
If the first advantageous zone clear counter and the second advantageous zone clear counter do not match, or if the first difference counter and the second difference counter do not match, for example, an error is displayed and the game proceeds. (Main processing) may be stopped.

(6) In the sub-difference number management process of FIG. 56, it is determined in step S544 that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, and the process advances to step S545 to determine that the sub-difference number counter has exceeded "2164 (D)". When the sub-difference number counter is cleared, the BB game may output a special effect different from the normal BB game. A special effect during the BB game can suggest to the player that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared.

Also, when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is stopped and displayed, the sub-difference number counter is not judged, and in the BB game, the sub-difference number counter is for example "2000 (D)" (an example of the threshold value, and this value is not limited to ). When it is determined that the sub difference number counter has exceeded "2000 (D)", the sub difference number counter is cleared, and a special effect (effect indicating that the sub difference number counter has been cleared) is performed from the next game. may be output.

Furthermore, in the above case, when the power is cut off in the game in which the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)" during the BB game (no special effect is output yet), the power is restored from the cut off. The special effect may be output from the game played. In this case, when the power is restored from the power-off, the sub-difference number counter value and the fact that the BB game is being played may be read to determine whether or not to output the special effect.

Further, when the power is cut off during the rotation of the reel 31 in the game in which the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)" during the BB game, the special effect can be output from the game that has recovered from the power cut. good. Therefore, in this case, if the power is not cut off, the special effect will be output from the next game, but if the power is cut off while the reel 31 is rotating, the special effect will be output from the game. Become.

(7) During AT, the game is played with the specified number of "2" (when the specified number is "2", the instruction function does not operate), the pressing order bell is won, and the stop switch 42 is accidentally operated in the correct pressing order. , When there is a payout of a small combination and the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", at the end of the game, it is possible to output an effect that informs the end of AT, such as displaying an image such as "END". preferable. This is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the AT ends in a game in which the order of pressing the correct answer is not notified.

(8) On the other hand, as described above, in order to prevent the AT from ending in a game in which the correct pressing order is not notified, for example, when the game is played with the prescribed number of "2", the pressing order bell is won. Even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order, the payout number of the game is set to "2" or less (the difference number of the game is "0" or less) so that the AT does not end in the game. may

(9) As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the sub difference number counter continued counting during the BB game. However, it is not limited to this, and when winning BB during AT and shifting to BB game, the sub difference number counter may not be updated (update of sub difference number counter is interrupted during BB game). .
In this case, for example, before step S531 in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the BB is in operation (determined by the operation state flag). Then, when the BB is in operation, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
Further, when the sub-difference number counter is not updated during the BB game, the processing of step S551 and steps S558 to S561 in FIG. 57 becomes unnecessary. Then, when "No" in step S547, the process proceeds to step S552.

B. Twelfth Embodiment (1) As in the eleventh embodiment, in FIG. 58, when the combination lottery is not won, the advantageous interval transition lottery (process related to the advantageous interval) is not executed. As noted above, the rules are considered. Therefore, if the rules are not taken into account, the transition lottery for the advantageous section may be executed when the winning combination is not won.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the transition lottery for the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is performed with only one specified number (the specified number "3" in the example of FIG. 58) in one gaming state (RT). I decided to do it. This is done in consideration of the fact that, according to the rules, the transfer lottery for the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is limited to only one specified number in one gaming state (RT). Therefore, if this point is not taken into consideration, in one gaming state (RT), the transfer lottery for the advantageous section may be executed with a plurality of prescribed numbers.

(2) In the twelfth embodiment, the specified number "2" is specified for non-RT and AT. However, when the game is the final game of the AT game, it is not necessary to indicate the specified number.
(3) In the twelfth embodiment, the game is played inside the BB2, and it is irregular that the BB2 wins and shifts to the BB2 game. However, the specification is not limited to this, and the BB2 game may be executed by causing the BB2 to win when the AT end condition is satisfied after the AT is executed inside the BB2. In this case, when the AT end condition is satisfied inside the BB 2, after the game that satisfies the AT end condition is finished (all reels 31 are stopped, and payout processing is executed when a minor win is won), Before the start of the next game (non-AT) (before the betting becomes possible), the specified number "2" is instructed to prompt BB2 to win. In the twelfth embodiment, since BB2 is won with the prescribed number of "2", the prescribed number for winning BB2 is "2". , when the BB is to win, the specified number "1" is indicated.
Further, the BB game with such specifications may be a BB game with increased medals or a BB game with decreased medals.

(4) When instructing the specified number, it is executed in the game start set process (step S322 in FIG. 42). However, it is not limited to this, and may be executed in the game end check process (FIG. 50). For example, in the BB2 game, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the BB2 game, and if it is the final game, the prescribed number of the next game is indicated during the game end check processing. However, when a small winning combination is won in the final game of the BB2 game and there is a payout, and the number of payouts is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, the prescribed number is indicated after the number of payouts is displayed. If the LED for instructing the prescribed number is a dedicated LED, the prescribed number for the next game can be instructed to the dedicated LED while the number of payouts is being displayed on the winning number display LED 78 .
Furthermore, in the case of executing the freeze in the last game of the BB2 game, when instructing the specified number of the next game at the end of the game, any timing before executing the freeze, during the execution of the freeze, or after the end of the freeze may be

(5) As in the twelfth embodiment, the function of the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b can be changed when a game can be executed with any one of a plurality of prescribed numbers. For example, in the game in the advantageous section, in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number "3" (for example, in FIG. 58, when inside BB2), the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b is dedicated to betting 3 You can set it to a button. That is, when the number of credits is "3", it is set to bet "3" when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number of "3" in the advantageous section. do. On the other hand, when the number of credits is "2", if it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number of "3" in the advantageous section, even if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" is not bet. set as

Alternatively, even if it is possible to play the game with the specified number of "3", if the number of credits is "2" and the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" is set to bet. good too. In particular, in FIG. 58, in non-RT and AT, it is preferable to set so that "2" bet is made when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when the number of credits is "2".

(6) As in the twelfth embodiment, when most of the game sections are set as advantageous sections, the instruction function can be activated at any timing. For example, a difference number counter (different from the difference number counter) capable of counting the minus of the difference number is provided, and the payout rate for a predetermined period is calculated. When the ball payout rate for a predetermined period reaches a predetermined lower limit (the predetermined lower limit is set higher than the legal lower limit, for example), an instruction function is activated to increase the ball payout rate. good too. Then, when the ball output rate increases and recovers to the reference value, the operation of the indicating function is terminated.
Such activation of an indicator function when a predetermined lower limit is reached may or may not be included in "AT". However, since there is no change in activating the instruction function, this corresponds to processing related to the instruction function.

(7) In the twelfth embodiment, the obtained number display LED 78 is used as the LED for displaying the information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other existing LEDs may be set, or dedicated LEDs for displaying information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions may be provided separately.
When a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is separately provided, even if the start switch 41 is operated after the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is displayed in the game start set process, the specified number of instructions is displayed. It is not necessary to erase the information corresponding to . Furthermore, even if all the reels 31 are stopped, a small winning combination is won, and medals are paid out, the information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions does not have to be erased.
In addition, when a dedicated LED is provided to display information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions, the prescribed number of instructions will not be confused with the number of payouts, error numbers, etc., so the prescribed number can be indicated in any display mode. can be done. For example, if the specified specified number is "2", "2" can be displayed.

(8) In the twelfth embodiment, an example of instructing the prescribed number "2" was given, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the prescribed number "1" or the prescribed number "3" may be instructed. Conceivable. If the specification has the possibility of indicating any of the prescribed numbers "1" to "3", the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 when instructing the prescribed number "1" is set to "A1", and the prescribed number For example, "A2" is used to indicate "2", and "A3" is used to indicate the specified number "3".

C. Thirteenth Embodiment (1) In the front view of FIG. 59, a line L1 is set to pass through the centers of the four reels 31 and the centers of the four stop switches 42 . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the four stop switches 42 as a whole may be arranged more to the right than the position shown in FIG. Conversely, all four stop switches 42 may be positioned to the left of the position shown in FIG. 58, for example, so that a portion of stop switch 42C intersects line L1.

(2) As shown in the front view of FIG. 59, Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written below the four reels 31, but these Roman numerals may be lamps. In this case, for example, when the stop switch to be operated next is 42C, the lamp of Roman numeral "3" is turned on.
In addition, different colors are assigned to the ranges in which the Roman numerals "1" to "4" are indicated, and the stop switches 42A to 42D may also be assigned colors corresponding to the Roman numerals "1" to "4". mentioned. In the example described above, the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the stop switch 42C is yellow, and the color of the stop switch 42D is red. In this case, the range of Roman numerals "1" should be white, the range of Roman numerals "2" should be blue, the range of Roman numerals "3" should be yellow, and the range of Roman numerals "4" should be red. be done.

(3) Also, the image display device 23 may be included in the portion including the periphery of the reel 31 . A different color is assigned to each stop switch 42 as described above. In this case, for example, when the stop switch 42B (blue) is specified when notifying the pressing order, the surroundings of the reel 31B may be illuminated in blue.

(4) In the front view of FIG. 59, the interval W3 between the reels 31 is set longer than the interval W4 between the stop switches .
However, without being limited to this, the interval W3 between the reels 31 and the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set substantially equal. Alternatively, the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set longer than the interval W3 between the reels 31 .

(5) In the thirteenth embodiment, a maximum of 24 push orders can be provided as the push order bell. However, it is also possible to provide not only this but a 1st stop pushing order bell. Here, in the prior art, there are three options for the first stop push order bell. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, four options can be set. When the correct push order is displayed as an image when the first stop push order bell is won, for example, if the correct stop switch 42 is the stop switch 42C, an image display of "xx1x" can be used.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide first stop and second stop push order bells (push order bells for which the correct push order is set for the first stop and second stop). For example, the first stop is set by the stop switch 42C, the second stop is by the stop switch 42A, and the third and fourth stops are optional (either of the stop switches 42B and 42D). In this case, 12 choices can be set for the order of pressing correct answers. Furthermore, when displaying the order of correct keystrokes as an image, in the above example, an image display of "2x1x" may be used. After the stop switch 42C is operated, an image display such as "2x-x" can be mentioned.

D. Others All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<14th Embodiment>
The fourteenth embodiment relates to the timing of starting and ending the display of the pressing order instruction information.
Hereinafter, a fourteenth embodiment in which the timing of starting or ending the display of the pressing order instruction information is different (
A) to (G) will be explained.

<14th Embodiment (A)>
60 and 61 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (A).
FIG. 60 shows the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information is shown.

Here, the hardware configuration in the fourteenth embodiment (A) is the same as the hardware configuration shown in FIGS. 31 to 35 of the eleventh embodiment.
Also, the main processing (M_MAIN), push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), medal payout due to winning (M_WIN_PAY), interrupt processing (I_INTR), and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the fourteenth embodiment (A) are Main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. 41 of the embodiment, push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in FIG. 48, medal payout by winning in FIG. 49, interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 53, and LED display control (I_LED_OUT ).
Then, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), similarly to the eleventh embodiment, when the pressing order bell is won during AT, the winning number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information.

If the input port read process is executed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 53 and the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Also, as shown in FIG. 41, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, then winning lottery processing (step S282), advantageous section transition lottery processing (step S283), and pushing order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) ).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 48, in the pushing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), when the condition for activating the instruction function is satisfied, that is, when a winning combination having an advantageous pushing order such as a pushing order bell is won during AT. , a push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is generated and stored as winning number data. Then, by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as in the eleventh embodiment, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed every 2.235 ms. Furthermore, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that five interrupts constitute one cycle.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, or the start switch 41 is turned on after the minimum playing time elapses. is turned on (operated), after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts to rotate, more specifically, the pushing order instruction number is stored as the winning number data. Within 5 interrupts (2.235×5=11.175 ms) from , display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 will start.

After the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data, the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the first interruption, and the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the fifth interruption. Information may be displayed.
Also, although not shown in FIG. 41, control command set 1 is executed between step S284 for setting the pushing order instruction number (M_ORD_INF) and step S285 for preparing to start reel rotation. In the control command set 1 between this push order instruction number set and reel rotation start preparation, the effect group number or push order instruction number is stored as a control command in the control command buffer. Then, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the control command is composed of the first control command and the second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are 1-byte data. The first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating a parameter (variable). One control command is composed of 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used. 2 control command is sent to the sub-control board 80; As a result, a control command consisting of 2-byte data can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), a 64-byte storage area is secured in the RWM 53 as a control command buffer. As described above, since one control command consists of 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command, 32 control commands can be stored in the control command buffer. By transmitting control commands during interrupt processing, the untransmitted control commands stored in the control command buffer are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the order in which they were stored.
If the control command is stored when the control command buffer is empty, the control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission during the interrupt processing that comes next at that time.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, or the start switch 41 is turned on after the minimum playing time elapses. is turned on (operated), after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating, more specifically, the pushing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer. After about one interrupt (2.235 ms), the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the sub-control board 80 is composed of a first sub-control board (sub-main control board) and a second sub-control board (sub-sub-control board). The first sub-control board and the second sub-control board are control boards subordinate to the main control board 50, and control the selection, output, etc. of effects during the game and during the game standby. Also, the second sub-control board is a control board that belongs to the lower level of the first sub-control board. Control commands are unidirectionally transmitted from the main control board 50 to the first sub-control board, and the first sub-control board and the second sub-control board communicate bi-directionally.

Also, the first sub-control board determines what kind of effect to output at what timing based on the control command transmitted from the main control board 50 . Then, the first sub-control board transmits a control command related to the determined effect to the second sub-control board.
Further, the second sub-control board is electrically connected to peripheral devices for effects such as the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23. Then, the second sub-control board selects an effect based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control board, and controls to output various effects from the peripheral device for effect.

Specifically, when the first sub-control board receives a control command transmitted from the main control board 50, it stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Further, the first sub-control board executes sub-main processing every 16 ms, analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing, and as a result, determines that the control command is related to an image. stores an image command corresponding to the analysis result in the command buffer.
Further, the first sub-control board transmits the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in command transmission processing (executed before loop processing) during the next sub-main processing.

Therefore, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as the control command to the first sub-control board, until the second sub-control board receives the image command, it takes 32 ms (= sub-main processing period). It takes about 16 ms×2).
Then, the second sub-control board executes drawing processing based on the received image command and displays an image on the image display device 23 .
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board executes drawing processing at 30 fps (frames per second). Therefore, it takes about 33.33 ms to display one image on the image display device 23 .

As described above, after the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number as a control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board displays an image (pressing order instruction image) for instructing the pressing order on the image display device. 23, it takes about 65.33 ms (=32 ms+33.33 ms).
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has passed, as shown in FIG. , that is, before the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 becomes acceptable, display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum playing time elapses, it takes about one second from the turning on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reels 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the rotation of the reel 31 is started.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, or the start switch 41 is turned on after the minimum playing time elapses. Regardless of whether it is turned on (operated), display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started first, and then display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 41, the control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288. In the control command set 1 between this reel stop acceptance check and all reel stop check, a control command regarding the operation of the stop switch 42 and a control command regarding the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. Then, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board analyzes the received control command, and as a result, determines that the control command is related to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops first). When done, an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 is transmitted to the second sub-control board.
Similarly, when it is determined that the control command is related to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped second), the image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is sent to the second control command. 2 sub-control board, and when it is determined that it is a control command related to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last), respond to the operation of the third stop switch 42 An image command is sent to the second sub-control board.

When the second sub-control board receives an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42, the second sub-control board displays an image corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (for example, prompts the user to operate the second stop switch 42). (push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23 .
Similarly, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is received, an image corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (for example, a push order instruction image prompting the operation of the third stop switch 42) is displayed. It is displayed on the image display device 23 .

Further, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is received, for example, the display of the push order instruction image is ended, and an image corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (for example, all reels 31 are stopped) is displayed. (image corresponding to the state) is displayed on the image display device 23 .
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends after the third stop switch 42 is turned on.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, when all the reels 31 are stopped ("Yes" in step S289), the acquired number data is cleared (step S290). For example, it is assumed that pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 when the pressing order bell is won during AT. In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S290.
For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when all the reels 31 are stopped, display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 ends.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is finished first, and then the push order instruction on the obtained number display LED 78 is completed. Information display ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, in step S294, medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) is executed by winning a prize. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, "1" is added to the acquired number data in step S399 during medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) due to winning. As a result, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is incremented by "1" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S399. For example, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "00" to "01".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the number of won medals is displayed on the win number display LED 78 when the medals are paid out.

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), all reels 31 are stopped when the pressing order bell is won during AT and the pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Then, the acquisition number data is cleared, and the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00". After that, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 remains "00" until the medals are paid out. For example, when 10 medals are paid out, the display of the winning number display LED 78 is changed in the order of "00"→"01"→"02"→...→"09"→"10" when the medals are paid out. count up.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), once the combination lottery process (step S282) and the advantageous section transition lottery process (step S283) are executed, the pressing order instruction number set (step S284) is executed next. do.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed. After that, and before the reels 31 start rotating, display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 can be started. That is, after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 can be started immediately.

<14th Embodiment (B)>
The fourteenth embodiment (B) differs from the fourteenth embodiment (A) in that the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is different from that of the fourteenth embodiment (A). is the one that starts the
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (B), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 62, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

In FIG. 41, the processing is executed in the order of setting the pressing order instruction number, preparing to start reel rotation, and starting reel rotation. In the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIG. Processing is executed in the order of number setting and reel rotation start.
That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), the order of steps S284 and S285 is reversed from that in FIG. 41, and after the reel rotation start preparation is executed, the pushing order instruction number setting is executed.

If the input port read processing is performed in step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 53 and the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" in step S278 of the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 62, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, thereafter, winning combination lottery processing (step S282), advantageous section transition lottery processing (step S283), control command set 1 (step S601), reel rotation start. Preparation (step S285) and push order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) are executed.

In step S601, control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, an effect group number or a pressing order instruction number is stored as a control command in the control command buffer. After step S601, the process proceeds to step S285.
Further, in step S285, reel rotation start preparation is executed. In this reel rotation start preparation, first, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the minimum game time (minimum time from the start of rotation of the reels 31 to the start of rotation of the reels 31 in the next game) is "0".

The RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing a timer value for the minimum game time. Also, the initial value of the timer value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms×1834≈4099 ms)". Furthermore, the timer value is decremented by "1" every interrupt processing (2.235 ms). When it is determined that the timer value is not "0", it is determined again whether the timer value is "0", and when it is determined that the timer value is "0", the initial value of the timer value is set. set, and proceed to step S284.
In this way, in the reel rotation start preparation of step S285, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has passed, and when it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, the process proceeds to step S284.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 is executed, the process proceeds to step S602.
In step S602, control command set 1 is executed. This control command set 1
Now, the control command regarding the operation of the stop switch 42 and the control command regarding the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. After step S602, the process proceeds to step S288.
Execution of the control command set 1 between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288 is as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A).
Other than the above, it is the same as the flowchart of FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.

63 and 64 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (B).
FIG. 63 shows the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. It shows the timing of the display start and display end of the pressing order instruction information when the button is pressed.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), once the advantageous zone transition lottery process of step S283 is executed, the process proceeds to step S601, and the control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, an effect group number or a pressing order instruction number is stored as a control command in the control command buffer. Then, the effect group number or the pressing order instruction number stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after this process.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum game time elapses, or the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum game time elapses. After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating, more specifically, after the pushing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer, one interrupt (2. 235 ms), the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board).

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the control command set 1 in step S601 is executed, reel rotation start preparation is next executed in step S285, and then the push order instruction number set is executed in step S284.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, or the start switch 41 is turned on after the minimum playing time elapses. is turned on (operated), when the reel 31 starts rotating, display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.

Also, as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the first sub control board, the second sub control board instructs the image display device 23 to push order. It takes about 65.33 ms to display the image. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has passed, as shown in FIG. Display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before it becomes possible.
On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum playing time elapses, it takes about one second from the turning on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reels 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64, display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the rotation of the reel 31 is started.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Display of the push order instruction image on the display device 23 is started.
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, as shown in FIG. At this time, display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.
That is, depending on whether the start switch 41 is operated before or after the minimum game time elapses, the display of the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 and the push order instruction on the image display device 23 are started. The order with the image display start is reversed.

Here, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses or whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operating) after the minimum playing time elapses , after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 start rotating, display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started. That is, immediately after the start switch 41 was turned on (operated), display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 was started.

However, if the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is too early, the start switch 41 will be turned on when winning a role having an advantageous push order such as a push order bell in a role lottery (internal lottery). After (operation), the player immediately understands.
In this case, although there is no advantageous pushing order, there is a risk of discouraging the player who is waiting for the winning of the rare combination, which is the condition for determining the addition of the number of AT games played.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has passed, the push order instruction number is stored as win number data, so that when the reel 31 starts rotating, the win number display LED 78 can be pressed. Start displaying turn indication information.
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum game time elapses. , the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare combination is not discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.例文帳に追加

Further, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, and after the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data, 5 interrupts (2.235 x5=11.175 ms), display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 will start.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), before storing the push order instruction number as the acquisition count data, the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer and transferred to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board). However, it takes about 65.33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. time.

In this way, the time required from storing the pressing order instruction number as acquisition number data to displaying the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is "X", and the main control board 50 stores the pressing order instruction number. When the time required for the second sub-control board to display the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 after transmission to the first sub-control board is "Y", the image should satisfy "X<Y". is set to
Also, when the cycle of the interrupt process is "T" and the number of digits to be dynamically lit by the interrupt process is "N", the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data, and then the acquired number display LED 78 is pressed. A maximum of "T×N" time is required until the forward indication information is displayed. Therefore, it is set so as to satisfy “T×N<Y”.
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started first, and then the push order instruction information on the image display device 23 is displayed. Display of the instruction image is started.

<14th Embodiment (C)>
The fourteenth embodiment (C) differs from the fourteenth embodiments (A) and (B) in the timing of ending the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78. to end the display of
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 65, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

In FIG. 41, when it is determined in step S289 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290 to clear the acquisition number data, but in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIG. When it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, and symbol display determination is performed without clearing the acquisition number data.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the payout of medals (M_WIN_PAY) (step S603) due to winning is different from that of the eleventh embodiment shown in FIGS. 41 and 49. FIG.

Input port read processing is performed in step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 53, and if the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" in step S278 of the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Also, as shown in FIG. 65, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, thereafter, winning combination lottery processing (step S282), advantageous section transition lottery processing (step S283), pushing order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) , control command set 1 (step S601), and reel rotation start preparation (step S285).
Note that step S601 is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (B).

Further, in FIG. 65, executing the control command set 1 (step S602) after the reel stop acceptance check (step S287), and then executing the all reel stop check (step S288) is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment. It is similar to FIG. 62 of (B).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 65, when it is determined in step S289 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291 to determine the display of symbols. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), after all the reels 31 are stopped, the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared.

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) due to winning in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and is a flow chart corresponding to FIG. 49 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 66, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 49 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 49 are given the same step numbers. .

As shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when payout number data is acquired in step S391, the process proceeds to step S611, where the payout number data is stored as acquired number data, and then the process proceeds to step S392. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), payout number data is stored as acquisition number data between step S391 and step S392.
Further, as shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the one medal payout process is executed in step S398, the process proceeds to step S400, and "1" is subtracted from the payout number data. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), unlike the eleventh embodiment shown in FIG. 49, "1" is not added to the obtained number data between step S398 and step S400.

67 and 68 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (C).
FIG. 67 shows the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information is shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the winning number display LED 78 continues to display the pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1").

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when payout number data is stored as acquisition number data in step S611 of FIG. As a result, the acquired number of medals (for example, "10" when paying out 10 medals) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the winning number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") until the medals are paid out. Subsequently, when the medals are paid out, the display of the winning number display LED 78 is switched from the pressing order instruction information to the winning number (for example, from "=1" to "10").
It should be noted that the timing of starting to display the number of medals obtained, the timing of transmitting the pushing order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment ( It is the same as A).

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the winning number data is maintained without being cleared, and the payout number is used as the winning number data in step S611 of payout of medals (M_WIN_PAY) by winning in FIG. Store data.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 are stopped, it is possible to continue to display the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LEDs 78 .
Further, until medals are paid out, the winning number display LED 78 continues to display the push order instruction information, and when the medals are paid out, the display of the winning number display LED 78 is switched from the push order instruction information to the number of wins. Although the LED 78 is used as an indicator for both the pressing order instruction information and the number of winning cards, it is possible not to interfere with the display of the number of winning cards.

<14th Embodiment (D)>
The fourteenth embodiment (D) differs from the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (D) in the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78, and the reel 31 can be stopped. Sometimes, the display of the pressing order instruction information is started.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (D), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (D) shown in FIG. 69, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286, the process proceeds to step S604 to determine whether or not the reel 31 can be stopped. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the reel 31 has reached a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. When it is determined that the reel 31 can be stopped, the process advances to step S284 to execute the pushing order instruction number setting (M_ORG_INF).
The contents of the processing in the push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) in step S284 are the same as those in the eleventh embodiment and the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (C).
Also, the contents of the processing in the control command set 1 in steps S601 and S602 are the same as those in the fourteenth embodiment (B) and (C).

70 and 71 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (D).
FIG. 70 shows the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information is shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the reel 31 becomes stoppable, the pushing order instruction number setting is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. Regardless of whether the switch 41 is turned on (operated) or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, when the reels 31 become stoppable, the winning number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information. is started.

Also in the fourteenth embodiment (D), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, the , after the reels 31 start rotating and before the reels 31 can be stopped, the image display device 23 starts displaying the push order instruction image, and the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses. ), as shown in FIG. 71, before the reels 31 start rotating, the image display device 23 starts displaying the pushing order instruction image.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C), the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum playing time. Regardless of whether the reels 31 can be stopped, display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed, when the reels 31 are allowed to stop. , display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum playing time elapses, First, the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started, and then the display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 can be delayed until the reel 31 can be stopped, so as in the fourteenth embodiment (B). , the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare combination is not discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.例文帳に追加
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), although the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is delayed, the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 when the reel 31 can be stopped. is started, the player can be notified of the pressing order instruction information before the player operates the stop switch 42. - 特許庁

<14th Embodiment (E)>
In the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), display of push order instruction information is started at the start of rotation of the reel 31, and medals are paid out in the same manner as in the fourteenth embodiment (C). In some cases, the display of the push order instruction information is terminated.
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (E), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B) and FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C). .
72, steps S271 to S286 are the same as in FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), and steps S287 to S303 are the same as in FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

73 and 74 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (E).
FIG. 73 shows timings for starting and ending display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information is shown.
As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to FIGS. 63 and 64 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the reel 31 starts rotating, the winning number display LED 78 The display of the instruction information is started, and the display of the pressing order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 is ended when the medals are paid out, as in FIGS. 67 and 68 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

The timing of starting to display the number of medals obtained, the timing of transmitting the pushing order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (B ).
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, the pressing order instruction number is stored as the winning number data so that the reel 31 , the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, it is possible to delay the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 until the minimum playing time elapses. , the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare combination is not discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), as in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the win count data is maintained without being cleared, and medal payout (M_WIN_PAY ), the payout number data is stored as the winning number data in step S611.
Therefore, even after all the reels 31 are stopped, it is possible to continue to display the push order instruction information on the winning number display LEDs 78 until the medals are paid out. Since the press order instruction information is switched to the acquired number, the acquired number display LED 78 is used as a display for both the pressing order instruction information and the acquired number, but the acquired number can be displayed without hindrance.

<14th Embodiment (F)>
FIG. 75 is a front view showing the outline of the configuration including the reel 31, the stop switch 42, and the operation instruction lamp 25 in the fourteenth embodiment (F).
As shown in FIG. 75, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), a stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below each reel 31 . The stop instruction lamp 25 indicates the reel 31 to be stopped, and is composed of an LED lamp.

The left stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below the left reel 31 and lights when the left reel 31 is instructed to stop.
Similarly, the stop instruction lamp 25 that is provided below the middle reel 31 and lights up when instructing the stop of the middle reel 31 is the middle stop instruction lamp 25 .
A right stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below the right reel 31 and lights up when instructing the stop of the right reel 31 .
The sub-control board 80 controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25 .

Here, the sub-control board 80 is composed of a first sub-control board and a second sub-control board, and the stop instruction lamp 25 is electrically connected to the second sub-control board.
Then, the second sub-control board controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25 and displays an image on the image display device 23 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control board.

Specifically, when the conditions for activating the instruction function are met, that is, when a win with an advantageous push order such as a push order bell is won during AT, the main control board 50 performs control during the main process (M_MAIN). In command set 1, the push order instruction number as the control command is stored in the control command buffer.
Then, the main control board 50 transmits the control command (step S464) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process, and transmits the push order instruction number as the control command stored in the control command buffer to the first sub-sub. Send to control board.

Further, when the first sub-control board receives a control command transmitted from the main control board 50, it stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Furthermore, the first sub-control board executes sub-main processing every 16 ms, analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing, and as a result determines that it is the push order instruction number. , the lamp control command and the image command according to the analysis result are stored in the command buffer.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board transmits the lamp control command and the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in the command transmission process during the next sub-main process.
For this reason, as in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number as the control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board transmits the lamp control command and the image. It takes about 32 ms (=sub-main processing cycle 16 ms×2) until the command is received.

Based on the received lamp control command, the second sub-control board controls lighting/extinguishing of the (left, middle, and right) stop instruction lamps 25, and performs drawing processing based on the received image command. Then, the image is displayed on the image display device 23 .
For example, when receiving a lamp control command and an image command indicating left first stop, the second sub-control board turns on the left stop instruction lamp 25 and turns off the middle stop instruction lamp 25 and the right stop instruction lamp 25. At the same time, an image prompting the operation of the left stop switch 42 is displayed on the image display device 23 .

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the second sub-control board executes interrupt processing every 1 ms, and controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25 in this interrupt processing.
Therefore, the second sub-control board takes about 1 ms from receiving the lamp control command transmitted from the first sub-control board to lighting the stop instruction lamp 25 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped. need.

Furthermore, as described above, it takes about 32 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board receives the lamp control command.
Therefore, it takes about 33 ms (=32 ms+1 ms) from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25 .

Also in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board executes drawing processing at 30 fps (frames per second), so that one image can be displayed as an image. It takes about 33.33 ms to display on the device 23 .
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board It takes about 65.33 ms (=32 ms+33.33 ms) to display the push order instruction image on the display device 23 .
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the stop instruction lamp 25 is turned on first, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23 .

76 and 77 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (F).
FIG. 76 shows timings for starting and ending the display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information is shown.

Although not shown, also in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), the pressing order instruction number setting is executed after the reel rotation start preparation is executed.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, in the fourteenth embodiment (F) as well, as in the fourteenth embodiment (B), whether or not the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum playing time elapses. Or, regardless of whether or not it has elapsed, when the reel 31 starts rotating, display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 starts.

Also, although not shown, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), when it is detected that the third stop switch 42 is turned on, the acquisition number data is cleared. Then, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt processing executed after this processing.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 ends.
The timing of starting the display of the number of medals obtained and the timing of transmitting the pushing order instruction number as a control command are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (E).

Further, as described above, it takes about 33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25. It takes about 65.33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 .

Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has passed, as shown in FIG. The instruction lamp 25 lights up, and then the image display device 23 displays a push order instruction image.
On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum playing time elapses, it takes about one second from the turning on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reels 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, before the reel 31 starts rotating, the stop instruction lamp 25 is first turned on, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23 .

Further, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, first, as shown in FIG. lights up, and finally, a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23 .
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, as shown in FIG.
, the pressing order instruction image is displayed, and finally, the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (E), when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data. Thus, when the reel 31 starts rotating, display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, it is possible to delay the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 until the minimum playing time elapses. , the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare combination is not discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed, the stop instruction lamp 25 is first turned on. After that, a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23 .
Both the stop instruction lamp 25 and the image display device 23 are controlled by the second sub-control board. 25 lights earlier.

<14th Embodiment (G)>
The fourteenth embodiment (G) is provided with a dedicated 7-segment display (7 segments) for displaying the pressing order instruction information, and the timing of ending the display of the pressing order instruction information is the same as that of the fourteenth embodiment (F). , and the rest is the same as the fourteenth embodiment (F).
A dedicated 7-segment display for displaying the pressing order instruction information is referred to as a pressing order instruction LED.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the RWM 53 secures a storage area for the pressing order instruction data. The push order instruction data is data for displaying the push order instruction information on the push order instruction LED.

78 and 79 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (G).
FIG. 78 shows timings for starting and ending display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information is shown.

Also in the 14th embodiment (G), similarly to the 14th embodiments (B) and (F), after the reel rotation start preparation is executed, the pressing order instruction number setting is executed.
For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the fourteenth embodiment (G) as well as in the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (F), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), the minimum game is played. Regardless of whether it is before the time elapses or after the time elapses, the display of the pushing order instruction information starts when the reel 31 starts rotating.
In the fourteenth embodiment (G), the push order instruction number is set in the push order instruction data storage area of the RWM 53 . As a result, the push order instruction information is displayed on the push order instruction LED in the interrupt process executed after this process.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (F), the winning number display LED 78 displays the push order instruction information. It was possible to display the number of medals obtained.
On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), even when the medals are paid out, the pushing order instruction data is maintained without being cleared, so as shown in FIGS. The pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") continues to be displayed on the order instruction LED.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), when the payout of medals is completed, the push order instruction data is cleared. Then, the display of the push order indication LED becomes "00" by the interrupt process executed after this process.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the display of the pushing order instruction information on the pushing order instruction LED ends after the medals are paid out.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but is displayed on the dedicated push order instruction LED. Even if it continues, the display of the number of acquired medals can be prevented.
The timing of starting display of the number of medals obtained, the timing of transmitting the push order instruction number as a control command, the timing of starting and ending the display of the operation instruction lamp 25, and the start of displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. And the display end timing is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (F).

<Summary of the 14th embodiment>
From the time the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) to the time the reel 31 can be stopped (the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted). If displayed, the player can be notified of the correct order of pressing before the player turns on (operates) the stop switch 42 .
Therefore, the timing for starting the display of the push order instruction information is
1) When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 2) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating 3) When the reel 31 starts rotating 4) After the reel 31 starts rotating and before the reel 31 becomes stoppable; and 5) when the reel 31 becomes stoppable.

Further, in the case where the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, if the display of the pressing order instruction information is finished from the time when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) to the time when the medals are paid out, the medals are displayed. can be set so as not to interfere with the display of the acquired number of
Therefore, the timing for ending the display of the push order instruction information is
1) When the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) 2) When the third stop switch 42 is turned off after being turned on (when the player releases the third stop switch 42)
3) when all reels 31 are stopped; and 4) when medals are paid out.
In the case where the pressing order instruction information is displayed on a dedicated pressing order display LED, the pressing order instruction information may continue to be displayed when the medals are paid out, and the display of the pressing order instruction information may be terminated after the medals are paid out. .

In addition, until the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, the main control board 50 generates the control command, and the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 , the control command is received and analyzed by the sub-control board 80, and the drawing processing and display are performed by the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board), so a certain amount of time is required.
Therefore, even if the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 and transmits the control command to the sub control board 80 at the same time, the push order instruction image is not displayed on the image display device 23. will be delayed.

Also, depending on whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time elapses, the rotation of the reels 31 and the display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 start. order may be changed.
Therefore, the timing of starting to display the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is as follows.
1) after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating; and 2) after the reel 31 starts rotating and before the reel 31 can be stopped.

Also, after the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the sub-control board 80, until the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) finishes displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, , takes a certain amount of time.
Therefore, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated).
Then, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the display end timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the display start timing of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, and the push order The display end timing of the instruction image on the image display device 23 is not limited to the combination shown in the 14th embodiment (A) to (G), and can be set by any suitable combination.

In a game in which the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, even if an error in the pressing order occurs in the middle of the game, the pressing order instruction information is displayed until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). may continue to be displayed as it is, or the display of the pressing order instruction information may be terminated when an error in the pressing order occurs.
Similarly, in a game in which the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23, even if a mistake in the push order occurs in the middle of the game, the push order instruction will continue until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). The image may continue to be displayed as it is, or the display of the pressing order instruction image may be terminated when an error in pressing order occurs.

In addition, when the replay wins when three coins are inserted, three medals are automatically betted and the game can be started. The LED 79f lights up.
At this time, when the third stop switch 42 is operated and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, first, the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, and the game start display. The LED 79d and the replay display LED 79f are turned off.

After that, the 2-bet display LED 79b and the 3-bet display LED 79c are sequentially lit, and finally, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are lit.
When a replay win is made when three cards are inserted, the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up, and the 2-bet display LED 79b, 3-bet display LED 79c, game start display LED 79d, and replay display LED 79f go out. The display of the instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 may be terminated.

In addition, when a small winning combination is won, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 ends when the third stop switch 42 is turned on, when the third stop switch is turned off, when all reels 31 are stopped, or when medals are paid out. When the replay wins, the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up, and the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, and the game start display LED
When the 79d and the replay display LED 79f are turned off, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 may be terminated.
In other words, the display end timing of the pressing order instruction information may be different between when a small win is won and when a replay win is won.
Of course, the display end timing of the pressing order instruction information may be the same between when a small win is won and when a replay win is won.

Although the 14th embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and for example, the following modifications are possible.
(1) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used. By transmitting 2 control commands to the sub-control board 80, it is possible to transmit a control command consisting of 2-byte data to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

However, not limited to this, for example, a control command consisting of 2-byte data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 using only one set of 8-bit parallel communication lines.
In this case, the first control command and the second control command may be sequentially transmitted in one control command transmission during interrupt processing. As a result, a control command consisting of 2-byte data can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Alternatively, the control command transmission during one interrupt process may transmit the first control command, and the control command transmission during the next interrupt process may transmit the second control command. As a result, a control command consisting of 2-byte data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in two interrupt processes.
Furthermore, control commands may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 not only by parallel communication but also by serial communication.
Furthermore, the control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by electrical connection, and the control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by connection using optical communication means. good too.

(2) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as the control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and the sub control board 80 (second sub control board). The board) executed drawing processing based on the received push order instruction number, and displayed the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 .
However, not limited to this, for example, the main control board 50 transmits the condition device number as a control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) Drawing processing may be executed based on the received conditional device number, and the pressing order instruction number may be displayed on the image display device 23 .

Also, for example, the main control board 50 transmits the effect group number as a control command to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board), and the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) transmits the received effect group number The drawing process may be executed based on , and the push order instruction number may be displayed on the image display device 23 .
(3) The first to fourteenth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to fourteenth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment relates to the timing of addition processing for medals inserted from the medal slot 47. FIG.
Fifteenth embodiments (A) to (C) in which the medal addition processing timing is different will be described below.

<Fifteenth Embodiment (A)>
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (A) is the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.
That is, when a medal is inserted from the medal slot 47, the medal flows down the medal passage in the medal selector. A passage sensor 46, an insertion sensor 44a, and an insertion sensor 44b are provided from the upstream side on the medal passage in the medal selector. A blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the entry sensor 44a.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 47 first passes through the path sensor 46 and then reaches the position of the blocker 45 . Also, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the medals flowing down the medal passage pass through the blocker 45 and then reach the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
The input sensors 44a and 44b are installed with a predetermined distance therebetween.
Before the medals reach the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
Also, when the medals flow down the medal passage, first, the insertion sensor 44a is turned on from off, and the insertion sensor 44b remains off.

Further, when the medals flow down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a is turned on while the insertion sensor 44b is turned on.
After that, when the medal further flows down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a is turned off from on, and the insertion sensor 44b remains on.
After that, when the medal further flows down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44b is turned off from on while the insertion sensor 44a remains off.
The medals that have passed through the insertion sensors 44 a and 44 b reach the hopper 35 .

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (A).
At the timing of (a) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
At the timing of (b) in FIG. 80, the input sensor 44a is on and the input sensor 44b is off.
The state of (b) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
80 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80. FIG. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .

At the timing of (c) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both ON.
The state of (c) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state of (b) or (c) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Also, if the state of (c) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined period of time or more, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error, and the sub-control board 80 receives an error as in the case of (b) in FIG. Send command. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .

At the timing of (d) in FIG. 80, the closing sensor 44a is off, and the closing sensor 44
b is on.
The state of (d) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Further, if the state of (d) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error, as in the case of (b) and (c) in FIG. Send an error command to the board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .

At the timing of (e) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
The state of (e) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state of (e) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
In addition, in the state of (e) in FIG. 80, the main control board 50 determines that medals have been inserted, and executes medal "1" addition processing (bet processing or credit processing).
Here, when the state (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, if the number of bets is less than the specified number, the main control board 50 executes the processing of adding "1" to the number of bets. For example, when the prescribed number in the game is "3" and the bet number at that time is "1", the bet number is increased from "1" to "2" by adding "1" to the bet number. update to.

In addition, when the state of (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of "50", the main control The board 50 executes processing for adding "1" to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits at that time is "20", the number of credits is updated to "21".
Furthermore, when the state of (e) in FIG. Then, when receiving the input command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the input sound from the speaker 22 .
When a medal passing error occurs before the state of (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, the main control board 50 does not execute the medal "1" addition processing and does not transmit an insertion command.

Also, when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, (a) to (e) in FIG. 80 are repeated.
Then, in the state of (e) in FIG. 80, by executing the bet number addition processing of "1", when the bet number reaches the specified number, the main control board 50 causes the start switch 41 to be operated. The game is put in an acceptable state (game can be started), and the game start display LED 79d is turned on.

<Fifteenth Embodiment (B)>
The fifteenth embodiment (B) differs from the fifteenth embodiment (A) in the execution timing of the medal "1" addition processing.
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (B) is also the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (B).
Since (a) to (c) in FIG. 81 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIG. 80, the description is omitted, and (d) and (e) in FIG. Since it is different from (d) and (e) in FIG. 80, it will be described below.

At the timing of (d) in FIG. 81, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state of (d) in FIG. 81 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that medals have been inserted, and performs medal "1" addition processing (betting processing or credit processing). ). At this time, when the number of bets is less than the specified number, the bet number is added to the number of "1", and when the number of bets has already reached the specified number, the credit amount reaches the maximum number of "50". If the number of credits has not yet reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed in the same manner as in the fifteenth embodiment (A).

Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 50 transmits the input command to the sub control board 80 when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is reached. Then, when receiving the input command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the input sound from the speaker 22 .
However, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80. . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .

Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), there is a case where it is determined that there is a medal passage error and an error sound is output after executing the medal "1" addition processing and outputting the throwing sound.
In this way, when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the medal "1" addition processing is executed and a throwing sound is output, and then the state of (d) in FIG. When the error sound is continuously output, the error sound is output after the insertion sound is output, so that even if an error occurs, the player can be notified by the insertion sound that the medals have been inserted. .
When a medal passing error occurs in the state of (b) or (c) in FIG. 81, the main control board 50 does not execute the medal "1" addition processing and does not transmit an insertion command.

At the timing of (e) in FIG. 81, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
Also, when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, (a) to (e) in FIG. 81 are repeated.
Then, when the number of bets reaches the specified number by executing the processing of adding "1" to the number of bets, the main control board 50 operates the start switch 41 in the state of (e) in FIG. A state is set in which the game can be accepted, and the game start display LED 79d is turned on.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the medal "1" addition processing is executed, the timing of outputting the throwing sound and the operation of the start switch 41 are set to be acceptable, and the game start display LED 79d is lit. different from the timing.

Here, as described in the fifteenth embodiment (A), at the timing of (e) in FIG. It is common practice to
However, if the medal flows down the medal passage to the position of (d) in FIG.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), at the timing of (d) in FIG. 81 (when the insertion sensor 44b remains on and the insertion sensor 44a turns off from on), the medal "1" is displayed. Execute addition. As a result, it is possible to prevent so-called medal swallowing, in which medals enter the hopper 35 even though the medal addition process has not been executed.

In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), as described above, when the state (d) in FIG.
0, and the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 . In this case, when the error sound is output, the medal addition processing has already been executed and the throwing sound is output, so the error should be canceled and the medals stuck in the medal selector should be put into the hopper 35.例文帳に追加As a result, the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

Further, when medals are continuously inserted from the medal slot 47 and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the 51st medal is removed from the medal passage at the position of the blocker 45. It is returned from the medal payout port 16. - 特許庁
At this time, at the timing when the fiftieth medal becomes the state (d) in FIG. 45 off. As a result, the fifty-first medal can be reliably returned from the medal pay-out port 16 without being swallowed.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), in the state of (d) in FIG. 81, when the bet number reaches the prescribed number by executing the process of adding "1" to the bet number, the start switch 41 is operated. can be accepted. At this time, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 transmits a start command to the sub control board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the start command, it outputs a sound effect from the speaker 22 .

Here, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A), at the timing of (e) in FIG. 80, when the operation of the start switch 41 is made ready to be accepted and the input command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, There is a possibility that the input sound and the effect sound based on the operation of the start switch 41 will overlap.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the input command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in FIG. 81, and the start switch 41 is operated at the timing (e) in FIG. make it acceptable. As a result, it is possible to avoid overlap between the input sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 .

<Fifteenth Embodiment (C)>
The fifteenth embodiment (C) is the same as the fifteenth embodiment (B) in terms of execution timing of the medal "1" addition processing, but the timing of outputting the insertion sound is the same as in the fifteenth embodiment (B). They are different.
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (C) is also the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (C).
(a) to (c) in FIG. 82 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIGS. is different from (d) and (e) in FIGS. 80 and 81, and will be described below.

At the timing of (d) in FIG. 82, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state of (d) in FIG. 82 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), when the state of (d) in FIG. 82 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that medals have been inserted, and adds "1" to the medals (bet processing or credit processing). ). At this time, when the number of bets is less than the specified number, the bet number is added to the number of "1", and when the number of bets has already reached the specified number, the credit amount reaches the maximum number of "50". If the number of credits has not yet reached, the processing of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed in the same manner as in the fifteenth embodiment (A) and (B).

However, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), unlike the fifteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 50 does not transmit the input command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in FIG.
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), the main control board 50 transmits the input command to the sub control board 80 at the timing of (e) in FIG. Then, when receiving the input command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the input sound from the speaker 22 .

Here, it is assumed that the state of (d) in FIG. 82 has continued for a predetermined period of time or longer, and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80 . Assume that the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .
In this case, the medal "1" addition processing is executed, but the error sound is output without outputting the insertion sound. Thereby, priority can be given to error notification.

When the error is cleared, the main control board 50 transmits a closing command to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 outputs a closing sound from the speaker 22 based on the received closing command. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that medals have been inserted, so that the player can be relieved.
Further, in the state of (e) in FIG. 82, by executing the bet number "1" addition processing, when the bet number reaches the specified number, the operation of the start switch 41 can be accepted, Lighting the game start display LED 79d is the same as in the fifteenth embodiment (A) and (B).

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
The sixteenth embodiment relates to a chute passage 48 that guides medals that have passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and a chute sensor 49 provided in the middle of the chute passage 48. FIG.
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the medal selector, the shoot path 48, and the shoot sensor 49. A medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the insertion sensor 44a, the insertion sensor 44b, and the shoot sensor 49, and passes through the hopper. 35 is a schematic diagram showing a state of reaching 35. FIG.

The chute passage 48 is a passage for guiding the medals M that have passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and is connected to the downstream side of the medal passage of the medal selector. Then, the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 reaches the hopper 35 through the medal passage of the medal selector and the chute passage 35 .

The shoot sensor 49 is a sensor provided for judging whether or not there is a jammed medal or an act of cheating. and electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
Since the chute passage 48 is a passage that guides the medals M that have passed through the throw-in sensors 44a and 44b to the hopper 35, the shoot sensor 49 is arranged downstream of the throw-in sensors 44a and 44b.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the insertion monitoring counter adds "1" (when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passing of the medal M (when both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are turned off→on→off). "+1"), and is subtracted "1"("-1") when the shoot sensor 49 detects the passage of the medal M. For this reason, the input monitoring counter repeats "1" and "0" during normal operation.
The timing of adding "1" to the input monitoring counter is the timing when the input sensor 44b turns off from ON (timing of (e) in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82).
Further, the timing of adding "1" to the input monitoring counter is not limited to the timing at which the input sensor 44b turns off from on, but for example, the timing at which the input sensor 44a turns on from off (see FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82). (b)), or the timing at which the input sensor 44a turns off from on (the timing in (c) of FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82), or the timing at which the input sensor 44b turns on from off. (timing of (d) in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82). This is because it is considered that the medal M enters the hopper 35 when the medal M reaches these timings.
Also, when the medal M passes the shoot sensor 49, the shoot sensor 49 is turned off→on→off, but the timing of subtracting "1" from the insertion monitoring counter is the timing when the shot sensor 49 turns off from on. be.

Further, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M (insertion monitoring counter=“+1”) and the shoot sensor 49 does not detect the passage of the medal M, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M is further detected, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "+2", and the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has occurred.
Furthermore, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medals M, and only the shoot sensor 49 detects the passage of the medals M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 detects the medals M Judged as a passage error.

It should be noted that the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error not only when the insertion monitoring counter has become "+2" or "-1". For example, the main control board 50 may determine that a medal passage error has occurred when the insertion monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "+2" or more and when it reaches a predetermined value of "-1" or less.
Further, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error occurs when the shooting sensor 49 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed after detecting the medal M. Then, when the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error, the progress of the game is stopped until the error is cleared.

As shown in FIG. 83, the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 reaches the hopper 35 through the medal passage and the chute passage 48 . At this time, it passes through the throw-in sensor 44a, the throw-in sensor 44b, and the shoot sensor 49.
Here, it is assumed that the tip of the chute passage 48 is jammed with medals M. In FIG. 83, the position of M1 indicates the position of the medals M placed in the medal slot 47, the position of M2 indicates the position of the medals M jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48, and the position of M3 indicates the position of the chute. The position of the second medal M from the tip of the passage 48 is indicated, and the position of M4 indicates the position of the third medal M from the tip of the chute passage 48 .

As shown in FIG. 83, in the sixteenth embodiment, when the tip of the shoot passage 48 is jammed with medals M, the shot is placed at a position where the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the shoot passage 48 can be detected. A sensor 49 is arranged.
Therefore, when the tip of the chute passage 48 is jammed with medals M, the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 is detected by the shoot sensor 49, and if this state continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error, and stops the progress of the game until the error is cleared.

For example, assume that three medals M are inserted from the medal slot 47 when the prescribed number is "3" and both the bet number and the credit number are "0". In this case, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passing of the third medal M, the main control board 50 puts the start switch 41 into a state where it can accept the operation (game can be started), and the game start display L is displayed.
ED 79d is turned on. At this time, when the first medal M (M2) is jammed at the tip of the shoot passage 48, the shoot sensor 49 detects the third medal M (M4). When this state continues for a predetermined time or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has occurred, and stops the progress of the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with the medals M clogged in the chute passage 48. - 特許庁

Note that the position of the shoot sensor 49 is not limited to the position where the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the shoot passage 48 can be detected when the medals M are jammed at the tip of the shoot passage 48 . Assuming that the specified number is "N", the shoot sensor 49 may be arranged at a position where it can detect the N-th medal M from the tip of the shoot passage 48 when medals M are jammed at the tip of the shoot passage 48. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with the medals M clogged in the chute passage 48. - 特許庁

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
The seventeenth embodiment relates to a payout medal passage 134 that guides the medals ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16 .
84 is a front view of passage forming member 130, FIG. 85 is a rear view of passage forming member 130, FIG. 86 is a left side view of passage forming member 130, and FIG. It is an AA cross-sectional view.

The slot machine 10 has a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an open front and a front door 12 closing the opening of the cabinet 13. - 特許庁
A medal payout device 15 is arranged in the lower part of the inside of the cabinet 13 .
Furthermore, a medal slot 47, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, and the like are arranged at the front center of the front door 12, and a medal selector is located on the back side of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47. are placed.
Further, a medal payout port 16 is provided in the lower part of the front door 12, and a medal receiving tray for receiving the medals paid out from the medal payout port 16 is provided in the front lower part of the front door 12. A passage forming member 130 is attached to the lower portion.

84 and 85, the passage forming member 130 is formed in a bent shape, and is attached to a predetermined position on the lower back surface of the front door 12 to form the return medal passage 132 and the payout medal passage. 134.
Furthermore, the return medal passage 132 is a passage for guiding the medals that are not allowed to be inserted by the blocker 45 of the medal selector to the medal payout port 16 .
Further, the payout medal passage 134 is a passage that guides the medals ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16 .
Note that the return medal passage 132 and the paid-out medal passage 134 join in the middle to form one passage.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, an upper medal receiving opening 131 is provided in the upper portion of the passage forming member 130. As shown in FIGS. The upper medal receiving opening 131 is an opening for receiving medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45, and is an opening at the upstream end of the returning medal passage 132. When the front door 12 is closed, the upper medal receiving opening 131 is opened. It is formed so as to be positioned below the blocker 45 of the medal selector in the folded state.
After passing through the upper medal reception port 131, the medals that are not allowed to be inserted by the blocker 45 are guided by the return medal passage 132, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal tray.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, a lower medal receiving opening 133 is provided at a position below the center of the passage forming member 130 and to the left when viewed from the front (to the right when viewed from the back). ing. The lower medal reception opening 133 is an opening for receiving medals ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15, and is an opening serving as an upstream end of the payout medal passage 134, and is located on the front door. It is formed so as to be located in front of the ejection part 103 of the medal payout device 15 when the medal payout device 12 is closed.
The medals ejected from the ejection part 103 of the medal payout device 15 pass through the lower medal receiving port 133, are guided by the payout medal passage 134, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal tray. .

86 and 87, the lower medal receiving opening 133 is formed on the back side of the passage forming member 130, and the front side of the passage forming member 130 constitutes the back side of the front door 12. Plates are placed. In this manner, there is a distance corresponding to the depth of the passage forming member 130 from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 .
Here, the medals M ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 pass through the lower medal receiving opening 133, pass through the payout medal passage 134, and reach a position facing the lower medal receiving opening 133 on the back surface of the front door 12. hit and bounce. At this time, if the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 is short, the medal M bounced back from the rear surface of the front door 12 and the medal M is ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 next. There is a possibility that it will collide with the medal M that is attached.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 is "L1" and the diameter of the medal M is "D", "L1 ≧2D”.
That is, the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 is set to be at least twice the diameter "D" of the medal M.
As a result, the medal M bounced back from the back surface of the front door 12 and the medal M ejected from the discharge part 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 next to the medal M are prevented from colliding.

That is, the medals M ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 are directed toward the rear surface of the front door 12 (to the right in FIG. 87) while dropping downward due to gravity. Therefore, the medal M ejected from the ejecting portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the rear surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position. Further, the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces back is directed toward the lower medal receiving opening 133 (leftward in FIG. 87) while dropping downward due to gravity.
If the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 is set to be at least twice the diameter "D" of the medal M, the medal is ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15. A sufficient height difference can be ensured between the medal M directed toward the back side of the front door 12 and the medal M bounced off the back side of the front door 12 and directed toward the lower medal receiving port 133, so that the two medals M do not collide. can be made difficult.

Also, if the medals M are ejected one after another at short intervals from the ejection portion 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, even if the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is equal to the diameter "D" of the medals M. Even if it is set to double or more, there is a possibility that the medal M ejected from the discharge part 103 of the medal payout device 15 and the medal M bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 collide.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, after the medal M ejected from the ejecting portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 bounces off the back surface of the front door 12, the next medal M is ejected from the ejecting portion 103 of the medal payout device 15. have set.
That is, the interval at which the medals M are ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, the ejection speed of the medals M from the ejection portion 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, and the distance from the lower medal receiving port 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 and are set so as to satisfy the above relationship.

In this way, the medal M ejected from the ejecting portion 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 bounces off the back surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position, and after dropping to a lower position, the next medal M is ejected from the medal dispensing device. If the medals are ejected from the ejection portion 103 of 15, the distance and height difference between the two medals can be sufficiently ensured, and the two medals M can be prevented from colliding with each other.
Here, when the medal M bounced back from the back surface of the front door 12 collides with the medal M ejected from the ejecting part 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 next to this medal M, the medal M is ejected from the vicinity of the lower medal receiving port 133 or the dispensed medal. There is a possibility that the medals M are jammed in the passage 134. - 特許庁

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the medals M are set so as not to collide with each other, thereby preventing the medals M from being jammed in the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133 and in the payout medal passage 134. .
In this embodiment, it is set so that the medal M bounced back from the back surface of the front door 12 and the medal M ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 next to the medal M are unlikely to collide with each other. However, when a large number of medals M are continuously ejected from the ejecting portion 103, it does not mean that the front and rear medals M do not all collide. It is enough if there is no collision. When winning a small winning combination, two medals are most often paid out. This is because the medals M can be prevented from being clogged in the payout medal passage 134 .

Here, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with a plurality of holding portions 102 capable of holding the medals M stored in the hopper along the outer circumference of the hopper disk 101. there is
Then, when the following conditions (a) and (b) are satisfied, or when the conditions (a) and (c) are satisfied, two or more medals M are consecutively ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15. It will be ejected.
(a) Two adjacent holding portions 102 of the hopper disc 101 hold medals M respectively.
(b) "(M−N)≧2" is satisfied, where "N" is the remaining number of medals before reaching the upper limit of the number of credits, and "M" is the number of medals M to be paid out for winning.
(c) The settlement switch 43 is operated when the number of credits is "2" or more.

For example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 positioned at the letter "B" and the holding portion 102 positioned at the letter "C" each hold a medal M. When there is, the above condition (a) is satisfied even if the medal M is not held in the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "D".
Further, for example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 positioned at the character "B" does not hold the medal M, but the holding portion positioned at the character "C" When medals M are held in 102 and in the holding portion 102 at the position of the character "D", the above condition (a) is satisfied.

Furthermore, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "B", the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "C", and the position of the letter "D" When the medal M is held in each of the holding portions 102 in and , the above condition (a) is satisfied.
Of course, even when medals M are held in all the holding portions 102 of the hopper disk 101, the above condition (a) is satisfied.

Further, for example, when the upper limit of credits is "50" and the number of credits is "47", the remaining number of cards before reaching the upper limit of credits is "3". is "5" or more, the above condition (b) is satisfied.
Furthermore, for example, when the number of credits has already reached the upper limit of "50", the remaining number of cards until reaching the upper limit of the number of credits is "0". , the above condition (b) is satisfied.

As described above, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, medal If the condition (b) or (c) is satisfied while M is being held, two or more medals M are continuously ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 .
Further, for example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "B" does not hold the medal M, but at least the medal M is held at the position of the letter "C". When the above conditions (b) or (c) are satisfied under the condition that the medals M are respectively held by the holding portion 102 and the holding portion 102 at the position of the character "D", the medals are paid out. Two or more medals M are continuously ejected from the ejection section 103 of the device 15 .

In addition, the medal M ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 may bounce off the back surface of the front door 12 and return to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133 . If the returning medal M passes through the lower medal receiving opening 133, it falls inside the cabinet 13 and cannot be paid out to the player.
Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the peripheral portion of the lower medal receiving opening 133 is "L2" and the thickness of the medal M is "T", "L2≧T ” is set to satisfy

That is, the height "L2" of the peripheral portion of the lower medal receiving opening 133 is set to be equal to or greater than the thickness "T" of the medal M.
As a result, even if the medal M ejected from the discharge part 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 bounces off the back surface of the front door 12 and returns to the vicinity of the lower medal reception opening 133, the returning medal M is not released into the lower medal reception opening. 133, and can be prevented from passing through the lower medal receiving opening 133.

In addition, since the hopper disk 101 of the medal payout device 15 is arranged to be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, the medals M are ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 while being inclined with respect to the horizontal plane. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the lower medal receiving opening 133 and the payout medal passage 134 are also inclined in accordance with the inclination of the ejected medals M. As shown in FIG.

Here, the direction perpendicular to the obverse and reverse surfaces of the medal M ejected in an inclined state is defined as the height direction. In the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the payout medal passage 134 is "L2" and the diameter of the medal M is "D", "L2<D" is satisfied. have set. That is, the height "L2" of the payout medal passage 134 is set to be less than the diameter "D" of the medal M.

As a result, even if the medal M bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 and rotates in the payout medal passage 134, the front and back surfaces of the medal M can be prevented from being parallel to the vertical plane in the payout medal passage 134.例文帳に追加Therefore, the medals M can be prevented from blocking the payout medal passage 134.例文帳に追加
It should be noted that all the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification are not limited to be implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
The eighteenth embodiment relates to transmission processing of an external signal.
In the eighteenth embodiment, it is possible to output a signal indicating ON/OFF as the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 .
In the eighteenth embodiment, the external signal 4 is a setting key switch ON signal (setting key switch signal), a signal indicating that an error has been detected, a signal indicating that an error is being displayed, or a signal indicating that the power switch 11 is on. This is a signal indicating that the power has been turned on (detection of power-on).
The external signal 5 is a signal (door switch ON signal) indicating that the front door 12 of the slot machine 10 is opened.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing major storage areas of the RWM 53 described in the eighteenth embodiment.
The input port 0 level data at address "F00A(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating ON/OFF of input port 0. FIG. Each bit of input port 0 is configured as follows.
D0: Setting switch signal (“1” when ON, “0” when OFF)
D1: Reset switch signal (“1” when ON, “0” when OFF)
D2: Signal of setting key switch (“1” when ON, “0” when OFF)
D3: Door switch signal (“1” when ON, “0” when OFF)
D4: Not used D5: Not used D6: Power failure detection signal D7: Full detection signal

Here, the D6-bit "power-off detection signal" is input when power-off occurs (for example, when "Yes" is determined in step S482 in FIG. 54 (eleventh embodiment)). is a signal.
In addition, although not shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 10 is provided with a sub-tank for storing medals overflowing from the hopper 35 . Furthermore, it has a full sensor that turns on when the sub-tank comes into contact with a medal when it is full. Then, when the full sensor is turned on, a full detection signal is input to the D7 bit of input port 0 .
Also, although not shown in FIG. 88, in addition to the storage area for input port 0 level data, each bit of input port 0 has been turned on (at the time of current interrupt processing) from off (at the time of previous interrupt processing). The input port rising data storage area for storing the data indicating that the It is also possible to provide a storage area for input port trailing edge data for storage.

Furthermore, the input port 51 shown in FIG. 1 is not limited to the input port 0. For example,
(1) Input port 1 for inputting operation switch signals such as bed switch 40 (40a and 40b), start switch 41, stop switch 42, settlement switch 43, etc.
(2) Input port 2 for inputting signals from passage sensor 46, input sensor 44, payout sensor 37, reel sensor 33, etc.
etc.
A storage area for input port level data corresponding to each input port is provided. Furthermore, as described above, it is possible to provide storage areas for input port rise data and input port fall data for each input port.
Furthermore, when only the storage area for input port level data is provided (when storage areas for input port rising data and input port falling data are not provided), the storage area for input port level data in this interrupt process In addition, a storage area for input port level data in the previous interrupt processing may be provided.

The external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure recovery at the address "F013(H)" is a storage area for a timer value for counting the time for outputting the external signal 4 at the time of power failure recovery. In this embodiment, when the power switch 11 in FIG. 1 is turned on and the main control board 50 detects recovery from power failure, the address "F013 (H)" is set to "136 (D)" as an initial value. and is decremented by "1" for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes "0".
Also, in the eighteenth embodiment, the interrupt period is "2.235 ms", as in the other embodiments. Therefore, "136" interrupt corresponds to "303.96 ms". As a result, the external signal 4 is turned on for about "300" ms at the time of recovery from power failure (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 4 management time at the address “F014(H)” is a storage area for a timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 4 . In this embodiment, the initial value "24 (D)" is set when the output of the external signal 4 is started (except when returning from power failure described above), and is decremented by "1" for each interrupt. . Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes "0".
Also, the "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64 ms". As a result, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least 50 ms or longer (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 5 management time at the address “F015(H)” is a storage area for the timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 5 . In this embodiment, an initial value "24(D)" is set when outputting the external signal 5 is started, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5) until this value becomes "0".
As above, the "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64ms". As a result, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least 50 ms or longer (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5).

Further, the external signal 4 output time, the external signal 4 management time, and the external signal 5 management time at the time of power failure recovery in this embodiment are all 1-byte timers to measure "255 (D)" or less. These timer values are decremented by timer measurement in step S455 during the interrupt processing of FIG.
Here, in the eighteenth embodiment, the above three timers are arranged at addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)". Therefore, in timer measurement, "F013 (H)" is set as the measurement start timer address in the first step. Also, "3" is set as the number of 1-byte timers. As a result, all timers including the addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)" are decremented by "1" by the timer measurement process.
Also, when the subtraction process is executed when the timer value is "0", in other words, when "0" is subtracted from "00 (H)", "00 (H)" is set. .

The error number at address "F051(H)" is a storage area for storing the number corresponding to the detected error when the error is detected. As shown in FIG. 88, when no error is detected, the value of address "F051(H)" is "0(D)". Then, for example, when an "E5" error is detected, a value "105(D)" corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address "F051(H)".
In FIG. 88, "E0" to "E7" are exemplified as error numbers.
Here, in the eleventh embodiment described above, "E1", "E5", "E6", and "E7" errors are exemplified as unrecoverable errors. On the other hand, the "E0" to "E7" errors in the eighteenth embodiment (FIG. 88) all correspond to recoverable errors.

When these recoverable errors occur, as a general rule, the progress of the game is stopped. Further, even during rotation of at least one reel 31, error detection is executed for at least some errors ("E7", "E6", and "E5" errors in the example of the 18th embodiment). When an error is detected during rotation of at least one reel 31, the progress of the game is continued until all the reels 31 are stopped, and when all the reels 31 are stopped, an error state ( error display) and stop the progress of the game. When the error is removed by the hall clerk, the progress of the game is resumed. Of course, if any one of the errors "E7", "E6", and "E5" occurs during rotation of the reel 31, the progress of the game is stopped (stop control by operating the stop switch 42 is not performed). ) can also be configured as

In FIG. 88, an "E0" error is an error when the insertion sensor 44 determines that the medals have accumulated.
The "E1" error is an error when it is determined that the medals have not passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b in order.
An "E2" error is an error when it is determined that the sub-tank is full.
An "E3" error is an error when it is determined that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty.
The "E4" error is an error when the payout sensor 37 determines that the medals are stuck (jammed) while the medal payout signal is being output.
The "E5" error is an error that occurs when the payout sensor 37 is turned on while the medal payout signal is not being output.
The "E6" error is an error when the insertion sensor 44b detects medals under the condition that the blocker 45 does not form the medal flow path.
The "E7" error is an error when it is determined that medals are stuck in the selector passage.

When any of the above errors is detected, the number corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address "F051(H)". When an error number is stored at address "F051(H)", it is possible to display an error corresponding to the stored error number. For example, the segment data corresponding to the number stored at the address "F051(H)" may be output to the obtained number display LED 78 to display the error number. Specifically, when the error code "101(D)" is stored in the address "F051(H)", the digit At the lighting timing of 3, the lighting data of the digit 3 and the segment data for displaying "E" are output. At the lighting timing of the digit 4, the lighting data of the digit 4 and the segment data for displaying "1" are output.

Also, when any error number is stored in the address "F051(H)"("0"
If not), turn on the external signal 4 (make it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4).
When the hall clerk removes the error that has occurred, he turns on the reset switch. When it is detected that the reset switch has been turned on, it is determined whether or not the error that occurred has been eliminated. If it is determined that the error that has occurred has not been removed, the status quo (error display) is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error that has occurred has been eliminated (no error has occurred), the error number stored at the address "F051(H)" is cleared. When the error number of address "F051(H)" is cleared, the error display (display of error number by digits 3 and 4) is ended.
The above is an example of displaying an error number on the earned number display LED 78 based on the above-described other embodiment, but it is not limited to this, and may be displayed on the credit number display LED 76, or an error display. A dedicated LED may be provided and displayed on that LED.

The error detection flag at address "F294(H)" is a storage area for storing the detection of an error in consideration of the case where the error state cannot be immediately changed when an error is detected. is. In the example of FIG. 88, D0 to D2 bits in the storage area of address "F294(H)" are used as detection flags for "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors, respectively. All of the "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors are errors that can be detected even when at least one reel 31 is rotating.

Here, for example, even when the reel 31 is rotating, it is determined whether or not an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error has occurred by interrupt processing. When the occurrence of these errors is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, the bit corresponding to the error in the error detection flag is set to "1". When the error detection flag is "1", the external signal 4 is output.
However, even if these errors are detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the error state (error display) does not immediately occur at that time, and only after all the reels 31 have stopped. The error state is entered before the payout process is executed.

If any bit of the error detection flag is "1" when all the reels 31 are stopped, the corresponding error number is stored in the address "F051(H)". When an error number is stored at address "F051(H)", the stored error number is displayed. After storing the error detection flag at the address "F294(H)", when the error number is stored at the address "F051(H)", when the error detection flag at the address "F291(H)" is cleared is arbitrary. For example, first, do not clear the error detection flag until the error is removed. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored and after all the reels 31 have stopped, the external signal 4 is turned on based on either the error detection flag or the error number. signal can be output). Then, when it is determined that the error has been eliminated, both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared. When the error detection flag and error number are cleared, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). However, even if both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, for example, if the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is not turned off (the external signal 4 is turned off). does not output a signal indicating

Secondly, after storing the error detection flag at the address "F294(H)", when the error number is stored at the address "F051(H)", the error detection flag at the address "F291(H)" is cleared. to do. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored, until the error number is stored, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error detection flag. ). When the error number is stored and the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error number (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). After that, when it is determined that the error has been eliminated, the error number is cleared. As a result, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). However, even if both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, the external signal 4 is not turned off if, for example, the setting key switch is on (the external signal 4 is turned off). does not output a signal indicating

When an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the error state (error display) cannot be immediately changed (the error state cannot be changed until after all the reels 31 have stopped). Since it is necessary to turn on the external signal 4 (to be able to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 4), the error detection flag is provided.
Therefore, when the "E5", "E6", or "E7" errors occur in a situation where the reel 31 is stopped or in a situation where it is possible to immediately shift to an error state, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. It is optional whether or not to In order to simplify the process, even when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs under conditions where it is possible to shift to an error state, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. good too. Alternatively, when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs, if the error state cannot be shifted immediately (for example, at least one reel 31 is rotating), the error detection flag is set to "1". ' is stored, and when the situation is such that it is possible to immediately shift to an error state (for example, during game standby), the error number is stored, but "1" may not be stored in the error detection flag.

In the storage area of the RWM 53 described above, the storage areas at addresses "F00A(H)", "F013(H)" to "F015(H)", and "F051(H)" are storage areas within the used area. . On the other hand, the storage area of address "F294(H)" is a storage area outside the use area. A program for detecting errors is stored in a control area outside the use area of the ROM 54 .

89 and 90 are time charts showing output timings of external signal 4 and external signal 5, FIG. 89 showing example 1 and FIG. 90 showing example 2. FIG.
In Example 1 of FIG. 89, (a) shows the relationship between the ON/OFF state of the setting key switch and the output of the external signal 4. FIG. When the ON state of the setting key switch is detected, the external signal 4 is immediately turned ON (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the setting key switch is turned on to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4) is "0" ms. Therefore, when the ON state of the setting key switch is detected, the external signal 4 is immediately turned ON (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).
Further, whether or not the setting key switch is on is detected in interrupt processing. For example, during the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 53 (11th embodiment), in the input port reading processing of step S457, when the level data of the input port 0 is read and the level data of the setting key switch is "1", the external The signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4).

Also, once the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is turned on for 50 ms or longer (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (t3 in the figure). Therefore, even if the setting key switch is turned off immediately after being turned on (for example, after "10" ms), the external signal 4 is turned on (external A signal indicating ON can be output as the signal 4).
When the setting key switch is turned off, the condition is that "50" ms or more have elapsed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 can be output). , the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). If "50" ms or more have passed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output), the external signal 4 is turned off when the setting key switch is detected to be turned off. (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (t2 in the figure).

Therefore, after detecting that the setting key switch is turned on and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 4), turn off the setting key switch before "50" ms elapses. When it is detected, the external signal 4 is turned off after the minimum "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, after detecting that the setting key switch is on and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 4), the setting key switch is turned off after a lapse of "50" ms or longer. When detected, the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(b) shows the relationship between error detection/non-detection and the output of the external signal 4. FIG. Here, "detection of an error" means that any bit in the error detection flag of the address "F294(H)" is "1", and "non-detection of an error" means that the error This corresponds to the detection flag being "0".
As soon as "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the external signal 4 can be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when "1" is stored in the error detection flag to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) is "0" ms.
Also, once "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the external signal is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (time t3). When the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 can be turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2). As described above, the error detection flag is cleared when the error is removed or when the error number is stored although the error is not removed.

Therefore, after detecting that the error detection flag has become "1" and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), before "50" ms elapses When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", after at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off as the external signal 4). can be output).
On the other hand, after detecting that the error detection flag has become "1" and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), after "50" ms or more have passed, When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(c) shows the relationship between error display/non-display and the output of the external signal 4. FIG. Here, "error display" means that the error number of the address "F051(H)" is a value other than "0" (in the example of FIG. 88, any of "100(D)" to "107(D)" ) is stored, and "error non-display" corresponds to the value of the error number being "0". A storage area for storing flags indicating error display/non-display may be provided. It is possible to reduce the storage area to be used by determining whether the error is to be displayed or not.

When a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when a value other than the error number "0" is stored until when the external signal 4 is output is "0" ms.
Also, when a value other than "0" is once stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (time t3). In addition, after a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output), and then the error number is cleared, the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2).

Therefore, when the error number is stored and the error number is cleared before "50" ms elapses after turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), After at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, when the error number is stored and the error number is cleared after "50" ms or more have passed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output), The external signal 4 can be turned off immediately (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(d) shows the relationship between the power on/off and the output of the external signal 4. FIG. Here, whether or not the power is turned on (whether or not the power switch 11 in FIG. 1 is turned on) can be detected by various methods. (H)" corresponds to the time when the initial value "136 (D)" of the external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure recovery is stored.
When the power-on is detected (when the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when power is restored), the external signal 4 can be turned on immediately (on is indicated as the external signal 4). signal can be output). The minimum value of the time t1 until the external signal 4 is output after the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 after power failure recovery is "0" ms.
In addition, when the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when power is restored, the external signal 4 is turned on for "300" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) ( time t3). "300" ms here corresponds to the number of interrupts "136". In addition, when the output time of the external signal 4 when power is restored becomes "0", the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). (time t2).

Therefore, the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when power is restored, and the power switch 11 is turned off after turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4). When this is detected (when the D7 bit of the input port 0 level data becomes "1"), the external signal 4 is turned off (external A signal indicating OFF can be output as the signal 4).
On the other hand, the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is restored. When 300 ms has passed, the external signal 4 is turned off even if the power switch 11 is kept on (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(e) shows the relationship between the opening/closing of the front door 12 and the output of the external signal 5. FIG. Here, "the front door 12 is opened" corresponds to when it is detected that the door switch is turned on. Particularly in the eighteenth embodiment, this corresponds to when the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data (or input port 0 rising data) becomes "1".
When the ON state of the door switch is detected, the external signal 5 can be turned ON immediately (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the door switch is detected to when the external signal 5 is output is "0" ms.
Also, when the ON state of the door switch is detected, the external signal 5 is turned ON for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5) (time t3). As a result, even if the front door 12 is closed immediately after the front door 12 is opened, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least 50 ms (the external signal 5 indicates ON). signal can be output).

Therefore, after detecting that the door switch is turned on and turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 5), it is detected that the door switch is turned off before "50" ms elapses. When at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 5, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).
On the other hand, after detecting that the door switch is on and turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 5), the door switch is detected to be off after lapse of "50" ms or more. In this case, the external signal 5 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

The output destination of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 is a hall computer or the like, but the external signal 4 or 5 is turned on for "50" ms or longer (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4 or 5). ), a hall computer (data lamp) or the like can reliably receive the external signals 4 and 5 . Therefore, even if a fraudulent act such as turning on the setting key switch for a moment (for example, about "5" to "10" ms) is performed, or a fraudulent act including opening the front door 12 for a moment is performed, the hall An external signal 4 or 5 can be received by a computer or the like.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 90 is a modification of Example 1 shown in FIG.
In FIG. 90,
The time t1 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is detected to be turned on until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4),
time t1 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) becomes "1" to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
time t1 from when the error number shown in (c) is stored to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t1 from when the ON state of the door switch shown in (e) is detected to when the external signal 5 is turned ON (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5)
are both set to "0" ms.

In FIG. 90, the interval of the time t1 is shown to exceed "0", but in reality, for example, in (a), the timing when the setting key switch is turned on from off and the timing of the external signal 4 The timing when the output turns from off to on is almost the same (the timing when the output of the external signal 4 turns on from off to the timing when the setting key switch turns off to on is within "2"). .
Also, the external signal 4 shown in (a) to (c) in the figure and the external signal 5 shown in (e) in the figure are turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signals 4 and 5) time t3. is a minimum of 50 ms. This point is the same as the example of FIG.
Furthermore, the time t3 for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling the output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) in (d) of the figure is "300" ms as in the example of FIG.

Furthermore,
time t2 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is detected to be off until the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
time t2 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) is cleared until the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
time t2 from when the error number shown in (c) is cleared until the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
The time t2 from when the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power failure recovery shown in (d) becomes "0" to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t2 from when the door switch is detected to be turned off to when the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).
are all "50" ms.

In order to do this, for example, a timer for managing the output time of the external signal 4 is used when the OFF of the setting key switch is detected, when the error detection flag is cleared, or when the error number is cleared. A value of "24 (D)" is set, the timer value is decremented by "1" each time an interrupt is processed, and when the timer value becomes "0", the external signal 4 is turned off (off as the external signal 4). can be output).
Similarly, when it detects that the door switch is turned off, it sets a timer value "24 (D)" for managing the output time of the external signal 5, subtracts "1" from the timer value for each interrupt process, For example, when the timer value becomes "0", the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

Next, the output of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 will be explained based on a flow chart. 91 to 94 are flow charts showing external signal output processing.
91 and 92 are flowcharts showing an example 1 of external signal output processing. FIG. 92 is a flow chart following FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing example 2 of the external signal output processing. Further, FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example 3 of external signal output processing.
The external signal output process (step S3221) is, for example, a process between step S455 (timer measurement) and step S456 (LED display control) in FIG.

First, Example 1 of external signal output processing will be described.
In FIG. 91, in step S3231, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch is on. If it is determined that the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3237, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S3232.

In step S3232, it is determined whether or not an error has been detected. This process determines whether any bit of the error detection flag is "1". When it is determined that any bit of the error detection flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3237, and when it is determined that none of the bits is "1" (no error is detected), the process proceeds to step S3233.
In step S3233, it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed. This process reads the error number and determines whether it is "0". If it is "0", it is judged that an error is not being displayed, and the process proceeds to step S3234.

In step S3234, it is determined whether "300" ms has passed since the power was turned on. As described above, when recovery from power failure is detected, the initial value "136 (D)" is set to the external signal 4 output time at power failure recovery of address "F013 (H)", and "1" is decremented. Then, in step S3234, it is determined whether or not the external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure recovery is "0". and advances to step S3235. On the other hand, when the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.

In step S3235, it is determined whether or not the output time of the external signal 4 has passed a predetermined time. Here, the external signal 4 management time of address "F014(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3240, which will be described later. Then, in step S3235, it is determined whether or not this external signal 4 control time is "0". The process proceeds to step S3236, and when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.
In step S3236, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). The process then proceeds to step S3242 (of FIG. 92).

On the other hand, when it is determined "Yes" in step S3231, S3232, or S3233, and the process proceeds to step S3237, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch has been turned on from off in the current interrupt process. In this interrupt process, whether or not the D2 bit (setting key switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on is determined, for example, firstly, if there is input port 0 rising data, input port 0 rising data is "1". Secondly, the input port 0 level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is saved, and if the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data at the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the input port 0 level data at the current interrupt processing When the D2 bit of is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned on from off in this interrupt process. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3240, and if it is determined that the setting key switch has not been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3238.

In step S3238, it is determined whether or not the error detection flag has changed from off to on. Here, for example, the error detection flag in the previous interrupt process is saved, and by performing a comparison operation with the error detection flag in the current interrupt process, the error detection flag is turned on from OFF to ON in the current interrupt process. determine whether or not When it is determined that the error detection flag has changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3240, and when it is determined that the error detection flag has not changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3239.

In step S3239, it is determined whether or not the error number has changed from hidden (“0”) to displayed (other than “0”). Here, for example, the error number in the previous interrupt process is saved, and the error number in the current interrupt process is compared with the error number in the current interrupt process. determine whether it has become When it is determined that the error number has changed from "0" to other than "0", the process proceeds to step S3240, and when it is determined that the error number remains "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.

When proceeding from step S3237, S3238, or S3239 to step S3240, the external signal 4 management time of address "F014 (H)" is set to "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms as an initial value. . Then, the process proceeds to step S3241.
In step S3241, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). The process then proceeds to step S3242 (of FIG. 92).
In step S3242, it is determined whether the door switch is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the door switch is on. If it is determined that the door switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3245, and if it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3243.

In step S3243, it is determined whether or not the output time of the external signal 5 has elapsed. Here, the external signal 5 management time of address "F015(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3246, which will be described later. Then, in step S3243, it is determined whether or not this external signal 5 control time is "0". Proceed to S3247.
In step S3244, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the door switch is on in step S3242, and the flow advances to step S3245, it is determined whether the door switch has been turned on from off in the current interrupt process. In this interrupt process, whether or not the D3 bit (door switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on is determined, for example, firstly, if there is input port 0 rising data, the input port 0 rising data Determine whether the D3 bit is "1". Secondly, the input port 0 level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is saved, and if the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data at the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the input port 0 level data at the current interrupt processing When the D3 bit of is "1", it is determined that the door switch has been turned on from off in this interrupt process. If it is determined that the door switch has been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3246, and if it is determined that the door switch has not been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3247.

In step S3246, "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms is set as the initial value for the external signal 5 management time of address "F015 (H)". Then, the process proceeds to step S3247.
In step S3247, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example 2 of external signal output processing.
In the example of FIG. 92,
(1) As shown in step S3237, when the setting key switch is turned on from off,
(2) As shown in step S3238, when the error detection flag is turned on from off,
(3) As shown in step S3239, the output time of external signal 4 is set when the error number is newly stored.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 93, in the current interrupt processing, it is based on whether the setting key switch is on, whether the error detection flag is on, and whether the error number is stored. to control the output of the external signal 4.

In FIG. 93, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIGS. In the example of FIG. 93, steps different from those of FIGS. 91 and 92 are not provided.
In the example of FIG. 93,
(1) When it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on (when the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data at address "F00A(H)" is "1"),
(2) In step S3234, when "300" ms has not passed since the power was turned on (the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery at address "F013(H)" is not "0"),
(3) In step S3233, when it is determined that an error is being displayed (when the error number stored at address "F051(H)" is other than "0"),
(4) In step S3232, when an error is being detected (when any bit of the error detection flag at address "F294(H)" is "1")
, the process proceeds to step S3240 to store the number of interrupts "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms of the external signal 4 in the address "F014 (H)".

Therefore, in the previous interrupt processing, for example, it was determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch was ON, and in step S3240, "24 (D)" was set as the external signal 4 management time of address "F014 (H)". After that, if it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is turned on in this interrupt process as well, the process advances to step S3240 to reset the external signal 4 control time "24 (D)". When it is determined in step S3234 that "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on, when it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being displayed, and when it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being detected. It is the same. After step S3240, the process proceeds to step S3241.

If it is determined in step S3232 that an error is not being detected, the process advances to step S3235. In step S3235, it is determined whether or not the output time of external signal 4 "50" ms has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 4 control time of the address "F014(H)" is "0", it is determined that the output time of the external signal 4 "50" ms has elapsed. Then, if the output time of the external signal 4 has passed, the process advances to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4), and the output time of the external signal 4 has passed. If not, the process advances to step S3241 to turn on the external signal 4 (make it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4).

Next, proceeding to step S3242, it is determined whether or not the door switch is on. If it is determined that the door switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3246, and if it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3243.
In step S3246, "24 (D)" is set to the external signal 5 management time of address "F015 (H)". In this case, as in the above case, it is determined that the door switch is ON in the previous interrupt process, and after "24 (D)" is set as the external signal 5 control time in step S3246, step If it is determined in S3242 that the door switch is ON, the external signal 5 control time "24 (D)" is reset in step S3246. Then, the process proceeds to step S3247.

In step S3243, it is determined whether or not the output time of external signal 5 "50" ms has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 5 control time of the address "F015(H)" is "0", it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 "50" ms has elapsed. When it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 has passed, the process advances to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5), and the output time of the external signal 5 is determined. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process advances to step S3247 to turn on the external signal 5 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

As described above, in example 1 of FIG. 91, whether or not the setting key switch has turned from off to on, whether or not the error detection flag has turned on from off, and whether the error number has changed from "0" to other than "0" The external signal 4 control time is set in the interrupt process determined as "Yes" in each determination of whether or not it has become. , the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 93, when the setting key switch is on, the error detection flag is "1", and an error number other than "0" is stored, external signal is kept on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). When the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number, the external signal 4 control time becomes "0". The signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

In other words, after the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on until "50" ms elapses. (A signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Therefore, for example, when an error is detected or when the setting key switch is turned on for only a moment (for example, only "3" interrupt), the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is used as the external signal 4). Even if the condition for enabling output is satisfied, the external signal 4 can be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) for at least 50 ms.

Also, in the external signal output processing (interrupt processing) shown in FIG. The timer value is decremented from "24(D)" to "23(D)". After that, in the external signal output processing of the next interrupt processing, when the condition of turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3240, and again, A timer value of "24(D)" is set.

After that, the timer value is decremented for each interrupt process, but if the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (to enable output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) is no longer satisfied, the process of step S3240 is performed. , the timer value eventually becomes "0 (D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", it is determined "Yes" in step S3235. possible).

By doing so, the external signal 4 is turned on (turning on as the external signal 4) from the time when the conditions for turning on the external signal 4 (allowing a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 to be output) are satisfied. signal can be output). While the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (outputting a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 is possible) is satisfied, the external signal 4 is turned on (outputting a signal indicating on as the external signal 4). possible). Next, when the condition to turn on the external signal 4 (to enable the output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) is no longer satisfied, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt processing. It is decremented by "1 (D)". Until the timer value reaches "0 (D)", the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

The same applies to the external signal 5 as described above.
In the external signal output process (interrupt process) shown in FIG. 93, after the timer value "24 (D)" relating to the external signal 5 is set in step S3246, when the next interrupt process is executed, the timer value is set to "24(D)" is subtracted to "23(D)". After that, in the external signal output processing of the next interrupt processing, when the door switch is ON (when the external signal 5 is turned ON (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5 can be output)) , the process proceeds to step S3246, and the timer value "24 (D)" is set again.

After that, the timer value is decremented for each interrupt process, but the condition that the door switch is turned off (turns on the external signal 5 (makes it possible to output a signal indicating that it is on as the external signal 5) is no longer satisfied. ), the process of step S3246 is skipped, so the timer value eventually becomes "0 (D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", it is determined "Yes" in step S3243. possible).

By doing so, the external signal 5 is turned on when the door switch is turned on (when the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (a signal indicating on as the external signal 5 can be output) is satisfied). (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). Then, while the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (outputting a signal indicating on as the external signal 5 is possible) is satisfied, the external signal 5 is turned on (outputting a signal indicating on as the external signal 5). possible). Next, when the condition to turn on the external signal 5 (to enable the output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 5) is no longer satisfied, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt processing. "1" is decremented. Until the timer value reaches "0 (D)", the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).
In Example 2 of FIG. 93 above, there is no need to generate rise data and check the level data, etc. at the time of the previous interrupt processing. It is possible to secure a time during which a signal indicating that the signal 4 or 5 is on can be received.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example 3 of external signal output processing. In FIG. 94, steps that perform the same processing as in FIG. 93 are assigned the same numbers, and steps that perform different processing are underlined.
In Example 3 of FIG. 94, when determining whether or not to output the external signal 4, first, in step S3251, it is determined whether or not the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014 (H)" is "0". determine whether Then, if it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241 to turn on the external signal 4 (make it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4). On the other hand, if the external signal 4 control time is "0" and the output condition of the external signal 4 is satisfied in the judgments of steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232, the process proceeds to step S3240 and addresses "F014 (H)". )” is set to “24 (D)” corresponding to the output time “50” ms, and the process proceeds to step S3241. On the other hand, if it is determined in steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232 that none of the output conditions for the external signal 4 is satisfied, the process advances to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4. output of a signal indicating off).

As for the external signal 5, similarly to the above, when determining whether or not to output the external signal 5, first, in step S3252, if the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015 (H)" is "0", determine whether there is Then, if it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3247 to turn on the external signal 5 (make it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 5). On the other hand, when the external signal 5 control time is "0" and it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on, the process advances to step S3246 to determine the external signal 5 control time of address "F015(H)". is set to "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time of "50" ms, and the process proceeds to step S3247. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is not on, the process advances to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

Thus, in example 3 of FIG. 94, when the set timer value (external signal 4 control time or external signal 5 control time) is "0", the timer satisfies the output condition of external signal 4 or 5. set the value. Even if the set timer value becomes "0", if the output condition of the external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied, the timer value is set again.
In the method of Example 3 of FIG. 94, as in Example 2 of FIG. 93, there is no need to generate rise data and check the level data, etc. at the time of the previous interrupt processing. While simplifying, it is possible to secure the time during which the hall computer can receive the signal indicating that the external signal 4 or 5 is turned on.

Although the eighteenth embodiment has been described above, the eighteenth embodiment is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) When the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, or when any one of the error indications is met, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). ), but not limited to this, each individual external signal (for example, external signals 4, 6, 7) is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signals 4, 6, 7). may Also, a specific external signal (e.g., external signal 5 or 6) may be turned on when either or both of the setting key switch is on or the door switch is on ( A signal indicating ON may be output as the external signal 5 or 6).

(2) Various timer values of addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)" are decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. It may be decremented by "N" for every "N" interrupts or by "1" for every "N" interrupts. For example, after setting "12 (D)" as the external signal 4 management time or the external signal 5 management time, "1" may be subtracted every two interrupts.
(3) Various modifications and numerical values described in the eighteenth embodiment are examples, and can be designed as appropriate. For example, in FIG. 89, the times t1 and t2 are the minimum "0" ms, so various settings such as "5" ms and "10" ms are possible.

Also, in FIG. 89, the time t3 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in the figure) is the minimum "50" ms, so for example "75" ms or "100" ms etc., can be set in various ways.
In particular, at time t3 in FIGS. 89 and 90 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in FIGS. 89 and 90), the hall computer or the like reliably receives the external signals 4 and 5. It may be as long as it is possible, and may be less than "50" ms depending on the performance of the hall computer or the like.
Furthermore, the time t2 in FIG. 90 is not limited to "50" ms, and can be set variously according to specifications and the like.

(4) When the setting key switch is turned on from off or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 can be output), but the setting The configuration may be such that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 can be output) when the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered.
Here, as in the eighteenth embodiment, when the setting key switch is turned on from off or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on. output possible), the external signal 4 is turned on even when the setting key switch is turned on from off while the reel 31 is rotating (a signal indicating on is output as the external signal 4 possible).
On the other hand, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 can be output), the reel Even if the setting key switch turns from off to on during the rotation of 31, the external signal 4 is turned off based on the state of the setting key switch (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). do). However, it is possible that the external signal 4 is turned on based on an error (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4).

(5) In the 18th embodiment, any one of when the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, when an error is being displayed, or when "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on. When the two conditions are satisfied, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). However, it is not necessary to provide all of these conditions, and only one or some of the conditions, for example, when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). ) configuration. In other words, the external signal 4 is not turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 cannot be output) even under other conditions, for example, when "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on. may be
(6) All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification, including the eighteenth embodiment, are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
The nineteenth embodiment relates to a setting change end sound.
The setting change end sound will be described below for the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine (19th embodiment (A)) and the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (19th embodiment (B)). do.
In the following description, the ``setting change state (also referred to as ``setting change mode'' or ``setting change processing'') is a state in which setting values can be changed and a game is started (progressed). ) is in a game state that cannot be played. In the setting change state, it is also possible to end without changing the setting value.
The 'setting confirmation state' (also referred to as 'setting confirmation mode' or 'setting confirmation processing') is a state in which setting values cannot be changed but current setting values can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be started (progressed) as in the setting change state.
On the other hand, the 'normal state (also referred to as 'normal mode')' refers to a state other than the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. In the normal state, the game can be started (progressed) except for special circumstances such as the occurrence of an error.

<Nineteenth Embodiment (A): When Gaming Machine is Slot Machine>
FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of the slot machine 10 in the nineteenth embodiment (A), corresponding to FIG. 1 of the first embodiment.
95, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided as components not shown in FIG. Although the above configuration is not shown in FIG. 1, it does not mean that the above configuration is not provided in the first embodiment.
The setting key insertion slot 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are not necessarily provided on the main control board 50, and may be provided as separate devices.

The door switch 17 is attached to either the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 22, the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 are normally closed, but the front door 12 is opened when changing settings or checking settings. The door switch 17 is a switch that turns on when the front door 12 is opened and detects the opening of the front door 12 . When the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the door switch 17, a door open error is notified.
A setting key insertion slot 151 , a setting key switch 152 and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are mounted on the main control board 50 .
The setting key switch 152 is turned on by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise. switch used.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves both as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch that is operated when changing the set value in the setting change state. Also, the reset switch is a switch that is operated after the error that has occurred is removed to restore the state before the error occurred.
In the following description, it may be referred to as "setting change (reset) switch 153", "setting change switch 153", or "reset switch 153".
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are integrally provided, but the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

When shifting to the setting confirmation state, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion opening 151 with the power turned on, and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees, for example. As a result, the setting key switch 152 is turned on. When the door switch 17 is turned on and the setting key switch 151 is turned on while the power is on, the setting confirmation state is entered. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to turn off the setting key switch 152, the setting confirmation state is terminated.

When the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151, the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and the power switch 11 is turned on. It becomes possible to shift to the setting change state (setting change processing in FIG. 39).

When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on as described above, as shown in FIG. 38, a checksum is executed (step S204), the designated switch is on (step S208), and the power-off recovery is abnormal ( Step S209) or when the setting change is possible (step S210), it becomes possible to shift to the setting change process (setting change state).

In the nineteenth embodiment, the "designated switches" in step S208 are two switches, ie, the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152. FIG.
Alternatively, in addition to the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152, a setting door switch (a switch that turns on when a cover provided to cover the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 is opened) is provided. If provided, three switches including the set door switch.
In the following explanation, it is assumed that no setting door switch is provided and that the specified switches are the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152. FIG.

In step S208 of FIG. 38, only when the door switch 17 is on and the setting key switch 152 is on, it is determined "Yes" in step S208, and the setting change state can be entered. On the other hand, when either one of the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 is ON, or when both switches are OFF, "No" is determined in step S208, and the setting change state is entered. does not migrate.
As a result, when the front door 12 is not opened or when the setting key is not inserted, there is a high possibility of cheating, and the setting change state is not entered.

Also, in FIG. 38, "start of setting change state" is first determined when "Yes" is determined in step S209 or when "No" is determined in step S210. . In this case, the “setting change state” includes the processing of steps S221 to S233 in FIG. 39 as well.
Alternatively, secondly, in FIG. 39, when the output request for starting the setting change is set in step S234 and the control command set 1 is executed in step S235 (the command to start changing the setting is sent to the sub-control board 80). ) is defined as "start of setting change state".

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period immediately before step S221 in FIG. 39 may be defined as "the start of the setting change state". Also, the period immediately after step S231 (at the end of initialization) may be defined as "the start of the setting change state". Furthermore, the interrupt activation time of step S233 or immediately after step S233 (immediately before step S234) may be defined as "start of setting change state".

Furthermore, in FIG. 39, "end of setting change state" is determined when setting key switch 152 is turned off in step S243.
Alternatively, secondly, in FIG. 39, when an output request at the end of setting change is set in step S246, and control command set 1 is executed in step S247 (a command for ending setting change is sent to the sub-control board 80). is sent) as "end of setting change state".
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "end of the setting change state" may be determined when "Yes" is determined in step S242 (when the start switch 41 is operated and the set value is determined).

Furthermore, as will be described later, the setting change state may end on condition that the front door 12 is closed, in other words, on condition that the door switch 17 is turned off from on. In this case, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state does not end when the front door 12 is open (when the door switch 17 is on).
Also, if the front door 12 is closed (when the door switch 17 is off) when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state is not terminated. This is for anti-goto measures.
In the following description, in the nineteenth embodiment (A), when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. ”.

In steps S246 and S247 of FIG. 39, when a command indicating that the setting change is finished is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 executes a setting change end sound and an output (output by the effect lamp 21) visually indicating the end of the setting change.
Here, the setting change end sound corresponds to outputting a voice saying "setting change is finished" from the speaker 22 in this embodiment.

Here, there are various opinions about the speed at which words (Japanese) are spoken, but according to the idea that a speed of about 300 characters per minute is appropriate, it is possible to say, "Finish setting change." The time "T01" from the start of voice output to the end of output may be set to approximately "2000" ms.
FIG. 96 is a time chart showing the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change end sound, the lamp effect, and one game time, which will be described later, in the nineteenth embodiment.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command indicating that the setting change has ended, it immediately outputs a setting change end sound. Here, in FIG. 39, if "Yes" is determined in step S243, in the first interrupt processing (FIG. 53) after "Yes" in step S243, step S464 indicates that the setting change has ended. command is sent.

In the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 independently executes interrupt processing, and determines whether or not a control command (a command indicating that the setting change has been completed) has been received for each interrupt processing. ing. Then, when it is determined that a command to the effect that the setting change is completed has been received, it starts outputting a setting change end sound.
In order to go through the above process, at least one interrupt (referring to an interrupt by the main control board 50. One interrupt time is "2.235" ms) from when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. After that, output processing of the setting change end sound by the sub-control board 80 or output of the setting change end sound is started. In other words, in FIG. 39, the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has passed after "Yes" is determined in step S243.

In FIG. 96, the timing at which the setting change state changes from ON to OFF is when the setting key switch 152 is turned OFF as described above. However, after the setting key switch 152 is turned off, a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 receives the command and starts outputting the setting change end sound. Since the time is extremely short, in FIG. 96, the end timing of the setting change state coincides with the output start timing of the setting change end sound.

Further, as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, in addition to the setting change end sound, the effect lamp 21 is set in a predetermined lighting mode (“lighting” is a concept including blinking. is a concept including the lighting color.) is executed.
Here, when the lighting of the effect lamp 21 is executed, at least the lighting mode is not the same as the lighting mode of the lighting of the effect lamp 21 when the special role (accessory) is won. For example, if it is determined that the lamp A among the effect lamps 21 is lit in the lighting mode a as an effect indicating that the special role is won, the effect lamp 21 is turned off as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed. In the case of lighting, a lamp other than the lamp A may be turned on. In this case, if a lamp different from the lamp A is lit, it may be in the same manner as the lighting manner when indicating the winning of the special role.

Further, when the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the lamp A may be turned on. However, the lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when indicating that a special role has been won.
As described above, when the lighting of the production lamp 21 is executed as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the special role has been won (the special role has been won in the game, or the special role The lighting mode of the performance lamp 21 is not the same as that of the performance notifying that the winning is carried over. As a result, when the game is started immediately after the setting change is finished, even if the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, the player does not win the special combination. It is possible to prevent confusion if there is.

In addition, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed and the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the special role is won are different so that they are not confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other effects, and if the lighting pattern is seen, the effect means the end of the setting change. It is preferable to make it understandable.
Further, for the effect lamp 21, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change is completed and the lighting pattern indicating that the special combination is won are made the same, and the other lamps other than the effect lamp 21 are changed in setting. The lighting pattern indicating that the game has ended may be different from the lighting pattern that indicates that the special combination has been won.
Specifically, for example, when indicating that the setting change is completed, the effect lamp 21 and the other lamps are all lit, and when notifying that the special combination is won, the effect lamp 21 is turned on. One example is to turn on the other lamp but not to turn on the other lamp. In this way, by checking the lighting patterns of the effect lamp 21 and the other lamps (lamps of general game machines), the administrator can grasp the state.

Furthermore, when the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, in principle, it is output at the same time as the setting change end sound. However, without being limited to this, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started before outputting the setting change end sound. Alternatively, after the output of the setting change end sound is started, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Furthermore, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is finished.
As shown in FIG. 96, in the following embodiment, lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is executed at the same time when the output of the setting change end sound is started.
Also, if the lighting time of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is set to "T02",
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01<T02
However, as shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, it is assumed that "T01<T02". For example, as described above, when the time T01 is set to about "2000" ms, the time T02 may be set to about "2500" ms to about "4000" ms.

Next, consider the case where the setting change state is ended, the game is shifted to the normal state (the state in which the game can be started), and the game is immediately started.
Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 96, the time required from the moment the setting change state ends until the game starts (until the game start condition is met) (preparation time until the game starts) is referred to as "T11". do. In addition, the time (one game time) from the start of the game (after the conditions for starting the game are satisfied) to the end of the game is defined as "T12".
In the setting change state, data stored in the RWM 53 are cleared as shown in FIG. . Therefore, immediately after the setting change state ends, the number of bets is "0" and the number of credits is also "0". Therefore, after the setting change state ends, as shown in FIG. 2, it is necessary to insert medals M from the medal slot 47 and bet a specified number before starting the game.

Here, in the normal game (when the accessory is not activated), the number of bets "3" is the commonly used prescribed number, but in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the minimum bet number "1" is the prescribed number. , the game can be started with the number of bets "1". When the specified number is "1", the game can be started earlier than when the specified number is "2" or "3".
In FIG. 2, when the medal M is at the position M1 and the medal M is released into the medal selector, as described in the first embodiment, it passes through the path in the medal selector and reaches the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. detected. If it is determined by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b that the medals have passed normally, "1" is bet.

In FIG. 2, the time from when the medal M is inserted from the position M1, detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, to when the specified number is bet corresponds to the preparation time "T11" for starting the game. The preparation time "T11" in this case does not consider the operation time for closing the front door 12 or canceling the door open error.).
Here, if the prescribed number is "1", one medal must be inserted, if the prescribed number is "2", two medals must be inserted, and if the prescribed number is "3" Requires 3 medals. In FIG. 2, from the state of medal M1, the time from inserting one medal to betting "1" is "T11a", and the time from inserting two medals to betting "2". Let "T11b" be, and let "T11c" be the time from inserting three medals until "3" is betted.
T11a<T11b<T11c
becomes.
However, since 2 or 3 medals can be inserted continuously, T11b (when the prescribed number is "2") is shorter than twice the time of T11a (when the prescribed number is "1"). It is believed that there is. Similarly, T11c (when the prescribed number is "3") is considered to be less than three times the time of T11a (when the prescribed number is "1").

When the specified number is betted, the game can be started by operating the start switch 41. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the start switch 41 is operated at the moment when "1" is bet. Therefore, the time from when the specified number is betted to when the start switch 41 is operated is set to "0".
In FIG. 41, when the start switch 41 is operated ("Yes" in step S278), rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286.
Here, the motor 32 accelerates the reel 31 to reach a speed of 80 revolutions per minute. When the speed reaches 80 revolutions per minute, the speed is kept constant. The operation of the stop switch 42 is prohibited until the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted after reaching the constant speed state.
The time from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the reel 31 starts rotating) to when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted is defined as "T12a".

Next, it is assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when it becomes possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 . In other words, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 can be operated until the first stop switch 42 is operated is "0".
When the stop switch 42 is operated, as shown in FIG. 13, a reel stop control time (time until the reel 31 stops) and a four-phase excitation state time are required (note that the four-phase excitation state is Before the end, it may be possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42. An example of this will be described later.). The total time of these is assumed to be "T12b".
When the four-phase excitation state ends, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the next (second) stop switch 42 . Here, it is assumed that the second stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 to be stopped first ends and the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from the end of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops first to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is defined as "0".

When the second stop switch 42 is operated, similarly to the above, the operation of the third stop switch 42 can be accepted after the time "T12b", which is the reel stop control time and the time of the four-phase excitation state, has elapsed. becomes. Here, it is assumed that the third stop switch 42 is operated at the instant when the four-phase excitation state of the second motor 32 ends and the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from the end of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops second to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is defined as "0".
When the third stop switch 42 is operated, the time "T12b", which is the reel stop control time and the four-phase excitation state time, is required as described above.

It should be noted that the moment when the last reel 31 stops may be defined as the end of one game. It is determined that one game has ended (when there is no payout).
Also, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination in the game is stopped, it is determined that the game is finished when the payout process is finished, specifically when the process of FIG. 49 is finished.
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, automatic bet processing is executed at the start of the next game as shown in FIG. Therefore, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the end of the game is determined not at the end of the automatic betting process but at the end of the four-phase excitation state for the third reel 31.例文帳に追加

For example, firstly, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the addition processing to the credits is executed, the end of the addition processing to the credits is determined as the end of the game.
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the actual medal payout process is executed, the payout of the last medal (driving of the hopper 36) is completed, and in step S401 in FIG. '' (when it is determined that the payout number data is "0") is defined as the end of the game. However, immediately after the setting change is completed, the number of credits is "0". All medals paid out are credited. Therefore, medals are not actually paid out in one game immediately after the setting change is completed.
"T12c" is the time from when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small combination is stopped and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 for the third reel 31 is completed to when the payout of medals (addition to credits) is completed. and
However, when the combination is not won (when no medals are paid out), "T12c=0".

In addition, when an effect (such as a winning combination notification effect) is output when all the reels 31 are stopped, the effect time is not included in one game time. For example, even if an effect is output for several seconds after all the reels 31 stop, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends when the last reel 31 stops (at that point, all the reels 31 stop). (Even if the effect that started the output at the time is continued), one game shall be completed. That is, the end of one game shall be based on the control by the main control board 50 .

As described above, when an operation for starting a game is performed immediately after the setting change state ends, and a game is started, a preparatory time "T11" is required until the game is started.
Furthermore, one game time "T12" is, as described above,
(1) The time "T12a" from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the reel 31 starts rotating) until the stop switch 42 can be operated.
(2) The time from the first operation of the stop switch 42 to the stop of the reel 31 and the time of the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(3) Time from operation of second stop switch 42 to stop of reel 31 and time of 4-phase excitation state "T12b"
(4) The time from the operation of the third stop switch 42 to the stop of the reel 31 and the time of the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(5) Time "T12c" until the payout of medals (addition to credits) is completed when winning a small winning combination
requires.
Therefore,
T12=T12a+3×T12b+T12c
becomes.
It is assumed that the three "T12b" times are the same.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for a role is performed (step S282 in FIG. 41). .).
"Freeze" in this case refers to a state in which the progress of the game is stopped for a certain period of time. Therefore, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for a role is executed, a special role is won, and it is determined to execute a freeze as an effect corresponding to the winning of the special role, the rotation of the reel 31 starts. do not. After the freeze ends, the rotation of the reel 31 starts. Incidentally, when the progress of the game is stopped by freezing, the sub-control means 80 outputs an effect using the image display device 23 or the like.
Assuming that the freeze time in this case is "T12d", one game time "T12" when the freeze is executed is "T12a+T12b×3+T12c+T12d".

Next, the shortest time of one game time "T12" is considered. In order to make one game time the shortest time, the freeze is not executed and the combination is not won.
Therefore, the shortest time of one game time "T12" is "T12a+3×T12b".
First, assuming that the specified number is "1", the time from when the medal M is inserted (dropped) into the medal selector from the position of M1 in FIG. Assume that "T11" is about "800" ms at the shortest.
Also, it is assumed that the time "T12a" from when the start switch 41 is operated to when the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and when the stop switch 42 is permitted to be operated is approximately "1200" ms.

Furthermore, since the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 is controlled to stop, and the time "T12b" until the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted) is As exemplified in FIG. 13, the shortest is about "140" ms (the shortest reel stop control time is about "40" ms, the shortest time of the 4-phase excitation state is about "100" ms). Assume that
In this case, "T11+T12" which is the time required to start one game and one game time (shortest time) is "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 140 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2420" ms to some extent.
One game time "T12" when medals are paid out after all reels 31 are stopped, or when freeze is executed when the start switch 41 is operated, is longer than the above time.

On the other hand, as described above, when the setting change state ends, the setting change end sound is output for the time "T01" (approximately "2000" ms), and the effect lamp 21 notifies the end of the setting change. Lighting is output for a time "T02" (for example, about "2500" to "4000" ms).
Therefore, when the game is started immediately after the setting change state is ended, the setting change end sound "T01" to be output immediately after the setting change state is ended, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game, and one game The relationship with the time "T12 (shortest time)" is
T01<T11+T12
becomes.
As a result, even if the operation (preparation) for starting the game is performed from the moment the setting change state ends, and the game is started at the moment when the preparation for starting the game is completed, the game is finished. The output of the setting change end sound has ended before.
FIG. 96 shows the relationship between the times "T01", "T11", and "T12".

Here, the above example is an example in which the stop switch 42 is operated, and after the four-phase excitation state is terminated, the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. However, without being limited to this, after the stop switch 42 is operated, it may be possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42 before ending the four-phase excitation state. By controlling in this way, the game can be completed more quickly. For example, after the stop switch 42 is operated (accepting the operation of the stop switch 42), it is possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42 at the time of the next interrupt processing.
In this case, of the above-mentioned time "T12b", the time in the four-phase excitation state can be considered to be approximately "0", so "T12b (shortest time)=40 (ms)".
Therefore, "T11+T12", which is the time required to start one game and one game time (shortest time) in this case, is "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 40 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2120 ” ms.
Therefore, even if it is controlled in this way, it becomes "T01<T11+T12".

In addition, the production timing of the slot machine 10 is when the start switch 41 is operated (when the reel 31 starts rotating), when the first stop switch 42 is operated (when the first reel 31 stops), and when the second stop switch 42 is operated (when the reel 31 stops). 2 reels 31 are stopped), and the third stop switch 42 is operated (when all reels 31 are stopped). The timing to do so is often when all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, in the case of outputting an effect to announce the winning combination of the game when all the reels 31 are stopped, the effect is output after the output of the setting change end sound is completed. , and the setting change end sound do not overlap (do not overlap). Therefore, even when the game is started immediately after ending the setting change state, the player can accurately understand the effect when all the reels 31 are stopped.

However, when there is an effect to be output when the start switch 41 is operated or when the first or second stop switch 42 is operated, the output timing of the effect and the output timing of the setting change end sound may overlap.
Here, the speaker 22 of this embodiment has a plurality of channels. The channel for outputting the setting change end sound is set to be different from the channel for outputting the notification effect of the winning combination. As a result, even if the effect of notifying the winning combination is output from the speaker 22 after the output of the setting change end sound is started, the setting change end sound is not erased in the middle. However, it is possible that the setting change end sound and the effect sound announcing the winning combination may overlap.

Also, the lighting time T02 of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is
T02<T11+T12
T02=T11+T12
T02>T11+T12
Both cases are possible. However, as described above, if the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating the end of the setting change is not confused with the lighting of the effect lamp 21 as the notification effect of the winning combination, no problem will arise.

Also, the preparation time "T11" until the start of the game is the time to close the front door 12 after finishing the setting change state, and to eliminate the door open error (error indicating that the front door 12 is open). does not take into account the time to
When the setting change state ends, at least the front door 12 should be in the open state. Therefore, even if the setting change state ends, the slot machine 10 side detects a door open error and issues an error notification. The game cannot proceed (start) when the door open error occurs. When the door open error occurs, the blocker 45 is controlled to be off (to return medals), so even if medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, they are not bet. Even if a bet is made, the game will not start even if the start switch 41 is operated.

To cancel the door open error, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. Although it is possible to configure so that the door open error is resolved at the moment the door switch 17 is turned off, generally, the key is inserted into the key insertion opening for opening the front door 12 provided in the front door 12. By inserting the key and rotating the key in the opposite direction (for example, counterclockwise) to opening the front door 12, the door open error is resolved (the error notification is terminated). Therefore, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game after the setting change state ends includes the operation time for closing the front door 12 and inserting the key to cancel the door open error. This is because the game cannot be started while the door open error has occurred.

When ending the setting change state on the condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state can be ended even if the front door 12 is open. Therefore, in this case, the output of the setting change end sound is started while the front door 12 is open, and the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is finished is also started.

On the other hand, it is possible to have a specification in which the setting change state is not terminated unless the front door 12 is closed. In this case, the setting change state is not ended only by turning off the setting key switch 152, and closing the front door 12 (turning off the door switch 17) is set as one of conditions for ending the setting change state. Alternatively, the setting change state may be ended simply by closing the front door 12 . In this case, when the front door 12 is closed (when the door switch 17 is turned off), output of the setting change end sound is started. Alternatively, the setting change state may end when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is cancelled. In this case, when the door open error is canceled, the output of the setting change end sound is started.

Even in the case of the specification that the setting change state ends when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is canceled, the time from the end of the setting change to the end of one game (T11+T12) is required as described above. , the setting change end sound output time "T01" is shorter than the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound.
Also, if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the output of the setting change end sound is started while the front door 12 is open when the setting change state is to be ended even if the front door 12 is open. Therefore, after the front door 12 is closed after that and the door open error is canceled, even if one game is finished after the time "T11+T12", the output of the setting change end sound is finished before the game is finished. .
If the (operation) time from the end of the setting change state to the closing of the front door 12 and the release of the door open error is "T10", then the time from the end of the setting change state to the start of one game is defined as "T10". The preparation time is "T10+T11". Therefore, it goes without saying that "T01<T10+T11+T12".

The above is the case where the setting change end sound output time "T01" is set to be shorter than the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game. The relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound and the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game can be set variously as follows.
(1) The output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is set shorter than the average time “T11+T12” when the winning combination is not won.
(2) The output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is set shorter than the average time "T11+T12" when the special combination is won in the combination lottery result. In addition, when a special combination is won as a result of the combination lottery, the freezing described above may or may not be executed, so the average time is "T12". For example, when a special role is won, the freeze is executed with a probability of "p"%, and the freeze is not executed with a probability of "100-p"%, the average value of one game time "T12" is
“Average 1 game time without freeze T12×(100−p)/100”+“Average 1 game time with freeze T12×p/100”
becomes.

<Nineteenth Embodiment (B): When the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine>
Next, the relationship between the setting change state, setting change end sound, and one game time in the pachinko game machine will be described.
First, an outline of the pachinko gaming machine will be explained.
FIG. 97 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the front side (player side). Also, FIG. 98 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the back side. In FIG. 98, illustration of a unit including the image display device 543 and the game board 504 is omitted, and the glass door 505 is shown from the rear side. Furthermore, in FIG. 98, illustration of board cases other than the main board case 550 is omitted as appropriate.
Furthermore, FIG. 99 is a block diagram of the pachinko game machine 500. As shown in FIG.

In the hall, the pachinko gaming machine 500 is generally installed on an island. The pachinko game machine 500 firstly includes an outer frame 501 and a front frame 502 . The outer frame 501 is a frame formed so as to surround the pachinko gaming machine 500 . Also, the front frame 502 is attached to the front side (player side) of the outer frame 501 in FIG. The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 so that it can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 501 by means of a hinge mechanism 503 provided at the upper left end of the outer frame 501 in FIG. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 500 is installed on the island, the outer frame 501 is fixed to the island, but the front frame 502 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 501, and the back side of the front frame 502 be accessible.

The front frame 502 is provided with a game board 504 . Although not shown, the game board 504 is provided with an image display device 543, a nail, an accessory, a pinwheel, and various prize-winning ports (including a starting port 532, which will be described later). In addition, portions of the front frame 502 other than the game board 504 are provided with an effect lamp 541, a speaker 542, an upper plate 506, a lower plate 507, a shooting handle 508, and the like.

A key insertion opening 521 is formed on the right side edge of the front frame 502 in FIG.
When the front frame 502 is closed to the outer frame 501 (the state shown in FIG. 97), the key is inserted through the key insertion opening 521 to unlock the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502. , the front frame 502 can be opened forward (toward the player) with respect to the outer frame 501 with the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis. When the front frame 502 is opened with respect to the outer frame 501, the game board 504 attached to the front frame 502 side, the glass door 505, the effect lamp 541, the speaker 542, the upper plate 506, the lower plate 507, and the firing handle The whole including 508 moves forward with respect to the outer frame 501 .
When the front frame 502 is opened, a frame opening switch 523, which will be described later, is turned on. When the frame open switch 523 is turned on, a frame open error is notified.

The glass door 505 is attached so as to be able to be opened and closed so as to cover the game area on the front surface of the game board 504 . For example, when clogging of game balls occurs in the game area, it is to be resolved. By inserting the key into the key insertion opening 521 and performing the unlocking operation of the glass door 505, the lock between the glass door 505 and the game board 504 is released, and the glass door 505 can be opened. When the glass door 505 is opened, a later-described door opening switch 522 is turned on. When the door open switch 522 is turned on, a door open error is notified.

In the block diagram of FIG. 99, in the pachinko game machine 500, a main control board (main board, main control board) 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 and a sub control board 80 corresponding to the sub control board 80 of the slot machine 10 A control board (effect control board, effect board) 540 is provided.
The main control board 530, the payout control board 520, and the sub-control board 540 are provided with CPU, RWM, ROM, etc. like the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 of the slot machine 10, respectively. In FIG. 99, illustration of the CPU, RWM, ROM, etc. is omitted.

Based on the power switch 511 being turned on, the power supply board 510 controls power supply.
The power supply board 510 and the payout control board (also referred to as "prize ball control board") 520 are connected to a harness (consisting of one or more lead wires (also referred to as "signal wires")). . It is assumed that the substrates shown in FIG. 99 are all connected by harnesses. Also, in FIG. 99, illustration of the relay board is omitted, but in reality, the boards shown in FIG. 99 may be directly connected or connected via a relay board. There is
A launch board 512 is connected to the power supply board 510 . The launch board 512 is a board for driving and controlling the launch device 513 . The shooting device 513 is a device that launches game balls onto the game board 504 (game area). When the shooting handle 508 is operated, the operation is detected and the shooting device 513 is driven and controlled to launch the game ball into the game area.

A payout control board 520 is connected to the power supply board 510 . A payout device 524 is connected to the payout control board 520 . A payout device 524 is a device that lends game balls corresponding to the requested number when there is a request for ball lending from the CR unit, and pays out prize balls corresponding to the winning when there is a winning of the game balls. be. The payout control board 520 and the CR unit are connected via an external terminal board 525 .

A door open switch 522 and a frame open switch 523 are electrically connected to the payout control board 520 . Note that the door opening switch 522 and the frame opening switch 523 may be connected to the main control board 530 .
As described above, when the glass door 505 is opened, the door opening switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530 . When the main control board 530 detects that the door opening switch 522 is turned on, the sub control board 540 notifies of a door opening error, for example.
Further, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530 . When the main control board 530 detects that the frame open switch 523 is turned on, the sub control board 540 notifies a frame open error, for example.

The main control board 530 is connected with a starting port switch 533 for detecting a winning to a starting port 532 which is one of the winning ports provided in the game area of the game board 504 . When the game ball wins the starting port 532 and the main control board 530 detects that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, a random number value is obtained as described later, and a winning/failing determination is executed (lottery processing). Then, based on the success/failure determination result, the variation time and stop design of the special design display device 531 are determined, and the variation pattern and stop design of the special design display device 531 are controlled so as to correspond to the determination result.

In addition, on the game board 504, other than the starting hole 532, there are other winning holes such as a general winning hole and a big winning hole (a winning hole opened during a special game for a big win). is omitted in the nineteenth embodiment (B).
Also, the special symbol display device 531 is provided on the game board 504, and is a device that displays the success/failure determination result based on the turn-on of the starting port switch 533 by means of special symbols. In other words, the "special symbol" is a symbol that indicates whether the result of the winning/losing determination is winning or not, depending on the stopped symbols after the variation. The special symbol display device 531 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.
It should be noted that the flow from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop will be described later.

The main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion opening 534 and a setting change (reset) switch 536 . The setting key insertion opening 534, the setting key switch 535, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are not necessarily provided on the main control board 530, and may be provided as separate devices.
The setting key switch 535 is a switch that is turned on by inserting a predetermined setting key from the setting key insertion opening 534 and rotating it clockwise by 90 degrees, for example.

A setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that serves both as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch that is operated when changing the set value during the setting change state. A reset switch is a switch that is operated after removing an error that has occurred to restore the state before the error occurred. In the following description, there are cases where it is called "setting change (reset) switch 536", cases where it is called "setting change switch 536", and cases where it is called "reset switch 536".
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 are integrally provided, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 may be provided separately.
In the pachinko game machine 500, when the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key is rotated to turn on the setting key switch 535, and the reset switch 536 is turned on. By turning on the power switch 511, it becomes possible to shift to the setting change state.

When the setting change state is entered, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 537 . The set value display LED 537 is equivalent to the set value display LED 73 in the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.
Then, when changing the setting value, the setting change switch 536 is operated. Each time the setting change switch 536 is operated (pushed) once, the set value is incremented by "1". ·→"5"→"6"→"1"→... and the setting value changes cyclically. Then, when the setting key is rotated counterclockwise, for example, and the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the setting value is determined and the setting change state is terminated. When the setting change state ends, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 is also extinguished.

When the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key is rotated, and the power switch 511 is turned on while the reset switch 536 is off. Become. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 537 . Then, when the setting key is rotated to turn off the setting key switch 535, the setting confirmation state ends. When the setting confirmation state is completed, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 is also extinguished.
In the pachinko gaming machine 500, unlike the slot machine 10, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting confirmation state is not entered and the setting values are not displayed.

The management information display LED 538 corresponds to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the slot machine 10, and is called a performance display monitor in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, as described above. Like the management information display LED 74, the management information display LED 538 is composed of four 7-segments.

The sub-control board 540 is connected to the main control board 530 and is a board for determining the contents of the performance based on the command transmitted from the main control board 530 and controlling to output the determined performance. Although one sub-control board 540 is shown in FIG. 99, in reality, for example, the sub-control board 540 is divided into a sub-main board (a board for controlling the entire performance) and a sub-sub-board (for example, an image display board). board for controlling the image display of the device 23).

Similar to the slot machine 10 , the performance peripheral equipment includes a performance lamp 541 , a speaker 542 , and an image (liquid crystal) display device 543 , and outputs of these devices are controlled by a sub-control board 540 .
As shown in FIG. 97, at least part of the effect lamp 541 is attached so as to cover the outer peripheral edge of the front frame 502 . Also, the speaker 542 is attached to the upper side of the front frame 502 . Furthermore, the image display device 543 is attached so that an image is displayed substantially in the center of the game area of the game board 504 .

Next, control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 500 will be described.
FIG. 100 is a flowchart for explaining the flow of startup after power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 500 .
When the power switch 511 is turned on and the power is turned on, in step S701, the main control board (specifically, it corresponds to the main CPU) 530 determines whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change state is satisfied. to judge. In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning to the setting change state are that the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on. If it is determined that all these conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S702, and if it is determined that all three switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S702, the process shifts to setting change processing (setting change state). Then, when the setting change processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S709.

In step S703, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting confirmation state is satisfied. In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation state are that the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off. If it is determined that these conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S704, and if it is determined that these conditions are not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S706.

When the process proceeds to step S704, a setting confirmation state is entered, and the main control board 530 reads the setting value data stored in the RWM and displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 537. FIG. Next, in step S705, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 535 is turned off. When it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the condition for ending the setting confirmation state is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S710. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is not turned off, the process returns to step S704 to continue the setting confirmation state (display of setting values).

When it is determined "No" in step S703 and proceeds to step S706, the main control board 530 determines whether the reset switch 536 is on. If it is determined that the reset switch 536 is on, the process proceeds to step S709, and if it is determined that the reset switch 536 is not on, the process proceeds to step S707.
In step S707, it is determined whether the RWM of the main control board 530 is normal. When the power is cut off, the information at the time of the power cut is stored in the RWM of the main control board 530, and when the power is turned on next time, it is determined whether the information at the time of the power cut matches the information at the time of the power cut. do. If they match, it is determined that the RWM is normal, and if they do not match, it is determined that the RWM is abnormal. If it is determined that the RWM is normal, the process proceeds to step S708, and if it is determined that the RWM is not normal, the process proceeds to step S709.
In step S708, state recovery processing is executed. This process is a process of restoring the state of the solenoid, the state of the special pattern display device 531, etc. to the state at the time of power-off. Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

When the setting change process (setting change state) in step S702 ends, when it is determined that the reset switch 536 is turned on in step S706, or when it is determined that the RWM is not normal in step S707, the process proceeds to step S709. Proceed to execute RWM clear processing. This process is a process of clearing data stored in a specified storage area of the RWM (a process of initializing the specified storage area). Note that the data to be cleared does not include set value data. Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

At step S710, the timer interrupt is permitted. This processing is processing to enable interrupt processing. Therefore, when the interrupt processing timing comes after the interrupt processing is permitted in step S710, the interrupt processing is executed.
In the next step S711, random number update processing (random number counter increment processing) is executed. This random number is used for various lotteries (selection of stop symbols, selection of effects, etc.).

FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the setting change process in step S702 of FIG. In this embodiment, the time when the process of step S721 is started is the time when the setting change process (setting change state) is started.
In step S721, the main control board (main CPU) 530 reads the set value written in the RWM and determines whether the set value is within the normal range. In this embodiment, the values stored in the RWM corresponding to the set values "1" to "6" are "0" to "5".

For example, if the value stored in RWM is "0", the set value will be "1". Therefore, in step S722, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the RWM is within the range of "0" to "5". On the other hand, when it is determined that the value stored in RWM is not within the range of "0" to "5", "0" is stored in RWM. When the value of RWM is "0", the set value is "1". The set value "1" is the basic set value as described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S724.

In step S724, the main control board 530 displays the set value corresponding to the value stored in the RWM on the set value display LED 537. FIG. For example, when the RWM value is "0", the set value display LED 537 displays "1".
Next, proceeding to step S725, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the setting change switch 536 has been operated. When it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S726, and when it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S729. In step S726, "1" is added to the set value. For example, if the setting value display LED 537 had been displaying "1" until then, the display is updated from "1" to "2" by the process of step S726, and the setting value data stored in the RWM is changed to "0". ” to “1”. In the example of FIG. 101, when the setting value "6" is displayed in step S724, if it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process of step S726 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S727. shall be taken.

In step S727, it is determined whether or not the set value exceeds the upper limit. For example, the setting value "6" is displayed in step S724, and the setting change switch 53 is displayed in step S725.
When it is determined that 5 has been operated, it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit has been exceeded. On the other hand, when the set values "1" to "5" are displayed in step S724, when it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded. is not judged.
If it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S728, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S729.

In step S728, basic setting values are set. That is, "0" is stored as RWM set value data, and "1" is displayed on the set value display LED 537. FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S729.
In step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the conditions for ending the setting change process (setting change state) are met. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the condition for terminating the setting change process is satisfied. Therefore, at step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the setting key switch 535 is on. If so, the process proceeds to step S730.

In step S730, the set value display of the set value display LED 537 is hidden.
Next, proceeding to step S731, the main control board 530 transmits a setting change end command to the sub control board 540. FIG. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change end command, it outputs a setting change end sound from the speaker 542 and executes lighting processing of the effect lamp 541 to indicate that the setting change is ended.

The end timing of the setting change state in the pachinko gaming machine 500 is
(1) When "Yes" is determined in step S729 (when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 is turned off).
(2) When the display of the set value by the set value display LED 537 is hidden in step S730.
(3) When a setting change end command is transmitted in step S731.
However, the end timing of the setting change state in the nineteenth embodiment (B) is "when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 is turned off" in (1) above. stipulated.
It should be noted that the above (2) and (3) may be determined as the end timing of the setting change state without being limited to this.

FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the flow of one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500. FIG.
In the pachinko game 500, the start timing of one game may be one of the following.
(1) When the game ball is shot toward the game area of the game board 504 by the shooting device 513 . In this case, one game is started even if the game ball has not reached the game area.
(2) When the game ball is shot toward the game area of the game board 504 by the shooting device 513 and enters the game area. Although not shown in FIG. 97, a rail is provided in the range from the lower side of the game area to the left side to the upper left to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 513 into the game area. ing. The moment when the game ball comes off the rail (the moment when the game ball enters the game area) is the start time of one game.

(3) When the game ball enters the starting port 532 provided in the game area. Alternatively, when the game ball enters the starting port 532 provided in the game area and the starting port switch 533 is turned on.
As described above, as the start time of one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500, there are various possible points of time to start. "When entering" is set as the start timing of one game.
Also, the timing of the end of one game is when the special symbol display device 531 finishes changing and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

In step S741, the main control board (main CPU) 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the starting port 532, that is, whether or not the starting port switch 533 has been turned on. When it is determined that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, the process proceeds to step S742.
In step S742, various lottery processes are executed at the timing when the starting switch 533 is turned on. A random number is extracted at the timing when the starting port switch 533 is turned on, and based on the extracted random number, a big win lottery (judgment of whether it is a big hit or a loss), a special symbol lottery (a stop symbol of a special symbol) Lottery for which pattern to use), fluctuation pattern lottery (lottery for fluctuation time of special pattern).

In the next step S743, a prize ball process (a prize ball payout process) based on the winning to the starting port 532 is executed. Here, the payout control board 520 drives and controls the payout device 524 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.
At least part of the lottery results including the fluctuation time among the various lottery processes executed in step S742 are transmitted to the sub-control board 540. FIG. When the sub-control board 540 receives the lottery result of the current game, it controls the production lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.

Next, proceeding to step S744, the main control board 530 starts the special symbol display device 531 to change the special symbol based on the lottery result in step S742. It should be noted that the variation of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 531 is conditioned that the variation of the previous special symbol has been completed at that time, and when the special symbol is being varied, the next special symbol will be displayed. The variation is suspended, and after the variation of the special symbol currently being varied is completed, the variation of the next special symbol is started.

Also, in step S745, the sub-control board 540 executes the variation of the decorative design by the image display device 543. FIG. The variation of the decoration pattern corresponds to a part of the production in the game this time.
Here, the device that directly shows the result of the big hit lottery in step S742 is the special design display device 531, and the stop design after the fluctuation by the special design display device 531 includes a special design corresponding to the big hit (for example, "7 ”) and a special symbol (for example, “-”) corresponding to the loss is provided.

Furthermore, the decorative design is varied by the image display device 543 so as to be linked (synchronized) with the variation of the special design. Then, when stopping at the special design corresponding to the big hit, the decorative design is also stopped at the decorative design corresponding to the big win, such as "777". On the other hand, when stopping at a special pattern corresponding to a loss (non-winning), the decorative patterns are also stopped at a decorative pattern (a pattern other than the decorative pattern corresponding to the big hit) corresponding to the loss. The special symbol display device 531 is composed of a small 7-segment display, but the image display area of the image display device 543 that displays images of decorative symbols is larger than the image display area of the special symbol display device 531 (for example, a game It is formed in a size that occupies more than half of the area). As a result, the player can confirm whether or not the current game is a big win by looking at the stop mode of the decorative symbols.

The variation of the decorative design in step S745 is controlled so as to be within the variation time determined by lottery in step S742. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbols is completed, the process proceeds to step S746, and after the special symbols are varied for the variation time determined by the lottery, the special symbols are varied so as to become the stop symbols determined by the lottery. finish.
Next, the process proceeds to step S747, and special symbol stop post-processing is executed. The post-stop process includes, for example, a process for shifting to a special game when the game is a big hit this time.

In the 19th embodiment (B) of the pachinko game machine, similarly to the 19th embodiment (A) of the slot machine, after the setting change state ends, a setting change end sound and a lamp indicating the end of the setting change are turned on. Execute. Further, assuming that the game is started at the same time as the setting change state ends, the output of the setting change end sound is ended before the game ends.
As described above, assuming that the setting change state has ended when it is determined "Yes" in step S729 in FIG. When the control board 540 receives the command, the control board 540 starts outputting a setting change end sound from the speaker 542 and the like.

The time from when "Yes" is determined in step S729 to when the output of the setting change end sound (and the predetermined lighting by the effect lamp 541) is started is longer than "0" ms. This is the timing when one interrupt time (for example, "4" ms in the case of the pachinko game machine 500) has elapsed since the determination of "Yes". In other words, the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has passed after "Yes" is determined in step S729.
Then, the setting change end sound is to output a voice saying "The setting change is finished" as in the nineteenth embodiment (A). Further, if the time from the start to the end of the output of the voice saying "Setting change is finished" is set to "T01" as in the nineteenth embodiment (A), then the time "T01" is the same as in the nineteenth embodiment (A ) is set to approximately “2000” ms.

Further, as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, in addition to the setting change end sound, an effect of lighting the effect lamp 541 in a predetermined lighting mode is executed.
Here, when the performance lamp 541 is turned on, at least the lighting mode is not the same as when the performance lamp 541 is turned on at the time of the big win. For example, if it is determined that the lamp A among the effect lamps 541 is lit in the lighting mode a as an effect indicating that the jackpot has been won, the effect lamp 541 is lit as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed. In this case, a lamp other than the lamp A may be turned on. In this case, if a lamp different from the lamp A is lit, it may be in the same lighting manner as that used to indicate the big win.

Further, when the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, the lamp A is turned on. The lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when indicating the big win.
As described above, when lighting the effect lamp 541 as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, the lighting mode of the effect lamp 541 is not the same as that when the big win is achieved. As a result, when the game is started immediately after the setting change is finished, even if the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, the player misunderstands that he/she has won a big win. You can prevent it from being lost.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is finished is different from the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 541 when the big win is achieved so that the two are not confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other effects (or the frequency of use is extremely low), and if the lighting pattern is seen, the setting change can be made. It is preferable to make it possible to understand that it is a production that means the end of the.
Furthermore, for the effect lamp 541, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed may be the same as the lighting pattern when the jackpot is won. The lighting pattern indicating the end of the game may be different from the lighting pattern when the jackpot is won.
Specifically, for example, when indicating that the setting change is finished, the production lamp 541 and the other lamps are all turned on, and when the big win is achieved, the production lamp 541 is turned on, but the other lamps are turned on. is not lit. In this way, by checking the lighting patterns of the effect lamp 541 and the other lamps (lamps of general game machines), the administrator can grasp the state.

Furthermore, when the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, in principle, it may be output at the same time as the setting change end sound. However, without being limited to this, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started before outputting the setting change end sound. Alternatively, after the output of the setting change end sound is started, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Furthermore, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is ended.
In the nineteenth embodiment (B), the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is finished is turned on at the same time when the output of the setting change end sound is started.

Also, if the lighting time of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is completed is set to "T02" as in the nineteenth embodiment (A),
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01<T02
However, in this embodiment, it is assumed that "T01<T02". For example, when the time "T01" is set to approximately "2000" ms as described above, the time "T02" may be set to approximately "2500" ms to approximately "4000" ms.

Next, the case where the game is started as soon as possible after ending the setting change state will be described.
In addition, in this embodiment, during the setting change state, the shooting device 513 is operated so that the game ball cannot be launched into the game area. Therefore, at least, unless the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the game ball cannot be launched into the game area.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to operate the shooting device 513 to launch the game ball into the game area even during the setting change state. In this case, even when a game ball wins in one of the winning holes during the setting change state, control may be performed so as not to pay out prize balls. Also, even if a game ball wins the starting port 532, the big winning lottery is not executed, and the variation of the special symbol display device 531 and the variation of the decorative symbol by the image display device 543 are not performed. be done.

In the setting change state, at least the front frame 502 is opened as described above.
Next, a case will be described where it is assumed that the game can be played even when the front frame 502 is open.
Then, the timing of starting the game is assumed to be when the game ball enters the starting hole 532 as described above.
First, assuming that the preparation time until the start of the game is "T21", the game ball is guided to the launchable position in the launching device 513, the game ball is launched from the launchable position, and the game ball enters the starting port 532. is the time "T21".
In this case, the time "T21" is considered to be approximately "2000" ms.
In the above assumption, it is assumed that the first game ball shot from the shooting device 513 enters the starting hole 532 .

When the game ball wins the starting hole 532, in FIG. 102, it is judged as "Yes" in step S741, after that, the special symbol starts to change (step S744), and after the special symbol fluctuates for the determined fluctuation time , stop the variation of the special symbol (step S746). Here, in FIG. 102, the time from when "Yes" is determined in step S741 to the end of the processing in step S746 is one game time, and this one game time is defined as "T22".
First, when a game ball enters the starting hole 532 in a state in which there is no reserved ball, one game time "T22" is determined, for example, within a range of approximately "10000" to "30000" ms. and Therefore, the shortest time of one game time "T22" is "10000" ms.

In addition, for example, when the number of held balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more, there is known a shortening function that increases the time efficiency by shortening the variation time of the special symbol, but in this embodiment, the setting Since this is the state after the end of the change state, it does not have a pending ball. Therefore, in one game time "T22", the function of shortening the variation time of special symbols is not taken into consideration.

As described above, the time required when the game is started immediately after ending the setting change state is "T21+T22".
The shortest time of "T21+T22" is approximately "12000" ms.
Therefore,
T01 (time at which setting change end sound is output)<T21+T22 (preparation time for starting game + 1 minimum time for game)
becomes.

Furthermore, immediately after the end of the setting change state (at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound is started), the effect lamp 541 is lit to indicate that the setting change has been completed. ” is the relationship between
T02 (about "2500" to "4000" ms) < T21 + T22
becomes.
Thus, even when the game is started immediately after the setting change state is ended, the output of the setting change end sound is ended and the effect lamp indicating the end of the setting change is completed before one game is ended. It means that the lighting of 541 has ended.
FIG. 96 shows the time relationship at this time.

In addition, the above-mentioned one game does not take into consideration the time required to close the front frame 502 after the setting change state ends, or the operation time required to resolve the frame open error after closing the front frame 502 .
As with the slot machine 10, at least the front frame 502 should be in the open state when the setting change state ends. Therefore, even if the setting change state is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 500 detects the frame opening error and performs error notification. The game cannot be started while the frame open error is being notified. Note that when a frame open error has occurred, firstly, the firing device 513 should not be operated. Secondly, the launching device 513 is in an operable state, but even if a game ball enters the starting port 532 (even if the game ball is detected by the starting port switch 533), the game does not start (lottery processing is not executed, the variation of the special symbol display device 531 is not started, and prize balls are not paid out).

To cancel the frame open error, the front frame 502 is closed and the frame open switch 523 is turned off. Furthermore, by inserting the key into the key insertion slot 521 and performing a predetermined operation, the frame open error is resolved (the error notification is terminated). Therefore, the preparation time "T21" from the end of the setting change state to the start of the game includes the operation time for closing the front frame 502 and inserting the key to cancel the frame open error. After the setting change state is completed, the front frame 502 is closed and the frame open switch 523 is turned off. Assuming that the time until the frame open error is resolved is "T20",
T01 (output time of setting change end sound)<T20+T21+T22
T02 (lighting time of effect lamp 541) <T20+T21+T22
becomes.

In the above example, the setting change state is ended when the setting key switch 535 is turned off. It is also possible to end the setting change state on the condition that the frame open error is cleared (operation such as inserting the key into the key insertion opening 521 and rotating it in a predetermined direction). In this case, the front frame 502 is closed, and when the operation for canceling the frame open error ends, the setting change state ends, and the output of the setting change end sound is started. By closing the front frame 502, the setting change state may be ended on the condition that the frame open switch 523 is turned off (without performing the operation to cancel the frame open error). In this case, when the frame open switch 523 is turned off, the setting change state is ended, and a setting change end sound is output.

Therefore, even in the case of the specification that the setting change state ends when the front frame 502 is closed and the frame open error is canceled, the time " Since the setting change end sound output time "T01" is shorter than the setting change end sound output time "T21+T22", the output of the setting change end sound is completed before the end of one game immediately after the end of the setting change.

The above is the case where one game time "T22" is finished in the shortest time.
On the other hand, not limited to this, the relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound and the time "T21+T22" from the end of the setting change until the end of one game can be set variously as follows. .
(1) The output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is shorter than the total time of the average one game time "T22" and the preparation time "T21" when the jackpot lottery is lost (not won). set.
For example, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 when it is lost is in the range of "T22 (min1)" to "T22 (max1)", and the average time is "T22 (avg1)",
T01<T21+T22(avg1)
can be set to

(2) The output time 'T01' of the setting change end sound is set shorter than the total time of the average 1-game time 'T22' and the preparation time 'T21' when a big win is won in the jackpot lottery.
For example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 when a big hit is in the range of "T22 (min2)" to "T22 (max2)", and the average time is "T22 (avg
2)”,
T01<T21+T22(avg2)
can be set to

<Twentieth Embodiment>
The twentieth embodiment relates to a board case for a control board.
As a board case for housing a control board, there are known a double door system and a slide system, and the twentieth embodiment is a slide system board case.
Compared to the double door system, the slide system has a smaller exposed area of the control board, so that the number of unauthorized access points can be reduced accordingly.
In the twentieth embodiment, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 slide while the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 . Therefore, the surface of the main control board 530 exposed during sliding movement is the solder surface.
In the control board, the surface on which the CPU, connectors and other electronic components are mounted is called the "component surface", and the surface on which the legs of the electronic components are soldered is called the "solder surface".

In the twentieth embodiment, a board case 550 for housing a main control board 530 in a pachinko game machine 500 is taken as an example. However, not limited to this, the board case 550 of the twentieth embodiment is not limited to the main control board 530 in the pachinko game machine 500, but the payout control board 520, the sub control board 540, and other control boards equipped with a CPU. It can be applied to a case that accommodates a control board that requires security.

Furthermore, the board case 550 of the twentieth embodiment is not limited to the control board of the pachinko game machine 500, but the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, the sub-control board 80, and other control boards on which a CPU is mounted, providing security. can be applied to a case that houses a control board that requires
Specifically, the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 is formed in the same or similar shape as the main control board 530 in the pachinko game machine 500, and the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) of the twentieth embodiment is formed. ) can be accommodated.
The board case 56 shown in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10) can also be applied to the main control board 530 of the pachinko game machine 500 and other control boards. Furthermore, although the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment may be implemented independently, it is also possible to implement the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment at the same time.

FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) and the main control board 530 as seen from the front side. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) and the main control board 530 as seen from the rear side.
Furthermore, FIG. 105 is an external perspective view of a state in which the main control board 530 is accommodated in the board case 550 as seen from the front side. Furthermore, FIG. 106 is a front view of the main control board 530 housed in the board case 550 as seen from the front side. FIG. 107 is a front view of the main control board 530 housed in the board case 550 as seen from the rear (back) side.

Here, the “front side” refers to the component side of the main control board 530 , and the “back side” refers to the solder side of the main control board 530 .
Further, the "upper" in the "upper case 560" refers to the component side of the main control board 530, and may also be referred to as the "front side case (or cover)" or the "component side case (or cover)." .
Furthermore, the "lower" in the "lower case 570" refers to the soldering surface side of the main control board 530, and includes the "rear (back) side case (or cover)" and the "soldering surface side case (or cover)." can be called.
Further, FIGS. 103 and 106 show a state in which the cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560, and FIG. 105 shows the upper case 560 without the cover 561. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 103, the main control board 530 includes the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 described above. Furthermore, connectors 539a to 539h are provided for harness connection with other boards, electronic components, or electronic equipment. Various parts shown in the twentieth embodiment such as FIG. 103 are examples, and the present invention is not limited to these.
Holes 530 a are formed in the four corners of the main control board 530 for screwing when attaching (fixing) the main control board 530 to the upper case 560 .

On the other hand, in the upper case 560, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530, the setting change (reset) switch 536, and the setting key insertion opening 534 each have appropriate gaps. Openings 563a to 563i that can be passed through (passed through) are formed.
A cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560 so as to be openable and closable at a portion where the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 are exposed when the main control board 530 is attached. In this embodiment, the opening and closing of the cover 561 is not detected by a sensor or the like, but it is possible to detect the opening and closing of the cover 561 by a sensor. Then, it is possible to shift to the setting change state under the condition that the sensor is turned on (the cover 561 is open), or the condition is set that the sensor is turned on (the cover 561 is open). The change state may be terminating.

Crimped portions 562 and 572 are provided on one end sides of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, specifically, on the left edges as seen from the front side in FIG. The crimped portions 562 and 572 are respectively used when sealing (crimping) the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 in a fitted state. After sealing (crimping), the fitting between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 cannot be released unless the crimped portion 562 on the upper case 560 side is destroyed.
Furthermore, in FIG. 103, side walls 565 and 571 are provided at the ends opposite to the one ends of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 (the sides provided with the crimped portions 562 and 572, respectively) when viewed from the front side. It is These side walls 565 and 571 come into contact when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together.

In FIG. 104, bosses 564 (four pieces) are provided on the back side of the upper case 560 . In FIG. 104, two bosses 564 are visible. The arrangement interval of the four bosses 564 is the same as the arrangement interval of the four holes 530 a of the main control board 530 . Further, the boss 564 is formed with a screw hole.
In the state shown in FIG. 104, when the main control board 530 is brought into contact with the back side of the upper case 560, the four holes 530a of the main control board 530 and the screw holes of the four bosses 564 of the upper case 560 overlap.

Further, in this state, the connector 539a of the main control board 530 passes through the opening 563a of the upper case 560 and the connector surface is exposed to the front side of the upper case 560. As shown in FIG.
Similarly, the connectors 539b and 539c of the main control board 530 pass through the opening 563b of the upper case 560, and the connector surfaces thereof are exposed to the front side of the upper case 550. FIG.
Connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f of the main control board 530 pass through openings 563c, 563d, and 563e of the upper case 560, respectively, and their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the connectors 539g and 539h of the main control board 530 pass through the openings 563f and 563g of the upper case 560, respectively, and the connector surfaces thereof are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560. As shown in FIG.
In this manner, all connectors provided on the main control board 530 are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560 through openings formed in the upper case 560 . 105 and 106 show the state at this time.
Further, in this case, the gaps between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g are all set to be appropriate gaps, and the connectors 539a to 539h are connected to the openings 563a to 563g. 563g can be penetrated without resistance, and after penetration, the gaps between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g are prevented from becoming more than necessary (for example, the gaps between the connectors and the openings). is a design value of about “0.5” mm). As a result, it is difficult to use the gap between the connector and the opening to play tricks.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 of the main control board 530 pass through openings 563h and 563i formed in the upper case 560, respectively, and are contacted (accessed) from the front side of the upper case 560. ) can be arranged (see FIG. 105), but since a cover 561 is attached over the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 as shown in FIGS. not exposed to However, the substrate case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) including the cover 561 is made of transparent resin, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 can be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover 561. It has become.
In the above state, the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 by inserting screws into the holes 530a (four places) from the solder side of the main control board 530 and screwing them to the bosses 564 of the upper case 560. be done.

As a result, the main control board 530 moves integrally with the upper case 560 even when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together.
In this way, the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 before the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together. There is no relative movement between case 560 and main control board 530 . Therefore, on the upper case 560 side, openings 563a to 563g slightly larger than the outer shape of the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530 are formed, and the connectors 539a to 539h pass through the openings 563a to 563g. By adopting such a structure, it is possible to obtain a structure in which unnecessary gaps do not occur between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g. For example, after the upper case 560 and the lower case 5670 are fitted together, even if the positional relationship between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 is displaced by a goto act, the upper case 560 and the main control board 530 are not connected. are not relatively displaced, it is not possible to increase the gaps between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating.

Next, a method of fitting the upper case 560 to which the main control board 530 is attached and the lower case 570 will be described.
108A and 108B are cross-sectional side views showing the state of fitting between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570. FIG. 108A shows the temporary fitting state (before sliding movement), and FIG. after slide movement).
In FIG. 108, the cross-sectional area is not hatched in consideration of the visibility of the drawing. Further, in the drawing, the upper case 560 is indicated by a solid line, and the lower case 570 is indicated by a two-dot chain line.
As shown in FIGS. 103, 104 and 108, the upper case 560 is provided with side walls 565 and the lower case 570 is provided with side walls 571 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 103, 104, and 108, the longitudinal lower edge (on the side of the lower case 570) of the upper case 560 is referred to as a lower edge 560a. A longitudinal edge of the lower case 570 is referred to as an outer edge 570a.
The upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are shaped so that when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are superimposed, they overlap with each other in the positional relationship shown in FIG. 108(a). When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are formed to contact each other. This position is called a "temporarily fitted state". In the temporarily fitted state, the gap L between the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 is formed to be about several tens of millimeters (for example, about "10" to "30" mm). ing.
Also, in the temporarily fitted state, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 can be separated at any time. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 108( a ), the upper case 560 can be moved away from the lower case 570 without the parts or the like interfering with the lower case 570 .

FIG. 109 is a plan view of the vicinity of the side walls 565 and 571 viewed from the side of the lower case 570 in the temporarily fitted state.
In the temporarily fitted state, as shown in FIG. 109, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 have a gap L. Through this gap L, one end of the solder surface of the main control board 530 can be seen. there is Here, among the connectors of the main control board 530, if the leg of the connector 539g is called a connector leg 539g' and the leg of the connector 539h is called a connector leg 539h', these connector legs 539g' and 539h' extend in the longitudinal direction. It has two rows of legs (see Fig. 104).
109, only one row of connector legs 539g' and 539h' on the outside is exposed in the provisionally fitted state. In other words, the connector legs 539g' and 539h' are not entirely exposed even in the provisionally mated state, and only a portion thereof is exposed.

108(a), the lower case 570 can be slid with respect to the upper case 560. As shown in FIG. The direction of sliding movement is the longitudinal direction of the board case 550, which is the leftward direction in FIG. 108(a).
When the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560, the upper case 560, the main control board 530, and the lower case 570 can move to the end point of the sliding movement without interference. Then, as shown in FIG. 108(b), the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 can be slid to a position where they abut. The state shown in FIG. 108(b) is the fully fitted state. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state in which the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 are in contact with each other (final fitting state).

In the fully fitted state, engaging members (not shown) respectively formed on the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are engaged. As a result, the upper case 560 cannot be moved away from the lower case 570 with respect to the lower case 570 . However, in this state, it is possible to slide the lower case 570 with respect to the upper case 560 in the opposite direction to the above. be able to.

In the temporary fitting state shown in FIG. 108(a), the crimped portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the crimped portion 572 of the lower case 570 are displaced in the vertical direction. In the fitted state, the crimped portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the crimped portion 572 of the lower case 570 overlap each other, and crimping can be performed using both. After crimping the crimped portion 562 and the crimped portion 572 at this position, unless the crimped portion 562 of the upper case 560 is cut (destroyed), the main case 560 and the lower case 570 can be separated or the upper case 560 can be separated. In contrast, the lower case 570 cannot be slid to return to the temporarily fitted state shown in FIG. 108(a).

However, it is conceivable that the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560 in some way to return to the temporarily mated state, exposing the solder surface of the main control board 530 .
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 109, if not all of the connector legs are exposed, but only a part of the connector legs are exposed, it is possible to make it difficult to play.
Moreover, even in the provisionally mated state, not all the connector legs are exposed. Feet of 539a, 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, 539g are not exposed.

When the board case 550 employs a sliding method, the sliding direction is usually the longitudinal direction of the board case. In this case, the amount of sliding movement is related to the number of exposed connector legs.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the connectors are arranged near the outer periphery of the main control board 530 . For example, if a connector is provided in the central portion of the main control board 530, the opening of the upper case 560 corresponding to the connector must have a substantially square shape surrounded by side walls on four sides. However, if the connector is arranged in the square-shaped interior surrounded by side walls on four sides, it becomes difficult to insert and remove the connector. Therefore, in this embodiment, connectors 539a to 539h are arranged near the outer periphery of the main control board 530, as shown in FIG.

Specifically, in FIG. 103, the connector 539a is arranged near the left edge of the main control board 530, the connectors 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e and 539f are arranged near the upper edge, and the connectors 539g and 539h are arranged near the right edge. was placed.
The connector opening 563 of the upper case 560 has no wall at least on the outside. For example, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563a through which the connector 539a passes has a substantially concave shape with no side wall on the left side (outside).
Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563b through which the connectors 539b and 539c pass has a generally concave shape with no side wall on the upper side (outside).

Furthermore, the openings 563c, 563d, and 563e through which the connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f pass, respectively, have a substantially L-like shape with no side walls on the upper and right sides (outer sides) in FIG. .
Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the openings 563f and 563g through which the connectors 539g and 539h respectively pass are shaped to have side walls only on the left side (inner side) in the drawing. As a result, the connector has a shape that facilitates insertion and removal of the connector.

Furthermore, when the connectors are arranged on the main control board 530 as described above, when the lower case 570 is slid as in this embodiment, the legs of the connectors that are exposed first are the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h. Feet (539g' and 539h').
Furthermore, when the amount of slide movement is set larger than in this embodiment, the connector 539
The legs of f become exposed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 506, the legs of the connectors 530a to 539f of the connectors of the main control board 530 are not exposed. For example, in FIG. 105, if the connector group of connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f is arranged further to the left in the figure (closer to the connectors 539b and 539c), the slide movement amount can be increased more than in the present embodiment. Even if they are provided, the legs of the connector 539f can be configured so as not to be exposed.

Also, when the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560 as in this embodiment, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h arranged near the right edge of the main control board 530 in FIG. 105 are likely to be exposed. . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h (connector legs 539g' and 539h') are exposed. Instead of exposing the entire leg, only a portion of the leg is exposed, making it difficult to act like a goto.

It is preferable that the number of connectors whose legs are at least partly exposed by sliding movement is as small as possible.
Also, when the number of rows of legs of one connector is "N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 2)", the number of exposed legs is set to "N-1" or less (that is, none of them are exposed). is preferred. Furthermore, when the number of rows of connector legs is "1", it is preferable that the connector legs are not exposed.
Alternatively, when the number of pins of the connector is "N", that is, the number of legs of the connector is "N", among the "N" pins, the "n"("n" ≤ "N-1") ”) th pin is exposed, but the “n+1” th and subsequent pins are configured not to be exposed (that is, all pins are configured not to be exposed).
Furthermore, among the pins of the connector, at least one reference pin should be configured so as not to be exposed. Having at least one pin not exposed can make cheating more difficult than if all pins were exposed.

Also, when the main control board is the main control board 530 in the pachinko game machine 500, as shown in FIG. Since it is electrically connected to the control board 540 and the like, it is connected to these boards and electronic components. Connections are made using lead wires. A plurality of lead wires are combined into one harness, and a connector terminal is attached to the end of the harness, and this connector terminal is connected to a connector on the main control board 530 .
Here, among the lead wires connected to the main control board 530, the lead wire whose security should be ensured in particular is the lead wire to which the signal of the starting switch 533 (signal relating to lottery) is input. Therefore, the connector to which the signal of the starting port switch 533 is input should be configured so that the connector leg is not exposed (at least one leg is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed) even if it is slid. is preferred.

Furthermore, regarding the connector connected to the payout control board 520, from the viewpoint of preventing the payout goto, the connector legs are not exposed (at least one leg is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed) even when the connector is slid. preferably not exposed).
Furthermore, a lead wire for supplying power to the main control board 530 (a lead wire connected to the power supply board 510 when the power supply board 510 and the main control board 530 are directly connected), a sub-control board 540 and For each connector to which the connecting lead wire and the lead wire connecting to the board for outputting the external signal are connected, at least one leg is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed. It is preferable to configure

On the other hand, when the main control board is the main control board 50 in the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to a display device, a medal payout device, and the like.
Of the lead wires connected to the main control board 50, the lead wire for which security should be ensured in particular is the lead wire to which the signal of the start switch 41 (signal relating to lottery) is input. Therefore, regarding the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the start switch 41 is input is connected, the connector leg is not exposed (at least one leg is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed) even if the connector is slid. It is preferable to configure as follows.

Furthermore, the lead wire to which the signal of the insertion sensor 44 is input also requires security from the viewpoint of preventing credit fraud. Therefore, regarding the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the insertion sensor 44 is input is connected, the connector leg is not exposed even if it is slid (at least one leg is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed). preferably not exposed).

Furthermore, each connector to which the lead wire connected to the medal payout device, specifically the lead wire for outputting the driving signal of the hopper motor 36 and the lead wire for inputting the signal from the payout sensor 37 is connected Also, from the viewpoint of preventing dislodgement, it is preferable that the connector leg is not exposed (at least one leg is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed) even if it is slid. .
In addition, as in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, a connector having a lead wire related to the power supply, a connector having a lead wire connected to the sub-control board 80, and a lead connected to the board for transmitting external signals Each connector to which each wire is connected is also preferably configured so that at least one leg is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed.

<21st Embodiment>
The twenty-first embodiment relates to the thickness (diameter) of lead wires (also referred to as “signal wires”).
In the twenty-first embodiment, the lead wire for starting is made the thinnest, and at least one other lead wire having the same thickness as the lead wire for starting is provided in one connector terminal having the lead wire for starting, In addition, by providing at least one or more lead wires thicker than the lead wire for starting, it is difficult to identify the lead wire for starting, and hoax (unauthorized starting or starting with intentional timing) is suppressed. It is something to do.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 500 , the lead wire for starting corresponds to the lead wire connecting the starting port switch 533 and the main control board 530 .
In the slot machine 10 , the lead wire for starting corresponds to the lead wire connecting the start switch 41 and the main control board 50 .
Note that the "starting lead wire" actually consists of two wires, one of which serves as a starting signal wire and the other one serves as a GND wire. In the present embodiment, the starting signal line is referred to as "starting lead line" and does not include the GND line. However, lead wires other than lead wires related to starting may include the GND wire.

FIG. 110 shows the connectors 539b to 539h of the main control board 530, respectively.
FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a state in which harnesses B to H are connected;
110, illustration of the substrate case 550 is omitted. In addition, although the main control board 530 is shown as an example in FIG. In other words, the twenty-first embodiment can be applied to both the slot machine 10 and the pachinko gaming machine 500. FIG.
Further, the connector terminals attached to the ends of the harnesses B to H are respectively referred to as "harness B connector terminal" to "harness H connector terminal".

The connector 539a is normally a connector to which no cable or the like is connected. The connector 539a is a connector that is connected to a verification device when, for example, the regulatory authority of the gaming machine uses the verification device to confirm data stored inside the CPU, ROM, and RWM.
Connectors 539b to 539h are concave connectors mounted on the main control board 530, and harness B connector terminals to harness H connector terminals (convex connectors) are connected to these connectors, respectively.
FIG. 111 is a front view showing details of the harnesses B to H and the connector terminals of the harnesses B to H. FIG.
Each of the harnesses B to H consists of a plurality of lead wires, and in FIG. 111, each lead wire is numbered. For example, the harness B is composed of nine lead wires 1 to 9 in the first row (upper row in the figure) and nine lead wires 10 to 18 in the second row (lower row in the figure). harness.

Each connector terminal of harnesses B, C, D, G, and H is configured in two rows. On the other hand, each connector terminal of harnesses E and F is configured in one row.
The harnesses and connector terminals shown in FIG. 111 are merely examples, and the connector terminals may be configured in three or more rows, for example. The number of lead wires in one row is determined according to the application (the number of signal wires), and is not limited to that shown in FIG. .
In addition, suppose that even if it is comprised from one lead wire, it will be called a "harness."
Furthermore, harnesses include those in which each lead wire is separated from each other (whether or not they are bound), specifically, in addition to discrete wire cables, such as flat cables and ribbon cables. includes all leads connected together (whether separable or not).

In addition, FIG. 111 shows two types of thicknesses of lead wires. In the figure, lead wires indicated by single circles indicate thin lead wires, and lead wires indicated by double circles indicate thick lead wires. Here, the "thickness of the lead wire" refers to the diameter of the lead wire. Therefore, if the diameter of the lead wire indicated by a single circle is D1 and the diameter of the lead wire indicated by a double circle is D2, then "D1<D2".
In addition, in the example of FIG. 111, two types of lead wire thicknesses are shown, but the harness is not limited to this, and may be composed of lead wires of three or more types of thicknesses.

In FIG. 111, a lead wire for starting (in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, a lead wire connecting the starter switch 533 and the main control board 530; in the case of the slot machine 10, the start switch 41 and the main control board 50 ) is the seventh lead wire of the harness D. As for the lead wire for start-up, the thinner one of the two thicknesses is used. This is because the thin lead wire makes the lead wire for starting as inconspicuous as possible. In addition, by using a thin lead wire, it becomes easy to disconnect when a fraudulent act (remodeling, etc.) is performed, so that an abnormality can be easily detected. In other words, thick lead wires are less likely to break even in the event of fraud than thin lead wires. This is because it is difficult to
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lead wire for starting may be a thick lead wire. Alternatively, when using lead wires of three different thicknesses, an intermediate lead wire may be used as the starting lead wire.
In some cases, only two wires, the start-related lead wire and its GND wire, are connected to one connector terminal.
On the other hand, the harness D shown in FIG. 111 has a lead wire (No. 7) related to starting and a plurality of other lead wires.

Further, in the harness D including the start-related lead wire (No. 7), at least one lead wire having the same thickness as the start-related lead wire (No. 7) is provided. This is because even if it is known that the connector D includes a lead wire related to start-up, it is difficult to specify which lead wire it is (to make it difficult to cheat). In this example, lead wires Nos. 2, 4, and 8 have the same thickness as lead wire No. 7 (lead wire for start-up).

Furthermore, adjacent to the lead wire No. 7 of the harness D, the lead wire No. 8 having the same thickness is arranged. This is because by arranging the lead wire of the same thickness adjacent to the lead wire for starting, it is difficult to identify the lead wire for starting. In the example of FIG. 111, the lead wire No. 8 located on the right side of the lead wire No. 7 in the harness D has the same thickness as the lead wire No. 7. The thickness of the wire may be the same as the thickness of the No. 7 lead wire. Alternatively, the thickness of the No. 3 lead wire may be the thickness of the No. 7 lead wire. In the harness D, the lead wires "adjacent" to the lead wire No. 7 correspond to the lead wires No. 3, No. 6 and No. 8 in the example of FIG. At least one lead wire among these lead wires is set to have the same thickness as the lead wire No. 7.

Further, the harness D is provided with one or more lead wires having a thickness different from that of the lead wire (No. 7) relating to starting. In the example of FIG. 111, leads numbered 1, 3, 5, and 6 have different thicknesses than the start lead (numbered 7). By including a lead wire having a thickness different from that of the start-related lead wire in one connector terminal (harness D connector terminal), it is possible to make the start-related lead wire more difficult to identify.

In addition to lead wires related to start-up, important signal wires, specifically, lead wires related to inserting game media, lead wires related to payout, lead wires for transmitting external signals, etc. From the viewpoint of starting, one or more other signal wires having the same thickness and one or more other signal wires having different thickness are provided in one connector terminal in the same manner as the lead wire for starting. is preferred.
Furthermore, it is preferable to arrange the lead wire for starting and the lead wire for power supply so as not to be adjacent to each other. This is to make the lead wires for starting less susceptible to noise.
Here, "not adjacent" means that, for example, when lead wire No. 7 of harness D is a lead wire related to starting, wire Nos. 3, 6, and 8 of harness D are not set as lead wires for power supply. Things are mentioned.

Further, as in the present embodiment, for example, when the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are arranged in a straight line on the main control board 530 and the distance between the two connector terminals is short, the fifth connector terminal of the harness G When the lead wire No. 1 is set as the lead wire for starting, it is preferable not to set the lead wire No. 1 of the harness H as the lead wire for the power supply.
On the other hand, even if the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are arranged in a straight line on the main control board 530, if there is a constant distance between the two connector terminals, the fifth lead of the harness G No. 1 lead of harness H may be set to the lead for power supply.

Furthermore, when the connector terminal of the harness including the lead wire for starting and the connector terminal of the other harness are adjacent to each other, the harness including the lead wire for starting is arranged below the other harness. It is preferable to wire so that the lead wires for are hidden from the outside as much as possible.
FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an example of hiding lead wires for starting. In FIG. 112, for simplification of the drawing, each of the harness D and the harness E consists of one row of lead wires, the harness D consists of three lead wires, and the harness E consists of five lead wires. Illustrated. Then, it is assumed that the lead wire closest to the harness E in the harness D is set as the lead wire for starting.
In this case, wiring is performed so that the direction in which the harness D extends is the harness E side, and the harness E passes above the harness D. As a result, the lead wires for starting the harness D are hidden from the outside as much as possible, and security can be improved.

<22nd Embodiment>
The twenty-second embodiment relates to the setting change state. Although the description of the twenty-second embodiment partially overlaps with the description of the nineteenth embodiment, it will be described again.
First, in the case of the slot machine 10, whether or not the door switch 17 is on, whether or not the setting key switch 152 is on, and whether or not the reset switch 153 is on is checked before shifting to the setting change state. is determined, and it is possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that all these switches are on. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all of the switches are off, the setting change state is not entered. As a result, even if the setting key switch 152 is accessed by illegally drilling a hole in the front door 12, the setting change state is not entered unless the door switch 17 is turned on.

Even if all of the door switch 17, the setting key switch 152, and the reset switch 153 are turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state is not entered. After the power is turned on, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the current setting value can be confirmed, but the setting value cannot be changed. Note that the door switch 17 may be turned on as a condition for shifting to the setting confirmation state. Furthermore, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the condition may be that the reset switch 153 is turned off.

Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the setting change state are that the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the door switch 17 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a state in which the setting change state ends when the door switch 17 is turned off, that is, when the front door 12 is not opened (a state in which there is a high possibility of cheating).
Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on, and to end the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is ON, and when the setting change state ends, the ON/OFF state of the door switch 17 is not determined. may

Secondly, it is not determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off when shifting to the setting change state, but when the setting change state ends, it is determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off, and if the door switch 17 is not on. The setting change state may not be terminated.
Thirdly, it is not determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off when shifting to the setting change state. can be set to
Fourthly, when shifting to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off, and the setting value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 153 during the setting change state. If the door switch 17 is not on when the start switch 41, which is an operation for finalizing the value, is operated, the set value may not be finalized (a new set value is not stored in the RWM 53). .

In addition, in order to shift to the setting change state in the slot machine 10, the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on. The current setting values stored in the RWM 53 are cleared before the setting values can be changed after shifting to (setting change processing). In this case, the set value data is "0". Therefore, the set value at the start of the setting change state is "1".

In addition, when the reset switch 153 is turned on and the power switch 11 is turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 (role ratio monitor) in the storage area of the RWM 53 Such data is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 includes the number-of-games counter, the number-of-payouts counter (including ring buffer), each ratio data, and the like.

In the case of the pachinko game machine 500, when the power is turned on, whether or not the frame opening switch 523 is on, whether or not the setting key switch 535 is on, and whether or not the reset switch 536 is on is determined. is determined, and it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that these three switches are ON. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all the switches are off, the setting change state is not entered. As a result, in an illegal state where the front frame 502 is not open, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the setting change state is not entered.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 98, the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 is not closed like the slot machine 10 (see FIG. 22), but is open.
Therefore, depending on the situation of the islands installed in the hall, it is assumed that the main control board 530 is accessed without opening the front frame 502 by going around to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 . However, if the frame open switch 523 is not turned on, it is determined that the state is not normal, and the state is not changed to the setting change state (the set value cannot be changed).

Even if the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the setting key switch 535 is turned on, and the reset switch 536 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state is not entered. Furthermore, after the power is turned on, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the setting change state is not entered and the setting confirmation state is entered. do not.
In the case of the pachinko game machine 500, as described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting key switch 535 turned on (the reset switch 536 is turned off), , it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation state.

Further, when the opening of the front frame 502 and the opening of the glass door 505 can be individually detected as in the present embodiment, when both the front frame 502 and the glass door 505 are opened at the same time (that is, the door (when the open switch 522 is on and the frame open switch 523 is on), the specification may allow the transition to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
By setting in this way, in the manufacturing process of the pachinko game machine 500, the functions of the set values can be inspected without performing unnecessary procedures. In addition, pachinko machine 500
After the is installed in the hall, even if the glass door 505 is removed from the pachinko game machine 500 during board maintenance work in the hall, setting change and setting confirmation can be performed in parallel with the board maintenance, thereby improving convenience. can be improved.

Further, the door open switch 522 (the switch that is turned on when the glass door 505 is opened) is not detected when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Therefore, when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it does not matter whether the glass door 505 is open or closed. However, it is determined that the glass door 505 is closed when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and the ON/OFF state of the door opening switch 522 is determined when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and the state is OFF. on the condition that it is possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are covered with a cover 561. As shown in FIG. In order to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion opening 534, the cover 561 must be opened.
Therefore, a sensor for detecting opening/closing of the cover 561 (hereinafter referred to as a "cover sensor") may be provided so that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be entered on condition that the cover sensor is turned on.

In the pachinko game machine 500, in the setting change state, each time the setting change switch 536 is operated, the setting value can be changed in common with the slot machine 10. FIG.
In addition, in the slot machine 10, the operation of the start switch 41 is an operation to confirm the set value, but in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, turning off the setting key switch 535 confirms the set value and , is an operation for ending the setting change state.
Furthermore, in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, the setting change state can be terminated on condition that the setting key switch 535 is turned off from on and the frame opening switch 523 is on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a state in which the setting change state ends when the frame opening switch 523 is turned off, that is, when the front frame 502 is not opened (a state in which there is a high possibility of cheating).

In the present embodiment, the setting change state can be entered under the condition that the frame open switch 523 is turned on, and the setting change state can be ended under the condition that the frame open switch 523 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the frame open switch 523 is ON, and when the setting change state ends, the ON/OFF state of the frame open switch 523 is not judged. can be

Secondly, it does not determine whether the frame open switch 523 is on or off when shifting to the setting change state, but determines whether the frame open switch 523 is on or off when the setting change state ends, and the frame open switch 523 is turned on. Otherwise, the setting change state may not be terminated.
Thirdly, when shifting to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the frame open switch 523 is on or off. You can set it so that it does not.

Fourthly, it is possible to change the set value by operating the setting change switch 536 during the setting change state without judging whether the frame open switch 523 is on or off when shifting to the setting change state. If the frame open switch 523 is not on when the setting key switch 535, which is an operation for fixing the setting value, is turned off, the setting value is not fixed (a new setting value is not stored in the RWM). May be set.

In the case of the pachinko game machine 500, even if the power is turned on with the reset switch 536 turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the management information display LED (performance Data relating to information displayed on display monitor 538 is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 538 is the base value.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are provided on the back side of the front frame 502 near the hinge mechanism 503 . By doing so, it is possible to prevent easy access to the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 simply by opening the front frame 502 slightly.
For example, in FIG. 98, the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are arranged inside the cover 561, but when the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting switch 536 are located inside the cover 561. A change (reset) switch 536 is located to the right in the area of the main control board 530 . Thereby, the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 can be arranged closer to the hinge mechanism 503 . In FIG. 98, since the left side in the figure is the open side, if it is formed as shown in FIG. can be placed.

Regarding the slot machine 10, similarly to the above, the setting key insertion slot 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are set on the main control board 50 so that when the front door 12 is opened, the rotational axis of the front door 12 is adjusted. It is preferable to arrange them so as to be close to each other. For example, when the main control board 50 is arranged as shown in FIG. When the door 12 is opened and the main control board 50 is seen, it looks like FIG. 10(a). Therefore, if the setting key insertion opening 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are arranged on the left side in FIG. A switch 153 can be arranged.

Furthermore, as a countermeasure to prevent the transition to the setting change state due to the cheating, for example, in the pachinko game machine 500, after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise. , the setting key switch 535 may be turned on. In this case, if the setting key is configured to be rotatable clockwise, and if it is configured not to shift to the setting change state when the setting key is rotated clockwise, the transition to the setting change state is made difficult to understand. be able to.
In particular, when the front frame 502 is opened by inserting the key into the key insertion opening 521, the front frame 502 can be opened by rotating the key clockwise. The direction of rotation of the key and the direction of rotation of the setting key are opposite to each other, making it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

The slot machine 10 is also similar to the above.
The setting key switch 152 may be turned on by rotating the setting key counterclockwise after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 . In this case, if the setting key is configured to be rotatable clockwise, and if it is configured not to shift to the setting change state when the setting key is rotated clockwise, the transition to the setting change state is made difficult to understand. be able to.
In particular, if the front door 12 is opened by rotating the key clockwise when opening the front door 12, the key rotation direction and the setting key rotation direction when the front door 12 is opened can be determined. is in the opposite direction, making it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

FIG. 113 is a side sectional view showing the positional relationship between the upper case 560 of the substrate case 550, the cover 561, the setting key insertion opening 534, and the setting change (reset) switch 536. FIG. Note that in FIG. 113, as in FIG. 108, the cross section is not hatched from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawing.
As shown in FIGS. 105 and 113, the highest surface of the upper case 560 is surface S1, and the opening surface of the setting key insertion opening 534 and setting change (reset) switch 536 is surface S2. In this case, the surface S2 is formed lower than the surface S1. By forming in this way, for example, when an attempt is made to access the setting key insertion opening 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536 by inserting a wire-like object from the outside, it is possible to access the surface rather than the surface S1. Accessing S2 becomes more difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress setting fraud.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 113, when the cover 561 is attached to the upper surfaces of the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536, the surface S3 (FIG. 113) which is the upper surface of the cover 561 is , are arranged at a position lower than the surface S1 of the upper cover 560. As shown in FIG.
By forming in this manner, when attempting to access the setting key insertion opening 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536, a wire-like object may be inserted from between the upper cover 560 and the cover 561, or the cover may be opened. 561, it is possible to make it difficult to do so, so that it is possible to suppress setting acts.

Although the 19th to 22nd embodiments have been described above, these embodiments are not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Nineteenth Embodiment (1) In the nineteenth embodiment, a setting confirmation end sound may be output when the setting confirmation state is terminated. For example, outputting a voice saying "The setting confirmation is finished."
Furthermore, if the game is started at the same time as the end of the setting confirmation state,
a) End the output of the setting confirmation end sound before the end of the game when the game is ended in the shortest possible time.
b) End the output of the setting confirmation end sound before the end of the game when the game is ended within the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game in which the special role was won (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the game in which the jackpot was won (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500) was completed within the average time of one game , ends the output of the setting confirmation completion sound.
It can be set as follows.

(2) Furthermore, simultaneously with the end of the setting confirmation state, the production lamp 21 (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the production lamp 541 (in the case of the pachinko game machine 500) outputs an effect indicating that the setting confirmation state has ended. may Also in this case, similarly to the nineteenth embodiment, the performance time by the lamp is
a) Ending the ramp performance before the end of the game when the game is completed in the shortest possible time.
b) Ending the ramp effect before the end of the game when the game is ended in the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game in which the special role was won (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the game in which the jackpot was won (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500) was completed within the average time of one game , to end the lamp effect.
etc.

(3) When the setting change state is ended (or when the setting confirmation state is ended as in the above example), the setting change (or confirmation) end sound and lamp effect are output. The (or confirmation) end sound and lamp effects are controlled by the sub-control board 80 or 540 .
However, not limited to this, when ending the setting change (or confirmation) state, the output device controlled by the main control board 50 or 530 executes an output indicating that the setting change (or confirmation) state has ended. You may

(4) In the slot machine 10, the setting key insertion opening 151 (setting key switch 152) and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided on the main control board 50, but not limited to this, the main control board 50 is separately provided. , a setting change board may be provided, and the setting key insertion port 151 (setting key switch 152), setting change (reset) switch 153, and setting value display LED 73 may be provided on this setting change board.
The pachinko game machine 500 is similar to the above. A setting change board is provided separately from the main control board 530, and a setting key insertion port 534 (setting key switch 535), a setting change (reset) switch 536, and a set value display LED 537 are provided on this setting change board. good too.

(5) As the setting change end sound, an example of outputting the sound "The setting change is finished" is shown, but it is not necessarily limited to this wording. For example, "The setting value has been updated" There may be.
(6) In the 19th embodiment, the game is started immediately after the setting change state ends. not. For example, it is assumed that after the hall manager changes the setting, he/she tries to complete one game as a trial. In such a case, while confirming that the setting change state has ended correctly by the output of the setting change end sound and the effect lamp, the notification by the setting change end sound and the effect lamp should not be confused with the effect output in the game. One of the purposes is to make

B. Twentieth Embodiment (1) In the twentieth embodiment, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are brought into contact so that they can slide. However, there are various ways of engaging the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 before the sliding movement, and the method is not limited to the one shown in FIG. Further, when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, they may have a shape that allows them to be overlapped with a certain degree of freedom. Alternatively, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 may overlap only at a specific position.

(2) How the connectors 539a to 539h are arranged on the main control board 530, and which connector legs are exposed when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are temporarily mated. , various methods.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are slid as in this embodiment, connector legs 539g' and 539h' are exposed first as shown in FIG. Therefore, in the case of the connector 539a provided on the main control board 530 at symmetrical positions with respect to the connectors 539g and 539h, even if the amount of slide movement increases, the connector legs are not exposed.

Therefore, for example, on the main control board 530, from the connector 539a side in FIG. , connectors with signal lines for outputting external signals, and connectors with signal lines for presentation) are arranged in order, and signal line connectors that are not so important in terms of security are adopted as the connectors 539g and 539h. Things are mentioned.

(3) Although the substrate case 550 has the crimped portions 562 and 572 as an example, the present embodiment can also be applied to the substrate case 550 that does not have the crimped portions. For example, the board case that accommodates the sub-control board 540 of the pachinko game machine 500 may not have a crimped portion, but the twentieth embodiment can be applied even to such a board case.

C. 21st Embodiment (1) The types and numbers of connectors and the types and numbers of harnesses (connector terminals) shown in the above embodiments are examples, and are not limited to these.
For example, in FIG. 111, harnesses B and C may all be composed of thick leads or may be composed entirely of thin leads.
Also, although the harness E has only one row of thin lead wires, a harness and connector terminals having two or more rows of thin lead wires may be used.
Furthermore, the harness and connector terminals may be provided in any number of rows, and the number of lead wires (terminals) in one row may be any number.
Furthermore, in a harness in which thick lead wires and thin lead wires are mixed in a row, it is sufficient that there is at least one thick lead wire and at least one thin lead wire in the row.

(2) In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, a set of lead wires connected to one connector of the main control board 530 is defined as "one harness".
For example, the harness G connected to the connector 539g is one harness, and the harness H connected to the connector 539h is one harness. When the harness G and the harness H are bound together at the end thereof, it is called a "harness group" and is not called a "single harness".

(3) When the main control board 530 and another board are harness-connected, a specific connector is mounted on the main control board 530, and a harness consisting of N lead wires is connected to the specific connector. Assume that the connector terminals are connected.
On the other hand, on the other end side of the harness, N lead wires are divided into Nx (Nx≧1) and Ny (Ny≧1) lead wires, and connector terminals X are attached to the tips of the Nx lead wires, The connector terminal X is connected to another board, and the connector terminal Y (≠connector terminal X) is attached to the end of the Ny lead wires, and the connector terminal Y is connected to another board (Nx lead wires). (either the same substrate as the substrate to which the line is connected or a different substrate).
In this case, "one harness" in this embodiment refers to a set of N lead wires connected to the main control board 530 side.

D. 22nd Embodiment (1) In the pachinko game machine 500, it is possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on. It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation state with . In this case as well, it is determined whether or not the frame open switch 523 is on, and if it is on, the setting confirmation state is entered.

(2) As described above, it is conceivable to provide a setting change board on a board different from the main control board 50 or 530 . In this case, in the case of the slot machine 10, the setting is changed to the side of the opening axis of the front door 12 inside the housing (toward the opening axis), in other words, to the side away from the open end as seen from the player side. It is preferable to arrange the substrate. Similarly, in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, it is set on the back side of the front frame 502 toward the hinge mechanism 503 (toward the hinge mechanism 503), in other words, on the side away from the open end when viewed from the player side. Preferably, a modified substrate is provided. By arranging them in this way, the setting key insertion openings 151 and 534 and the setting change (reset) switches 153 and 536 can be arranged at positions far from the open end. Even in this case, the main control board 50 or 530 is preferably arranged far from the open end.

In particular, the main control board 50 or 530 is equipped with management information display LEDs 74 or 538, respectively, and it is preferable that the information displayed by the management information display LEDs 74 or 538 is not easily visible. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530 away from the open side, and also arrange the main control board 50 or 530 away from the open end.
However, the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 can be made invisible simply by arranging the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530, respectively, at a position away from the open side. is also possible. Similarly, even if the management information display LED 74 or 538 is mounted approximately in the center of the main control board 50 or 530, respectively, the management information can be displayed by simply arranging the main control board 50 or 530 at a position away from the open end. The information displayed by display LEDs 74 or 538 can also be easily obscured.

E. All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification, including the 19th to 22nd embodiments, are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described.
The terms used in the twenty-third embodiment have the following meanings.
“RT” means that the type (number) of the role to be selected by lottery and its winning probability are in a unique lottery state, and “RT transition” means transition from one RT to another RT By doing so, it means that the winning probability of at least one replay subject to lottery changes. Therefore, the type of replay and its winning probability in one RT are values specific to that RT, and it is impossible that the replay type and its winning probability are all the same between one RT and another RT. do not have. However, there is no problem if one RT and another RT have the same total replay winning probability.

In this embodiment, RT includes non-RT and RT1, as shown in FIG. 131, which will be described later.
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, when "RT" is referred to herein, it includes non-RT.
In addition, in this embodiment, a 1BB game (1BB operation state) and an RB game (RB operation state) are provided as special games (accessory product operation state). Strictly speaking, 1BB game (1BB operating state) and RB game (RB operating state) are not included in RT, but may be one of RT.

It should be noted that RB in the present embodiment is a combination drawn during a general game of 1BB game (meaning a game other than RB game). , the general game is shifted to the RB game during the 1BB game. Therefore, the RB drawn in the general game of the 1BB game is also called "SRB (shift RB)".

Furthermore, it is a concept different from RT, and has a main game state whose transition (transition) is controlled by the main control board 50 in the same way as RT. The main game state of this embodiment includes main game states 0 to 5, as shown in FIG. 132, which will be described later.
RT and the main game state may or may not be interlocked. For example, when the transition conditions for both the RT and the main game state are satisfied, both the RT and the main game state are shifted. On the other hand, when the RT transition condition is satisfied but the main game state transition condition is not satisfied, only the RT transitions while the main game state remains as it is. Conversely, when the conditions for transitioning to the main game state are satisfied but the conditions for transitioning to RT are not satisfied, only the main game state transitions while keeping RT.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the winning lottery means 61 executes the lottery for the "winning number". Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also called "winning number lottery (determination, selection) means". Winning numbers in this embodiment include winning numbers "1" to "41" as shown in FIG. 126 and the like, which will be described later.
Then, when the winning number is determined, a "condition device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated. For example, in FIG. 126, if winning number "1" is determined, winning and replay condition device number "1" is generated.

The "condition device number" (also referred to as "winning information") has a "accessory condition device number" and a "winning and replay condition device number". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122 to be described later, "1" to "17" are provided as role product condition device numbers. Also, as shown in FIGS. 123 to 125 to be described later, "1" to "24" are provided as prize and replay condition device numbers.
Then, when the winning number is determined and the conditional device number is generated, the conditional device corresponding to the conditional device number is activated, so that the combination of symbol combinations corresponding to the activated conditional device can be stopped and displayed on the activated line. becomes.
Note that 1BB and RB in the present embodiment may not win a winning game, so there may be cases where 1BB and RB are inside.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the left reel 31 may be called the first reel 31 , the middle reel 31 may be called the second reel 31 , and the right reel 31 may be called the third reel 31 .
In particular, the RWM 53, which will be described later, is called the first reel 31, the second reel 31, and the third reel 31. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the pattern arrangement of the reels 31 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 114, in this embodiment, each reel 31 consists of 20 frames.
In FIG. 114, the symbol numbers are also illustrated. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol with symbol number 0 is "Replay". Furthermore, in FIG. 114, the symbol numbers are also displayed when the reels 31 rotate in the reverse direction. The symbol number when the reel 31 rotates in the reverse direction will be described later.

Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 stop is set to "4". For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated just before the number 1 "watermelon" on the left reel 31 passes through the activated line, a maximum of 4 symbols are moved from the relevant symbol to the number 5 "replay". It becomes possible to stop on the effective line.
Therefore, for example, if four specific symbols are arranged on one reel 31 at intervals of 5 symbols, the specific symbols can always be stopped on the activated line regardless of which position the stop switch 42 is operated. For example, on the left reel 31, "Replay" is arranged at Nos. 5, 10, 15, and 0. That is, the "replay" on the left reel 31 is arranged with 4 symbols at intervals of 5 symbols. Therefore, regarding the left reel 31, regardless of the timing at which the left stop switch 42 is operated, the "replay" can always be stopped on the active line. In addition, such a symbol arrangement may be referred to as a ““PB=1” arrangement”.

On the left reel 31, "Bell A" and "Watermelon" are arranged at "PB=1".
Also, on the middle reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Cherry" are each arranged at "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Bell B" are each arranged at "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the left reel 31, the 3rd “black BAR”, the 8th “special map”, the 13th “red 7”, and the 18th “blue BAR” are “PB=1” in total of these 4 symbols. ” placement. Therefore, at any timing when the left stop switch 42 is operated, any one of "black BAR", "special map top", "red 7" or "blue BAR" can be stopped on the effective line.
Similarly to the left reel 31, the middle reel 31 also has a "PB=1" arrangement for "black BAR", "blue BAR", "red 7", or "special design top" by adding these four symbols.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, the "blue BAR" or "special symbol bottom" is arranged at "PB=1" by adding these two symbols.

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the display window (transparent window) 18, the positional relationship of each reel 31, and the effective lines (display lines for displaying symbol combinations).
A reel 31 arranged inside can be seen through the display window 18 .
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three patterns that are continuous vertically can be seen from the display window 18 . Therefore, a total of nine symbols (frames) are arranged so that they can be seen from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10 .

In addition, FIG. 115 shows designations of symbol positions in this specification. In this specification, for each reel 31, the symbol positions when stopped, which can be seen from the display window 18, are referred to as "upper row", "middle row", and "lower row" in order from the top. ”, “middle left”, and “lower left”.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 115, valid lines are set for the nine symbols visible from the display window 18 .
Here, the "effective line" is a line of symbols arranged when the reels 31 are stopped, and is a symbol combination line (display line) for forming a symbol combination, and a symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations is a symbol combination line. This is the line where the player wins the prize when the player stops on that line. In this embodiment, the prescribed number is three in any game state, and the same effective line is set in any game state.
The effective line in the twenty-third embodiment is a so-called right-sloping straight line (“upper left”-“middle middle”-“lower right”). Other lines are invalid lines.
In addition, the specified number may be changed for each game state (for example, the specified number during 1BB operation is set to "2"). Furthermore, the position and number of activated lines may differ for each game state or for each specified number (for example, multiple activated lines may be used for a specific specified number).

FIGS. 116 to 121 are diagrams showing the types of combinations (such as combinations corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the combination lottery means 61), symbol combinations, the number of payouts, and the like in the twenty-third embodiment.
The roles are roughly divided into special roles, replays (replay roles), and minor roles.
Then, the combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination, the number of payouts at the time of winning, etc. are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped, if the symbol combination corresponding to any of the combinations stops on the activated line (the combination wins; the same shall apply hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out (dividend (profit ) is granted).
However, the payout number at the time of winning the special role is set to 0. Also, in the replay, medals are automatically inserted, and a replay can be executed.

In FIGS. 116 to 121, "three (1)" corresponds to when the accessory is not activated, and particularly in the twenty-third embodiment, games other than 1BB games This corresponds to a state in which it is not in progress, a state in which 1BB winning information (condition device number) is carried over, etc.). In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, since there is a case where AT is executed during 1BB game, games other than 1BB game are non-AT. Therefore, in the twenty-third embodiment, games other than the 1BB game may be referred to as "normal game (accessory not activated, non-AT)". However, even in normal games, there are cases of advantageous sections and non-advantageous sections.
Also, "three cards (2)" corresponds to the time when RB is not activated while 1BB is in operation (during 1BB game). Furthermore, "3 cards (3)" corresponds to 1BB operation (during 1BB game) and RB operation (during RB game).
For example, in FIG. 116, 1BB with winning combination number "001" is subject to a lottery when the specified number of cards is 3 (1) (when the role is not activated), but the specified number of 3 (2) and the specified number of 3 are selected. In the case of (3), it means that the lottery is not applicable.

The winning combination numbers “001” to “017” shown in FIG. 116 correspond to special winning combinations (accessories). In this embodiment, one type of 1BB and 16 types of RBs (RBA to RBP) are provided as special roles.
In the twenty-third embodiment, only 1BB is drawn when the role is not activated, and RB is not drawn, so there is no transition from when the role is not activated to when RB is activated.
When 1BB is won and 1BB is won when the accessory is not activated, medals are not paid out in this game, but the next game is shifted to 1BB operation (1BB game) corresponding to a special game.

Also, during 1BB operation (1BB game), RB is drawn. When RB is won during 1BB operation and RB wins, medals are not paid out in this game, but from the next game, RB operation (RB game) during 1BB operation (1BB game) is performed.
In the twenty-third embodiment, the time when 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation may be referred to as "general game of 1BB game".
In the case where the conditions for ending the RB operation are satisfied, when the conditions for ending the 1BB operation are satisfied, the 1BB operation is terminated and the game shifts to the time when the accessory is not activated (ordinary game). On the other hand, when the condition for ending the RB operation is satisfied but the condition for ending the 1BB operation is not satisfied, the operation shifts to the 1BB operation (and when the RB is not operated).

All of the combination numbers “018” to “047” shown in FIG. 117 correspond to replays (replay combinations). In the twenty-third embodiment, replays 01 to 10 are provided as types of replays. As shown in FIG. 117, when the accessory is not activated (three (1)), all of replays 01 to 10 are subject to lottery. On the other hand, when 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation (three cards (2)), only Replay 01 is selected for the lottery. Furthermore, when 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation (three cards (3)), replays are not drawn.

Figures 118 to 121 show minor combinations of the twenty-third embodiment. Small wins 01 to 34 are provided as small wins in the twenty-third embodiment.
Of the small wins 01 to 34, the number of payouts for the small wins 01 to 12 is set to 15 at the time of winning. and small win group B (when minor wins B1 to B6 are won).
In addition, the number of small wins 13 to 24 to be paid out at the time of winning is set to 3, which is a low bell when winning the so-called pressing order bell (when winning the small win group A (small wins A1 to A6)). is a role.
Furthermore, the number of small wins 25 to 33 to be paid out at the time of winning is set to 1, and it is a low bell when winning the so-called pushing order bell (when winning a small win group B (small wins B1 to B6)). It is a role.
Furthermore, the small winning combination 34 is a winning combination to be selected by lottery when RB is activated during 1BB activation (when 3 cards (3)).

In each of the above-mentioned roles, when the symbol combination corresponding to the role does not stop on the effective line in the game in which the role is won, the role to be carried over from the next game onwards and the role not to be carried over are determined.
The hands carried over are 1BB and RB in this embodiment. Since the symbol combinations of 1BB and RB are both set to "PB≠1", there is a case where a game in which 1BB or RB is won does not win. When 1BB or RB is won, in the game until 1BB or RB is won, the winning information of 1BB or RB is controlled so as to be carried over to the next game and thereafter.

On the other hand, when a minor combination or replay is won, the winning combination is valid only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over to the next game or later. That is, in a game in which one of these winning combinations is won, the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be won. The rights to the elected role shall be extinguished.
In the 23rd embodiment, when a winning number including a small combination or a replay is won, one of the replays or the small combination is always won, and there is no chance of being missed. However, the invention is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a minor combination ("PB≠1") that may be missed.

122 to 125 are diagrams showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, and the like.
First, the combination lottery means 61 draws a winning number. Winning numbers include winning numbers "1" to "41" as shown in FIG. 126, which will be described later. Then, as shown in FIG. 126, for example, when the winning number "1" is won, the condition device "replay A" corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number "1" becomes operable.
Further, for example, when the winning number "25" is won, the condition device "1BB" corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" becomes operable.

Here, as shown in FIG. 138 to be described later, the RWM 53 has a storage area (address "F0A9(H)") capable of storing winning and replay condition device numbers, and a storage area capable of storing role product condition device numbers. (address “F0AA(H)”). For example, assume that the winning number "11" is won when the accessory is not activated. In this case, by storing the value of the winning number ("11") in the address "F0A9(H)", it becomes possible to update the winning and replay condition device number. Also, assume that the winning number "25" is won when the accessory is not activated. In this case, a value (in the twenty-third embodiment, "1" obtained by subtracting "24" from the winning number) obtained by performing a predetermined calculation on the value of the winning number is stored in the address "F0AA(H)". By doing so, it becomes possible to update the accessory condition device number.

In the 23rd embodiment, the winning number won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is compared with "25", and if it is determined to be less than "25", the winning number is assigned to the address "F0A9(H)". Make it memorizable. Also, if it is determined that it is not less than "25", it is possible to derive the accessory condition device number from the winning number by a predetermined calculation (as described above, subtracting "24" in the twenty-third embodiment). A control process is performed to enable the stored accessory condition device number to be stored in the address "F0AA(H)". Especially, as in the 23rd embodiment, this is an effective derivation method when the total number of accessory condition device numbers "17" is smaller than the total number of winning and replay condition device numbers "24". .

FIG. 122 shows a accessory (particularly 1BB or RB in the twenty-third embodiment) condition device.
For example, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" is the accessory condition device that becomes operable when the 1BB is won. When this 1BB condition device operates, 1BB, which is a winning combination, can win.
In addition, in the remarks column of FIG. 122, the condition for terminating the operation of the accessory condition device is shown. The 1BB condition device continues until the number of medals acquired exceeds 170, and when the number of medals acquired exceeds 170, the operation end condition of the 1BB condition device is satisfied, and the operation of the 1BB condition device is terminated.
Similarly, the RBA conditional device to the RBP conditional device all terminate upon completion of 12 games or 8 wins, or the completion of the operation of the 1BB conditional device.

Figures 123-125 illustrate the prize and replay conditions device. Of the winning and replay condition device numbers, "1" to "9" are condition device numbers related to replay, and "10" to "24" are condition device numbers related to minor wins.
For example, when the replay B condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number "2" is activated, the winning combinations include replays 01 and 02, so replays 01 and 02 can win. When a conditional device is activated, not all the winning combinations corresponding to the conditional device can win. For example, when the replay B conditional device is activated, Replay 02 can win in the 23rd embodiment. becomes.
Therefore, in the twenty-third embodiment, only one of the replays wins even if multiple types of replays are won. Similarly, as will be described later, multiple types of small winning combinations may be won, but in this case, only one of the small winning combinations can be won (no double winning).

When the replay A condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number "1" is activated, only replay 01 can win. The symbol combinations of replay 01 are the combination numbers "018" to "021" in FIG. Therefore, "Replay"--"Blue BAR/Black BAR/Red 7/Tokuzujo"--"Bell A" stops on the active line. When the middle reel 31 stops and "blue BAR/black BAR/red 7/special map top" stops on the effective line (middle middle row), "replay" stops on the middle upper row. Further, when "Bell A" stops on the effective line (lower right) when the right reel 31 stops, "Replay" stops on the upper right. Therefore, when the symbol combination of Replay 01 stops on the active line (Replay 01 wins), "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" (upper replay) stops on the upper line (invalid line).

When the replay B condition device is activated, replay 02 can be won. The symbol combination of replay 02 is the combination number "022" in FIG. Therefore, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" (downward-sloping replay) stops at the active line.
When the replay C condition device is activated, replay 03 or 10 can be won. Here, the reason why the remarks column includes "weak cherry" is that it is possible to form a so-called corner cherry ("cherry" stops at the lower left). Note that the lower left row is not a valid line. The symbol on the left reel 31 of the replay 03 is "Bell A", but in FIG. stops at the bottom left (invalid line).

In the replay D1 conditional device, the remark column has "strong cherry 1" because it is possible to have a so-called middle cherry ("cherry" stops in the middle left). Note that the middle left row is not a valid line. The same applies to the "strong cherry 2" of the replay D2 conditional device and the "strong cherry 3" of the replay D3 conditional device.
When the replay D1 condition device is activated, replay 03, 04 or 10, which is a winning combination, can win a prize. Among them, the symbol combination of replay 04 is shown in FIG.
"Black BAR" - "Red 7/Cherry" - "Replay/Bell B" as shown at "030". When the left reel 31 is stopped and the 3rd "black bar" is stopped on the effective line (upper left), the 2nd "cherry" is stopped on the middle left.

When the replay D2 conditional device is activated, replays 02, 03, 04, or 10, which are winning combinations, can be won, and when the replay D3 conditional device is activated, replays 03, 04, 05, or 10 can be won.
When the replay 04 wins when the replay D2 condition device or the replay D3 condition device is activated, the 2nd "cherry" stops at the middle left row when the left reel 31 stops, similarly to when the replay D1 condition device is activated.

When the Replay E condition device is activated, Replay 06, which is a winning combination, can win a prize. The symbol combination of replay 06 is, as shown in FIG. 117, "watermelon"--"replay/watermelon"--"red 7/watermelon/special map/black BAR". Here, since the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB=1", the "watermelon" always stops on the activated line. "Watermelon" on the middle and right reels 31 is "PB≠1", but if "Watermelon" is pressed, "Watermelon" can be stopped on the effective line.
When the Replay F condition device is activated, Replay 07, which is a winning combination, can win a prize.

When the replay G condition device is activated, replay 08 or 09, which is a winning combination, can win a prize. Here, in order to win the replay 08, when the left reel 31 stops, the 8th "special map" stops at the upper left row, and when the right reel 31 stops, the 16th " When the replay is stopped at the bottom right, the replay 08 wins, and the top left and the bottom left are stopped. In addition, "special figure top" and "special figure bottom" also stop on the upper right and middle right. This stop type is called "strongest cherry" in the twenty-third embodiment.

In FIG. 124, when the small combination A1 condition device to the small combination A6 condition device are operated, either the small combination 01 to 06 or the small combination 13 to 24 included in the winning combination can be won.
Here, when the small combination A1 condition device to the small combination A6 condition device are activated during the 1BB game (1BB operation), and the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the correct answer, the 15-piece combination (included in the winning combination) Any of the small wins 01 to 06) is won, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the incorrect answer (the order of pressing other than the order of pressing the correct answer), the 3-card combination (small wins 13 to 13 included in the winning combination) is operated. 24) will win a prize.
On the other hand, when the accessory is not activated, there is no correct pressing order when the small combination A1 condition device to the small combination A6 condition device are operated. When the small combination A1 condition device to the small combination A6 condition device are activated when the accessory is not activated, the 3-card combination is won even if they are all in the order of pushing.

It should be noted that the small winning combination A1 condition device to the small winning combination A6 condition device can be operated only when RB is not operated during 1BB operation. Therefore, the small combination A1 condition device to the small combination A6 condition device operate during the general game of the 1BB game (other than the RB game).
Here, the relationship between the small combination A1 to A6 conditional devices and the order of pressing the correct answer during the 1BB operation is as follows.
Small hand A1 condition device: 123 (left middle right)
Small hand A2 condition device: 132 (left and right middle)
Small role A3 condition device: 213 (middle left and right)
Small hand A4 condition device: 231 (middle right left)
Small hand A5 condition device: 312 (right left middle)
Small hand A6 condition device: 321 (right middle left)

For example, when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated during a 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "123", in order to win the small winning combination 01, "Watermelon" - "Cherry" - Stop "Bell A". As a result, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" stops on the lower line (ineffective line).
Further, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order of "132", the correct pressing order is at this point in the left first stop, so when the left reel 31 stops, the effective line is "watermelon" (small win). 01) is stopped. Next, at the second stop on the right side, the order of pressing the wrong answers is set at this point, so among the winning combinations 13 to 17, the small combination 17 whose left reel 31 is "Watermelon" is stopped on the activated line. That is, when the right second stop is performed, the "replay" is stopped at the lower right stage. Furthermore, at the middle third stop, "red 7/replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage.

On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order "213" or "231", the incorrect answer pressing order will be set at this point in the middle first stop, so for example, the minor combination 14 is stopped on the effective line. Therefore, "Bell A" is stopped at the middle middle stage at the middle first stop. When the left reel 31 is stopped, "Replay" is stopped at the upper left stage, and "Bell A/Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage when the right reel 31 is stopped.
Further, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the wrong answer pressing order "312" or "321", the wrong answer pressing order is set at this point in the right first stop. Therefore, the "replay" is stopped at the lower right stage at the right first stop. When the left reel 31 is stopped, "Watermelon" is stopped at the upper left stage, and "Red 7/Replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage when the middle reel 31 is stopped.

As described above, when the small combination A1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, the 15-card combination is awarded when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "123". On the other hand, when the 1BB game is not in progress, that is, in the 23rd embodiment, when the accessory is not activated (during 1BB non-internal and 1BB internal), even if the minor combination A1 condition device is activated, the correct answer Has no push order. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "123" when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated when the winning combination is not activated, the winning combination of 3 coins is won (without winning the winning combination of 15 coins). For example, a small winning combination of 14 or 17 with "PB=1" can be given as a triple winning combination.

The above is the same for the small winning combination A2 to small winning combination A6 conditional devices (conditional device numbers "11" to "15").
When the small combination A2 conditional device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "132", the small combination 02 with 15 cards is won, and the pressing order other than "132" is won. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is awarded.
Furthermore, when the minor combination A2 condition device is activated while the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, one of the 3 hands included in the winning combination will be played. win a prize.

When the small winning combination A3 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "213", the small winning combination 03 with 15 cards is won, and the pressing order other than "213" is won. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is awarded.
Furthermore, when the minor combination A3 condition device is activated while the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, any of the 3 hands included in the winning combination will be played. win a prize.

When the small combination A4 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "231", the small combination 04 with 15 cards is won, and the pressing order other than "231" is won. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is awarded.
Furthermore, when the small combination A4 condition device is activated while the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, one of the three hands included in the winning combination will be played. win a prize.

When the small combination A5 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "312", the small combination 05 with 15 cards is won, and the pressing order other than "312" is won. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is awarded.
Furthermore, when the small combination A5 condition device is activated while the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, one of the three hands included in the winning combination will be played. win a prize.

When the small combination A6 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "321", the small combination 06 with 15 cards is won, and the pressing order other than "321" is won. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is awarded.
Furthermore, when the minor combination A6 condition device is activated while the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, one of the 3-hands included in the winning combination will be played. win a prize.

In addition, inside the SRB during 1BB operation, the small win B1 condition device to small win B6 condition device (condition device numbers "16" to "21") were operated, and the stop switch 42 was operated in the correct order. When a 15-card hand (any of the small hands 07 to 12 included in the winning hand) is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the wrong answer pressing order (pressing order other than the correct answer pressing order), 1 A winning combination (any of the small winning combinations 25 to 33 included in the winning combination) wins.
On the other hand, when the role is not activated and when the SRB is not in operation during 1BB operation, there is no correct pressing order when operating the small bonus B1 condition device to the small bonus B6 condition device. When the role is not activated, and when the SRB is not in operation during 1BB operation, when the small combination B1 condition device to the small combination B6 condition device are operated, even if they are all in the order of pushing, 1 piece combination is won.
Winning and replay condition device numbers "16" to "21" are selected by lottery only when 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order of pressing "123" when the small combination B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, "Watermelon" is placed on the activated line in order to win the small combination 07. '-'Cherry'-'Bell B' to stop. As a result, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" stops on the lower line (ineffective line).
Also, when the small win B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the wrong answer pressing order "132", the correct pressing order at this time at the left first stop Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "watermelon" (symbol forming the small winning combination 07) is stopped on the active line. Next, at the second stop on the right, the order of pressing the wrong answers is set at this point, so among the winning hands 25, 26, and 28, for example, the small winning combination 28 whose left reel 31 is "watermelon" is stopped on the activated line. That is, at the right second stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the lower right stage. Furthermore, at the middle third stop, "Bell B/Watermelon" is stopped at the middle middle stage.

On the other hand, when the small win B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the wrong answer pressing order "213" or "231", this time point is the middle first stop. In order to stop the small combination 25 on the effective line, for example, when stopping the middle first, "blue BAR/black BAR/red 7/special figure top" is stopped in the middle middle row. Also, when the left reel 31 stops, "Replay" is stopped on the upper left stage, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Black BAR/Red 7/Watermelon/Special Top" is stopped on the lower right stage.
Also, when the small win B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the wrong answer pressing order "312" or "321", this point is the right first stop. In order to press the wrong answer, for example, the small winning combination 25 is stopped on the effective line in the same manner as described above.

Also, in a game in which the small combination B1-B6 conditional device is activated during 1BB game and not inside SRB, there is no correct pressing order. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "123" during the operation of the small winning combination B1 condition device during 1BB game and non-SRB, for example, (without winning the small winning combination 07 with 15 cards) ) to win one role. As the one-piece winning combination, for example, a small winning combination 25 or 28 with "PB=1" can be mentioned.
Similarly, when the 1BB game is not in progress, that is, when the role is not activated (during 1BB non-internal and 1BB internal), the game in which the small combination B1 condition device is activated does not have the correct pressing order. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "123" when the small winning combination B1 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, the small winning combination 07 ( Instead of winning a winning combination of 15 coins, a single winning combination (for example, a small winning combination of 25 or 28 with "PB=1") is awarded.

The above is the same when operating the small win B2 condition device to the small win B6 condition device.
When the small winning combination B2 conditional device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "132", the small winning combination 08 with 15 cards is awarded, and the correct pressing order is awarded. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "132", any single combination included in the winning combination is awarded without winning the minor combination 08.例文帳に追加
Furthermore, when the small winning combination B2 conditional device is activated during 1BB game while the SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, the small winning combination 08 to win any one-piece combination included in the winning combination without winning a prize.

When the small winning combination B3 conditional device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "213", the small winning combination 09 with 15 cards is awarded, and the correct pressing order is awarded. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "213", any single combination included in the winning combination is awarded without winning the minor combination 09. - 特許庁
Furthermore, when the small winning combination B3 conditional device is activated during 1BB game while the SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), any pressing order will cause a small winning combination of 09. to win any one-piece combination included in the winning combination without winning a prize.

When the small winning combination B4 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "231", the small winning combination 10 with 15 cards is awarded, and the correct pressing order is awarded. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "231", any single combination included in the winning combination is awarded without winning the minor combination 10.例文帳に追加
Furthermore, when the small winning combination B4 condition device is activated during 1BB game and while the SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, the small winning combination 10 to win any one-piece combination included in the winning combination without winning a prize.

When the small winning combination B5 conditional device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "312", the small winning combination 11 with 15 cards is awarded, and the correct pressing order is awarded. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "312", any single combination included in the winning combination is awarded without winning the minor combination 11.例文帳に追加
Furthermore, when the small combination B5 conditional device is activated during 1BB game and while the SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, the small combination 11 to win any one-piece combination included in the winning combination without winning a prize.

When the small combination B6 conditional device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "321", the small winning combination 12 with 15 cards is awarded, and the correct pressing order is awarded. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "321", any single combination included in the winning combination is awarded without winning the minor combination 12.例文帳に追加
Furthermore, when the small combination B6 conditional device is activated during a 1BB game while the SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, the small combination 12 to win any one-piece combination included in the winning combination without winning a prize.

The minor combination C condition device is a condition device that becomes operable when the winning number "22" is won during RB operation (game). When the small combination C condition device is activated, any one of the small combination 01 to 12 (15-piece combination) included in the winning combination is awarded. In this case, it is arbitrary which 15-card combination is won, but for example, the small combination to be won may be changed according to the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.
The small combination D condition device is a condition device that becomes operable when the winning number "23" is won during the RB operation. When the small combination D condition device is activated, one of the small combinations 13 to 24 included in the winning combination (three-card combination) is awarded. In this case, it is arbitrary which three-card combination is won, but for example, the small combination to be won may be changed according to the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.
The minor combination E condition device is a condition device that becomes operable when the winning number "24" is won during the RB operation. When the small winning combination E condition device is activated, any one of the small winning combinations 25 to 34 included in the winning combination (1 piece combination) is won. In this case, it is arbitrary which one-piece combination is awarded, but for example, a small combination to be awarded may be made different according to the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

Figures 126 to 130 show the winning probability determined by the lottery table when the lottery lottery means 61 performs the lottery for the lottery numbers, and show the number of winning numbers set for each RT (game state) and each set value. FIG. The winning probability is obtained by dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. For example, in FIG. 126, the winning number "1" is "4338" in common for all settings, so the winning probability is "4338/65536".
In FIGS. 126 to 130, for example, if the winning number "1" in FIG. 126 is won, the winning and replay condition device number "1", that is, the replay A condition device becomes operable, and the replay 01 becomes possible to win.

Note that the set value refers to the value displayed on the set value display LED 73 in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and differs from the information stored in the RWM 53 as set value information. Specifically, the set value information stored in the RWM 53 ranges from "0" to "5" in the twenty-third embodiment. For example, when the set value information stored in the RWM 53 is "0", the value displayed on the set value display LED 73 is "1", and when the set value information stored in the RWM 53 is "1" The value displayed on the set value display LED 73 is "2", and when the set value information stored in the RWM 53 is "2", the value displayed on the set value display LED 73 is "3". When the stored set value information is "3", the value displayed on the set value display LED 73 is "4", and when the set value information stored in the RWM 53 is "5", the set value display LED 73 The value displayed for is "6".

Also, the combination lottery means 61 executes the combination lottery using the combination lottery table. For example, in FIG. 126, the winning number 1 (replay A) indicates that the set number "4338" is common to settings 1 to 6. In such a case, the winning number 1 (replay A) ) is won, one set number "4338" is stored in the combination lottery table. On the other hand, when at least part of the set numbers are different from setting 1 to setting 6 like the winning number 3 (replay C), the set numbers corresponding to the setting values are stored in the combination lottery table.
Specifically, the combination lottery table contains, for example, the address "XXX0 (H
)” and “XXX1(H)”, and “940(D)” is stored in the two-byte addresses “XXX2(H)” and “XXX3(H)” corresponding to setting 2. "940(D)" is stored, and "940(D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses of addresses "XXX4(H)" and "XXX5(H)" corresponding to setting 3. Also, "950 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses of addresses "XXX6 (H)" and "XXX7 (H)" corresponding to setting 4, and addresses "XXX8 (H)" and "XXX8 (H)" corresponding to setting 5 are stored. "950 (D)" is stored at the 2-byte address of "XXX9 (H)". Furthermore, "960 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses of addresses "XXXA (H)" and "XXXB (H)" corresponding to setting 6. The above "XXX0(H)" to "XXXB(H)" indicate consecutive arbitrary addresses in the ROM 54. FIG.

For example, when the set value information is "1" (that is, set value 2), the address "XXX0(H)" is set as the reference address, and the value obtained by multiplying the set value information by two is set as the offset value, and the address "XXX2(H)" is set. And "940 (D)" stored in "XXX3 (H)" is obtained, and the random value and the input number "940 (D)" are compared to determine whether the winning number 3 (replay C) has been won. determine whether or not In the above example, since the number is 2 bytes, the value obtained by doubling the setting value information is used as the offset value. can be an offset value without In this way, by using a specific address as the reference address and setting the setting value information or a value obtained by doubling the setting value information as the offset value, it is possible to acquire the number corresponding to the setting value information. .

In the game in which the special combination (1BB) has not been won, in the game in which the winning number "25" has been won in this game, and in the game in which the 1BB condition device has become operable, when 1BB, which is the winning combination, has not won, The winning is carried over to the next game or later. Then, from the next game onwards (inside 1BB), the winning number "25" will not be drawn, and the winning numbers "1" to "21" will be drawn. When one of the winning numbers "1" to "21" is won in 1BB, the condition device corresponding to the winning number won in the game this time becomes operable, and the accessory condition device does not operate. On the other hand, when none of the winning numbers "1" to "21" is won in the 1BB, the 1BB condition device related to the 1BB that is carrying over the winning becomes operable, and the 1BB can win. .

The same applies to RB, which is another special role.
In the game when RB is not won in the 1BB game, in the game where any of the winning numbers "26" to "41" is won in the game this time, and in the game where the RBA-RBP conditional device can be operated, the winning role RBA- When the RBP is not won, the winning is carried over to the next game or later. Then, from the next game onwards (inside the SRB), the winning numbers "26" to "41" are not drawn, and the winning numbers "10" to "21" are drawn. When one of the winning numbers "10" to "21" is won in the SRB, the condition device corresponding to the winning number won in the game this time becomes operable, and the RBA to RBP condition devices do not operate. On the other hand, if none of the winning numbers "10" to "21" are won in the SRB, the RBA to RBP conditional devices related to the RBA to RBP that are carrying over the winning become operable, and the winning is won. RBA to RBP that are in the same position can be awarded.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an entry table for non-RT. In non-RT, 1BB is drawn (winning number "25") for the accessory, but RB is not drawn. RB is drawn by lottery when 1BB is activated (during 1BB game), which will be described later.
In non-RT, winning numbers "1" to "9" corresponding to winning replays are all subject to lottery. In addition, the winning numbers "10" to "21" corresponding to the winning of the minor winning combination are selected by lottery. Winning numbers "10" to "27" are subject to lottery in any RT (game state) except when RB is activated.
Winning numbers "22" to "24" are subject to lottery only when RB is activated during 1BB game, which will be described later, and are not subject to lottery in other RT (game state).

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an entry table in RT1. RT1 differs from non-RT in that the winning number "9" (replay G) is not drawn. Otherwise, it is the same as non-RT.
In addition, in both non-RT and RT1, during 1BB non-inside, 1BB (winning number "25") is drawn by lottery according to the numbers shown in FIGS. In non-RT and RT1 (inside 1BB), 1BB (winning number "25") is not drawn. That is, the set number "19930" shown in FIGS. 126 and 127 becomes "0" after winning 1BB.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a table of numbers in RB (SRB) non-internal during 1BB operation. The non-inside RB during 1BB operation corresponds to the general game of the 1BB game.
In this game state, the winning number "25" (1BB) is not drawn, but all RBs (winning numbers "26" to "41") are drawn. In this embodiment, all RBs are set to the same number "1807" in all setting values.
Also, replays are not drawn during non-inside RB during 1BB operation. Therefore, the winning numbers "1" to "9" are set to "0".
As for the small winning combination, the winning numbers "10" to "21" are selected by lottery as in the above-described non-RT and RT1. Also, winning numbers "22" to "24" corresponding to small wins in the RB game are not drawn.

FIG. 129 is a table of numbers in the RB (SRB) interior during 1BB operation. The time inside the RB during the 1BB operation corresponds to the normal game time of the 1BB game, similarly to the time during the non-inside the RB during the 1BB operation.
While 1BB is in operation, RB is not drawn in addition to 1BB, so all winning numbers "25" to "41" are "0".
In addition, while RB is in operation during 1BB operation, unlike during RB non-inside operation during 1BB operation, winning number "1" (replay A) is selected by lottery.
FIG. 130 shows the table of numbers during 1BB operation and RB operation. While 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation, only winning numbers "22" to "24" are drawn.

A description will be given of the payout rate in each game state described above.
There are various definitions of the payout rate, but in the twenty-third embodiment, the payout rate is defined as "the number of out balls/the number of in balls".
Here, the "in number" refers to the number of bets, which is "3" in any gaming state in the twenty-third embodiment.
Also, the "out number" means the number of coins to be paid out, and in terms of design, indicates the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out. For example, in a game in which the instruction function is activated (a game in which the correct pressing order is notified), when the winning numbers "10" to "21" are won (when the pressing order bell is won), a high-level bell (in the 23rd embodiment, 15 bells) shall be awarded.
Specifically, when the number of in balls is "3" and the number of out balls is "1", the payout rate is approximately "0.33".
Also, when the number of in balls is "3" and the number of out balls is "3", the payout rate is "1".
Furthermore, when the number of in balls is "3" and the number of out balls is "9", the payout rate is "3".

In addition, when the winning numbers "10" to "15" are won when the role (1BB) is not activated, the winning number "16" to "21" when the role is not activated will always win. At times, one hand shall always win.
Furthermore, when RB is not inside and not AT during 1BB game (game in which the instruction function does not operate), when winning numbers "10" to "15" are won, there is a probability of "1/6" high bell ( 15 bells) will win the prize, and an inexpensive bell (3 bells) will win with a probability of "5/6". The reason why "1/6" is used is that the probability of winning when the stop switch 42 is operated at random is determined because there are 6 choices in the pressing order. Also, during 1BB game, when RB is not inside and AT is not, when the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, one bell is always won.

In addition, during 1BB game inside RB and non-AT (game in which the instruction function does not operate), when the winning number "10" to "15" is won, there is a probability of "1/6" high bell (15 pieces Bell) wins a prize, and an inexpensive bell (three bells) wins with a probability of "5/6". In addition, during 1BB game inside RB and non-AT, when the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, a high bell (15 bells) will win with a probability of "1/6", and "5 It is assumed that an inexpensive bell (one bell) wins with a probability of /6.

When the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the first method is to set the number of out symbols in the current game to "0" and the number of in symbols in the next game to "0". Secondly, there is a method of setting the number of outs in the current game to "3" and the number of ins in the next game to "3". In the following example, the latter is used for calculation.
Furthermore, although the ball payout rate differs depending on settings 1 to 6, the ball payout rate will be calculated using setting 1 as an example below.

In non-RT, the total number of winning numbers "1" to "9" corresponding to the winning of replay is "8982".
Also, the total number of winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of the small win group A is "16800".
Furthermore, the total number of winning numbers "16" to "21" corresponding to the winning of the small win group B is "19824".
In the non-RT gaming state, the games with the winning numbers "10" to "15" always win the 3-card role, and the games with the winning numbers "16" to "21" always win the 1-card role.
Therefore, the expected payout number per game is
3 x (8982/65536) + 3 x (16800/65536) + 1 x (19824/65536)
≒ 1.483 (sheets)
becomes.
Also, the ball output rate is
1.483/3≈0.494
becomes.

Next, during the 1BB operation and during the RB non-internal state, the payout rate is calculated separately for the AT time and the non-AT time.
First, at the time of AT, 15 coins are paid out in games where the winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of the small win group A are won, and in games where the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, 1 card will be paid out.
Therefore, the expected payout number per game is
15 x (16800/65536) + 1 x (19824/65536)
≒ 4.148 (sheets)
becomes.
Also, the ball output rate is
4.148/3≈1.383
becomes.

In addition, while 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside, at the time of non-AT, in the game where the winning number "10" to "15" corresponding to winning the small win group A is won, 15 with a probability of "1/6". 3 cards are paid out with a probability of "5/6". Also, in a game in which winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, one coin is paid out.
Therefore, the expected payout number per game is
15*(16800/65536)*(1/6)+3*(16800/65536)*(5/6)+1*(19824/65536)
≒ 1.584 (sheets)
becomes.
Also, the ball output rate is
1.584/3=0.528
becomes.

Next, during the 1BB operation and inside the RB, the payout rate is calculated separately for the AT time and the non-AT time.
First, at the time of AT, 15 coins are paid out in games where winning numbers ``10'' to ``15'' correspond to winning in group A, and 15 cards are paid out. 15 cards will be paid out.
Therefore, the expected payout number per game is
15 x (16800/65536) + 15 x (19824/65536)
≒ 8.383 (sheets)
becomes.
Also, the ball output rate is
8.383/3≈2.794
becomes.

In addition, during 1BB operation and inside RB, when non-AT, in the game winning the winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to winning the small win group A, 15 cards with a probability of "1/6" , and 3 cards are paid out with a probability of "5/6". Also, in the game in which the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, 15 coins are paid out with a probability of "1/6", and 1 card is paid out with a probability of "5/6".
Therefore, the expected payout number per game is
15 x (16800/65536) x (1/6) + 3 x (16800/65536) x (5/6) + 15 x (19824/65536) x (1/6) + 1 x (19824/65536) x (5/ 6)
≒2.290 (sheets)
becomes.
Also, the ball output rate is
2.290/3≈0.763
becomes.

Furthermore, when 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation, the ball output rate is the same between non-AT and AT.
As shown in FIG. 130, when 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation, the winning number "22" has a set number of "3310" and the payout number is 15, and the winning number "23" has a set number of "16230" and the payout number. is 3, the winning number '24' has a set number of '19825', and the payout number is 1.
Therefore, the expected payout number per game is
15 x (3310/65536) + 3 x (16230/65536) + 1 x (19825/65536)
≒ 1.803 (sheets)
becomes.
Also, the ball output rate is
1.803/3≈0.601
becomes.

In the above, when the payout rate exceeds "1", the game state is increased medals, and when the payout rate is less than "1", the game state is decreased medals.
Therefore, the ball output rate exceeds "1" (the number of medals increases) at the time of AT during 1BB operation and not inside RB, and at the time of AT during 1BB operation and inside RB.
On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside and no AT, when 1BB is activated and RB is not AT and when 1BB is activated and RB is activated rate falls below "1" (medals decrease).
Therefore, the size relationship of the ball output rate is, in order from the smallest one,
(1) When 1BB is not activated (ball output rate "0.494")
(2) Non-AT during 1BB operation and RB non-inside (ball output rate "0.528")
(3) During 1BB operation and RB operation (ball output rate "0.601")
(4) Non-AT during 1BB operation and inside RB (ball output rate "0.763")
(5) At AT when 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside (ball output rate "1.383")
(6) At the time of AT during 1BB operation and inside RB (ball output rate "2.794")
becomes.

From the above,
(1) The payout rate exceeds "1" when RB is not activated during AT, but the payout rate does not exceed "1" during non-AT.
(2) Even during the AT, if the RB is won and the RB is activated, the ball output rate falls below "1".
(3) When 1BB is activated during non-AT, the ball output rate is higher than when 1BB is not activated during non-AT.
Therefore, for example, even if 1BB is won without having the right to execute AT and the game shifts to 1BB game, the ball output rate is less than "1" during both the general game and the RB game of 1BB game, so medals cannot be increased.
In addition, during non-AT, when 1BB is activated, the ball output rate is higher than when 1BB is not activated. However, since the AT lottery is performed only during 1BB (when 1BB is not activated), AT lottery cannot be received when 1BB is activated. Therefore, when 1BB is activated during non-AT, it is disadvantageous to the player.
Also, during AT (during operation of 1BB), when inside the RB, a 15-card hand can be won when the small hand B1-B6 condition device is activated. Therefore, during AT (during 1BB operation), the player is more advantageous while inside the RB than while not inside the RB.
Although the above-described ball payout rate is calculated with the setting 1, the other set values (settings 2 to 6) also have the same magnitude relation of the ball payout rate.

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing RT transitions in the twenty-third embodiment.
Non-RT and RT1 correspond to when 1BB is not activated. Non-RT and RT1 continue until the 1BB symbol combination is stopped. In the 23rd embodiment, the RT shift timing is set at the time when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, that is, at the time of full stop (when all the reels 31 are stopped).
In non-RT and RT1, 1BB (the above-mentioned winning number "25") is drawn, but RT does not move just by winning 1BB and becoming inside 1BB, and non-RT or RT1 is maintained respectively. . Then, in non-RT or RT1, when the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed, it shifts to 1BB operation and RB non-inside (general game of 1BB game).

When 1BB is activated and RT is not inside, RBA (winning number "26") to RBP (winning number "41") are drawn by lottery, as shown in FIG. 123 described above. When one of RBA to RBP is won and none of the winning RBA to RBP wins, the game shifts to the inside of RB during 1BB operation. During 1BB operation and inside RB, it continues until the symbol combination of RB carrying over winning is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination of RB is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to 1BB operation and RB operation (RB game).
In addition, when RB is won during 1BB operation and while RB is not inside, and the symbol combination of RB is stopped and displayed in the game, when 1BB is operating and RB is operating without moving to inside RB while 1BB is operating Transition.

As shown in FIG. 122, the operation of the 1BB condition device (1BB game) ends when more than 170 medals are obtained. Also, if the RB condition device is activated during the operation of the 1BB condition device (shift to the RB game), on the condition that the medal acquisition does not exceed 170, it will continue until 12 games or 8 wins. do. When the RB condition device is activated, if 12 games or 8 wins are won, and more than 170 medals are not obtained by the operation of the 1BB condition device, the 1BB condition device is reactivated. When activated and when the RB condition device is not activated. In addition, when the 1BB condition device is activated and the RB condition device is not activated, or when the 1BB condition device is activated and the RB condition device is activated, when more than 170 medals are obtained by the operation of the 1BB condition device, Terminate the operation of the 1BB condition device (end the 1BB game) (even if 12 games or 8 wins have not been reached after the operation of the RB condition device).

After completing the operation of the 1BB condition device, the process proceeds to RT1. RT1 continues until 1400 games are completed or until the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. After shifting to RT1, the number of times of each game is counted and stored in the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) of address "F00A(H)" which will be described later. When the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed in RT1, as described above, it shifts to 1BB operation and RB non-inside. On the other hand, when 1400 games have been completed in RT1, the game shifts to non-RT. Once it shifts to non-RT, 1BB wins again, and when the 1BB operation ends, it shifts to RT1.
In the 23rd embodiment, it is set that the AT is more likely to be won in the non-RT than in the RT1. Therefore, when "1400" games are completed in RT1, it means that the so-called ceiling is reached, and AT is likely to be won in non-RT.

Also, the advantageous section may end during RT1, and at the end of the advantageous section, the section type number, advantageous section clear counter, difference counter (MY counter), and AT-related data are cleared. On the other hand, the number of games played for RT1 ("_CT_RT_GAME" described above) is not cleared. For example, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the 1200th game of RT1, the next game will be the 1201st game of RT1 and the non-advantageous section.
Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, even if the state shifts from RT1 to non-RT based on the completion of 1400 games, the main game state, which will be described later, does not shift. For example, in the 1400th game of RT1, when staying in main game state 1, the next game will be non-RT and main game state 1.

However, when the conditions for shifting to the main game state are satisfied in the 1400th game of RT1, the main game state shifts as a matter of course.
For example, first, in the main game state 1, when the number of RT1 and RT games is the 1400th game, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section ends in the current game, and the next game , non-RT and main game state 0.
Secondly, in the main game state 1, when AT is won in the 1400th game of RT1 and RT game count, the next game becomes non-RT and main game state 2 (AT sign).

Here, the transition determination of the advantageous section in the twenty-third embodiment is executed in the non-RT or RT1 non-advantageous section. In particular, in determining the transition of the advantageous section in the 23rd embodiment, when the winning numbers "1" to "4" and "6" to "21" are won, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section. ing. Therefore, in the non-RT or RT1 non-advantageous section, if a few games are played, most of them shift to the advantageous section. Once the advantageous section is won, the transition to the advantageous section is not decided unless the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied and the player transitions to the non-advantageous section. Note that the determination of the transition to the advantageous section may be made by lottery based on the winning number.

Also, the AT lottery of the twenty-third embodiment is executed in the non-RT or RT1 advantageous section. Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, the execution condition of the AT lottery is that the winning of 1BB is carried over. In other words, when 1BB is not won and when 1BB is in operation, AT lottery is not executed. The AT lottery is executed when the winning numbers "3" to "9" corresponding to winning in the rare replay are won.
In FIG. 127 (RT1), the winning probability of AT is, for example,
Replay F condition When device is activated < Replay C condition When device is activated < Replay E condition When device is activated < Replay D (D1 to D3) condition When device is activated < Replay G condition When device is activated.

Specifically, for example, when the replay F condition device is activated: AT winning probability 10 to 30%
When the replay C condition device is activated: AT winning probability 15-30%
When the replay E condition device is activated: AT winning probability 20-35%
When replay D1 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 30-50%
When replay D2 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 40-50%
When replay D3 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 35-80%
When the replay G condition device is activated: AT winning probability 100%
is set as The reason why each winning probability has a range is that, for example, the winning probability varies depending on the production stage (low probability, normal probability, high probability, etc.) when the conditional device is activated.

In addition, when 1400 games are consumed in non-AT and RT1, reaching the so-called ceiling and shifting to non-RT, AT is drawn with the following winning probability, for example.
When the replay F condition device is activated: AT winning probability 90%
When the replay C condition device is activated: AT winning probability 90%
When the replay E condition device is activated: AT winning probability 90%
When replay D1 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 75%
When replay D2 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 80%
When the replay D3 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 85%
When the replay G condition device is activated: AT winning probability 100%
Therefore, non-RT is set to be more likely to win AT than RT1.

After winning the AT in non-RT or RT1 and satisfying the AT start condition (for example, after the AT standby counter becomes "0"), the 1BB symbol combination is displayed stopped and 1BB is in operation ( When shifting to 1BB game), AT can be started. The AT then continues until the 1BB operation ends.
In non-RT or RT1, even if the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed without having the right to execute AT (without winning AT), even if it shifts during 1BB operation, when the pushing order bell is won (winning number " 10” to “21” wins), the advantageous pushing order (the pushing order for winning the 15-card combination) is not displayed (the instruction function does not operate).
On the other hand, in non-RT or RT1, if you have the right to execute AT (winning AT), stop displaying the 1BB symbol combination after satisfying the AT start condition, and shift to 1BB operation , and AT are executed, and when a winning number having a correct pressing order is won, the correct pressing order for winning a prize of 15 cards (high bell) is displayed (an instruction function is activated).
Even if you have the right to execute AT, in situations where AT start conditions are not met (for example, when the AT precursor counter is greater than "0" or when the AT standby counter is greater than "0") ), the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and even if the 1BB is in operation, AT is not executed. In other words, the advantageous push order is not displayed when the push order bell is won (the instruction function does not operate).

Here, when AT is in progress and 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside, winning numbers ``10'' to ``15'' (small win A1 to small win A6) are won, the correct pressing order is displayed. (activation of indication function).
On the other hand, during AT, when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside, even if winning numbers "16" to "21" (small wins B1 to B6) are won, the indication function does not operate. As described above, when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside, when the small combination B1 to B6 condition device is activated, there is no correct pressing order, and even if the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order, one sheet This is because the role wins (the 15-card role does not win).
On the other hand, during AT and inside RB during 1BB operation, winning numbers ``10'' to ``15'' (small win A1 to small win A6) are won, the correct pressing order is displayed. (indication function is activated).
Similarly, when AT is in progress and inside RB during 1BB operation, the winning numbers "16" to "21" (small hands B1 to B6) are displayed. function works).

Also, the winning probability values of RB during 1BB operation are "28912" in total, and the winning probability is about 44%. Therefore, when 1BB is in operation, RB is elected early. However, during the AT, the 23rd embodiment is based on the premise that the game is completed without winning the winning RB. When inside the RB during 1BB operation, as shown in FIG. 129, the sum of winning numbers "1" and "10" to "21" is set to 1 and is "50424". Therefore, there is a probability of about 23% that the game will not be won, and the game that is not won has the possibility of winning RB. In the non-winning game with the possibility of winning RB, an effect is output to the player, suggesting that the game has the possibility of winning RB. When this effect is output, the player operates the stop switch 42 so as not to win the RB. Incidentally, in a game having the possibility of winning an RB, the indicator on the main control board 50 side (for example, the winning number display LED 78) does not notify the eye-pushing position or the like (indicating function does not operate).
If RB wins during 1BB operation, it shifts to RB game. As described above, the RB game has a lower ball output rate than the general game of the 1BB game. In the RB game, if the end condition of the 1BB game (acquisition of more than 170 medals) is not satisfied at that time, the general game of the 1BB game is resumed. return.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing the transition of the main game state in the 23rd embodiment.
The main game state of the twenty-third embodiment includes main game state 0 to main game state 5. FIG.
Main game state 0 is a non-advantageous section, and main game states 1 to 5 are advantageous sections.
Further, the main game states 2 and 3 are non-AT game states although the AT is won.
Further, the main game state 4 is a game state during AT. Furthermore, the main game states 0, 1 and 5 are non-AT game states in which AT is not won.

The main game state 0 is a non-advantageous section and non-AT state. In the main game state 0, an advantageous zone lottery and an AT lottery are executed. In the main game state 0, when the advantageous section is won and the AT is not won, the main game state 1 is entered. On the other hand, in the main game state 0, when the advantageous section is won and the AT is won, the main game state 2 is entered.

In the main game state 1, the advantageous zone lottery is not executed, but the AT lottery is executed. Then, when the AT is won, the game shifts to the main game state 2.例文帳に追加In addition, when the AT is won, the number of AT sets is also randomly selected, and the number of AT sets determined by the lottery is stored in the AT set number counter. The "AT set number" is a counter that determines how many times the main game state 4 (AT and 1BB operation) is to be executed.
On the other hand, in the main game state 1, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied without winning AT (for example, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, or when the falling lottery in the advantageous section is won) ), it shifts to the main game state 0.

It should be noted that even if the conditions for transition to the main game state 0 are satisfied in the main game state 1, the RT does not shift. For example, in RT1 and main game state 1, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the next game will be RT1 and main game state 0 unless 1400 games have been reached in RT1.
The main game state 2 is a game state of an AT sign. When the AT wins, the number of AT precursor games is determined by lottery or the like, and is set in the AT precursor counter. Then, the main game state 2 is executed until the AT precursor counter becomes "0". When the AT precursor counter becomes "0", the main game state 3 is entered.

The main game state 3 is a game state during AT preparation. The main game state 3 continues until the AT standby counter becomes "0" and the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Here, in the twenty-third embodiment, when the AT has a plurality of sets, when the main game state 4 (1BB operation and AT) to be described later is finished and the main game state 3 is returned to, the 1BB symbol combination is quickly performed. In order to prevent the number of paid balls from increasing too much, instead of stopping the display and moving to the main game state 4, the number of paid balls is adjusted (reduced) to some extent before the transition to the main game state 4. A fixed number of games is ensured in the main game state 3. For example, when moving from the main game state 4 to the main game state 3, set one of "1" to "8" in the AT standby counter (determined by lottery), and the game winning 1BB, or a small winning combination or "1" is subtracted for games that have not been won for replay. Then, when the AT standby counter becomes "0" and the 1BB is in the middle, a notice is given to stop and display the symbol combination of the 1BB.
The reason why the ball output adjustment (reduction) is performed in the main game state 3 is that if a plurality of sets of AT are continuously executed, it is likely to become unsuitable in the test shooting test. In the trial shooting test, for example, it is necessary to make the payout rate less than "220"% for an arbitrary number of "400" games. Therefore, when performing multiple sets of AT, after one set of AT is completed, after passing through a game interval (period of ball output adjustment (reduction)) in which AT is not performed, the next set of AT is performed. I am trying to run it.

Further, in the main game state 3, addition lottery for the AT set number counter is executed. For example, when a rare combination (winning numbers "2" to "9") is won in the main game state 3, an addition lottery for the number of AT sets is executed. Then, when the lottery for addition of the number of AT sets is won, the number of AT sets won is added to the AT set number counter.
In the main game state 3, when the AT standby counter becomes "0", the winning and replay conditions after that in the game where the device number is "0", "Aim for the blue BAR!" ” is displayed as an image. In addition, "Aim for" Blue BAR "! is displayed on the condition that the winning of 1BB has been carried over or the winning of 1BB has been won. This urges the player to stop and display the 1BB symbol combination.

In addition, "Aim for" Blue BAR "! ” is displayed as an image, if the player is unable to stop and display the 1BB symbol combination, then in the game with the subsequent winning and replay condition device number “0”, again, “Aim for the “blue BAR”. ! ” is displayed as an image. Also, first, "Aim for the 'Blue BAR'! ” is displayed, the lottery for addition of the number of AT sets may not be executed. ' is displayed, until the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed, the addition lottery for the number of AT sets is executed. However, the winning probability of the lottery to add the number of AT sets is set so that there is no merit to the player even if the symbol combination of 1BB is intentionally extended (the winning probability of the lottery to add the number of AT sets is set to the AT standby set lower than before the counter reached "0").

In the main game state 3, when the AT standby counter becomes "0" and the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the main game state 4 is entered. The main game state 4 corresponds to 1BB operation (1BB game) and AT. Therefore, the main game state 4 is executed until the number of won medals exceeds 170 (see FIG. 122). When the number of medals acquired exceeds 170 in the main game state 4, it is determined that the conditions for ending the main game state 4 are satisfied, and based on the values of the AT set number counter and the ending counter at that time, the main game state is determined. 3 (AT preparation), main game state 5 (AT withdrawal), main game state 0 (non-advantageous section).
The AT set number counter is decremented by "1" each time the main game state 4 ends. When the AT set number counter is "0", it is determined that it does not have the right to execute AT, and when it is "1" or more, it is determined that it has the right to execute AT.

The ending counter is set based on the values of the difference counter (also referred to as "MY counter") and the advantageous section clear counter, which have been described in other embodiments. The advantageous section must end when the difference counter reaches "2400 (D)" or when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches "1500". Therefore, in this embodiment, when the difference counter value exceeds "1951 (D)" or when the advantageous section clear counter value becomes less than "200 (D)", the ending counter is set to "2". do.
At the end of the main game state 4, if the ending counter is equal to or greater than "1", "1" is subtracted. When the ending counter changes from "1" to "0", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section (and AT) are satisfied, and the main game state 0 is entered. With this setting, the advantageous section can be ended before the difference counter value reaches "2400 (D)" and before the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0".

On the other hand, at the end of the main game state 4, the main game state 3 is entered unless the AT set number counter is "1" or more and the ending counter has changed from "1" to "0". When shifting to the main game state 3, one AT standby counter value is determined by lottery from "0" to "8" and set.
Further, when the AT set number counter is "0" at the end of the main game state 4, the main game state 5 (AT withdrawal) is entered. The main game state 5 is non-AT, but when the AT is won in the main game state 5, the data of the winning number and the number of sets in the previous AT are taken over, and the image is displayed on the image display device 23. - 特許庁

When the main game state 5 is entered, the AT withdrawal counter is set to a predetermined value, for example, "50 (
D)” is set, and “1” is subtracted every game. The termination condition of the main game state 5 is that the AT withdrawal counter has become "0" or that the AT has been won.
When the AT withdrawal counter becomes "0", the advantageous section clear counter value is determined, and when the advantageous section clear counter value is less than "600 (D)", the advantageous section is terminated and the main game state is entered. 0. When the advantageous interval clear counter value is less than "600 (D)", when shifting to AT after that, since the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval is small, there is a possibility that AT cannot be continued. , ends the advantageous section. As described above, if the main game state 0 is entered, the advantageous section is won again after playing several games, and at least the main game state 1 is entered.

On the other hand, when the AT withdrawal counter becomes "0" in the main game state 5, when the advantageous section clear counter value is "600 (D)" or more, the main game is played without ending the advantageous section. Go to state 1. Then, the AT lottery is continued.
Further, when the AT is won before the AT pullback counter becomes "0" in the main game state 5, the main game state 3 is entered. Incidentally, when the AT is won in the main game state 5, it may shift to the main game state 2 (AT precursor), but in this embodiment, it shifts to the main game state 3 (AT preparation). When shifting to the main game state 3, the lottery for the AT standby counter value is executed in the same manner as described above, and the lottery-determined value is stored in the AT standby counter.

In the main game state 4 or 5, when the transition to the main game state 0 occurs before the advantageous interval clear counter reaches "0", and when the advantageous interval clear counter reaches "0" in the main game state 1, an advantageous When shifting to the main game state 0 based on winning the section drop lottery, before the advantageous section clear counter management of FIG. 51 is executed, the advantageous section clear counter (regardless of the value up to that point) A process of storing "1" is executed (advantageous section end preparation shown in FIG. 150 to be described later). As a result, when the advantageous section clear counter management of FIG. 51 is subsequently executed, the advantageous section clear counter value is "1" before subtraction of "1" and "0" after subtraction of "1". Therefore, it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, and the process advances from step S424 to step S435 to execute the RWM clearing process based on the end of the advantageous section.

In the main game state 0 or 1, even if the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the main game state 4 (AT) is not entered. Therefore, in this case, the main game state is 0 or 1, 1BB operation, and non-AT.

133 to 138 are diagrams showing main data according to the twenty-third embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the twenty-third embodiment. Note that the data shown in FIGS. 133 to 138 are part of the data, and various data are stored in the RWM 53 in addition to the data shown. Also, in the following description (especially the RWM name), "#" indicates all of "1" (first reel 31) to "3" (third reel 31), and "1" to "3". and any one of
Numerical values shown in parentheses in the "address" column indicate the number of bytes in the storage area.

In FIG. 133, the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS) at address "F009 (H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating the current RT, and "0" is stored when it is non-RT, which is RT1. "1" is stored when As shown in FIG. 131, in the 23rd embodiment, there is a case where RT1 shifts to non-RT, but when the game reaches "1400" games in RT1, for example, at the end of the game, "0" is stored as the RT state number. be done.
Further, when the conditions for ending the 1BB operation are satisfied and the game moves to RT1, "1" is stored as the RT state number at the end of the game in which the conditions for ending the 1BB operation are satisfied.

The number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) at the address "F00A(H)" is a storage area of a counter for counting the number of RT1 games. When the 1BB operation ends and the game moves to RT1, "1400 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted each time one game is completed. When the number of RT games becomes "0", it is determined that the condition for shifting to non-RT is satisfied.
The role condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) at the address "F00D(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of role currently in operation. The value stored here corresponds to the accessory condition device number shown in FIG. For example, "0" is stored when the role is not activated, "1" is stored when 1BB is activated, and "2" is stored when RBA is activated.

Acquisable number of cards during 1BB operation (_CT_BIG_PAT) at address "F00E(H)" is a storage area for storing the remaining obtainable number of cards during 1BB operation (1BB game). When 1BB is activated, "170 (D)" is stored in this storage area. During 1BB operation (during 1BB game), the value of this storage area is subtracted each time a medal is paid out. When the value of this storage area becomes "0" during 1BB operation, it is determined that the 1BB operation end condition is satisfied.

The number of games played when RB is activated (_CT_BONUS_PLAY) at address "F00F(H)" is a storage area for storing a counter for counting the number of games when RB is activated. When RB is activated, "12 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted for each "1" game when RB is activated. Then, when the number of games played during the RB operation becomes "0", the end condition of the RB operation is satisfied.
The number of wins when RB is activated (_CT_BONUS_WIN) at address "F010(H)" is a storage area for storing a counter for counting the number of wins when RB is activated. When the RB is activated, "8(D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted each time the winning combination is won when the RB is activated. Then, when the number of wins during the RB operation becomes "0", the end condition of the RB operation is satisfied.

The input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the address "F012(H)" is a storage area for storing ON/OFF of the signals of the start switch 41 and the stop switch 42. FIG. In this interrupt process, the signals of the start switch 41 and the (left, middle, right) stop switch 42 are determined, and "1" is stored when they are on, and "0" when they are off.
The input port level data A (previous) (_PT_IN_A_BK) at the address "F015(H)" is a storage area for storing the value of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) in the previous interrupt processing.

The input port rise data A of the address "F017(H)" is a storage area for storing the presence or absence of rise of the signals of the start switch 41 and the stop switch 42. FIG. When the level data of the previous interrupt process is "0" and the level data of the current interrupt process is "1", "1" is stored as the rise data. On the other hand, when the level data of the previous interrupt process is "1" and the level data of the current interrupt process is "1", the rise data is "0". Similarly, when the level data at the time of the previous interrupt process is "0" and the level data at the time of the current interrupt process is "0", the rising data is "0". Furthermore, when the level data of the previous interrupt process is "1" and the level data of the current interrupt process is "0", the rising data is "0" (in this case, the falling data is "0"). 1”).

In FIG. 134, the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) at address "F019(H)" is a storage area for storing which phase of the motor 32 associated with the first reel is to be excited. In the first reel motor signal data, "1" corresponds to ON (excitation), and "0" corresponds to OFF (no excitation). Based on the data stored in this storage area, the motor 32 is excited in port output processing (step S462 in FIG. 151 to be described later) during interrupt processing.
In this embodiment, the first reel corresponds to the left reel 31 , the second reel corresponds to the middle reel 31 , and the third reel corresponds to the right reel 31 .

In the first reel motor signal data, the D0 bit corresponds to φ1, the D1 bit to φ2, the D2 bit to φ3, and the D3 bit to φ4. The first reel motor signal data stores one pulse data selected from a reel drive pulse table shown in FIG. 158, which will be described later. For example, as shown in FIG. 158, in this interrupt process, when excitation is applied to turn on φ0 and φ3, pulse data "00001001 (B)" at address "1100 (H)" is changed to address "F019 ( H)”.

The second reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR2) at the address "F01A(H)" is a storage area for storing which phase of the motor 32 associated with the second reel (middle reel 31) is to be excited. Its contents are the same as the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) of the address "F019(H)".
Similarly, the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) at address "F01B(H)" is a storage area for storing which phase of the motor 32 associated with the third reel (right reel 31) is to be excited. Its contents are the same as the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) of the address "F019(H)".

The first reel designated symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TARPIC_WAIT) at the address "F039 (H)" is a timer value for measuring the waiting time for starting the deceleration of the first reel 31 when executing the waiting effect. is a storage area for A predetermined value is stored in this storage area at the start of execution of the standby effect, and is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. Then, the stop of the first reel 31 is permitted under the condition that the value of this storage area becomes "0". In other words, when the value of this storage area is not "0", the rotation of the first reel 31 is maintained without being stopped.

Specifically, the reel effect execution timer table corresponding to the stop symbol is selected from the reel effect execution timer tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 145 which will be described later. For example, in FIG. 144, which will be described later, when the stop symbol is determined to be "the middle stage 'black BAR'matching" corresponding to the standby effect number 1 o'clock, the reel effect execution timer table corresponding to the standby effect number 1 is shown in FIG. In the middle, reel effect execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) is selected. Then, in the reel effect execution timer table 1, the specified symbol position search waiting time of the first (left) reel 31 is "14112 (D)", so this value is stored in the address "F039 (H)". .
When a predetermined value is stored in the first reel designated symbol position search waiting time of address "F039 (H)", "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and when the value becomes "0", waiting time is considered to have passed. Instead of subtracting "1" for each interrupt process, the specification may be such that "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process a plurality of times.

Here, in the twenty-third embodiment, one rotation (360° rotation) of the reel 31 at the constant speed corresponds to the step “336” of the motor 32 . Since the motor 32 is driven one step every two interrupts, one rotation (360 degree rotation) of the reel 31 at constant speed corresponds to "672" interrupts.
Therefore, when reel effect execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) (standby effect 1) is selected in FIG.
1 stops after approximately one revolution (after the "670" interrupt). Further, after the middle reel 31 stops, the right reel 31 stops after approximately two rotations (after the "1340" interruption). Similarly, when another reel effect execution timer table is selected, after the first reel 31 stops, the second reel 31 stops after one or more rotations. Further, after the second reel 31 stops, the third reel 31 stops after approximately two or more rotations.
Also, the time from the stop of the second reel 31 to the stop of the third reel 31 is longer than the time from the stop of the first reel 31 to the stop of the second reel 31. set long. This gives the player a sense of anticipation as to which pattern the third reel 31 will stop, and gives the player time to enjoy watching the patterns of the first and second reels 31 stopped (a sense of accomplishment). becomes possible.

The above address "F039(H)" is a storage area for the first (left) reel designated symbol position search standby time, the second (middle) reel designated symbol position search standby time, and the third (right) reel designated symbol position search standby time. Addresses 'F03B(H)' and 'F03D(H)' are respectively provided as storage areas for designated symbol position search waiting times.
For example, when reel effect execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) is selected in FIG. =14782(D)” is stored. Similarly, at the address "F03D(H)", "14112+2010=16122(D)" is stored as the third (right) reel specified symbol position search standby time.

The waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) of the address "F041 (H)" carries over the winning information of 1BB, and when the symbol combination of 1BB can be stopped and displayed at the time of the second stop, in other words, the symbol combination of 1BB is ten. In the storage area of the standby time until accepting the operation of the third stop when the symbols constituting the symbol combination of 1BB are stopped on the effective line at the time of the second stop and the third stop has not yet been performed. be.
Here, taking 1BB as an example, when one reel 31 is rotating and the remaining two reels 31 are stopped, the symbols constituting the symbol combination of 1BB are (on the active line 2) is stopped and displayed, and when the symbols constituting the 1BB symbol combination are stopped and displayed when the one reel is stopped, the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed (1BB wins). For example, when the one reel 31 is the right reel 31, it corresponds to the case of "blue BAR (upper left)"-"blue BAR (middle middle)"-"rotating" on the active line.

This standby time is not set in the state where the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination is permitted (when the main game state is 3 and the AT standby counter is "0"), but in other cases, the 1BB symbol combination. Standby time is set at the timing when the temperature rises (at the time of the second stop). The initial value is "896 (D)". Then, the standby time is decremented for each interrupt processing, and when it becomes "0", the third stop operation is accepted.
Note that the interrupt cycle in the twenty-third embodiment is "1.117" ms.
In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, 1BB is set so as not to tense unless it is a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB can be stopped and displayed. However, not limited to this, even in a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB cannot be stopped and displayed, 1BB may be tenpai. For example, 1BB can be tenpai in a game when winning a minor combination. In a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB cannot be stopped and displayed, it is possible not to set the standby time even if 1BB is tense.

"896 (D)" is set as the standby time, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt.
Approximately 1000 ms) of standby processing (processing that does not stop the third reel 31 even if the third stop switch 42 is operated. In other words, processing that does not accept the stop operation of the third stop switch 42) is executed.
As described above, one rotation (360 degree rotation) of the reel 31 corresponds to "336" steps of the motor 32 in the twenty-third embodiment. In the twenty-third embodiment, one step of the motor 32 corresponds to two interrupts (2.234 ms), and the time for the motor 32 to drive for "336" steps, in other words, the time for one rotation of the reel 31 is It is "2.234*336=750.624ms".
Therefore, the waiting time from the timing when the 1BB symbol combination is tense (approximately 1000 ms) > the time for one rotation of the reel 31 (approximately 751 ms)
It has become.
By setting in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from winning 1BB due to an unexpected stop operation while minimizing the waiting time.

On the other hand, it is preferable to set the standby time to, for example, the time required for the reel 31 to rotate four times (approximately 3 seconds) or less. For example, when the third reel 31 does not stop because the waiting time has not elapsed when the third stop switch 42 is operated, the player should pay attention again to stop the third stop switch 42. This is because it is desirable that the waiting time has passed by the time the operation is attempted.

135 to 137, FIG. 135 shows the data of the first reel 31, FIG. 136 shows the data of the second reel 31, and FIG.
In FIG. 135, the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS) at address “F04D(H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating the driving state of the motor 32 relating to the first reel 31 . In this embodiment, the excitation update timing is set once every two interrupt processes. However, the excitation is not limited to this, and the excitation may be updated for each interrupt process, for example. If the excitation can be updated for each interrupt process, the period of the interrupt process may be set to every "2.235" ms. As in the present embodiment, when one excitation is performed in a plurality of interrupt processes, the D7 bit is assigned as a flag for determining whether or not it is excitation update timing. In this embodiment, when the D7 bit is "1", it indicates non-excitation update timing, and when it is "0", it indicates excitation update timing.
The D7 bit of this data is determined for each interrupt process, and if it is "0", it is updated to "1", and if it is "1", it is updated to "0".

The low-order 4 bits of D0 to D3 represent the reel drive state number. As shown in FIG. 135, "0" indicates stop, "1" indicates deceleration, "2" indicates acceleration, "3" indicates start of acceleration, "4" indicates start of deceleration, and "5" indicates constant speed. For example, when the interrupt process is the non-excitation update timing and the reel drive state is constant speed ("5"), "10000101 (B)" is stored.

The drive state of the first reel at the address "F04D(H)" is for the motor 32 associated with the first reel 31. Data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 associated with the second reel 31 is stored. As a storage area, the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS) of address "F058(H)" (FIG. 136) is provided.
In addition, as a storage area for storing data indicating the driving state of the motor 32 related to the third reel 31, the driving state of the third reel (_WK_RL3_STS) of address "F063 (H)" (Fig. 137) is provided. .

The first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX) at the address "F04E (H)" is a storage area for storing the ON/OFF state of the motor index signal for the first reel 31, and the signal obtained in the previous interrupt process is stored in the D4 bit. and store the signal acquired in this interrupt process in the D0 bit.
Here, the motor index 1 signal is turned on when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the first reel 31, and turned off when the reel sensor 33 does not detect the index of the first reel 31. is.
Therefore, for example, when the first reel motor index is "00000000 (B)", the motor index 1 signal is off (the reel sensor 33 detects the index) in both the previous interrupt process and the current interrupt process. not). When the first reel motor index is "00000001 (B)", the motor index 1 signal was off in the previous interrupt process, and the motor index 1 signal is on in the current interrupt process (reel sensor 33 detected the index) (rise).

Furthermore, when the first reel motor index is "00010001(B)", it means that the motor index 1 signal is ON in both the previous interrupt process and the current interrupt process.
Further, when the first reel motor index is "00010000 (B)", the motor index 1 signal was on in the previous interrupt processing, and the motor index 1 signal is off in the current interrupt processing (falling edge). means

The first reel motor index of the above address "F04E (H)" is a storage area for the left reel 31, but the storage area for the reel motor index of the second reel 31 is address "F059 (H)" (Fig. 136) is provided with a second reel motor index (_FL_RL2_MT_IDX).
Further, as a storage area indicating the reel motor index of the third reel 31, a third reel motor index (_FL_RL3_MT_IDX) of address "F064(H)" (FIG. 137) is provided.

The first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT) at the address “F04F(H)” is a storage area for storing a value corresponding to the number of interrupts to switch the excitation of the motor 32 related to the first reel 31 . Specifically, in the acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) shown in FIG. 156 to be described later, the value corresponding to the current step is stored in this storage area. For example, in the case of the first step during acceleration, the value "25 (D)" corresponding to the address "1058 (H)" is stored in this storage area. Then, "1" is decremented every two interrupt processes, and when it becomes "0", the next second step value "25 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and every two interrupt processes " Subtract by 1. Furthermore, during deceleration, the value "90 (D)" corresponding to the address "1050 (H)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is decremented every two interrupts. However, when the reel 31 is stopped, at a constant speed, or when deceleration is started, "1" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is not subtracted at the time of interrupt processing.

The first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT) of the above address "F04F(H)" is a storage area for the motor 32 related to the first reel 31, but the drive pulse for the motor 32 related to the second reel 31 is As an output counter storage area, a second reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL2_PLSOUT) is provided at the address "F05A(H)" (FIG. 136).
Further, as a storage area for the drive pulse output counter for the motor 32 related to the third reel 31, a third reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL3_PLSOUT) is provided at address "F065(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL1_PLSCHG) of the address “F050(H)” is a storage area for storing the number of drive pulse switchings during acceleration of the motor 32 relating to the first reel 31 . As shown in later-described FIG. 156 (acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP)), when the reel 31 is accelerated, the pulse is switched eight times from the first step to the eighth step. For this reason, the initial value of the first reel drive pulse switching count is set to "9". , the value "25(D)" corresponding to the first step is stored. As described above, the first reel drive pulse output counter is decremented by "1" every two interrupt processes during acceleration or deceleration. When the first reel drive pulse output counter reaches "0", "1" is subtracted from the first reel drive pulse switching count. In this manner, each time the first reel drive pulse output counter reaches "0", the number is decremented by "1" until the first reel drive pulse switching count reaches "0".

The first reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL1_PLSCHG) of the above address "F050 (H)" is a storage area for the motor 32 associated with the first reel 31, but is a storage area for the motor 32 associated with the second reel 31. As such, the second reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL2_PLSCHG) is provided at the address "F05B(H)" (FIG. 136).
Further, as a storage area for the motor 32 related to the third reel 31, the third reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL3_PLSCHG) is provided at the address "F066(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL1_BAD) at the address "F051(H)" is a storage area for a counter for determining whether the rotation of the first reel 31 is normal or abnormal (out-of-step). The first reel rotation failure detection counter stores "0" as an initial value when the first reel 31 reaches a constant speed. When the first reel 31 is at a constant speed, "1" is added, and when the value after adding "1" becomes "0" (that is, the value before addition is "255 (D)"). Yes, and as a result of adding "1", the digit is carried up and the zero flag="1"), it is determined that the rotation of the first reel 31 is not normal.
When it is determined that the value of the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX) has changed after the first reel 31 reaches a constant speed, the first reel rotation failure detection counter is cleared.

The first reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL1_BAD) at the address "F051 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, the address "F05C (H) ' (FIG. 136) is provided with a second reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL2_BAD).
As a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL3_BAD) is provided at address "F067(H)" (FIG. 137).

The step number (_NB_RL1_STEP) of one symbol on the first reel at the address "F052(H)" is a storage area for storing the step number when the first reel drive state is constant speed or deceleration start.
When the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX_) rises, "3" is stored as an initial value (design value).
Further, when the driving state of the first reel is constant speed or start of deceleration, "1" is decremented at the excitation update timing, and when it becomes "0", it is determined that one symbol has been moved.
When it is determined that one symbol has been moved, and the symbol numbers are "2", "7", "12" and "17", "16 (D)" is stored as the initial value, and other values are stored. , "17 (D)" is stored as the initial value.
In the twenty-third embodiment, the number of steps per rotation of the motor 32 is "336", and the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20". For 16 symbols, the number of steps for one symbol is "17" (4*16+16*17=336). In other words, since one pattern is assigned to 16 steps at substantially equal intervals, when the reel 31 is stopped, it is configured to stop at the center of the pattern as much as possible.

The step number (_NB_RL1_STEP) of one symbol on the first reel at the above address "F052 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, the address "F05D ( H)” (FIG. 136) is provided with a step number (_NB_RL2_STEP) for one symbol of the second reel.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a step number (_NB_RL3_STEP) for one symbol of the third reel is provided at the address "F068(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) at the address "F053(H)" is a storage area for storing the symbol number of the first reel 31 that is currently passing. As the initial value, "255 (D) (FF (H))" is stored. When it is determined that the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX) has changed, and at the rising time (the D0 bit is "1" and the D4 bit is "0"), "10 (D)" is stored. At the falling edge (D0 bit is "0" and D4 bit is "1"), "0" is stored.

Thus, "255 (D)" is stored as the initial value until the value of the first reel motor index changes. Then, when it is determined that the value of the first reel motor index has changed, "10 (D)" is stored at the rising edge, and "0" is stored at the trailing edge.
Also, the 1st reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) is incremented by "1" each time it is determined that the symbol has moved by one symbol after "10 (D)" or "0" is stored. .

The first reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) at the above address "F053(H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, the address "F05E (H)” (FIG. 136) is provided with a second reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC).
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) is provided at the address "F069(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) at the address "F054(H)" is a storage area for storing the symbol number of the stop position (applying 4-phase excitation). As the initial value, "255 (D) (FF (H))" is stored. When the first stop switch 42 is operated and the stop position is determined, the determined pattern number is stored in this storage area.

The first reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_PL1_STPPIC) of the above address "F054 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, the address "F05F (H)” (FIG. 136) is provided with a second reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL2_STPPIC).
Also, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL3_STPPIC) is provided at the address "F06A(H)" (FIG. 137).

A first reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL1_PLUS) at address “F055 (H)” is a storage area for a counter for determining the excitation phase of the first reel 31 . The first reel drive pulse data search counter is incremented by "1" at each excitation update timing. Furthermore, when the first reel 31 rotates forward, "0" is added, and when the first reel 31 rotates in reverse, "254 (
D)(FE(H))" is added. For example, when the counter value stored so far is "100 (D)", it becomes "101 (D)" by adding "1". Further, when the first reel 31 rotates in the reverse direction, "254 (D)" is added, resulting in "99 (D)". In other words, adding "254(D)" is the same as subtracting "1". In this manner, the first reel drive pulse data search counter takes a value within the range of "0" to "255 (D)".

Further, when the logical product (AND) of the first reel driving pulse data search counter value and "00000111 (B)" is executed, the values of "0" to "255 (D)" are obtained from "0" to "7 ” value. Then, drive pulse data corresponding to values of "0" to "7" are set. For example, when the converted value is "7", the drive pulse stored at address "1107 (H)" corresponding to the offset value "7" in the reel drive pulse data table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in FIG. Data "00001000(B)" is set, and excitation is performed to turn on φ3.

The first reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL1_PLUS) at the above address "F055 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, address "F060 ( H)” (FIG. 136) is provided with a second reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL2_PLUS).
As a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL3_PLUS) is provided at the address "F06B(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) at the address "F056(H)" is a counter for random delay of the first reel 31 after the waiting effect.
Here, "random delay" is explained.
When a standby effect is executed and the reels 31 are automatically stopped without depending on the operation of the stop switch 42 by the player, if all the reels 31 are rotated simultaneously (all at once) after the reels 31 are automatically stopped, the spot pressing assistance is performed. may lead to Therefore, when the reels 31 are restarted after the reels 31 are automatically stopped by the standby effect, a delay time at the start of rotation is set for each reel 31, and the rotation start timing of each reel 31 is random (discrete). set to be Such control is called "random delay".

When the standby performance is not executed, "0" is stored in this storage area. Also, when the standby effect is executed, a value is determined by lottery or the like from among the values "0" to "335 (D)", and the determined value is stored. Then, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process, and when the value becomes "0", the restart of the first reel 31 is permitted.

The first reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) at the address "F056 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, the address "F061 (H) ' (FIG. 136) is provided with a second reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL2_WAIT).
As a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL3_WAIT) is provided at the address "F06C(H)" (FIG. 137).

In FIG. 138, the section type number (_NB_ADV_KND) of the address "F070(H)" is a storage area for storing a number indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section. When it is an advantageous section, "1" is stored, and when it is a non-advantageous section, "0" is stored. This storage area is the same storage area as the advantageous section type flag at address "F061(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.
The AT flag (_FL_AT) at the address "F078(H)" is a flag for determining whether or not the AT wins. When AT is won, "1" is stored, and when AT is not won, "0" is stored. This storage area is the same storage area as the AT flag at address "F067(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The advantageous interval clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) at the address "F07A(H)" is a storage area for a counter (decrement counter) for the number of games played in the advantageous interval. When shifting to the advantageous section, the initial value "1500 (D)" is set, and "1" is subtracted for each game during the advantageous section. And when it becomes "0", it satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section. This storage area is the same storage area as the advantageous section clear counter at address "F063(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The difference number counter (also referred to as "MY counter") (_CT_MY) at the address "F07C(H)" is a counter (increment counter) that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number during the advantageous interval.
The difference number counter does not simply store the accumulated value of the difference number of sheets, but stores the "value corresponding to" the accumulated value of the difference number of sheets. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "accumulated value of difference number ≠ difference number counter value". In other words, the difference number counter stores a value that sets "0" to the time when the accumulated value of the number of difference cards has decreased the most during the advantageous section.

Also, when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2399 (D)" in the current game, and "2414 (D)" when 15 coins are paid out in the next game.
It should be noted that the difference number counter needs to count at least the cumulative value of the number of difference sheets during the advantageous section, and does not have to count during the non-advantageous section (normal section), but it continues to count including the non-advantageous section. It may be a counter.
This storage area is the same storage area as the difference number counter of the address "F065(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The main game state number (_NB_GAM_STS) at the address "F07E(H)" is a storage area for storing the number of the main game state. As shown in FIG. 132, in the twenty-third embodiment, main game states 0 to 5 are provided, and the number of the main game state in which the player is currently staying is stored in this storage area. When there is a transition to the main game state, the value in this storage area is updated.
The AT precursor counter (_CT_AT_ZN) at the address "F080(H)" is a storage area for the AT precursor game count counter. When the AT is won, the number of AT precursor games is determined, for example, within the range of "0" to "33", and the determined number of games is stored in this storage area. Then, in the AT precursor, that is, the main game state 2, every game, "1" is subtracted from the AT precursor counter, and when it becomes "0", it is determined that the end condition of the AT precursor (main game state 2) is met. do.

The ending counter (_CT_ENDING) of the address "F097 (H)" is set when the difference number counter value exceeds "1951 (D)" when the AT set number counter value (to be described later) is "1" or more, or This is a counter storage area in which the initial value "2" is set when the section clear counter value becomes less than "200 (D)".
At the end of the main game state 4, if the ending counter is equal to or greater than "1", "1" is subtracted. When the ending counter changes from "1" to "0", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section (and AT) are satisfied, and the main game state 0 is entered. Therefore, after "2" is set in the ending counter, it is possible to perform up to two sets of ATs, including the AT set to "2" in the ending counter.

The AT wait counter (_CT_AT_WAIT) at the address "F098(H)" is a counter storage area for managing AT activation. When the AT set number counter is equal to or greater than "1", after the main game state 4 (AT) ends, the main game state 3 (AT preparing) is entered. Then, in this main game state 3, the value for managing whether or not to permit the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination is the AT standby counter value. In other words, in the main game state 3, it is a counter for removing a certain number of paid balls. The AT standby counter is determined and stored within a range of "0" to "8" when, for example, the main game state 4 shifts to the main game state 3.

In the main game state 3, the AT standby counter value is subtracted by "1" in a game in which 1BB is won, or in a game in which a small winning combination or replay is not won in 1BB (game in which 1BB can be won). . Then, after the AT standby counter reaches "0", in a game in which the 1BB symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (a game in which a small winning combination or a replay has not been won), an effect that encourages a 1BB prize to be won (for example, "Aim for 'Blue BAR'!", etc.) is output. When the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the main game state 4 is entered.

In the main game state 3, when 1BB is won before the AT standby counter reaches "0", the main game state 3 remains and the main game state 4 (AT) is not entered. Therefore, 1BB is in operation and not AT (AT is being prepared). In this case, the AT standby counter is reset after the 1BB operation ends. Note that the AT standby counter that has been stored may be taken over without resetting. By doing so, even if the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is erroneously stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being further disadvantaged.

The AT set number counter (_CT_AT_SET) at the address "F09C(H)" is a storage area for storing the AT set number. When an AT is won, the number of AT sets is determined by lottery, and the determined number of AT sets is stored in this storage area. Further, in the main game state 3 (AT preparation), an addition lottery for the number of AT sets is executed according to the winning combination, and when the addition lottery is won, the winning addition number is added to the AT set number counter.

At the end of the main game state 4, it is determined whether or not the AT set number counter is "1" or more, and when the AT set number counter is "1" or more, it is determined that the AT continuation condition is satisfied. Then, the main game state 3 is entered, and when the AT set number counter is "0", it is determined that the AT continuation condition is not satisfied, and the main game state 5 is entered. When shifting from the main game state 4 to the main game state 3, the AT set number counter is decremented by "1".
Also, even if the number of AT sets is "1" or more, when the ending counter changes from "1" to "0" at the end of the main game state 4, the end condition of the advantageous section (AT) is satisfied. The AT set number counter is cleared as the determination is made and the state shifts to the main game state 0. Here, as an example of a method of shifting to the main game state 0 and a method of clearing the AT set number counter, RWM initialization processing executed at the end of the advantageous interval by the advantageous interval clear counter management (step S435 in FIG. 51) are mentioned.

The AT pullback counter (_CT_AT_BACK) at the address "F09D(H)" is a storage area for the counter of the number of remaining games to be AT pullback. When moving from the main game state 4 to the main game state 5, the initial value "50 (D)" is set, and in the main game state 5, "1" is subtracted every game. Then, when the AT withdrawal counter becomes "0" without winning the AT, it is determined that the end condition of the main game state 5 is satisfied, and the main game state 0 or 1 is entered.
Further, when the AT is won in the main game state 5 and the game is shifted to the main game state 3, the AT withdrawal counter is cleared.

The standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E(H)" is a storage area for storing the type of the standby effect number.
Here, the "standby effect" in the twenty-third embodiment means that the reels 31 are rotated in reverse when the start switch 41 is operated, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, " This is a reel effect (also referred to as a freeze effect) in which black bars are displayed in a stopped state. As a standby effect, the reels 31 are rotated forward when the start switch 41 is operated, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "black BAR" alignment) is stop-displayed without the player's operation of the stop switch 42. may contain things. Alternatively, as a standby performance, the reels 31 are rotated forward when the start switch 41 is operated, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "black BAR" alignment) is stop-displayed without the player's operation of the stop switch 42.例文帳に追加It may be composed only of

In the standby effect, if it is executed as a effect indicating AT winning confirmation (for example, stopping display of "black BAR" matching or "red 7" matching), or if it is performed as a effect that fuels the expectation of AT winning (for example, , “Stop displaying “watermelon” matching, etc.).
When it is decided to execute the standby performance, when any one of the standby performance numbers "1" to "4" (address "F0A0 (H)" to be described later) is determined, "2" is stored. , "5" to "8" (address "F0A1(H)" to be described later) is determined, "3" is stored. Moreover, it is cleared in step S835 at the start of standby effect (M_TARPIC_EXE) in FIG. 143, which will be described later.

The search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) at the address "F09F(H)" is a storage area for storing data that determines whether the rotation is forward rotation or reverse rotation in the standby effect. When the standby effect is forward rotation, "0" is stored, and when it is reverse rotation, "FE (H)" is stored.
When starting the standby effect, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) described above is "0", and when it is not "0", that is, the standby effect (in the twenty-third embodiment, When executing reverse rotation), "FE (H)" is stored in the retrieval counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV).
In addition, when the standby effect ends, this storage area is cleared ("0" is stored).

The standby effect number (_NB_PRD_NO) of the address “F0A0(H)” is a storage area for the number that manages the standby effect indicating AT win determination. As shown in FIG. 138, "1" to "4" are stored according to the stop symbols. Note that the standby effect number "4" corresponds to a number that temporarily stops and displays the "red 7" alignment and then changes it again to stop and display the "black BAR" alignment. The set number of winning ATs is set so as to be related to the symbol combinations stopped and displayed by the standby effect.

The three-way number (_NB_TRIO) of the address "F0A1(H)" is a storage area for numbers for managing the standby effect indicating the AT win expectation. For example, in the main game state 1, when a rare replay (winning numbers "3" to "9" in FIG. 126) is won, the three winning numbers are determined by lottery and set at the end of the game. For example, when it is determined that the three-part number "5" is selected, the operation of the start switch 41 for starting the next game is used as a trigger to stop and display the middle row "watermelon" by the waiting effect. The AT win expectation is set so as to be associated with the symbol combination stopped and displayed by the standby effect.

The winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the address "F0A9 (H)" is a memory that stores the number when the winning number is determined in the game this time and the replay and winning condition device that operates in the game this time is determined. area. As shown in FIG. 126, when the winning numbers "1" to "24" are won, "1" to "24" are respectively stored as the winning and replay condition device numbers of the game.
The role product condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) of the address "F0AA(H)" is a storage area for storing the role product condition device number when winning the role product. As shown in FIG. 126, when winning numbers "25" to "41" are won, "1" to "17" are respectively stored as accessory condition device numbers for the game.

The minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) of the address "F0AB (H)" is a timer that monitors the minimum game time for one time, and when it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, the number of interrupts "3672 (D)" is set. An initial value is set for counting (step S767 in FIG. 140 to be described later). Note that the minimum playing time in this embodiment is set to approximately "4.1" seconds (1.117 ms×3672≈4100 ms).
When the minimum playing time is set in the current game, the rotation of the reels 31 starts on the condition that the minimum playing time is "0" in the next game.

Among the above data of the RWM 53, when the advantageous section ends, the data regarding the advantageous section and AT are cleared.
Also in the twenty-third embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment, the game end check process (FIG. 148) is executed at the end of the game, and the advantageous zone clear counter management is executed in step S945. The advantageous section clear counter management is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 51 or FIG.

Therefore, the advantageous section clear counter ("_CT_ADV_CLR
”) becomes “0” (“Yes” in step S424 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), the process proceeds to step S435 to clear the data of the RWM 53 regarding the advantageous section and AT.
In the twenty-third embodiment, the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section include section type number (_NB_ADV_KND), AT flag (_FL_AT), difference counter (MY counter) (_CT_MY), AT precursor counter (_CT_AT_ZN), ending counter. (_CT_ENDING), AT waiting counter (__CT_AT_WAIT), AT set number counter (__CT_AT_SET), AT withdrawal counter (_CT_AT_BACK), waiting effect type (_WK_PRD), waiting effect number (_NB_PRD_NO), three-part number (_NB_TRIO).
On the other hand, the data that are not cleared at the end of the advantageous section include RT state number (_NB_RT_STS), RT game count (_CT_RT_GAME), and main game state number (_NB_GAM_STS).
Therefore, as described above, the current game is the 1000th game of RT1, and when the advantageous section ends in the current game, the next game will be the non-advantageous section and the 1001st game of RT1.

Also, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) are not initialized by turning on/off the power or setting change processing.
Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off in the 1000th game of RT1 and the setting change process is executed and the game returns, the first game after the return is started from the 1001st game of RT1. However, not limited to this, when the setting change process is executed, the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS) is not initialized, but the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) may be initialized. Alternatively, both the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) may be initialized when the setting change process is executed.

Furthermore, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) are not initialized only by turning the power on/off, but at least the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) is initialized when the setting change process is executed. good too.
Note that when the power is turned on/off, the number of games (non-AT) displayed on the image display device 23 is set to "0". This point will be described later.

Next, in the twenty-third embodiment, each process during a game will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing main processing (M_MAIN) by the main control board 50 . This flowchart corresponds to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 139, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. In FIG. 139, steps different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined with step numbers.
Differences from FIG. 41 will be mainly described below.
In FIG. 139, if it is determined in step S278 that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S751 to execute start switch acceptance processing (M_START_CTL). It is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated when the D6 bit of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address "F017 (H)" in FIG. 133 becomes "1".

Then, when proceeding to the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) of step S751, the process proceeds to the process of FIG. 140, which will be described later.
Next, the process proceeds to step S752, and a reel stop reception check (M_STOP_CHK) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 146, which will be described later. Then, the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) is executed for each reel 31 until it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped in the next step S289.
Also, in FIG. 139, the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) (step S753) in the twenty-third embodiment executes the process shown in FIG. 148 to be described later.

FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 of FIG.
In step S761, a winning combination lottery process is executed. This process is a process of performing a lottery for a winning number by the combination lottery means 61 . For example, when the game is non-RT this time, the winning number is determined according to the number table shown in FIG. When the winning number is determined, the winning and replay condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored in the memory area of the address "F0A9 (H)", and the accessory condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored. , is stored in the storage area at the address "F0AA(H)".

In the next step S762, the main control board 50 determines the transition to the advantageous section. As described above, when the winning numbers "1" to "4" and "6" to "21" are won, it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section.
Here, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, "1" is set to the section type number (address "F070(H)").

At the next step S763, a game start process in the main game state is executed. In this process, lottery, counter update, etc. are executed according to the main game state of the current game.
For example, when the main game state is 0, 1, or 5, an AT lottery is executed. As described above, when a rare replay (any of the winning numbers “3” to “9”) occurs, an AT lottery with a number “1” or more may be executed. Then, when the AT is won, the AT flag (address "F078(H)") is set to "1", and the lottery-determined AT set number is stored in the address "F09C(H)".

Further, when the main game state is 2, "1" is subtracted from the AT precursor counter (address "F080 (H)").
Furthermore, when the main game state is 3, "1" is subtracted from the AT standby counter (address "F098(H)").
Further, when the main game state is 5, "1" is subtracted from the AT withdrawal counter (address "F09D(H)").

In the next step S764, a symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 141, which will be described later, and is a process for outputting a test signal regarding the operation timing and pressing order of the stop switch 42 to the tester side. When the gaming machine is actually installed in the hall (store), the gaming machine is not connected to the testing machine, so the testing machine does not actually receive the test signal. However, since the pattern stop signal set (S_IF_SET) exists in the program of the main processing, even after the gaming machine is installed in the hall, every game, test signals regarding the operation timing and pressing order of the stop switch 42 are generated. The output processing itself is executed.
In the next step S765, start of standby effect (M_TARPIC_EXE) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 143, which will be described later, and corresponds to a process of executing a standby effect when the start switch 41 is operated.

In the next step S766, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the minimum playing time has passed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the value stored at the address "F0AB(H)" is "0". When it is determined that the minimum playing time has become "0", the process proceeds to step S767. In step S767, the initial value "3672 (D)" of the minimum playing time is stored in the address "F0AB (H)". From this time point, the value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process, and it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has reached "0" in step S766 of the next game. In the next step S768, the main control board 50 sets the acceleration start state. This processing stores "3" (00000011 (B)) indicating the start of acceleration in the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS). is. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) in step S764 in FIG.
Before describing FIG. 141, the stop acceptance designation tables 1 and 2 will be described.
FIG. 142 shows the symbol stop signal table, (A) shows symbol stop signal table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1), and (B) shows symbol stop signal table 2 (TBL_ORD_INF2).

As shown in FIG. 141(A), two types of symbol stop signal data are stored in the stop acceptance specification table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1). Further, each symbol stop signal data is composed of four data.
First, the pattern stop signal data when (1) "Accessory condition device number = 1, main game state number 3 and AT standby counter = 0" is data "0, 16, 7, 2". . Here, "accessory condition device number = 1, main game state number 3 and AT standby counter = 0" means that 1BB is inside, main game state 3 (AT is in preparation), and AT standby counter is "0", that is, it means that 1BB can be won.
This data is for aiming at the "blue BAR" alignment on the effective line.
The four pieces of symbol stop signal data are data of "push order, stop operation position of left reel 31, stop operation position of middle reel 31, stop operation position of right reel 31".

First, the push order data has "0" to "5". "0" indicates the pressing order 123, "1" indicates the pressing order 132, . . . , and "5" indicates the pressing order 321. Here, each symbol stop signal data in the stop acceptance designation table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1) of (A) is actually the symbol stop signal data during the game in which the instruction function is not operating, but the pressing order is the pressing order. It is set to 123. Instead of the pressing order 123, pressing order data indicating another pressing order may be used.
In addition, the stop operation position of the left reel 31, the stop operation position of the middle reel 31, and the stop operation position of the right reel 31 all point to the pattern numbers aimed at the lower stage.
For example, among the symbol stop signal data (1) of the stop acceptance designation table 1, the data indicating the stop operation position of the left reel 31 is "16". Here, as shown in FIG. 114, if the number 16 "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is aimed to stop at the lower left stage, the number 18 "blue BAR" can be stopped on the effective line (upper left stage). Become.
In the above example, the data indicating the stop operation position centered on the lower stage is stored, but the data indicating the stop operation position centered on the middle stage or the upper stage may be stored. In either case, the effective line in the present embodiment is an irregular line that descends to the right, whereas the data indicating the stop operation position is set in a horizontal straight line (set along the effective line). ), when the tester side performs the test according to the test signal, the stop operation can be performed at a predetermined timing without being influenced by the effective line. As a result, the processing load on the testing machine side and the processing load on the gaming machine side can be reduced.

Further, among the symbol stop signal data, the data indicating the stop operation position of the middle reel 31 is "7". If you aim to stop No. 7 "Watermelon" on the middle reel 31 at the middle and lower stage, No. 8 "Blue BAR" can be stopped on the effective line (middle middle stage).
Furthermore, among the symbol stop signal data, the data indicating the stop operation position of the right reel 31 is "2". If you aim so that the No. 2 "blue BAR" of the right reel 31 stops at the lower right stage, this "blue BAR" can be stopped on the effective line (lower right stage).
Therefore, the above symbol stop signal data is data for aiming at the "blue BAR" alignment in the pressing order 123 .

In addition, if it is a game in which 1BB is inside and no small win or replay has been won in this game, if each reel 31 is stopped based on the symbol stop signal data, the "blue BAR" is complete. Stop display. On the other hand, even within 1BB, in a game in which either a small winning combination or a replay is won in this game, even if each reel 31 is stopped based on the symbol stop signal data, the "blue BAR" is displayed. Alignment does not stop appearing.

The symbol stop signal data "0, 6, 127, 127" of (2) is the symbol stop signal data under conditions other than the above (1). This symbol stop signal data is symbol stop signal data that prevents the "blue BAR" alignment.
In the symbol stop signal data "0, 6, 127, 127", "0" is data indicating the push order 123 as described above. The data indicating the stop position of the left reel 31 is "6". Here, as shown in FIG. 114, if No. 6 "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is aimed to stop at the lower left row, No. 18 "Blue BAR" will not stop on the effective line.
Furthermore, the data "127" indicating the stop operation position of the middle and right reels 31 means that the operation timing is irrelevant (arbitrary operation position). Therefore, since the left reel 31 is set so that the "blue bar" does not stop on the effective line, it means that the operation timing of the stop switches 42 of the middle and right reels 31 is arbitrary. Although the data indicating the stop operation position of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is "127", it is also possible to store data indicating a predetermined stop operation position instead of an arbitrary operation position. is.

As described above, the symbol stop signal is a signal including the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the stop operation position of each reel 31, and is a test signal to be transmitted to the testing machine. When the testing machine side receives this pattern stop signal (test signal), it executes a simulation of operating the stop switch 42 according to this pattern stop signal. Then, when a simulation of operating the stop switch 42 according to the symbol stop signal is executed, it is judged (confirmed) whether or not the reel 31 stops at the correct position, and whether or not the payout rate is within an appropriate range. judgment (confirmation). By outputting the symbol stop signal before determining whether or not the minimum playing time has passed, the testing machine side can perform a stop operation immediately after the minimum playing time has passed.

142(B), 6 types of pattern stop signal data are stored in the stop acceptance specification table 2 (TBL_ORD_INF2), and are respectively in push order 123, push order 132, ..., push order 321. Yes.
When winning number "10" is won during AT, or when winning number "16" is won during AT and inside SRB, symbol stop signal data "0, 127, 127, 127" corresponding to push order 123 ” is selected.
Also, when the winning number "11" is won during AT, or when the winning number "17" is won during AT and inside the SRB, the pattern stop signal data "1, 127, 127" corresponding to the pushing order 132 , 127” is selected.
Furthermore, when the winning number "12" is won during the AT, or when the winning number "18" is won during the AT and inside the SRB, the pattern stop signal data "2, 127, 127, 127" is selected.

Furthermore, when the winning number "13" is won during AT, or when the winning number "19" is won during AT and inside the SRB, the pattern stop signal data "3, 127, 127" corresponding to the pushing order 231 , 127” is selected.
Similarly, when winning number "14" is won during AT, or when winning number "20" is won during AT and inside SRB, symbol stop signal data "4, 127, 127, 127" is selected.
Furthermore, similarly, when the winning number "15" is won during AT, or when the winning number "21" is won during AT and inside the SRB, the symbol stop signal data "5, 127" corresponding to the push order 312 , 127, 127" is selected.

As described above, in a game in which the pressing order is notified during the AT, there is a process for outputting the pressing order data corresponding to the pressing order and the stop operation position data indicating that the stop operation position is arbitrary. executed. By outputting stop operation position data indicating that the stop operation position is arbitrary, the discrepancy between the test on the testing machine side and the game method performed by the player after the game machine is actually installed in the hall is eliminated. can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 141, the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) will be described.
First, in step S771, the stop acceptance specification table 2 shown in FIG. 141(B) is set.
In the next step S772, it is determined whether or not there is a pressing order instruction. Here, when a small win group A is won during AT, or when a small win group B is won during AT and inside the SRB, the pressing order instruction number (in FIGS. 133 to 138, (not shown) is stored, so this push order instruction number is stored in the A register. When the A register value is not "0", it is determined as "Yes" (the pressing order is indicated), and when it is "0", it is determined as "No" (the pressing order is not indicated).
If it is determined that there is a pressing order instruction, the process proceeds to step S773, and if it is determined that there is no pressing order instruction, the process proceeds to step S775.

In step S773, an offset value is set. Here, it is assumed that the push order instruction numbers are set to "1", "2", ..., "6" for the six push orders 123, 132, ..., 321, respectively. . In this case, the offset values are "0", "1", ..., "5". Therefore, "1" is subtracted from the A register and the offset value is set.
Next, in step S774, symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value is obtained. For example, the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value "0" is "0, 127, 127, 127" in FIG. 142(B), and the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value "1" is "1 , 127, 127, 127", and the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value "5" is "5, 127, 127, 127". Then, the process proceeds to step S781.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S772 to step S775, the stop acceptance designation table 1 is set. This process is a process of setting the stop acceptance specification table 1 instead of the stop acceptance specification table 2 initially set in step S771.
Next, in step S776, it is determined whether or not the winning and replay condition device number is "0". This process determines whether or not the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) stored at address "F0A9(H)" is "0". When it is determined that there is "0" (that is, when a small win or replay is not won in the game this time), the process proceeds to step S7777, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S780.

In step S777, it is determined whether or not the accessory condition device number is "1" (whether or not 1BB is won). This process determines whether or not the role product condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) stored at the address "F0AA(H)" is "1". If it is determined to be "1", the process proceeds to step S778, and if it is determined not to be "1", the process proceeds to step S780.

In step S778, it is determined whether or not 1BB winning is permitted in the current game. Here, "winning of 1BB is permitted" corresponds to the main game state 3 (AT preparation) and the AT standby counter being "0". Therefore, whether or not the value of address "F07E(H)" (main game state number) is "3" and whether or not the value of address "F098(H)" (AT standby counter) is "0" to judge whether When determining that the main game state number is 3 and the AT standby counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S779, and when determining that the main game state number is 3 and the AT standby counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S780.
In step S779, the symbol stop signal data "0, 16, 7, 2" are acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step S781. On the other hand, in step S780, the symbol stop signal data "0, 6, 127, 127" are acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step S781.

In the next step S781, a serial communication circuit data register is set. Here, the address of the transmission register in the serial communication circuit of the chip incorporated in the main CPU 55 is stored in a predetermined register.
Next, the process advances to step S782 to execute processing for outputting the pressing order among the test signals. For example, when the symbol stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the processing here is to write push order data "0" to the address of the transmission register.
Next, proceeding to step S783, processing for outputting the stop operation position of the first reel 31 (the left reel 31 in this embodiment) among the test signals is executed. Here, for example, when the pattern stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the stop operation position "16 (D)" of the left reel 31 is written to the address of the transmission register. be.

Next, proceeding to step S784, processing for outputting the stop operation position of the second reel 31 (middle reel 31 in this embodiment) is executed. Here, for example, when the symbol stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the stop operation position "7" of the middle reel 31 is written to the address of the transmission register.
Next, proceeding to step S785, processing for outputting the stop operation position of the third reel 31 (the right reel 31 in this embodiment) is executed. In this process, for example, when the symbol stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the stop operation position "2" of the right reel 31 is written in the address of the transmission register.
Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In steps S782 to S785, the pressing order and the stop operation position of the reel 31 are written in the transmission register, and processing for transmitting these data to the testing machine is executed. Incidentally, in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 151, which will be described later, processing for transmitting these data to the testing machine may be executed by the test signal output in step S842.

As described above, when 1BB winning is permitted, the symbol stop signal data for winning 1BB is transmitted. Transmit symbol stop signal data. As a result, it is possible to transmit a test signal in accordance with the player's playing style in the market. Therefore, it is possible to bring the number of balls produced by the testing machine closer to the number of balls produced on the market.

It should be noted that the process of FIG. 141 is one process in the main process, so it is performed every game. Then, when the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are electrically connected, a pattern stop signal (test signal) is output to the testing machine every game by the process of FIG.
On the other hand, even when the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are not connected, for example, even when the slot machine 10 is installed in the hall, the process of FIG. 141 is executed every game. However, since the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are not connected, the symbol stop signal (test signal) is not output to the outside.

FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the start of standby effect (M_TARPIC_EXE) in step S765 in FIG.
First, in step S821, the standby effect type is obtained. This process is a process of storing the data of the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E(H)" in the A register.
Next, in step S822, it is determined whether or not the standby effect type is "0". Here, it is determined whether or not the A register value is "0". When it is determined that the A register value is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S823. When the standby effect type is "0", it means that there is no standby effect when the start switch 41 is operated, and when it is not "0", it means that there is a standby effect.

In step S823, "-2" is stored in the search counter update correction data. This process is a process of storing "FE(H)" in the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) at the address "F09F(H)". "FE(H)" is data for reverse rotation.
"Control command set 1" in the next step S824 is processing for transmitting a command to the sub-control board 80, like step S303 in FIG. 41 (eleventh embodiment), for example. Here, the information of the standby effect number (_NB_PRD_NO) of the address "F0A0 (H)" or the information of the triple role number (_NB_TRIO) of the address "F0A1 (H)" is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
In the next step S825, "0" is stored in the trio number (_NB_TRIO) of "F0A1(H)".

Next, proceeding to step S826, based on the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT), # # reel pattern numbers (for stop position) of addresses "F054 (H)", "F05F (H)" and "F06A (H)" The specified position (stop position of the reel 31) is saved in (_NB_RL#_STPPIC).
FIG. 144 shows a reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT) stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 144, the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT) stores designated positions (stop positions) corresponding to standby effect numbers. And this "specified position (stop position)" corresponds to the pattern number.
For example, in the figure, the addresses "1000 (H)" to "1002 (H)" are the stop symbol designation positions of each reel 31 when the standby effect number (_NB_PRD_NO) is "1"("blackBAR" aligned). indicate. The value ``8(H)'' stored at the address ``1000(H)'' indicates the designated stop symbol position on the left reel 31, and the value ``8(H)'' at the address ``1001(H)''"3(H)" of the address "1002 (H)" indicates the stop symbol designation position of the right reel 31.

Also, the symbol number during forward rotation and the symbol number during reverse rotation are different. In the twenty-third embodiment, the index (also referred to as “initial” or “detection piece”) provided on each reel 31 covers a range of approximately half (approximately 180 degrees) of the entire circumference (360 degrees) of the reel 31. is formed in Then, the current position of the reel 31 can be grasped when the reel 31 rotates about half a turn by detection/non-detection of the index.
Although the details will be described later, in steps S897 and S899 of FIG. 155 (reel drive control), the reference symbol number is set to "10" when the rise of the #th reel motor index is detected (when the index is detected). ing. Similarly, the reference pattern number is set to "0" when the trailing edge of the #th reel motor index is detected.

Therefore, when the reel 31 is rotating in the forward direction, the symbol number "10" (for example, "replay" for the left reel 31 in FIG. 114) is displayed at the moment the rise of the #th reel motor index is detected. It is judged that it has passed through the middle stage.
Similarly, when the reel 31 is rotating in the forward direction, the symbol number “0” (for example, “Replay” on the left reel 31 in FIG. ) passes through the middle stage.

On the other hand, in the case where the reel 31 is rotating in the reverse direction, when it is determined that the symbol of symbol number "10" is passing at the moment when the rise of the #th reel motor index is detected, actually, As shown in FIG. 114, the symbol of symbol number "1" in forward rotation has passed. Similarly, when it is determined that the symbol number "0" has passed at the moment when the trailing edge of the #th reel motor index is detected, the symbol number "11" in forward rotation is actually selected. You will pass through the middle stage.
In this way, as shown in FIG. 114, the symbol numbers passing through the middle stage are different when the #th reel motor index rises and falls depending on whether the reel 31 is rotating forward or backward (e.g., nine symbols). there is a gap). Therefore, in the reel effect data table of FIG. 144, the stop position is stored in consideration of the deviation. For example, if the reverse rotation of the reel 31 is determined to stop at symbol number "8", it can actually be stopped at symbol number "3" as shown in FIG.

The reel effect data table in FIG. 144 defines stop symbol positions during standby effect, that is, during reverse rotation of the reels 31 . For example, in FIG. 144, if the stop symbol position at the standby performance number "1" is set to "8, 8, 3", in fact, "black BAR (number 3 during forward rotation)"-"black BAR (No. 3 during forward rotation)--Black BAR (No. 8 during forward rotation) stops.
The same applies to "2" to "8" other than the standby effect number "1".
For example, when the standby effect number is "2", the stop symbol positions are "18, 18, 8", but the symbol number "18" during reverse rotation is symbol number "13" (red 7) during forward rotation. , and the symbol number "8" for reverse rotation corresponds to the symbol number "3" (red 7) for forward rotation.
As described above, in step S826 in FIG. 143, reel pattern numbers (for stop positions) are stored based on the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT).

The description returns to FIG.
After step S826, the process advances to step S827 to save the designated symbol position search waiting time. It should be noted that the "specified symbol position search waiting time" is, as described above, the waiting time ( In other words, it is roughly the rotation time of the reel 31).
FIG. 145 is a diagram showing reel effect execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) to reel effect execution timer table 8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM8) stored in ROM 54. FIG. The data values shown in FIG. 145 are decimal numbers. Reel effect execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) to reel effect execution timer table 8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM8) correspond to standby effect numbers "1" to "8", respectively. For example, when the standby effect number is "1", the reel effect execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) is used.
145, for example, addresses "1018(H)" and "1019(H)", "101A(H)" and "101B(H)", and "101C(H)" and "101D(H)" indicate the timer values of the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31, respectively. In FIG. 145, the timer value of the left reel 31 is used as a reference, and how much the timer value is larger than the timer value of the left reel 31 is shown. Each timer value of "1019 (H)", "101A (H)" and "101B (H)", "101C (H)" and "101D (H)" is "14112 (D), 14782 (D) , 16122(D)".

This timer value designates the waiting time until deceleration of the reel 31 is started. For example, when the standby effect number is "1", the left reel 31 can start decelerating after "14112 (D)" has elapsed from the start of the standby effect, that is, after "1.117×14112=about 15763 ms" has elapsed. ing.
This timer value is also subtracted during acceleration of the reels 31 in the standby effect. As shown in FIG. 156, which will be described later, the acceleration processing of the reel 31 requires a total of "62 times×2 interrupts=about 139 ms" for the 1st to 8th steps. The timer value of each reel 31 is set at least to a time longer than the time required for this acceleration process.
Further, in the reel effect execution timer tables 1 to 4, the standby time of the middle reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the left reel 31 . Furthermore, the standby time of the right reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the middle reel 31 . As a result, when the reel 31 stops, it stops in the order of "left→middle→right". Further, in the reel effect execution timer tables 5 to 8, the standby time of the middle reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the right reel 31. - 特許庁Furthermore, the standby time of the left reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the middle reel 31 . As a result, when the reel 31 stops, it stops in the order of "right→middle→left".
Thus, by setting the waiting time of each reel 31 in the reel effect execution timer table, the stop order of the reels 31 can be determined, and the stop order and stop timing of the reels 31 can be given regularity. .
On the other hand, if the waiting time of each reel 31 is not set, it becomes impossible to secure a sufficient constant speed time after the reel 31 is started, and it becomes impossible to output a necessary effect while the reel 31 is rotating. . Also, if the reels 31 are stopped in the order in which the designated symbol positions have reached the stop positions, the reels 31 may stop randomly, for example, in the order of "right→left→middle".

Furthermore, the difference between the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops first and the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops second is "670" interrupt in the reel effect execution timer table 1, and "1008" interrupt, and reel effect execution timer tables 5 to 8 are set to "1176" interrupt. The number of interrupts per rotation of the reel 31 is "672" as described above. Therefore, after the first reel 31 stops, the second reel 31 is set to stop after approximately one or more rotations.
Furthermore, the difference between the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops second and the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops third is "1340" interrupt in the reel effect execution timer table 1, and ""1008" interrupt, "1176" interrupt in the reel effect execution timer tables 5 to 7, and "1848" interrupt in the reel effect execution timer table 8 are set. Therefore, after the second reel 31 stops, the third reel 31 is set to stop after approximately two or more rotations.

For example, even if the middle reel 31 is out of step after the left reel 31 has stopped (it is determined that an abnormality has occurred by the second reel rotation failure detection counter), the set timer value remains unchanged during this period as well. subtracted. Then, when the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped even if the timer value becomes "0" because it is difficult to reach a constant speed after stepping out, the timer value of the right reel 31 becomes "0". , the right reel 31 is stopped before the middle reel 31 as an irregular. Therefore, the stopping order of the reels 31 in this case is "left→right→middle". By responding in this way to irregular times such as step-out, it is possible to prevent the time required for the standby effect from being carelessly extended due to step-out. Thereby, the time until the game can be started can be shortened.

Furthermore, the fourth timer value of each reel effect execution timer table, for example, in the reel effect execution timer table 1, the values stored by the addresses "101E (H)" and "101F (H)" are wait time. For example, at the time of standby effect number "1", restart is possible after "1.117×5371=approximately 5999 ms" has elapsed after a complete stop.
Then, in step S827 of FIG. 143, for example, when the standby effect number is "1", the first reel designated symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR1_WAIT) of addresses "F039 (H)" and "F03A (H)" is set to " 14112 (D)” is stored, and “14782 (D)” is stored in the second reel designated symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR2_WAIT) of addresses “F03B (H)” and “F03C (H)”, and address “F03D” is stored. (H)” and “F03E (H)” store “16122 (D)” in the third reel specified symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR3_WAIT).

In the next step S828, acceleration start is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Disable interrupts.
(2) Store "10000011 (B)" in the A register.
(3) Store the A register value in the first reel drive number (_WK_RL1_STS) at address "F04D(H)".
(4) Store the A register value in the second reel drive number (_WK_RL2_STS) at address "F058(H)".
(5) Store the A register value in the third reel drive number (_WK_RL3_STS) at address "F063(H)".
(6) Allow interrupts.
This is because the reels 31 do not start rotating all at once if an interrupt process occurs between (3) to (5). For this reason, interrupt processing is prevented from occurring while the reel drive number is being updated.
By the above processing, the first reel drive number (_WK_RL1_STS) to the third reel drive number (_WK_RL
3_STS) all become "10000011 (B)", and when it becomes "00000011 (B)" in the next interrupt processing, the acceleration of each reel 31 is actually executed.

The lower four digits of the reel drive number are "0011(B)" at the start of acceleration, "0010(B)" at acceleration, and "0101(B)" at constant speed.
After the reels 31 reach a constant speed, the constant speed state is maintained until the reel designated symbol position search standby time set in step S827 is reached, and when the reel designated symbol position search standby time becomes "0", Start decelerating the reel. When the reel 31 starts to decelerate, the reel drive number becomes "0100(B)", and when it shifts to the deceleration state, it becomes "0001(B)". When the reel 31 stops, the reel drive number becomes "0000(B)".

In the next step S829, an end check of all reels 31 is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "0" in the A register.
(2) A logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS). Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(3) A logical sum operation is performed between the A register value and the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS). Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(4) OR operation of the A register value and the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS). Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(5) A logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "01111111 (B)" is performed.

Here, when all the reels 31 stop, the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS) all become "10000000 (B)" or " 00000000 (B)”. Therefore, it is only when all the reels 31 are stopped that the calculation result in the above calculation (5) becomes "0".
In addition, in the calculation of (5) above, the input number for calculating the AND for determining whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped is not limited to "01111111 (B)", but "00001111 (B)". However, a calculation result similar to the above can be obtained. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped by determining whether or not the lower 4 bits are "0".
Also, in this embodiment, since the actual reel drive control is executed once every two interrupts, the most significant bit of the reel drive status (_WK_RL#_STS) changes to "0" or "1" for each interrupt process. Become. Therefore, not limited to such a specification, for example, when the most significant bit is always "0", "11111111 (11111111 ( B)” can also be used.

In the next step S830, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. In this process, when the calculation result of (5) above is "0" (when the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped.
When it is determined in step S830 that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S831, and when it is determined in step S830 that all reels 31 have not stopped, the above process of step S829 is executed again.
At step S831, the waiting time for the end of the effect is set. This process is a process of acquiring the effect completion waiting time corresponding to the standby effect number in the current standby effect from the reel effect execution timer table (TBL_TARPIC_TM1-8) and storing it in the BC register. For example, when the standby effect number in the current standby effect is "1", in FIG.
” (waiting time at the end of the effect) stored in the BC register.

Next, the flow advances to step S832 to execute a 2-byte time wait. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the BC register value for each interrupt process until the BC register value becomes "0".
Then, when the BC register value becomes "0", the wait for 2 bytes is ended and the process proceeds to step S833.
In step S833, a standby effect type RWM address is set. This process is a process of storing "F0A0 (H)" which is the address of the waiting effect number (_NB_PRO_NO) in the HL register.
In the next step S834, it is determined whether or not the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (that is, the standby effect number (_NB_PRO_NO)) is "4". When it is judged to be "4", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be "4", the process proceeds to step S835.
Here, when the standby effect number "4" is selected as the standby effect, as shown in FIG. 144, after the "red 7" is aligned, the "black BAR" is aligned. Therefore, when the standby effect number is "4", the process proceeds to the next process without clearing the data related to the standby effect start process or initializing the symbol number.

On the other hand, when proceeding to step S835, search for the waiting effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E (H)", the waiting effect number (_NB_PRO_NO) of the address "F0A0 (H)", and the address "F09F (H)" Clear the counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) for Specifically, a process of storing "0" in each address is executed.
Next, in step S836, the data of the pattern number (for passing position) and the pattern number (for stop position) are initialized.
in particular,
1st reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) at address “F053 (H)”,
1st reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL1_STPPIC) at address “F054 (H)”,
2nd reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC) at address “F05E (H)”,
Second reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL2_STPPIC) at address "F05F (H)",
3rd reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) at address “F069 (H)”,
Third reel pattern number (for stop position) at address "F06A (H)" (_NB_RL3_STPPIC)
, the initial value "11111111 (B)" (FF (H)) is stored.

The flow then advances to step S837 to set a random delay time. This processing consists of the first reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) at address "F056 (H)", the second reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL2_WAIT) at address "F061 (H)", and the counter at address "F06C (H)". A value determined by lottery is set in each of the third reel rotation start waiting counters (_CT_RL3_WAIT). Specifically, any one value from "0" to "335(D)" is determined, and the value is stored in each of the above three addresses. When a value is stored in the above address, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and when "0" is reached, the reel 31 can be restarted.

The standby effect start process shown in FIG. 143 is executed before the determination of whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed (step S766), as shown in FIG. In other words, the standby effect start process is executed even if the minimum game time has not elapsed. Then, after the standby effect is completed, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has passed in step S766. In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, since the standby effect is executed by the timer value shown in FIG. 145, the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has definitely passed when the standby effect ends.
In this way, when the waiting effect is executed, it can be started without waiting for the minimum playing time. can be reduced.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in step S752 of FIG.
First, in step S791, it is determined whether or not the waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) stored by addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)" is "0" (whether or not the zero flag is "1"). to decide. When it is "0", the process proceeds to step S792, and when it is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. In other words, as long as the waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) stored by the addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)" is not "0", even if the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 will not be stopped. don't run

The reason for such control is as follows.
In the twenty-third embodiment, non-RT or 1BB non-internal during RT1 wins 1BB with a relatively high probability (with "19930/65536"), as shown in FIGS. When 1BB is won and inside 1BB, the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a game in which a small winning combination or replay is not won in the relevant game (game where the winning and replay condition device number is "0"). It becomes possible.
On the other hand, in the twenty-third embodiment, AT is executed in a 1BB game. Therefore, when it is not AT, it is not desired to win 1BB even if it is inside 1BB. Even if 1BB is won during non-AT, the 1BB game itself is executed, but AT is not executed. In addition, since the lottery for AT is not executed while 1BB is in operation, it is disadvantageous for the player if 1BB is in operation during non-AT. When the 1BB is activated, the ball output rate is slightly higher than when the 1BB is not activated as described above.

Therefore, when the stop display of the symbol combination of 1BB is not permitted, specifically, when the main game state is not "3" (AT preparation), or even if the main game state is "3", AT standby When the flag is not "0", the symbol combination of 1BB is tense in order to prevent the symbol combination of 1BB from being stopped and displayed as much as possible (when the two reels 31 are stopped, the symbol "blue BAR" related to 1BB is displayed. In this case, the stopping operation is not effective even if the third stop switch 42 is operated.

At step S791, it is determined that the standby time is "0", and the process proceeds to step S792, where all motors are checked for index passage. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) in the A register.
(2) A logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(3) A logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the third reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(4) Add "1" to the A register value.

Here, the 1st reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC), the A register value and the 2nd reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC), and the 3rd reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) are , is "FF(H)", that is, "11111111(B)" before there is a change in the #th reel motor index.
Therefore, if at least one data is "11111111(B)", the calculation result up to the above (3) is "11111111(B)", and adding "1" as shown in (4) results in "0". become. Therefore, for at least one reel 31, before the #th reel motor index changes, the above calculation result is "0", and for all the reels 31, after the #th reel motor index changes, the above calculation result becomes "0". The calculation result is a value other than "0".

As described above, when there is a change in the #th reel motor index, the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) is set to "10 (D)" (when rising) or "0" (when falling). time) is stored. Then, every time it is determined that the symbol has moved by one symbol, "1" is subtracted from the #th reel symbol number (for the passing position). In this way, after the #th reel motor index is changed, the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) changes from "0" (00000000 (B)) to "19 (D)" (00010011 (B)). will circulate. Therefore, after the #th reel motor index changes, the logical sum operation of the above (1) to (3) will not result in "11111111 (B)".

Further, as another method of the above operation (4), there is a method of performing a logical product (AND) operation with "11100000 (B)". With this method, it is possible to determine "No" in step S793, which will be described later, when the calculation result is not "0". Furthermore, as another method of the above operation (4), there is a method of performing an operation by shifting "1" bit to the left. With this method, it is possible to determine "No" in step S793, which will be described later, when the calculation result is not "0". That is, before the #th reel motor index changes, the upper 3 bits of the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) are "111". It is determined whether or not at least one bit of them is "1". If there is "1" in the upper 3 bits, it is not possible to accept the stop of the stop switch 42 in step S793, which will be described later. becomes.

Next, in step S793, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 can be stopped. This judgment is made by judging whether or not the calculation of the above (4) in step S792 is "0" (whether the zero flag is "1"). In other words, when there is a change in the #th reel motor index for all the reels 31, acceptance of stopping the stop switch 42 is permitted.
When it is determined in step S793 that it is possible to stop the stop switch 42, the process advances to step S794.

In step S794, the operation of the stop switch 42 (corresponding to the reel 31 not yet controlled to stop) is performed based on the values of the D0 to D2 bits of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address "F017 (H)". determine whether it has been done. When it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process advances to step S795, and when it is determined that the stop switch 42 has not been operated, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In step S795, the stop position is determined based on the combination lottery result of the current game (addresses "F0A9(H)" and "F0AA(H)") and the reel position at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated.
Next, the process advances to step S796 to shift to the stop pattern set (M_STOPPIC_SET).

FIG. 147 shows the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S796 of FIG.
It is a flow chart showing.
As described above, this flowchart restricts the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination when the 1BB symbol combination is tense and the situation permits the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination. However, under a situation in which it is not desired to stop and display the 1BB symbol combination, the waiting time until the third stop switch 42 becomes effective is set. When the waiting time is set here and the third stop switch 42 is operated before the waiting time elapses, the result is "No" in step S791 of FIG. 146, and the stop control of the third reel 31 is not executed.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the stop operation of the second stop switch 42 has been performed. Here, in step S794 of FIG. 146, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 determined to have risen is the second stop switch 42 (second operated stop switch 42). When it is determined in step S801 that it is after the second stop, the process proceeds to step S802, and when it is determined that it is not after the second stop, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not 1BB can be won. Specifically, at the time of the second stop, it is determined whether or not the 1BB symbol combination is tense on the activated line. For example, when judging whether or not the tenpai has occurred, after the second reel 31 stops, both the "blue bar" (symbols constituting the symbol combination of 1BB) of the first reel 31 and the second reel 31 are on the active line. When it is stopped, it is determined that 1BB is tenpai (1BB can win). On the other hand, even before the second reel 31 stops (regardless of whether it has stopped), it may be determined whether or not to continue. For example, when the first reel 31 is stopped, the "blue bar" is stopped on the effective line, and the second stop switch 42 is operated at an operation timing when the "blue bar" of the second reel 31 can be stopped on the effective line. When it is done, it is judged that 1BB is tenpai (1BB can win).
When it is determined that 1BB can be won, the process proceeds to step S803, and when it is determined that 1BB cannot be won, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated.

In step S803, it is determined whether or not the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the current game is "0". Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the address "F0A9(H)" is "0". When it is determined that the winning and replay condition device number is "0", the process proceeds to step S804, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
Therefore, even if it is determined in step S802 that 1BB is tenpai, the waiting time is not set in step S810 because "No" is obtained in step S803 in the game when a minor combination is won. In the 23rd embodiment, in a game in which a minor winning combination is won, minor winning combination priority control is performed (in a game in which winning of 1BB is carried over, in a game in which a minor winning combination is won, priority is given to winning of a small winning combination, and 1BB is not won). is executed, 1BB is never won. Therefore, it is not necessary to set a waiting time in a game in which a small winning combination is won.
In step S804, the accessory condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) is acquired. This process is a process of acquiring the value of the address "F0AA(H)" and storing it in the A register.
In the next step S805, it is determined whether or not the obtained accessory condition device number is less than "2", in other words, whether or not it is "1". Here, a comparison operation is performed between the value of the A register and "2". End the processing according to the flowchart.

In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, unless the accessory condition device number is "1", the pattern combination of 1BB is not tense. Therefore, when the accessory condition device number is "0" in the current game, it is determined "No" in step S802.
Therefore, in step S805, it is not determined whether or not the accessory condition device number is "1" (of course, in step S805, it is determined whether or not the accessory condition device number is "1". may be acceptable), and it is determined whether or not it is less than "2".

In step S806, the main game state number is obtained. This process is a process of storing the value of the main game state (_NB_GAM_STS) at the address "F07E(H)" in the A register. Then, in step S807, it is determined whether or not the value of the A register is "3" (preparing for AT). Here, a comparison operation is performed between the A register value and "3", and if the A register value and "3" are the same value, the determination is "Yes". When determining that the main game state number is "3", the process proceeds to step S808, and when determining that it is not "3", the process proceeds to step S809.

In step S808, the value of the AT wait counter (_CT_AT_WAIT) at address "F098(H)" is obtained. Then, it is determined whether or not the AT standby counter value is "0". When the AT standby counter value is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the AT standby counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S809.
In step S809, "896(D)" is stored in the HL register. Next, in step S810, the HL register value (896(D)) is stored in the waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) of addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
When the waiting times are stored in the addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)", "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing. Also, it is determined whether or not the time set here has become "0" in step S791 of FIG.
In the above processing, when the main game state is "3" and the AT standby counter is "0", the standby time is not stored. That is, in this case, a 1BB prize is permitted.

FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S753 of FIG.
First, in step S941, main game state game end processing is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, and is a process shown in FIG. 149 to be described later.
Next, in step S942, 1BB operation management is executed. The 1BB operation management is a process of determining whether or not conditions for ending the 1BB game are satisfied when the current game is a 1BB game. Specifically, based on whether or not the D2 bit of the operation status flag (in the twenty-third embodiment, like the eleventh embodiment, includes "FL_ACTION" shown in FIG. 35) is "1", Determine whether 1BB is in operation.
When it is determined that 1BB is in operation, the obtainable number of cards during 1BB operation ("_CT_BIG_PAY" at address "F00E(H)") is read, and it is determined whether or not it is "0".
Then, when it is determined that the obtainable number has become "0" (when the obtainable number satisfies the 1BB operation end condition), a process of clearing the D2 bit of the operation state flag is executed.

Next, in step S943, it is determined whether or not the RB is in operation. Here, it is determined whether or not the RB is in operation by determining whether or not the D3 bit of the operating state flag (FIG. 35) is "0". When it is determined that the RB is not in operation (the RB operation state flag is "0"), the process proceeds to step S945, and when it is determined that the RB is in operation, the process proceeds to step S944.

In step S944, RB operation management is executed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of games played when RB is activated at address "F00F(H)" reaches "12" or the number of wins when RB is activated at address "F010(H)" reaches "8". However, when it is determined that the number of times the RB has been played is less than "12" and the number of times the minor combination has been won is less than "8", the process of step S944 is terminated and the process proceeds to step S945. On the other hand, in step S944, when it is determined that the number of times RB has been played has reached either "12" or the number of winnings of minor winning combination has reached "8", the D3 bit of the operating state flag is set to "0". , the process proceeds to step S945.
A step S945 executes advantageous section clear counter management. This processing is the processing shown in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52 shown in the eleventh embodiment, and includes the processing of updating the advantageous interval clear counter and the difference number counter, and the initialization processing when the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied. Execute. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the processing at the end of the main game state game in step S941 of FIG.
First, in step S951, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) of the addresses "F07A(H)" and "F07B(H)" is less than "600". If it is determined that it is less than "600", the process proceeds to step S952, and if it is determined that it is not less than "600", the process proceeds to step S955.
In step S952, it is determined whether or not the main game state 1 (advantageous section normal (non-AT)). This process is a process of determining whether or not the main game state number of the address "F07E(H)" is "1". When it is determined that the main game state is 1, the process proceeds to step S957, and when it is determined that the main game state is not 1, the process proceeds to step S953.

In step S953, it is determined whether or not it is the main game state 5 (AT withdrawal). This process is a process of determining whether or not the main game state number of the address "F07E(H)" is "5". When it is determined that the main game state is 5, the process proceeds to step S954, and when it is determined that the main game state is not 5, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S954, it is determined whether or not the AT withdrawal counter is "0". This process is a process of determining whether or not the value of the address "F09D(H)" is "0". When it is determined that the AT withdrawal counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S957, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

On the other hand, when proceeding from step S951 to step S955, it is determined whether or not the conditions for ending the main game state 4 are satisfied. In this process, it is determined whether or not the obtainable number of cards at address "F00E(H)" when 1BB is activated is "0". It is judged that it satisfies If it is determined that the conditions for ending the main game state 4 are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S956, and if it is determined that the conditions for ending the main game state 4 are not satisfied, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S956, it is determined whether or not the ending counter has changed from "1" to "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the ending counter of the address "F097(H)" has been updated from "1" to "0" in the current game. When it is determined that the ending counter has changed from "1" to "0", the process proceeds to step S957, and when it is determined that the ending counter has not changed from "1" to "0", the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In step S957, advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STBY) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 150, which will be described later. Then, after executing preparation for the end of the advantageous section, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STNBY) in step S957 of FIG.
In step S961, "1" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter. This process executes the following processes.
(1) Store "1 (H)" in the HL register. As a result, the H register value becomes "0 (H
)”, and the L register value becomes “1 (H)”.
(2) Next, the L register value "1 (H)" is stored in the lower address (F07B (H)) of the advantageous section clear counter, and the H register value "0 (H)" is stored in the upper address (F07A (H)). ” is stored.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. As described above, the upper byte of the advantageous section clear counter is "00000000 (B)" and the lower byte is "00000001 (B)".

By storing "1" in the advantageous interval clear counter through the above advantageous interval end preparations, it becomes unnecessary to store data indicating whether or not the advantageous interval end condition is satisfied at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
If the data indicating whether or not the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53, the capacity of the RWM 53 will be compressed accordingly.
Further, when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, a process of storing data indicating that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 is required. Furthermore, it is necessary to read the data stored in the predetermined address every game and determine whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, that much program capacity is required, and the capacity of the ROM 54 is squeezed.

On the other hand, in the twenty-third embodiment, only "1" is stored in the advantageous interval clear counter in preparation for the end of the advantageous interval. When the process is executed, the value before the subtraction is "1" and the value after the subtraction is "0". , the RWM 53 can be cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the twenty-third embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 53 of the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 151, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG.
In FIG. 151, the reel drive control in step S461 of FIG. 53 is referred to as reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) in step S841, and this specific process will be described in detail.
Also, in FIG. 151, a test signal output is provided in step S842. Note that the processing is omitted in FIG. 53 of the eleventh embodiment, and the eleventh embodiment is not necessarily provided with no test signal output.
The output of the test signal in step S842 may include the output of the data of the pressing order and the indicated position of the reel 31 in the current game. Also, for example, output of conditional device information and the like may be included, but the description is omitted in the twenty-third embodiment.

Furthermore, in the twenty-third embodiment, the interrupt cycle is "1.117" ms, which is different from the other embodiments (2.235 ms).
Here, when the interrupt period is "2.235" ms, the driving control of the reel 31 is executed for each interrupt (for example, step S461 in FIG. 53 in the eleventh embodiment). Thus, when the interrupt period is "1.117" ms, the driving control of the reel 31 (the process after step S872 in FIG. 154 described later) is executed once every two interrupts.

FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing reel driving management (I_REEL_ADM) in step S841 of FIG.
Here, the program shown in FIG. 152 (including FIGS. 153, 154 to 155, 157 and 159 which will be described later) is used not only for reel control during standby performance but also for normal reel control. Therefore, it is possible to execute normal reel control and standby effect (reverse rotation of reels 31) by the program shown in FIG. 152 without providing a program dedicated to standby effect.
In FIG. 152, the number of reels is set in step S851. The number of reels is "3". Here, a process of storing "00000100 (B)" in the C register is performed.
At the next step S852, reel control data address setting (C_RLDAT_SET) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 153, which will be described later, and is a process of storing the value of the reel driving state to be controlled or its address in each register. By the processing of step S852, each register value becomes as follows.
A register value: Reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) value of reel 31 to be controlled DE register value: Address of reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of reel 31 to be controlled HL register value: Control target Address of reel driving status (_WK_RL#_STS) of reel 31

In the next step S853, reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed. This processing is processing for actually accelerating, constant speed, decelerating, stopping, etc. of the reel, and is processing shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 described later.
In the next step S854, it is determined whether or not the processes of steps S852 and S853 have been executed for all the reels 31 or not. This process first shifts the C register value to the right by "1". For example, since the initial value is "00000100(B)" as described above, it becomes "00000010(B)" by shifting "1" to the right in the first step S854. Next, it is determined whether or not the value after shifting to the right by "1" is "0". When it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the processes of steps S852 and S853 have been executed for all the reels 31, and the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the process returns to step S852.

FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing reel control data address setting (C_RLDAT_SET) in step S852 of FIG.
First, in step S861, a start RWM address request is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), that is, "F04D(H)" in the HL register.
(2) Store the C register value in the A register. The initial value of the C register value is "00000100(B)" as described above.
(3) Shift the A register value to the right by "1" and store the result in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000010 (B)" in the first operation.
(4) Multiply the A register value by "11(D)" and store the multiplication result in the A register. Here, multiplying "00000010(B)", ie, "2(D)", by "11(D)" results in "22(D)", ie, "16(H)".

This "11(D)" is based on the address interval stored in the RWM 53. FIG. Specifically, the address for storing the drive state of the first reel is "F04D(H)", and various information about the first reel is stored up to "F057(H)". Further, the address for storing the drive state of the second reel is "F058(H)", and various information about the second reel is stored up to "F062(H)". Furthermore, the address for storing the driving state of the third reel is "F063(H)", and various information about the third reel is stored up to "F06D(H)".
In this way, the interval between the address "F04D(H)" storing the first reel driving state and the address "F058(H)" storing the second reel driving state is "11" addresses. This is because the interval from the address "F058(H)" storing the reel drive state to the address "F063(H)" storing the third reel drive state is "11" addresses. As a result, by repeatedly executing the same processing in subsequent processing, it is possible to acquire, for example, the reel driving state information of the reel to be controlled.

Further, various pieces of information for each reel 31 are also arranged at the same intervals. For example, the address of the first reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F04E(H)" obtained by adding "2" to the address "F04D(H)" in the first reel drive state. Similarly, the address of the second reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F05A(H)" obtained by adding "2" to the address "F058(H)" in the second reel drive state. Further, similarly, the address of the third reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F065 (H)" obtained by adding "2" to the address "F063 (H)" in the third reel drive state. The same applies to other information.
As a result, for example, in step S881 (FIG. 154), which will be described later, "6" is added to the address of the #th reel driving state to calculate the address of the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC). However, for the first reel 31, for example, "6" is added to the first reel drive state address "F04D (H)" to obtain the first reel symbol number (for passing position) address "F053 (H)". )” can be requested. Similarly, for the second reel 31, "6" is added to the second reel driving state address "F058(H)" to obtain the second reel pattern number (for passing position) address "F05E(H)". can be asked for.
In this way, by repeatedly executing the same module, processing for three reels can be executed.

Next, the process advances to step S862 to set designated address data. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. In the first calculation, the A register value is "16 (H)", so adding "16 (H)" to the HL register value "F04D (H)" results in "F063 (H)".
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) Store the H register value in the D register.
(4) Store the L register value in the E register.
This process
A register value: Value of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) HL register value: Address value of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (H register value is the upper address, L register value is the lower address) "F063 (H )”
DE register value: "F063 (H)" which is the address value of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (the D register value is the upper address and the E register value is the lower address)
becomes.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

The reel control data address setting (C_RLDAT_SET) in FIG. 153 is executed a total of three times until it is judged "Yes" in step S854 in FIG.
The second calculation by reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) is as follows.
(1) Step S861
a) Store the address of the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), that is, "F04D(H)" in the HL register.
b) Store the C register value in the A register. The second time, the C register value is "00000010(B)".
c) Shift the A register value right by '1' and store the result in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000001 (B)".
d) Multiply the A register value by "11(D)" and store the multiplication result in the A register. Here, multiplying "00000001(B)", ie, "1(D)", by "11(D)" results in "11(D)", ie, "0B(H)".

(2) Step S862
a) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, in the second operation, since the A register value is "0B(H)", adding "0B(H)" to the HL register value "F04D(H)" yields "F058(H)". Become.
b) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
c) Store the H register value in the D register.
d) Store the L register value in the E register.
This process
A register value: Value of second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS) HL register value: Address value of second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS) (H register value is high address, L register value is low address) "F058 (H )”
DE register value: "F058 (H)" which is the address value of the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (the D register value is the upper address and the E register value is the lower address)
becomes.

The third calculation of reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) is as follows.
(1) Step S861
a) Store the address of the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), that is, "F04D(H)" in the HL register.
b) Store the C register value in the A register. The third time, the C register value is "00000001 (B)".
c) Shift the A register value right by '1' and store the result in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000000 (B)".
d) Multiply the A register value by "11(D)" and store the multiplication result in the A register. Here, multiplying "00000000 (B)" by "11 (D)" results in "0".

(2) Step S862
a) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, since the A register value is "0" in the third calculation, adding "0" to the HL register value "F04D(H)" results in "F04D(H)".
b) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
c) Store the H register value in the D register.
d) Store the L register value in the E register.
This process
A register value: Value of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) HL register value: Address value of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (H register value is the upper address, L register value is the lower address) "F04D (H )”
DE register value: "F04D (H)" which is the address value of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (the D register value is the upper address and the E register value is the lower address)
becomes.

154 and 155 are flowcharts showing the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) in step S853 of FIG. 152. FIG. FIG. 155 is a flowchart following FIG.
In FIG. 154, in step S871, it is determined whether or not the current interrupt process is the excitation update timing. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) An exclusive OR (XOR) operation is performed on the A register value (#th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) value) and "10000000 (B)", and the operation result is stored in the A register.
As a result, when the D7 bit of the A register value before the operation is "0", it becomes "1" by the operation, and when the D7 bit of the A register value before the operation is "1", it becomes "0" by the operation. ”. Also, D0 to D6 bits do not change before and after the operation.
(2) Store the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value (address indicated by #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS)).
(3) Determine whether or not the D7 (most significant) bit stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is "0". If "0", determine that it is the excitation update timing. .

As described above, the D7 bit of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) takes a value of "0" or "1" for each interrupt process. Therefore, once every two interrupts, the D7 bit becomes "0" and the excitation update timing arrives.
When it is determined that it is the excitation update timing, the process proceeds to step S872, and when it is determined that it is not the excitation update timing, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. In other words, the process after step S872 of the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed once every two interrupts. Therefore, the counters and data that are updated in the processing after step S872 can be updated every two interrupts. Control for driving the motor 32 (output processing from the output port) is executed for each interrupt.

In the next step S872, a reel rotation start waiting counter is obtained. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Save the HL register value to the stack area.
(2) Add "9" to the HL register value to set the HL register value to the address value of the #th reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL#_WAIT).
Next, proceeding to step S873, the counter value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is counted down (subtracted by "1").
It should be noted that the # # reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL #_WAIT) stores "0" when there is no waiting effect, and when there is a waiting effect, the random delay of the # # reel 31 after the waiting effect is stored. A counter value is stored.
Then, in step S874, it is determined whether or not there is a standby at the start of reel rotation. Here, when the value before subtraction of "1" in step S873 is not "0" (when the carry flag does not become "1"), it is determined that there is no standby at the start of reel rotation, and the process proceeds to step S875. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a standby at the start of reel rotation, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S875, it is determined whether or not the reel 31 is stopped. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Restore the value saved in the stack area (the address value of the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS)) to the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is "0", it is determined that the reel 31 is stopped.
When the process proceeds to step S875, the D7 bit of #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is "0".
When it is determined in step S875 that the reels 31 are not stopped, the process proceeds to step S876, and when it is determined that the reels 31 are stopped, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S876, it is determined whether the reel 31 is accelerating or decelerating. Here, when the A register value (the value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS)) is less than "3", it is determined that the reel 31 is accelerating or decelerating.
If it is determined that the reel 31 is accelerating or decelerating, the process proceeds to step S882, and if it is determined that the reel 31 is not accelerating or decelerating, the process proceeds to step S877.

In step S877, it is determined whether the reel 31 is at a constant speed or has started to decelerate. Here, it is determined whether or not the A register value is "0". 31 determines that the speed is constant or the deceleration is not started.
If it is determined that the reel 31 is at a constant speed or has started to decelerate, the process proceeds to step S892, and if it is determined that the reel 31 is not at a constant speed or has not started to decelerate, the process proceeds to step S878.
In step S878, acceleration set processing is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register. Since the E register value is the lower address value of the reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS), this process stores the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) in the HL register.
(2) Store "2(D)" at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the value indicating the reel driving state becomes "2" (a value corresponding to acceleration).

In the next step S879, the reel driving pulse output counter and the number of reel driving pulse switching times are initialized. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "1" at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value. Here, the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value is the address of the #th reel driving pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT).
(2) Store "9" at the address indicated by adding "3" to the HL register value. Here, the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "3" to the HL register value is the address of the #th reel driving pulse switching count (_CT_RL#_PLSCHG).

Next, the process proceeds to step S880, and it is determined whether or not the standby effect is being performed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E(H)" is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the standby effect is not in progress. When it is determined that the standby effect is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S881, and when it is determined that the standby effect is being performed, the process proceeds to step S882.
In step S881, the symbol number (for passing position) and the symbol number (for stop position) are initialized. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the initial value "255(D)" (FE(H)) at the address obtained by adding "6" to the HL register value. Here, the address obtained by adding "6" to the HL register value is the address of #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).
(1) Store the initial value "255(D)" (FE(H)) at the address obtained by adding "7" to the HL register value. Here, the address obtained by adding "7" to the HL register value is the address of #th reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC).

In the next step S882, "1" is subtracted from the reel driving pulse output counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the HL register value to the address of the #th reel driving pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT).
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Next, in step S883, it is determined whether or not the reel driving pulse output counter is "0". This process determines whether or not the result of subtracting "1" in the above (2) is "0". If it is judged to be "0", the process proceeds to step S884, and if it is judged to be not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S884, it is determined whether or not the reel drive pulse switching count is "0". Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the HL register value to the address value of the #th reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL#_PLSCHG).
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) Store the A register value in the B register.
(4) When it is determined that the A register value is "0", it is determined that the reel drive pulse switching count is "0".
If it is determined that the number of reel driving pulse switching times is "0", the process proceeds to step S914 (FIG. 155), and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S885.

In step S885, "1" is subtracted from the reel drive pulse switching count. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (the address of the #th reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL#_PLSCHG)). Also, the value obtained by subtracting "1" is stored in the A register.
At the next step S886, an acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) is set.
FIG. 156 shows an acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP).
In FIG. 156, the numerical value "90 (D)" at the address "1050 (H)" indicates the pulse output counter value during deceleration. Numerical values of addresses "1058(H)" to "1051(H)" indicate the pulse output counter values of the 1st to 8th steps during acceleration.
Then, in step S886, the head address "1050 (H)" of the acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S887, specified data is obtained from the acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP). In this process, the data (pulse output counter value) stored at the address of the sum of the HL register value (1050 (H)) and the A register value (#th reel drive pulse switching count) is stored in the B register. It is a process to
Next, the flow advances to step S888 to save the reel driving pulse output counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register.
(2) Store the D register value in the H register.
By this processing, the address of the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) is stored in the HL register.
(3) Store the B register value (pulse output counter value) at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value.
Here, the address indicated by the HL register value is the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS), and the address obtained by adding "2" to this is the address of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT). be the address.

In the next step S889, it is determined whether or not acceleration has ended. In this process, it is determined whether or not the A register value (#th reel drive pulse switching count) is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the acceleration has ended. When it is determined that the acceleration has been completed, the process proceeds to step S890, and when it is determined that the acceleration has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S892.
In step S890, a constant speed is set. In this process, "5" is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (#th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS)).
In the next step S891, the reel rotation failure detection counter is cleared. This process stores "0" in the address of the value obtained by adding "4" to the HL register value (the address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD)).
In the next step S892, reel drive pulse update (I_PULSE_INC) is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 157, which will be described later.

Next, in step S893, it is determined whether or not the reel 31 is at a constant speed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register.
(2) The data stored at the address (#th reel motor index (_FL_RL#_MT_IDX)) indicated by the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is stored in the A register.
(3) Add "4" to the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD).
(4) When the data stored at the address indicated by the DE address value is "5", it is determined that the speed is constant.
Here, the address indicated by the DE register value is the address of the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) in step S888.
When it is determined that the speed is constant, the process proceeds to step S894, and when it is determined that the speed is not constant, the process proceeds to step S903.

In step S894, "1" is added to the reel rotation failure detection counter. This process is a process of adding "1" to the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S895 in FIG. 155 to determine whether or not it is time to detect reel rotation failure. This process determines whether the result of adding "1" to the reel rotation failure detection counter in step S894 is "0", and if it is "0" (when the zero flag is "1") , it is determined that the reel rotation failure is detected.
When it is determined that it is time to detect that the reel does not need to be rotated, the process proceeds to step S878, and the acceleration process is executed again. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the time when reel rotation failure is detected, the process proceeds to step S896.

In step S896, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the #th reel motor index (motor index # signal). In this process, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the motor index # signal based on the A register value (value of the #th reel motor index (_FL_RL#_MT_IDX)). If it is determined that there is no change, the process proceeds to step S903.
In step S897, the reference pattern number "10" and the reference number of steps "3" are set when passing through the index. This process is to store "10(D)" in the D register and "3(D)" in the E register.
Here, "10(D)" stored in the D register is the value stored in the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) thereafter. Also, "3(D)" stored in the E register is the value that is subsequently stored in the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of the 1 symbol on the #th reel, all of which are design values.

In the next step S898, it is determined whether or not it is time for the #th reel motor index to rise. This processing is based on the value of the A register (the value of the #th reel motor index (_FL_RL#_MT_IDX)), and when the D0 bit is "1" and the D4 bit is "0", the #th reel motor index rises. Decide it's time. If it is determined that it is time for the #th reel motor index to rise, the process proceeds to step S900, and if it is determined that it is not time for the #th reel motor index to rise, the process proceeds to step S899.

In step S899, the reference drawing number "0" and the reference number of steps "3" when passing through the index are set. This process stores "0" in the D register and stores "3(D)" in the E register. That is, "0" is stored as the value for the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC), and "3 (D )”.
In the next step S900, the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD) is cleared. This process is a process of storing "0" in the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (the address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD)).

In the next step S901, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PLUS) is obtained. This process is a process of storing in the A register the data stored at the address obtained by adding "4" to the HL register value.
Here, the HL register value is the address value of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD) as described above. The address value is (_CT_RL#_PLUS).

In the next step S902, the reference pattern number and the reference number of steps when passing the index are stored. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value at the address obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value. Here, the address of the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of the 1 symbol on the #th reel. At this address, the E register value "3" is stored.
(3) Store the D register value at the address obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value. Here, the address of the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value is the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC). At this address, the D register value ("10 (D)" set in step S897 when the #th reel motor index rises, and "0" set in step S899 when it falls) is stored. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
As described above, when steps S896 to S902 are executed, the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol on the #th reel and the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of the #th reel are displayed every time the #th reel motor index rises and falls. A reference value (design value) is set for each pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).

As described above, in the twenty-third embodiment, both the rising and falling times of the reel motor index are detected, and the step number of one pattern and the passing position pattern number are updated respectively, so only when the reel motor index rises. can be stopped before the reel 31 rotates once compared to the case of detecting . Also, even if there is a problem with the rotation of the reel 31, it can be corrected immediately.
As described above, the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed regardless of whether it is normal (forward rotation) or standby effect (reverse rotation). Therefore, in step S898, regardless of whether it is normal (forward rotation) or standby effect (reverse rotation), it is determined whether it is the rising time or not, and in step S902, the rising time or the rising Predetermined values are set depending on the time.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S893 that the speed is not constant, and when it is determined in step S896 that the #th reel motor index has not changed, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not the index has already passed (whether or not the reel sensor 33 has detected the index). Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored at the address obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value is stored in the A register.
The HL register value is the address value of the #th reel rotation detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD), and by adding "2" to this address value, the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) It becomes an address value.
(2) Add "1" to the value stored in the A register.
(3) If the result of the addition of "1" in (2) above is "0", it is determined that the #th reel motor index has not changed from the initial value and the index has not passed.

Here, as described above, the initial value "255 (D)" (FF (H)) is stored in #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC), and the #th reel motor index is stored. When the value has changed, "0" or "10(D)" is stored in step S902, and after that, "0" to "19(D)" are circulated. In other words, after the value of the #th reel motor index changes, the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) will be "255" if the reel 31 is rotating normally. (D)" (when acceleration processing is executed again due to step-out, "255(D)" is stored again as the initial value).
Therefore, if "1" is added to the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and it becomes "0", it is possible to determine that the #th reel motor index has not changed yet. becomes.

In step S903, when it is determined that the index has already passed, the process proceeds to step S904, and when it is determined that the index has not yet passed, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S904, "1" is subtracted from the number of steps for one symbol. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, the HL register value before the addition of "1" is the address value of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD). #_STEP) address value.
(2) Subtract "1" from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.

In the next step S905, it is determined whether or not the character has moved by one symbol. Here, as a result of subtracting "1" in step S904, when the value of the number of steps (_NB_RL#_STEP) for one symbol on reel # becomes "0" (when the zero flag becomes "1"), It is judged that one symbol has moved. When it is determined that the character has moved by one symbol, the process proceeds to step S906, and when it is determined that the character has not moved by one symbol (the subtraction result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S909.
In step S906, the number of steps per symbol "16 (D)" is saved. This process is a process of storing "16 (D)" in the address indicated by the HL register value (number of steps for one symbol on reel # (_NB_RL#_STEP)).

In the next step S907, the symbol number is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the HL register value and store the added value in the HL register. As a result, the address indicated by the HL register value becomes #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).
(2) Perform special addition processing to add "1" to the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Here, the "special addition process" means that, in this example, the upper limit is set to "19 (D)" (corresponding to the maximum value of the symbol number), and "19 (D)" is set to "1 (D)". It is an operation that becomes "0" when added. Specifically, the calculation is performed as follows.
Example 1) 0+1=1
Example 2) 10+1=11
Example 3) 19+1=0
Thus, it is possible to circulate between "0" to "19(D)" without determining whether or not the symbol number is the maximum value.

Next, the process proceeds to step S908 to correct the number of steps per symbol. In step S906, "16 (D)" is stored as the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) for one symbol on reel #.
Here, in the twenty-third embodiment, the number of steps for one symbol is set to "16" for the four symbols having symbol numbers "2", "7", "12", and "17", and the other 16 symbols. , the number of steps for one symbol is set to "17".
Therefore, in step S908, the symbol number after the update in step S907 is determined. "16 (D)" stored in the symbol step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) is maintained. On the other hand, when the symbol number is other than the above four symbol numbers, "17 (D)" is stored in the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol on the #th reel.
The number of steps for one rotation of the reel 31 is set to "336" in accordance with the number of steps of the motor 32. FIG. Also, the number of symbols is "20". Therefore, by setting the number of steps to "16" for 4 symbols and the number of steps to "17" for 16 symbols,
16×4+17×16=336
is set to be

In the next step S909, it is determined whether or not the deceleration start symbol position has been reached. Here, in order to compare the passing pattern number and the deceleration start pattern, the following processing is executed.
(1) "1" is subtracted from the HL register value (#th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC)), and the result of the subtraction is taken as the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) for one symbol on the #th reel.
Furthermore, the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register. The reason why the number of steps for one symbol of #th reel is stored in the B register is that it is used in the process of deceleration start check (I_REDUCE_CHK) in step S910 which will be described later.
(2) Add "1" to the HL register value, and use the result of the addition as the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).
(3) Store the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(4) Add "1" to the HL register value, and use the result of the addition as the HL register value.
(5) Compare the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (#th reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) and the A register value, and if the values are the same, judge "Yes" do.

In the next step S910, deceleration start check (I_REDUCE_CHK) is executed. This processing is to check whether or not the conditions for starting deceleration are satisfied, and is processing shown in FIG. 159 to be described later.
Then, in the next step S911, it is determined whether or not it is time to start deceleration. In this process, when the zero flag is "1" as a result of the deceleration start check in step S910, it is determined that deceleration is started.
Although the details will be described later, when the standby effect type is "0", the zero flag is "1". In addition, when the standby effect type is not "0" (reverse rotation standby effect), the # # reel designated symbol position search waiting time (TM2_TAR#_WAIT) is "0" and the current number of steps is "13" ( design value), the zero flag becomes "1".

When it is determined that it is time to start deceleration, the process proceeds to step S912, and when it is determined that it is not time to start deceleration, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S912, deceleration is set. This process is a process of storing "1" in the A register.
In the next step S913, deceleration pulse data is set (four phases ON). This process is a process of storing "00001111 (B)" in the B register.
In the next step S914, the reel drive state is set. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the DE register value. Here, the DE register value is the address of the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS). As a result, the #th reel drive state becomes "1" (a value indicating deceleration).

Next, in step S915, a reel driving pulse is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#).
In the next step S916, it is determined whether or not the state has changed from the deceleration start state to the deceleration state. In this process, it is determined whether or not the B register value is "0". If it is determined that the vehicle is decelerating from the start of deceleration, the process proceeds to step S917, and if it is determined otherwise, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
As described above, "00001111(B)" is stored in the B register in step S913, so when the process proceeds to step S916 via step S913, it is determined that the value is not "0", and deceleration is being performed from the start of deceleration. It is determined that On the other hand, when it is judged "Yes" in step S884 and the process proceeds to step S914, the B register value is "0" in step S884, so it is judged "No" in step S916.
In step S917, an output request is set when reel rotation is stopped. This process is for transmitting the symbol number of the reel 31 to be stopped to the sub-control board 80 . Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing reel drive pulse update (I_PULSE_INC) in step S892 of FIG.
First, in step S921, "1" is added to the reel drive pulse data search counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "8" to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, the HL register value before the addition of "8" is the address value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS), and when "8" is added, the HL register value becomes the #th reel drive pulse data search It becomes the address value of the counter (_CT_RL#_PULS).
(2) Add "1" to the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Here, for example, when the value stored in the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS) is "255 (D)", the result of adding "1" is "0". becomes.

Next, the process advances to step S922 to add search counter update correction data. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value of the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) at the address "F09F(H)" in the A register. Here, when the value of the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) is "0", it means forward rotation data, and when it is "FE (H)", it means reverse rotation data. means that
(2) Add the A register value to the value (#th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS)) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the addition result in the A register.

Here, since the A register value is "0" when the reel 31 is rotating forward, the A register value becomes the same value as the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value before addition.
On the other hand, when the reel 31 is rotating in the reverse direction, the A register value is "FE (H)". ” is subtracted.
for example,
Value stored at address indicated by HL register value: 100 (D)
A register value: FE(H) or 254(D)
when
The A register value becomes "98(D)".

In the next step S923, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS) is updated. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value.
By the processing of steps S921 to S923 described above, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS) is incremented by "1" during forward rotation, and decremented by "1" during reverse rotation.
Next, in step S924, a reel drive pulse data search offset is generated. This process is a process of executing a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "00000111(B)". Then, the result of the AND operation is stored in the A register.
The A register value is the value of the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS), and is a value that ranges from "0" to "255 (D)". When this value and "00000111(B)" are ANDed, the result of the operation is a value from "0" to "7".

Specifically, for example, it is as follows.
Example 1) When the A register value is "00000000(B)", ANDing it with "00000111(B)" yields "00000000(B)".
Example 2) When the A register value is "00000010(B)", ANDing it with "00000111(B)" yields "00000010(B)".
Example 3) When the A register value is "000100001(B)", ANDing it with "00000111(B)" yields "00000001(B)".
Example 4) When the A register value is "111111111(B)", ANDing it with "00000111(B)" yields "00000111(B)".
That is, the maximum value after the logical product (AND) operation is "00000111 (B)" (7 (D)).

Next, in step S925, a reel drive pulse table is set. This process is to store the address of the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in the HL register.
FIG. 158 shows a reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE). As shown in FIG. 158, the reel driving pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) stores eight types of reel driving pulse data. The upper 4 bits (D4 to D7 bits) of the reel driving pulse data are unused bits. The D0 bit corresponds to φ0 data, the D1 bit corresponds to φ1 data, the D2 bit corresponds to φ2 data, and the D3 bit corresponds to φ3 data. "1" indicates ON, and "0" indicates OFF.
For example, "00001001(B)" stored at address "1100(H)" means that φ0 and φ3 are on. φ0 to φ3 correspond to the excitation phases of a four-phase stepping motor.
Then, in step S925, "1100 (H)", which is the head address of the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE), is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S926, reel drive pulse data is acquired. In this processing, the result of adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as the HL register value, and the value of the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register.
Here, the A register value is the offset value generated in step S924 (a value obtained by converting the reel drive pulse in the range of "0" to "255(D)" into "0" to "7").
For example, when the A register value is "1", the value "00000001 (B)" of "1101 (H)" obtained by adding "1 (H)" to the HL register value "1100 (H)" is stored in the B register. Remember.
Next, in step S927, reel drive pulse data is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing deceleration start check (I_REDUCE_CHK) in step S910 of FIG.
First, in step S931, it is determined whether or not the standby effect type is "0". Here, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E(H)" is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined as "Yes". to end the processing according to this flowchart. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S932.
In step S932, it is determined whether or not the search waiting time is "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the #th reel designated symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR#_WAIT) is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S933. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S933, the deceleration start step number "13 (D)" is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set "13 (D)" in the A register.
(2) Perform a comparison operation with the B register value.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
The B register value is the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) for one symbol on the #th reel stored in step S909 of FIG. Then, when the result of the comparison operation is "0", the zero flag becomes "1". When the zero flag becomes "1", "Yes" is determined in step S911 in FIG. In other words, it is set to start deceleration when the current number of steps reaches "13 (D)" (design value).

Next, control specific to the twenty-third embodiment of the sub-control board 80 will be described.
(1) Output of immersion prevention In the 23rd embodiment, an immersion prevention output may be performed after the end of one AT set and before the start of the next set. In the twenty-third embodiment, "output to prevent addiction" corresponds to displaying an image such as "Pachinko/pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. Beware of addiction." do. It should be noted that not only the image display but also voice output such as "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game to be enjoyed moderately. Be careful not to become addicted." Only image display, only sound, both image display and sound may be performed, but it is understood that it is preferable to perform at least image display.
Since the addiction prevention output is generally executed when a certain number of medals or more are paid out, in the twenty-third embodiment, one set of AT (main game state 4, 1BB operation) is completed. When the immersion prevention output condition is satisfied, the immersion prevention output is executed.

FIG. 160 is a flow chart for controlling the sub-control board 80's immersion prevention output during AT.
First, in step S971, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. When it is determined that AT is being performed, the process proceeds to step S972, and when it is determined that AT is not being performed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
The sub control board 80 receives commands regarding the main game state from the main control board 50 . When a command indicating that the main game state is "4" is received, it is determined that AT is in progress.

In step S972, it is determined whether or not a notice to continue AT has been output. In the twenty-third embodiment, when the next AT is determined, in other words, when the AT set counter is equal to or greater than "1", a notification indicating that the next AT will also be performed is provided during the AT. It has a case of outputting (notifying AT continuation) and a case of not outputting.
The sub control board 80 receives a command for the AT set number counter from the main control board 50 . When the next AT is not determined (when the AT set number counter is "0"), there is no case of outputting the AT continuation notification, but when the next AT is determined (when the AT set number is When the counter is "1" or more), for example, it is decided by lottery or the like whether or not to output the AT continuation notification. When it is decided to output the AT continuation notification, an effect for outputting the AT continuation notification is selected and the effect is output.

An example of outputting the AT continuation notification includes, for example, a presentation in which the main character and the enemy character face each other and the main character wins. When the main character and the enemy character face each other and an effect is output in which the main character wins, the next AT is determined and the AT does not end with the current AT (however, it is not possible to finish the AT with the announced push order). If the player does not operate the stop switch 42, there is a possibility that the advantageous interval itself will end during the current AT due to the advantageous interval clear counter management. In addition, when the main character and the enemy character confront each other and an effect is output in which the main character loses, the AT may end with the current AT or may continue.

When it is determined in step S972 that the AT continuation notification has been output, the process proceeds to step S973, and when it is determined that the AT continuation notification has not been output, the process proceeds to step S974.
In step S973, the AT continuation notification flag is turned on. The AT continuation notification flag is provided in the storage area of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, and is a flag for determining whether or not the AT continuation has been notified.

In step S974, it is determined whether or not one set of AT has been completed. This judgment is based on the command transmitted from the main control board 50, when the end condition of the main game state "4" is satisfied (at the end of the operation of the 1BB game (at the end of the game)), one set of AT is determined to have ended. When it is determined that one set of AT has been completed, the process advances to step S975, and when it is determined that it has not been completed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S975, it is determined whether or not the AT continuation notification flag is ON. When it is determined that the AT continuation notification flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S976, and when it is determined to be on, the process proceeds to step S977.

In step S976, an AT end effect is output. Here, the "AT end effect" is a effect suggesting that the AT is terminated and the game is shifted to a non-AT. Therefore, even if the AT set number counter is "1" or more at this time, if the AT continuation notification flag is not ON, in other words, if the AT continuation notification is not output during the current set of AT, Output AT end effect. It should be noted that even if the AT end effect is output, the AT does not necessarily end.

Next, the process advances to step S978 to output the immersion prevention effect described above.
In the next step S979, it is determined whether or not there is an AT set number (whether or not the AT set number counter is "1" or more). When it is determined that there is no AT set number, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an AT set number, the process proceeds to step S980.
In step S980, an AT resurrection effect is output. That is, in step S976, the AT end effect is output, but the reverse effect for negating the AT end effect is output.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the AT continuation notification flag is ON in step S975, the process advances to step S977 to clear the AT continuation notification flag, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. When the process goes through step S977, the AT continuation notification has already been output, so there is no need to output the AT resurrection effect as in step S980. However, at the end of one set of AT, it is of course possible to output a new effect indicating that the AT will continue.

Also, the AT end effect in step S976, the addiction prevention effect in step S978, and the AT revival effect in step S980 may be sequentially output at predetermined time intervals without being operated by the player. Alternatively, after outputting the AT end effect and the addiction prevention effect, wait for the operation of the player's operation switch (bet switch 40, start switch 41, settlement switch 43), and when the operation switch is operated, go to step S979 You may proceed.
Further, the immersion prevention output in step S978 is ensured for a certain period of time. For example, when proceeding to step S978, a predetermined timer value is set, the predetermined timer value is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and the processing of step S978 is performed on the condition that the predetermined timer value becomes "0". Terminate.
Specifically, it is preferable that the immersion prevention output continues for at least 3 seconds.
If the power is turned off while the immersion prevention is being output, the immersion prevention is not output when the power is restored. When the power is turned off while the immersion prevention is being output and then the power is restored, the predetermined timer value is cleared (cleared).

Therefore, even if the specification is such that the process proceeds from step S978 to step S979 when the operation switch is operated, if the predetermined timer value is not "0" at the time the operation switch is operated, step Continue to output the immersion prevention in S978. Then, when the predetermined timer value becomes "0", the process proceeds to step S979.
Further, after starting the immersion prevention output in step S978, even if the predetermined timer value becomes "0", if the operation switch is not operated, the immersion prevention output may be maintained, or , the screen may be switched to a demo screen, such as displaying the logo mark of the gaming machine manufacturer.

Further, when the 1BB game ends, the main control board 50 executes wait processing (also referred to as “freeze processing” or “standby processing”) for about one second. During the period in which this wait process is being executed, control based on the operation is not executed even if any operation switch is operated. Also, the blocker 45 is controlled to return the medals even if the medals are inserted while this wait process is being executed. The control by the main control board 50 differs from the control by the sub-control board 80 because the power is turned off during execution of this wait process (for example, 0.3 seconds after the start of the wait process). After that, when the power is restored (when the power is restored without shifting to the setting change mode), the wait processing is continued. The timer managed by the main control board 50 side is not cleared when the power is turned off during the wait process and then the power is restored (the power is restored without shifting to the setting change mode). On the other hand, the timer value of the wait process is cleared when the power supply returns to the setting change mode.

By controlling as described above, the addiction prevention output is ensured for a certain period of time, so that the addiction prevention image display can be reliably shown to the player.
It should be noted that the wait processing by the main control board 50 is for about one second, and if the immersion prevention output is for about 3 seconds, even if the immersion prevention output is in progress, the operation of the operation switch is valid after the wait processing is completed. become. Therefore, when the operation switch is operated immediately after the end of the wait process, the next effect may be executed while continuing the immersion prevention output. For example, after starting the output of prevention of immersion in step S978, the wait process by the main control board 50 is completed, the operation switch becomes effective, and for example, based on the operation of the bed switch 40, the AT revival effect of step S980 is output. In such a case, the AT revival performance is output while the immersion prevention is output.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the condition for outputting the immersion prevention is that the AT end effect is output. Therefore, in the case of "Yes" in step S975, since the AT end effect is not output (because step S976 is not executed), the immersion prevention display is not output either.

As described above, at the end of one set of AT, when the player is notified of the continuation of the next AT (when the player knows the continuation of AT), the addiction prevention output is not executed, In other cases, the immersion prevention is output on the condition that the AT end screen is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it impossible to determine the continuation of the AT from the presence or absence of the immersion prevention output.
In other words, if the AT is terminated when the immersion prevention is output and is not terminated if the immersion prevention is not output, the continuation of the AT can be known by the presence or absence of the immersion prevention output.
In addition, when the player knows that the AT will continue, even if the output for prevention of immersion is not very effective, there is an effect that unnecessary output is not required.

(2) Output of confrontation effect (variation of output timing of the end of effect)
In the twenty-third embodiment, during the AT, there is a case where a confrontation effect is output as an effect indicating whether or not the AT will continue next time.
The confrontation production of the twenty-third embodiment is a production showing that the main character and the enemy character face each other, and if the main character wins, the AT will continue next time as well. Here, when an effect in which the main character side character wins is output, it means that the above-described AT continuation notification is output, and the AT continuation notification flag is turned on. On the other hand, if the enemy character wins, it is not confirmed that the AT will continue next time. However, even if the enemy character wins, it does not mean that AT ends in this set. When the enemy character wins, the AT continuation notification flag is not turned on at that time.

In the case of outputting a confrontation effect, in a game for outputting the ending of the confrontation effect (an effect indicating whether or not the main character will win), the output timing of the effect is controlled as follows.
First, in a game that outputs an effect indicating whether or not the main character will win, the timer starts counting when the start switch 41 is operated. Timer measurement is performed by the timer of the sub-main board of the sub-control boards 80 . In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 consists of a sub-main board and an image control board (sub-sub-board) which belongs to the sub-main board and is specialized for controlling the image display device 23. Prepare.

Next, the sub-main board of the sub-control board 80 receives a command from the main control board 50 indicating that all reels 31 have stopped. The sub-main board judges whether or not the timer value has passed 10 seconds, and when it judges that 10 seconds have passed, the sub-sub board issues a command to allow the image to proceed (whether the main character wins or not). or, in other words, a command for permitting the output of the ending of the confrontation presentation). When the sub-sub board receives the command, it outputs an effect indicating whether or not the main character will win.
On the other hand, when the command indicating that all the reels 31 have stopped is received and the timer value has not passed 10 seconds, the game waits until the timer value passes 10 seconds. Then, when the timer value has passed 10 seconds, the sub-main board transmits the above command to the sub-sub-board.
Note that "10 seconds" is an example, and various settings such as 5 seconds and 15 seconds are possible.

FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing control of the confrontation effect output.
First, in step S991, it is determined whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When the start switch 41 is operated, a command indicating that the start switch 41 has been operated is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 (sub-main board). , the start switch 41 is operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S992.
Here, when the sub-main board receives a command indicating that the start switch 41 is operated, it selects a performance to be output in the game this time and transmits a command corresponding to the selected performance to the sub-sub board. The sub-sub board controls the output of the effect based on the received command (command corresponding to the effect). Also, when the sub-main board receives a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated from the main control board 50, it transmits a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated to the sub-sub-board. When the sub-sub board receives a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the sub-sub board switches the performance as necessary (there may be no switching depending on the content of the performance).

In step S992, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game for outputting the ending of the confrontation effect. In this process, the confrontation effect has already been output before the previous game, and it is determined whether or not the current game corresponds to the game for outputting the effect indicating the end of the confrontation effect. When it is determined that the game is for outputting the ending of the confrontation effect, the process proceeds to step S993, and when it is determined that the game is not for outputting the ending of the confrontation effect, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S993, the sub-main board sets a timer value. Then, the timer value is decremented for each interrupt process. For example, assuming that the sub-main board has an interrupt period of 1 ms, the timer value may be set to "10000 (D)" and decremented by "1" each time an interrupt is processed. Then, the process proceeds to step S994.
In step S994, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. When all reels 31 stop, a command indicating that all reels 31 have stopped is transmitted from main control board 50 to sub-control board 80 (sub-main board) (hereinafter referred to as "all reels stop command"). Therefore, when the all reels stop command is received, it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped. When it is determined that the all-reels stop command has been received, the process proceeds to step S995.

It should be noted that determination as to whether or not all reels 31 have stopped in the main process is executed in step S289 of FIG.
Here, it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped for the following patterns.
(1) When the level data of the stop switch 42 operated for the final stop is OFF.
(2) When the level data of all stop switches 42 is off.
(3) When the level data of all the stop switches 42 are off and the level data of the other switches (the bed switch 40, the start switch 41, and the settlement switch 43) are off.
(4) In addition to any of the above (1) to (3), when the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) for all the reels 31 is information (“0”) indicating stop.
In the twenty-third embodiment, when the above conditions (2)+(4) are satisfied, the main control board 50 determines that all the reels 31 have stopped, and transmits an all reel stop command to the sub-main board. .

In step S995, it is determined whether or not the timer value has become "0". When it is determined that the timer value has not reached "0", it waits until it is determined that the timer value has reached "0". Then, when it is determined that the timer value has become "0", the process proceeds to step S996. In step S996, the sub-main board transmits to the sub-sub board a command permitting the output of the ending of the confrontation effect. When the sub-sub board receives the command, it outputs the ending of the confrontation effect. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As described above, when the timer value is "0" when the all reels stop command is received (when 10 seconds or more have passed since the operation of the start switch 41), the confrontation occurs after receiving the all reels stop command. The ending of the performance is output. On the other hand, if the timer value is not "0" when the all reels stop command is received, the timer waits for the timer value to become "0" even after receiving the all reels stop command. , the ending of the confrontation production is output.
In the twenty-third embodiment, even after the timer value reaches "0", the ending of the confrontation effect is not output until the all-reels stop command is received. , the ending of the confrontation effect may be output even before receiving the all-reel stop command.

As described above, the all reels stop command is issued when the level data of all the stop switches 42 is off and the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of all the reels 31 is information indicating stop. It is configured to be transmitted from the control board 50 to the sub-main board.
As a result, in a game in which the ending of the confrontation effect is output, the player presses and holds the last stop switch 42 (meaning the stop switch 42 operated (or operated) last; the same shall apply hereinafter), and releases the timing. (provided that 10 seconds have elapsed since the start switch 41 was operated), it is possible to output the ending of the confrontation effect.
Therefore, if the player who does not want to see the end of the confrontation effect immediately continues to press the last stop switch 42 (unless he releases his hand), the end of the confrontation effect will not be output. Then, at the timing when the hand is released from the last stop switch 42, the ending of the confrontation presentation can be output.
On the other hand, not limited to this, the all-reels stop command may be transmitted when the last stop switch 42 is turned on (when the rising data of the last stop switch 42 is turned on). By doing so, it is possible to output the ending of the confrontation effect at the timing when the last stop switch 42 is turned on.

(3) Volume setting In the twenty-third embodiment, the volume from the speaker 22 can be set. Tone setting includes an administrator (store manager) mode in which an installation manager (hall manager) of the slot machine 10 sets tone, and a player mode in which a player playing a game on the slot machine 10 sets tone. .
In FIG. 162, (A) shows an image display by the image display device 23 showing the administrator mode related to tone setting, and (B) shows an image display by the image display device 23 showing the player mode related to tone setting. FIG. 10 shows.

In (A) in the figure, when the power is turned on/off, the administrator mode tone setting is a setting change state that can be executed by turning on the setting key switch and turning the power on/off, or the setting key It is one of the system menus that can be executed under at least one of the setting confirmation states that can be executed by turning on the switch.
There are three volume levels that can be selected for the administrator mode: "loud", "standard", and "low" (of course, the volume is not limited to these three levels).
When the manager selects the volume using the cross key of the slot machine 10 and presses the chance button, the volume is determined.
Here, although not shown in FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 has a cross key (also referred to as a “selection button”) and a chance button (also referred to as a “effect button” and a “determination button”). properly connected. The cross key is a switch operated when moving the cursor position on a menu screen or the like. In addition, the chance button is a switch that is operated when developing the effect, and is also used as a switch that is operated when deciding the target selected on the menu screen or the like.

Also, in administrator mode, when the volume is changed using the cross key, the test sound is output at the changed volume. The type of test sound may be, for example, a cursor movement sound, or a predetermined sound (pattern) may be output. For example, if the currently selected volume is "Normal" and the cursor position is changed from "Volume" to "Large" by operating the four-way controller, the test will be performed at the volume corresponding to "Large". output sound. This enables the administrator to grasp how "loud" the volume is. Similarly, when the cursor position is changed from "normal" to "small", the test sound is output at the volume corresponding to "small". In this way, the administrator can confirm the level of the set volume.

Also, the volume of the test sound is based on the volume of a predetermined effect sound. Here, the "predetermined effect sound" includes, for example, a game start sound output when the start switch 41 is operated, a stop sound output when the stop switch 42 is operated, a pattern combination tenpai sound, a prize winning sound ( or payout sound), BGM sound during AT, and the like.
Therefore, for example, when the volume is set to "normal" in the administrator mode and "volume 3" in the player mode, which will be described later, the volume of the test sound is 80 decibels. The volume of the predetermined effect sound is also set to approximately 80 decibels. On the other hand, the error sound will be described later.

Further, when "large" is selected in the administrator mode, even if the cross key is operated to move the cursor position further upward, the cursor position remains "large". However, when "loud" is selected and the cross key is operated to move the cursor upward, the test sound is output again at the volume corresponding to "loud".
Then, when any one of "loud", "standard", and "low" volume is selected, if the chance button is operated, that volume may be determined. When any one of "high", "standard", and "low" volume is selected, "close" can be selected by moving the cursor position to the right with the cross key. If the cursor position is "closed" and the chance button is operated, the volume may be determined. In this case, the administrator mode volume setting is terminated and the system menu (not shown) is returned to. Also, if the cursor position can be moved to the setting of other items (for example, energy saving mode, etc.) instead of "Close", move the cursor position to "Setting of other items" and operate the chance button. Then, the volume indicated by the cursor position at that time may be determined. In this case, the volume setting in the administrator mode is ended, and the setting of other items (not shown) is performed.

The volume selected by the administrator mode is configured to be stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 . This predetermined area is configured so as not to be erased by changing settings or turning off the power. With this configuration, once the volume is set, the hall side can save the work of setting the volume again. Further, even if an unrecoverable error occurs on the main control board 50 side and the storage area containing the set values is initialized by clearing the RWM 53 due to the setting change, the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80 The predetermined area may not be initialized. Also, when selecting the volume in the administrator mode, for example, when the cross key is set to "loud" from among "loud", "standard", and "low", "loud" corresponds to the predetermined area. Alternatively, data corresponding to "loud" may be stored in the predetermined area when the volume is determined.

After the volume is set in the manager mode as described above, the player can set the volume during game standby. FIG. 162(B) shows the display screen (player mode) at this time.
For example, when the cross key is operated during game standby, a menu screen is displayed (not shown in FIG. 162), and by selecting "tone setting" from the menu screen, it is possible to shift to the volume setting screen.
The volume setting in the player mode can be set in five levels from "volume 1" to "volume 5". Selecting the volume by moving the cursor with the cross key and confirming the volume with the chance button are the same as in the administrator mode. In the administrator mode, a test sound corresponding to the selected sound volume is output each time the cursor is moved, but in the player mode, this is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a test sound corresponding to the selected volume may be output in the player mode as in the administrator mode.

FIG. 162(C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the volume setting value in the administrator mode and the volume setting value in the player mode. In the figure, for example, the volume is set to "100" (reference value) when the volume is set to "loud" in the administrator mode and "volume 5" in the player mode. Note that each numerical value shown in FIG. 162(C) indicates a value corresponding to the sound volume, and does not indicate a decibel (dB) itself.
In the example of FIG. 162(C), the maximum volume is "100" and the minimum volume is "20". Note that the volume in each mode and the range between the maximum value and the minimum value are not limited to this, and various settings can be made.
As shown in FIG. 162(C), one of the characteristic points of the twenty-third embodiment is that when the player selects "volume 1", the volume is set to "loud" in the administrator mode. Even if it is, the minimum volume is set to "20". Thus, when the lowest volume (volume 1) is selected in the player mode volume setting, the volume is set to the lowest volume regardless of the volume setting value in the administrator mode.

In other words,
a) When the volume is set to "loud" in the administrator mode and set to "volume 1 (minimum volume)" in the player mode (setting pattern A);
b) when the volume is set to "normal" in the administrator mode and "volume 1 (minimum volume)" in the player mode (setting pattern B);
c) When the volume is set to "low" in the administrator mode and "volume 1 (minimum volume)" in the player mode (setting pattern C), and are both "20" and the same.
However, it is not limited to this, but it is set to be slightly different, such as setting the volume for setting pattern A to "22", setting the volume for setting pattern B to "21", and setting the volume for setting pattern C to "20". You may
In any case, the volumes of the predetermined effect sounds output in the case of the setting patterns A to C are substantially the same (“substantially the same” is a concept including “the same”). For example, when the maximum volume is "100", the minimum volume is within the range of "±3" with "20" as the reference.

Therefore, if the player wants to play the game at the lowest possible volume, he or she selects "volume 1" to play the game at the minimum volume without being affected by the difference in volume setting between halls. can be done.
It should be noted that the minimum volume of "20" is set so that a player with normal hearing can hear the character's lines, the correct answer sequence, "Aim!" audible volume.

As shown in FIG. 162(C), one of the characteristic points of the twenty-third embodiment is the degree of change in volume. For example, if the volume is set to "normal" in the administrator mode and the volume is changed from "volume 1" to "volume 2" in the player mode, the volume will change from "20" to "50" (increase amount "30"). On the other hand, if the volume is changed from "volume 4" to "volume 5" in the player mode, the volume changes from "80" to "90" (increase amount "10"). In this way, when changing from the minimum volume "volume 1" to "volume 2", the amount of increase is greater than when changing from a volume other than "volume 1" to a volume one step higher. is set. Therefore, by changing the volume from the minimum volume to another volume, it is possible to immediately change the volume to a larger one.
In the example of FIG. 162(C), when the volume is set to "Low" in the administrator mode, when the volume is changed from "Volume 1" to "Volume 2" in the player mode, "Volume The amount of increase in volume is set to "5" in each of the cases where the volume is changed from a volume other than "1" to a one-step higher volume. As described above, depending on the volume setting in the administrator mode, it is not always the case that the greatest amount of increase occurs when the volume is changed from "volume 1" to "volume 2" in the player mode.
On the other hand, when the volume is set to "low" in the administrator mode, the volume in the player mode is set to, for example,
Volume 1:20
Volume 2:30
Volume 3:35
Volume 4:40
Volume 5:45
It is also possible to set such that the amount of increase is greatest when changing from "volume 1" to "volume 2".

In the twenty-third embodiment, if the volume is not set in the player mode after setting the volume in the administrator mode, the default volume is set to "volume 5" in the player mode.
Further, when the game is not played (play standby state) for 10 minutes, the previous volume setting in the player mode is cleared, and the default "volume 5" is restored. This is to return the volume to the default when the players are replaced. Therefore, the player mode default may be "volume 3" or the like.
Further, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on/off, the player mode volume is set to the default "volume 5".
On the other hand, the administrator mode volume is kept at the previous value unless it is reset. For example, when the volume is set to "low" in the administrator mode, the volume is maintained at "low" even after the power is turned on/off, the setting is changed, and the setting is confirmed.

FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing control of volume setting in administrator mode.
First, in step S1001, the current volume is read. For example, "0" for "small", "1" for "standard", and "2" for "large" are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 83, and this volume setting data is read. The process then advances to step S1002 to display the current sound volume as an image. For example, when the volume data stored in the RWM 83 is "1", an image is displayed indicating that the current set value is "standard" as in the example of FIG. 162(A).
Next, the process advances to step S1003 to determine whether or not the cross key has been operated. If it is determined that it has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1004, and if it is determined that it has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the volume setting can be changed. For example, when the current volume is set to "standard" and the cross key is used to select a higher volume, it is determined that the volume setting can be changed. On the other hand, when the current volume is set to "high" and the cross key is used to select a higher volume, it is determined that the volume setting cannot be changed. If it is determined that the volume setting can be changed, the process proceeds to step S1005, and if it is determined that the volume setting cannot be changed, the process proceeds to step S1006.
In step S1005, the volume setting value is updated. As described above, when the current volume is set to "normal", the volume setting is updated to "loud" when the cross key is used to select a higher volume. Then, the process proceeds to step S1006.

In step S1006, a test sound is output at the currently set volume. As described above, for example, when the volume is changed from "normal" to "loud", the test sound is output at the volume corresponding to the changed "loud". On the other hand, for example, when the current volume is set to "loud" and a higher volume is selected with the cross key ("No" in step S1004), the current volume is set to "loud". Outputs a test sound at a volume corresponding to
Next, the process advances to step S1007 to determine whether or not the chance button has been operated. When it is determined that the chance button has been operated, the processing according to this flowchart (volume setting in administrator mode) is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the chance button has not been operated, the process returns to step S1003.

The volume setting described above is for a predetermined effect sound. On the other hand, the volume of the error (recoverable error and non-recoverable error) sound is fixed and is configured so as not to change depending on the volume setting in the manager mode or player mode. This is because, for example, it is conceivable that the person who performs the act of cheating sets the volume to the minimum volume in the above-described player mode before performing the act of cheating.
For example, the error sound may be uniformly set to a volume corresponding to "100" when set to "loud" in the administrator mode and set to "5" in the player mode ( For example, the error sound is uniformly set to "90" decibels, etc.).
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the error sound volume cannot be changed in the player mode, it may be possible to set the error sound volume in the administrator mode. However, even if the error sound is set to the lowest volume in the administrator mode, the error sound is set to a volume sufficient to reach the surroundings.
Also, when the volume (“loud”, “standard”, “low”) is set in the administrator mode shown in FIG. The volume may be changed according to the volume). Alternatively, a dedicated menu screen for setting the volume of the error sound may be provided in the administrator mode.

(4) Effect when 1BB symbol combination is tense When 1BB is tense, the sub-control board 80 outputs a flash (light emission by the effect lamp 21) and a tenpai sound (sound from the speaker 22). The flash and tenpai sounds are executed regardless of whether the conditions for transition to main game state 4 (AT, 1BB operation) are met. As a result, the player can know the fact that 1BB is tense even when 1BB is tense by chance while the game is progressing casually.

Furthermore, as described above, when the 1BB is tenpai, when the conditions for shifting to the main game state 4 are satisfied, even if the third stop switch 42 is operated, the stop operation of the third reel 31 is not accepted. Although the time is not set, when the conditions for shifting to the main game state 4 are not satisfied, the standby time is set (steps S809 to S810 in FIG. 147). As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning of 1BB due to the player's unexpected stop operation.

Also, if the conditions for shifting to AT are satisfied, as described above, "Aim for 'Blue BAR'! ” is displayed, and a voice saying “Aim” is also output.
Here, since there are many cases in which the condition for transition to the main game state 4 is not satisfied during the game, when the above-described flash and tenpai sound are output each time 1BB is tenpai, the player will: It is also conceivable that the flash and the tenpai sound may be recognized as an effect for avoiding the winning of 1BB.
However, if the conditions for transition to main game state 4 are satisfied, "Aim for 'Blue BAR'! ' and the sound of 'Aim' are output, the player can recognize that 1BB can be won in the game this time, even if the flash and the tenpai sound are output at the same time. can.

When 1BB is tenpai, flash and tenpai sounds are output when the conditions for transition to the main game state 4 are not satisfied, and when the conditions for transition to the main game state 4 are satisfied, these flashes and tenpai are output. It is conceivable that no sound is output. However, since the effect for not stopping the symbol combination is not legally permitted, in the twenty-third embodiment, when 1BB is tenpai, regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the main game state 4 are met. Flash and tenpai sounds are output uniformly.

(5) Effect during 1BB game (when AT start conditions are met/not met) The sub-control board 80 stops and displays the 1BB symbol combination when the conditions for shifting to the main game state 4 are met. When, AT (1BB game) is started from the next game.
In the case of shifting to the main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), before winning the SRB, when winning the small combination A group (winning numbers "10" to "15"), the order of pressing the correct answer is reported. As a notification method, for example, the order of pressing the correct answer is displayed as an image, and the stop switch 42 to be operated next is output by voice.
On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), before winning the SRB, even if you win the small win group B (winning numbers "16" to "21"), you can press the correct answer. Do not report order. This is because, in a game in which the SRB is not won, there is no correct pressing order (pressing order for winning a high-ranked bell) even if a small win group B is won (see FIG. 125).

Then, in the case of shifting to the main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), when the SRB is won and the SRB is inside, both when the small win group A wins and when the minor win group B wins , to notify the order of pressing the correct answer. Winning SRB will be carried over to the next game or later, so when you first win SRB. After the next game of the game in which the SRB has been won, the order of pressing the correct answer is informed when the minor combination B group is won.

On the other hand, even if the conditions for shifting to the main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game) are not satisfied, the 1BB game is started when the symbol combination of 1BB is stop-displayed. However, even if 1BB wins, the main game state does not shift.

When shifting to the 1BB game without shifting to the main game state 4, the main control board 50 does not operate the instruction function, and the sub control board 80 does not execute AT. Therefore, even when a small winning combination having a correct pressing order (small winning combination A group during non-SRB internal processing, small winning combination A group and small winning winning combination B group during SRB internal processing) is won, the winning number display LED 78 indicates the pressing order. The instruction number is not displayed, and the correct pressing order is not notified by the effect output device such as the image display device 23 or the like.
Also, when shifting to the 1BB game without shifting to the main game state 4, the sub-control board 80 maintains the normal performance content during the non-AT (the performance content up to that point). Therefore, when viewed from the player's side, even during the 1BB game, it feels as if the normal game (non-AT, non-special game) is continuing.

(6) Display of the number of games played in RT1 (non-AT) As described above, the number of games played in RT1 is counted. Go to non-RT.
RT1 starts with the end of 1BB operation (end of AT). Therefore, the number of RT1 games is substantially the number of non-AT games.
In the twenty-third embodiment, the image display device 23 displays the number of non-AT games played. As a result, the player can easily know how many games have been played since becoming non-AT. Also, it is possible to easily know how many games are left until reaching the so-called ceiling of "1400" games (games until transition to non-RT).

It should be noted that although the advantageous section may end during RT1 and shift to a non-advantageous section, the number of games played in RT1 ("_CT_RT_GAME" of address "F00A(H)") is not cleared at the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, even when the advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section during RT1, the number of games played in RT1 is maintained and continues to be counted even after the shift to the non-advantageous section. The same is true when transitioning from this non-advantageous section to an advantageous section.

Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, the number of non-AT games to be displayed on the image display device 23 is determined by the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 without using the data of the number of RT games "_CT_RT_GAME" at the address "F00A(H)". remembered in At the end of the 1BB operation, the initial value "0" is set as the number of non-AT games (increment counter) in the RWM 83, and this number of games is updated according to completion of the game, and is stored in the image display device 23 as the number of non-AT games. do.
However, when the power is turned on/off, the sub-control board 80 initializes a predetermined area of the RWM 83 when returning from the power-off, regardless of whether the setting change process is executed or not. The AT game count data is also initialized (cleared). Therefore, the number of non-AT games displayed on the image display device 23 becomes "0" when the power is restored from the power-off.
In addition, the number of non-AT games can be displayed as one of the game histories on the menu screen that can display the specifications of the gaming machine, the game history, etc., and the number of games displayed as an image on the image display device 23. (displayed based on the data of the number of non-AT games stored in the RWM 83). Therefore, when the power is turned on/off, the number of non-AT games displayed on the menu screen is also "0".

Therefore, for example, when the RT1 game count "_CT_RT_GAME" on the RWM 53 (main control board 50 side) is "100" and the non-AT game count displayed on the image display device 23 is "100", the power is turned on. When / is turned off, the number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" of RT1 maintains "100", but becomes "0" displayed on the image display device 23. Next, when the first game is executed, the number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" of RT1 is updated to "101", and the number of games displayed on the image display device 23 is updated to "1". Thus, when the power is turned on/off, the RT1 game count "_CT_RT_GAME" in the RWM 53 and the non-AT game count (the game count stored in the RWM 83) displayed on the image display device 23 are changed. become different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp how many games are left until the ceiling in the first morning (when the hall opens).

Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, even when the setting change process is executed, the RT state number "_NB_RT_STS" and the number of games played for RT1 "_CT_RT_GAME" are not cleared. However, not limited to this, when the setting change process is executed, the RT1 game count "_CT_RT_GAME" may be cleared. If the number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" of RT1 is cleared when the setting change processing is executed, the data of the number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" of RT1 after the setting change processing and the number of non-AT games displayed on the image display device 23 are combined. come to match. With this configuration, it is possible to grasp the number of games played from the first morning (when the hall opens) to the number of games played until the floor is reached. It becomes possible to motivate (use it as judgment material).

Although the twenty-third embodiment has been described above, the twenty-third embodiment is not limited to the above contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) When the small win group A is won, the win has the correct pressing order during 1BB operation, and the small win group B has the correct pressing order during 1BB operation and inside the SRB. However, not limited to this, the small win group B may also be a win having the correct pressing order during 1BB operation (regardless of whether it is inside the SRB) like the small win group A.
On the contrary, like the small win group B, the small win group A may also have a correct pressing order only during 1BB operation and within the SRB.

(2) The payout ratios when 1BB is not activated, when AT is not activated and 1BB is activated, and when AT and 1BB are activated are examples, and are not limited to the above embodiments. However, in order to prevent the shift to 1BB operation (1BB game) even though AT has not been won, it is preferable that the ball output rate during non-AT and 1BB operation is less than "1". .
On the other hand, when the 1BB is activated, by setting the ball output rate to be higher than when the 1BB is not activated even if the AT is not activated, the game machine is said to be in a state advantageous to the player due to the 1BB activation. It satisfies the principle of

(3) In the above embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed during non-AT and 1BB operation or during AT and 1BB operation. may be executed. However, in order to prevent 1BB activation during non-AT, it is preferable to set the AT winning probability during non-AT and 1BB activation to be lower than the AT winning probability when 1BB is not activated.
Furthermore, during the AT and 1BB operation, it is possible to execute a lottery for adding the number of AT sets.

(4) In the 23rd embodiment, even if the SRB is inside while the AT and 1BB are in operation, it is assumed that the game is completed without winning the SRB. This is because if the SRB is won and the game is shifted to the RB game, the payout rate will decrease.
Here, when the AT and 1BB are activated and the SRB is tense inside the SRB, the standby time may be set using the processing shown in FIG. 147 in order to avoid winning of the SRB.
On the other hand, in the case of shifting to a 1BB game without having the right to execute AT, when the SRB is won, even if the SRB is tense, processing to avoid winning the SRB (setting of waiting time) ) need not be executed.
Also, when the AT and 1BB are activated and the SRB is tense inside the SRB, similar to when the 1BB is tense, the player may be alerted by outputting a flash or sound.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the conditions for shifting to AT are not satisfied, the waiting time when 1BB is tense is set to "896 (D)" (approximately 1000 ms). The reason for this is that the waiting time is set longer than the one rotation time of the reel 31 because the time required for one rotation of the reel 31 at a constant speed is "1.117×2×336=approximately 750 ms". . With this setting, when the "blue BAR" symbol on the third reel 31 first reaches the effective line after the second stop switch 42 is operated, the standby time has not yet passed. Even if the third stop switch 42 is operated at the timing, winning of 1BB can be avoided.
However, the standby time is not limited to this and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to about 3 seconds in order to ensure sufficient time to avoid winning 1BB.

(6) In the example of the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in FIG. 147, the standby time is stored in step S810 on the condition that the stop operation of the second stop switch 42 has been performed in step S801. In this case, the determination in step S802 is made when "Yes" is determined when the second stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when 1BB is tense, and when the second reel 31 actually stops and 1BB is actually tense. There are two methods of judging "Yes" when it is done, but any of them may be used.
For example, in step S802, when it is determined "Yes" before the second reel 31 actually stops, at the time of step S810, when the second reel 31 has not yet stopped, and when the second reel 31 and when it has already stopped.

(7) Setting a standby time during the tense of 1BB and not stopping the third reel 31 during the standby time can also be used in specifications inside 1BB.
Here, the "inside 1BB specification" means that the game is executed while the winning of 1BB is carried over, and both non-AT and AT are executed while inside 1BB. In the case of 1BB internal medium specs, it is assumed that the game is played without winning 1BB. In such a case, the waiting time is set as shown in step S810 of FIG. 147, and if the waiting time has not elapsed as shown in step S791 of FIG. If so, it is possible to effectively suppress the transition from inside the 1BB to the 1BB operating state.

(8) The standby effect is performed by rotating the reels 31 in reverse. However, the rotation direction of the reels 31 in the waiting effect is not limited to this, and may be forward rotation. When the standby effect is executed in forward rotation (when the specification is such that the reels 31 are not rotated in reverse), the storage area for search counter update correction data at address "F09F (H)" in FIG. The processing of step S823 (storage of search counter update correction data) and the processing of step S933 in FIG. 159 (correction of deceleration start step number) are not required.
However, if the standby effect is performed in reverse rotation, the player can easily recognize that it is the standby effect. In addition, even if the standby effect is performed in normal rotation, the player can easily recognize that it is the standby effect if it is performed at a rotation speed different from the rotation speed of the normal game.
In addition, in the standby effect, the reel effect data table shown in FIG. 144 is used to set in advance which symbol number is to be stopped for each reel 31, so the stop position of the reel 31 before the standby effect is irrelevant. be. In other words, even if the stop numbers before execution of the standby effect (previous game) are different, the standby effect stops and displays a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "black BAR" aligned). In other words, it is not necessary to stop the preparation dots in the previous game of the game in which the standby effect is executed.

The immersion prevention output of (9) is not limited to the example described above, and may be executed even when the AT continuation notification is output, for example. Alternatively, the immersion prevention output may be executed even when the AT end effect is not output.

(10) In the confrontation effect output control shown in FIG. 161, in this example, the timer value is set based on the operation of the start switch 41 (steps S991 and S993). However, the timer value is not limited to this, and the timer value may be set (the timer may be counted) based on the operation of other operation switches such as the bed switch 40 and the first or second stop switch 42 .
Also, instead of setting the timer value (starting the timer count) when any of the operation switches is operated, the timer may start counting at a predetermined timing after the operation switch is operated. good.

For example, firstly, when the operation switch is the bed switch 40, the timer may start counting one second after the bed switch 40 is operated.
Secondly, when the operation switch is the start switch 41, after the start switch 41 is operated, the timer may start counting at the timing when the output of the current game effect is started.
Furthermore, thirdly, when the operation switch is the first or second stop switch 42, when the reel 31 corresponding to the first or second stop switch 42 is stopped, or when the first or second stop switch 42 is operated The timer may start counting at the timing when the production based on is started.

(11) In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, when the timer value is "0", the timing for outputting the ending of the confrontation effect is when the third stop switch 42 is turned off (when the hand is released). when it is done). However, not limited to this, when another (already operated) stop switch 42 is operated before the third stop switch 42 is turned off from on, even if the third stop switch 42 is turned off from on It is also possible not to output the ending of the confrontation presentation. For example, while the player himself/herself continues to press the third stop switch 42 so as not to output the ending of the showdown performance, the next player (friend) mischievously operates the other stop switch 42. It is possible to provide a new game in which the effect ending is not output at .

(12) Furthermore, in a game that outputs the ending of the confrontation effect, when the payout process is executed based on the turning off of the third stop switch 42 from on and a hopper error (no medals) occurs, The output of the performance ending is interrupted and the continuation of the performance ending is output after the hopper error is canceled, or the performance ending is output again from the beginning after the hopper error is cancelled.
Also, when the third stop switch 42 is turned off immediately before the timer value becomes "0" and the payout process is executed, the timer continues counting during the payout process. Therefore, when the timer value becomes "0" during the payout process, the effect ending is output based on the fact that the timer value has become "0" (regardless of whether the payout process has ended). be done.

(13) Furthermore, in the game in which the ending of the confrontation effect is output, the output of the effect ending is started based on the turning off of the third stop switch 42, but this is not the only option. is turned on, or when the third stop switch 42 is turned off from on, for example, the icon of the push button (sub button) is displayed as an image (at this point, the effect ending is not output), and the push button The effect ending may be output when is operated.

(14) In the example of FIG. 132, in the main game state 5 (AT pullback), when the AT pullback counter is "0" and the advantageous section clear counter is less than "600", the main game state 0 is entered. made it However, not limited to this, when the AT withdrawal counter becomes "0" in the main game state 5, regardless of the value of the advantageous section clear counter, the advantageous section clear counter is cleared, and the main game state 0 is entered. You may Also, in the case of high accuracy in the main game state 1, the main game state 1 may not end (shift to the main game state 0) even if the advantageous interval clear counter becomes less than "600".
(15) In the twenty-third embodiment, since the number of reels 31 is three, in step S801 of FIG. 147, it is determined whether or not the second stop has been completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where four reels 31 are used as shown in FIG. 59 (thirteenth embodiment), in step S801 of FIG. 147, it is determined whether or not it is after the third stop. It will be.

(16) In the twenty-third embodiment, the volume setting in the administrator mode is set in three stages, but the number is not limited to this, and may be set in any number of stages (eg, 5 stages, 10 stages, etc.). Also, although the volume setting in the player mode is set to 5 levels, it is not limited to this, and may be set to any number of levels (eg, 3 levels, 10 levels, etc.).
(17) Numerical values (setting values, timer values, etc.) given in the twenty-third embodiment are examples, and do not mean that the values are limited to these values.
(18) The 23rd embodiment can be implemented alone or in combination with the other 1st to 22nd embodiments.

<Appendix>
The invention described in the original specification, etc. of the present application (original invention) can be, for example, the following original inventions 1 to 26. The means and effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the inventions described in this specification are not meant to be limited to inventions 1 to 26 originally.

1. Original invention 1
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 1 The original invention relates to a game machine that does not execute processing related to game media after a power failure occurs.
In a conventional game machine, by turning off a blocker before executing backup processing as power-off processing, even if medals are inserted during execution of backup processing, the medals are returned to the player via the blocker. Therefore, there is known a technique of not performing the medal addition process (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-173832).
However, for example, if a power failure occurs at the moment a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot, the medal will pass through the blocker before the power shutdown process is executed, and the medal will be counted. It was possible. In terms of control, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process (the medal bet process or the medal credit process) after the power failure.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent addition processing of game media from being executed even when a power failure occurs substantially at the same time when game media are inserted from a game medium slot. .

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of Invention 1 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (first embodiment (A)) is
a game medium slot (medal slot 47);
It is provided in a passage (medal passage) for game media (medals) inserted from a game medium slot, and is in a state (on state) that permits passage of game media or a state (off state) that disallows passage of game media. ) controllable blocker (45);
Detection means A (insertion sensor 44a) and B (insertion sensor 44b) provided in the path of the game medium inserted from the game medium insertion port and capable of detecting the game medium (the detection means B is downstream of the detection means A). ) and
When an event occurs in which power supply is interrupted in a state in which the blocker is controlled to allow the passage of game media, the power supply interrupt event is detected, and the game media is removed. Let T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3) be the time until the blocker is controlled to disallow passage,
When the game medium is released from the game medium inlet into the gaming machine under the condition that the blocker is controlled to permit passage of the game medium, the game medium is invisible from the front of the gaming machine. From the time when it becomes possible (position M2 in FIG. 2) to when the game medium is detected by the detection means B and when the game medium is no longer detected by the detection means B (position M4 in FIG. 2) When the time is T2 (T2 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
T1<T2
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 1 According to the original invention, the game medium is released from the game medium inlet into the gaming machine, and when the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine, the power is cut off. In this case, until the detection means B stops detecting the game medium, the blocker is controlled so as to disallow passage of the game medium by detecting an event in which the supply of power is interrupted. , at least not detected by the detection means B.
Therefore, since the game media are not normally detected by the detecting means A and B, the addition processing (betting processing and credit processing) of the game media is not executed. Therefore, even if the power is cut off when the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine, that is, even if the power is cut immediately after the game medium is released into the gaming machine, the game You can choose not to accept media. As a result, it is possible to prevent the addition processing of the game media from being executed after the power failure occurs.

2. Original invention 2
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 2 The original invention relates to a gate mark of a substrate case in a game machine having a substrate case in which a control substrate is accommodated.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional game machine, a board case is known which accommodates a main control board inside. Here, since the substrate case is generally formed by molding, gate traces remain on the substrate case. A technique using this gate mark as a mark has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-042270).
However, the trace of the gate on the substrate case is unclear when viewed from the outside because it has a cut portion of the resin. Therefore, there is a problem that the inside of the main control board may be accessed by opening the gate marks.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to suppress the use of the gate traces of the substrate case.

(b) Means for solving the problem of invention 2 (the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (second embodiment) is
a predetermined IC (main CPU 55) having an arithmetic function;
a control board (main control board 50) having the predetermined IC mounted on one surface (the surface facing the upper surface of the upper cover 57);
A substrate case (substrate case 56 consisting of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) that has a plurality of surfaces (upper surface, side surface, etc.) and accommodates the control substrate,
The substrate case is formed so that the inside can be visually recognized,
A gate trace (57b) at the time of molding of the substrate case is arranged on a surface (outside the upper surface of the upper cover 57) that is outside the substrate case and faces the one surface of the control substrate,
It is characterized in that the predetermined IC of the control substrate is not positioned in the direction perpendicular to the surface facing the gate trace.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 2 According to the original invention, since the predetermined IC on the control substrate is not positioned in the vertical direction of the gate trace of the substrate case, the gate trace is illegally opened to access the predetermined IC. can be prevented.
In addition, since there is no gate trace of the substrate case in the vertical direction of the predetermined IC on the control substrate, the predetermined IC can be visually confirmed without being blocked by the gate trace. Accordingly, it is possible to easily visually confirm whether or not a predetermined IC has been tampered with.

3. Original invention 3
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 3 The original invention relates to a process when communication is restored from a disconnection after a disconnection occurs in communication between the main control board and the sub-control board.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional game machine, a game machine is known in which a command is transmitted from a main control board to a sub-control board, and the sub-control board controls an image display device or the like based on the received command.
Here, there is known a technique in which the sub-control board compares the command received last time with the command received this time, and determines that command reception is abnormal based on the consistency of these received commands (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-226503).
However, when a command is transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board, disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub control board. Then, when the communication is restored, there is a possibility that the sub-control board cannot output a normal effect.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to provide an appropriate effect when communication is restored after disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board.

(b) Means for solving the problem of Invention 3 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (third embodiment) is
a main control board (50);
A sub-control board (80) that controls the performance based on the information received from the main control board,
The sub-control board can receive information on the operated stop switch (42) from the main control board,
In a predetermined game state (AT), the sub-control board can output an effect corresponding to the operation of the stop switch based on receiving information of the operated stop switch,
The sub-control board is
When a predetermined stop switch is operated in the "N" game in the predetermined game state, when information that the predetermined stop switch is operated is received, a predetermined stop switch corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch is received. An effect (effect when the reel corresponding to the predetermined stop switch is stopped) is output, and then information from the main control board becomes unreceivable before all the remaining stop switches in the "N" game are operated. After that, at the "N+a" game, information from the main control board can be received, and thereafter, at the "N+a" game, information is received that a specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch has been operated. When, an effect corresponding to the operation of the specific stop switch and related to the predetermined effect (an effect following the predetermined effect, and an effect when the reel corresponding to the specific stop switch is stopped) is output. After that, when predetermined information is received in the "N+a+1" game, an effect for the "N+a+1" game is output based on the predetermined information.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 3 According to the original invention, when the communication is restored in the middle of the "N+a" game, an effect related to the predetermined effect of the "N" game that has been output until then is output. Therefore, in the "N+a" game, an effect following the "N" game can be output. Since the normal performance is restored when the game shifts to the "N+a+1" game, the sudden change of the performance due to the return of communication during the "N+a" game can be eliminated. As a result, it is possible to output an effect that does not cause discomfort before and after the disconnection occurs.

4. Original Invention 4
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 4 The original invention relates to a game machine in which a stop switch can be operated at high speed.
In a conventional game machine, when a stop switch is operated, the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to the lottery result. After stopping the reel at a predetermined position, the motor is energized for a predetermined time. Here, when the operated stop switch is in the ON state or when the motor is in the excited state, the next stop switch operation is not accepted.
Here, there is a known technique that does not accept the stop operation even if the second stop switch is operated from the time the first stop switch is operated until the reel status becomes the stopped state ( For example, see JP-A-2017-093576).
However, in the conventional technology described above, there is a problem that the game cannot be completed at high speed if it takes a long time after the stop switch is operated until the next stop switch operation can be accepted.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to enable the stop switch to be operated at high speed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 4 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (fourth embodiment) is
a reel (31);
a motor (32) for rotating the reel;
Reel control means (65) for driving and controlling the motor to stop the rotation of the reel based on detection of the operation of the stop button (stop button 42a);
Internal lottery means (role lottery means 61) and
Until the stop button is pushed to the deepest part (position shown in FIG. 12(c)), a sensor (detection sensor 42e) that detects the operation of the stop button is turned on, and when the stop button is released, the stop button is pushed. The button is configured to be movable to the initial position (the position shown in FIG. 12(a)) by the biasing force, and the sensor is turned off until the stop button moves to the initial position,
In a game in which the internal lottery means has determined a predetermined result, the stop button is operated for a predetermined reel at a predetermined timing under the condition that all the reels are rotated by the reel control means, and the predetermined result is obtained. After detecting that the sensor of the stop button for the reel is turned on, an excitation state (four-phase excitation state) for stopping the predetermined reel is set, and a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) elapses after the excitation state. is configured to terminate the excitation state when
Let T1 (T11 in FIG. 13) be the time from the moment when the stop button pushed to the deepest part is released until the sensor is turned off, and let T2 be the predetermined time,
T1<T2
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 4 According to the original invention, it was assumed that the start of the excitation state of the motor when the reel is stopped and the moment when the stop button pushed to the deepest position is released are simultaneous. Sometimes the energized state ends after the sensor turns off. Therefore, the next operation of the stop button can be accepted at the timing when the excitation state of the motor ends.

5. original invention 5
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 5 The original invention relates to the control of the medal payout device.
In conventional gaming machines, it is known that it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal (for example, JP-A-2016-214434).
Here, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor for rotating the hopper disk. When a constant current is supplied to the DC motor, the drive shaft gradually accelerates from the stopped state. After that, it reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
For this reason, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor gradually accelerates from the start of driving the hopper motor until the first medal is discharged. The required time is longer than the medal discharge interval when the drive shaft of the hopper motor rotates at a constant speed, and there is a possibility that the player may feel that the discharge of the first medal is delayed.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the player from feeling that the discharge of the first medal is delayed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 5 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (sixth embodiment) is
a hopper (35) for storing medals;
a hopper disk (101) provided in the hopper;
a hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disc;
A control means (main control board 50) for controlling the driving of the hopper motor,
The hopper disk is provided with a plurality (eight pieces) of holding portions (102) capable of holding medals stored in the hopper along the outer circumference of the hopper disk,
When the hopper motor is driven and the hopper disc rotates, the medals held in the holding section are sequentially discharged from the discharge section (103),
A first position is defined as a position of the holding section holding the last discharged medal at the moment when the last discharged medal in one payout process is discharged from the discharging section;
A second position is a position of the holding section that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process at the moment when the last ejected medal in the one payout process is ejected from the ejecting section,
When the one payout process ends, the control means is configured such that the holding section holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is positioned between a first position and a second position. and controlling the driving of the hopper motor so as to stop the rotation of the hopper disk.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 5 According to the original invention, if the holder for holding the first ejected token is stopped between the first position and the second position, it takes a long time to reach the first position. The distance is shorter than when stopped at the second position. As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when it stops at the second position, so even if the rotation of the hopper motor's drive shaft gradually accelerates, the ejection of the first medal is delayed. Feelings can be hidden from the player.

6. original invention 6
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 6 The original invention relates to the arrangement of the main control board mounted inside the cabinet and the sub-control board mounted on the rear surface of the front door.
In a conventional game machine, there is known one having an electrolytic capacitor for storing electricity on a sub-control board for controlling effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-131656).
Here, the electrolytic capacitor for power storage is filled with an electrolytic solution, but if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction and the filled electrolytic solution scatters and adheres to the main CPU on the main control board, There is a possibility that the main CPU will malfunction. Moreover, there is a possibility that the main CPU will be damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor explodes.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the main CPU from malfunctioning even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a defect and the electrolytic solution scatters. Another object of the present invention is to prevent the main CPU from being damaged by the impact even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a defect.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 6 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (seventh embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) openably attached to the cabinet;
a main control board (50) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control board (80) that controls the production,
The main control board is mounted inside the cabinet,
The sub-control board is attached to the back surface of the front door,
The main control board and the sub-control board are arranged to face each other when the front door is closed,
A main CPU (55) is arranged on the main control board,
An electrolytic capacitor (86) is arranged on the sub-control board at a position other than the position facing the main CPU.

(c) Effect of the original invention 6 According to the original invention, since the electrolytic capacitor is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub-control board, the electrolytic capacitor may explode due to a malfunction, Even if the electrolyte scatters, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU, thereby preventing malfunction of the main CPU.
Also, even if the electrolytic capacitor explodes, the main CPU can be prevented from directly receiving the impact, thereby preventing damage to the main CPU.

7. original invention 7
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 7 The original invention relates to reel stop control on the main control board side and effect output control on the sub control board side.
In the conventional game machine, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of performance contents, and each performance content is different when the special role is won (internal) and when the special role is not won (non-internal). have different selection probabilities (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-146608).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the effect content is selected regardless of the lottery result of the internal lottery both during internal and non-internal.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately determine the effect to be output according to the lottery result of the internal lottery.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 7 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (ninth embodiment) is
a plurality of reels (31) displaying a plurality of symbols;
a plurality of stop switches (42) operated by the player when stopping each reel;
Main control means (main control board 50) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control means (sub-control board 80) that controls the production,
The main control means is
Internal lottery that draws lots so that there are cases where the first lottery results (e.g., "BB" won alone while not inside) or the second lottery results (e.g., "no win" while inside BB) Means (role lottery means 61),
a plurality of stop position determination tables that define stop positions of the reels corresponding to positions of the reels at the moment the stop switch is operated;
reel control means (65) for determining the stop position of the reel using one of the stop position determination tables and stopping the reel at the determined stop position;
The reel control means determines the stop positions of the reels in the game in which the first lottery result is obtained and in the game in which the second lottery result is obtained, using the same stop position determination table;
The sub-control means is
a plurality of effect determination tables that define effects to be output;
An effect output control means (91) that determines the effect to be output using any of the effect determination tables and outputs the determined effect,
The effect output control means is characterized in that the effect to be output is determined using different effect determination tables for the game resulting in the first lottery result and the game resulting in the second lottery result.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, the reel control means on the side of the main control means stops in the same manner in the game in which the internal lottery means results in the first lottery result and the game in which the internal lottery means results in the second lottery result. The stop position of the reel is determined using the position determination table, but the effect output control means on the side of the sub-control means determines the effect to be output using a different effect determination table.
Thus, even if the reel stop control on the main control means side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control means side, and the effects can be diversified.

8. original invention 8
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 8 The original invention relates to the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
In a conventional game machine, a projecting side projecting outward is provided at the edge of an opening on the front side of a cabinet, and the projecting side is accommodated inside the front door when the front door is closed. Therefore, it is known that the gap between the cabinet and the front door is bent to make it difficult for foreign matter to enter (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-198949).
However, it is conceivable that the front door is slightly opened so that the protruding side is separated from the front door so that foreign matter can enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the fraudulent act of slightly opening the front door to allow a foreign object to enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 8 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (eighth embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) openably attached to the cabinet;
a door sensor that detects opening of the front door,
A first closing portion (13c) protruding toward the front door when the front door is closed is provided at the bottom of the cabinet,
A second closing portion (12a) projecting toward the cabinet when the front door is closed is provided at a lower portion of the front door below the first closing portion,
A third closing portion (12b) projecting toward the cabinet when the front door is closed is provided at a position above the first closing portion in the lower portion of the front door,
When the front door is closed, the first closing portion is arranged between the second closing portion and the third closing portion,
The position of the front door when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door is defined as a detection start position,
The first closing portion is arranged between the second closing portion and the third closing portion even when the front door is at the detection start position.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 8 According to the original invention, when the front door is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door, and then the second closing portion and the third closing portion are detected. The first blocking part is pulled out from between. Also, when the door sensor detects that the front door is open, it is possible to notify that the front door is open.
Therefore, the fact that the front door is open can be notified without the first closing part coming out from between the second closing part and the third closing part before the notification that the front door is open can be made. Even in the possible position, the gap between the cabinet and the front door has a curved shape, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of foreign objects entering through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

9. original invention 9
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 9 The original invention relates to a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section display.
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, a game machine having an advantageous section display is known (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-000797).
However, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an advantageous interval indicator, lighting control of the advantageous interval indicator at the time of recovery from power failure has not been sufficiently studied.
The original problem to be solved by the present invention is to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator when returning from power failure.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 9 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation mode (correct order of pressing) of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the information game state can be executed,
Equipped with an advantageous section indicator (advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section,
After the power supply is interrupted while the advantageous interval indicator is illuminated, when the power supply is resumed with the setting change switch turned off, the advantageous interval indicator is turned off after the activation of interrupt processing. Make it possible to execute processing for lighting,
Processing for turning off the advantageous interval indicator when the power supply is restarted while the setting change switch is on after the power supply is interrupted while the advantageous interval indicator is lit. After executing

(c) Effect of Original Invention 9 According to the original invention, the advantageous section indicator can be appropriately controlled according to the situation when the power is restored from the power-off.

10. original invention 10
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 10 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having four reels and a stop button.
A conventional gaming machine generally has three reels and three stop buttons (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-000797).
It has also been proposed to use four reels and stop buttons in conventional gaming machines. However, if the number of stop buttons is set to four, there is a problem that the stop button operation error tends to occur at the time of AT.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it difficult for the stop button to be erroneously operated when the number of stop buttons is set to four.

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of the Original Invention 10 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
four reels (31A-31D);
Four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to each of the four reels,
A predetermined operation button (24) is arranged above the four stop buttons,
At least part of the stop button (stop switch 42A) on the left end side is positioned vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button,
At least part of the stop button (stop switch 42D) on the right end side is positioned vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 10 According to the original invention, even when the number of stop buttons is four, both the left and right stop buttons can be operated using the left and right ends of the operation button as marks. , the operation error of the stop button can be made less likely to occur.

11. original invention 11
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 11 The original invention relates to a game machine capable of indicating a specified number.
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that allows a game to be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, even in a game that can be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers, there are cases where an appropriate prescribed number and an inappropriate prescribed number occur.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to play a game with an appropriate prescribed number.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 11 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (12th embodiment) is
Equipped with a notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42),
When an operation mode is notified in the notification game state, information corresponding to the operation mode (push order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display unit (acquisition number display LED 78),
In the notification game state, the game can be started when a game value of at least a prescribed number of a plurality of prescribed numbers (“2” or “3”) is inserted,
In the information game state, information corresponding to a specified number can be displayed on the predetermined display unit,
In the information game state, when the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the predetermined display unit, a predetermined timing (in FIG. 42 , displayed in step S322),
When displaying the information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display unit, it should be displayed in a display mode that is identifiable from the information corresponding to the operation mode ("0A" is displayed when the specified number is "2"). Characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, it is possible to display the information corresponding to the specified number at a predetermined timing until the start switch is detected to be turned on. , it is possible to notify an appropriate specified number in the game.
Also, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the information corresponding to the operation mode with the information corresponding to the prescribed number.

12. original invention 12
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 12 The original invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter for counting the difference number in an information game state.
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine provided with a counter that counts the difference number during AT (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-000797).
In a conventional gaming machine, it is requested to initialize information regarding the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section. However, there is a case where the next AT is won early after the AT is finished, and there is a case where it is desired to take over the difference in the number of cards from the previous AT.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to enable the transfer of the difference number of sheets from the previous informing game state (AT) while initializing the information on the advantageous interval at the end of the advantageous interval.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 12 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation mode (correct order of pressing) of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the information game state can be executed,
In the first control means (main control board 50), the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets of game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same shall apply hereinafter), and the minimum value is set to "0". a first difference counter (difference counter) that stores a value of
a second difference number counter (sub-difference number counter) for storing an accumulated difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets and the number of payouts of the game value in the second control means (sub-control board 80);
At the end of the advantageous interval, the first difference counter may be cleared (step S435 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the second difference counter may not be cleared.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, the first difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous interval, so that the rule of initializing the information on the advantageous interval can be complied with. In addition, there is a case where the second difference number counter is not cleared, and in that case, it is possible to take over the difference number of the previous information game state at the start of the next information game state.

13. original invention 13
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 13 The original invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter for counting the difference number in an information game state.
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine provided with a counter that counts the difference number during AT (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, sufficient consideration has not been given as to how to count (update) the difference number at the time of winning a replay.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately execute the process of updating the difference number at the time of winning a replay.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 13 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the information game state can be executed,
a differential number counter for storing a cumulative difference number indicating the difference between the number of gaming value bets and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same shall apply hereinafter), with the minimum value being "0";
Equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) that counts the number of games played in the advantageous section,
1. At least in a game in which a minor win is won, after all reels have stopped (in FIG. 41, step S2
89), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous interval counter satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval (step S424 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval counter satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is terminated without judging the value of the difference counter (without executing the process of step S434). The process for ending (step S435) can be executed,
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval counter does not satisfy the conditions for ending the advantageous interval ("No" in step S424), the difference counter updating process (steps S428 and W429) is executed. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference counter satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous section (step S434). ”) makes it possible to execute the process (step S435) for ending the advantageous section,
2. In the game winning the replay, after all the reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous interval counter satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval (FIG. 51). or step S424 in FIG. 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section ("Yes" in step S424), the value of the difference number counter is not judged (step S434). without executing the process) to execute the process (step S435) for ending the advantageous section,
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval counter does not satisfy the conditions for ending the advantageous interval ("No" in step S424), the difference counter is not updated. is a value that satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous section (in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, if "Yes" in step S426, proceed to step S434), and the value that satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous section ("Yes" in step S434), the processing for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 13 According to the original invention, in a game in which a replay is won, regardless of whether or not the value of the advantageous interval counter satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval, the difference counter is updated. is not executed, it is possible to appropriately execute the process of updating the difference number in the game in which the replay is won. Furthermore, speeding up of program processing can be achieved.

14. original invention 14
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 14 The original invention relates to a game machine capable of executing a process related to an instruction function in a predetermined prescribed number.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines having an instruction function have been known (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, the relationship between the specified number and the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to appropriately execute the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section according to the prescribed number.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 14 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
An information game state (AT) in which an instruction function for informing the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be executed;
An advantageous section in which the information game state can be executed,
an advantageous interval counter (advantageous interval clear counter) for counting a predetermined variable related to the advantageous interval;
An information game counter (AT game number counter or AT difference number counter) for counting a specific variable (for example, the number of games played or the difference number) related to the information game state,
Having a game in which at least a first specified number (specified number "3") or a second specified number (specified number "2") of gaming values can be inserted,
In the game (AT) in the advantageous section, in the game started based on the first specified number being inserted, the processing related to the instruction function (for example, notification of the correct pressing order) can be executed (see FIG. 48 , "Yes" in step S382), and in the game started based on the second specified number being inserted, the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed ("No" in step S382 in FIG. 48). ,
In the information game state, in the game started based on the first specified number being inserted, it is possible to update the advantageous interval counter (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the information game making it possible to update the counter (step S333 in FIG. 43),
In the game started based on the introduction of the second specified number in the information game state, it is possible to update the advantageous section counter (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the information game counter Make update impossible (“No” in step S332 in FIG. 43)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 14 According to the original invention, the advantageous interval counter can be updated by either the first specified number or the second specified number of games, thereby optimizing the advantageous interval. .
In addition, by not updating the information game counter in the second specified number of games in which the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed, consistency can be achieved between the execution of the process related to the instruction function and the update of the information game counter. can.

15. original invention 15
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 15 The original invention relates to a game machine having a signal line for starting.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, it is known to use a harness composed of a plurality of signal lines (lead wires) when electrically connecting control boards of a game machine. One of the signal lines is a signal line for starting.
In the prior art, since the start-related signal is used in a lottery, it is necessary to suppress any bullying on the start-related signal line.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it difficult to identify the signal line related to the start and to suppress the goto behavior.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 15 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (21st embodiment) is
In a game machine (slot machine 10, pachinko game machine 500) having a control board (main control board 50, 530),
Having a plurality of signal lines (lead wires) electrically connected to the control board,
The plurality of signal lines include at least a first signal line, a second signal line, and a third signal line,
The first signal line is a signal line related to the start of a game (for example, lead wire No. 7 of harness D in FIG. 111),
The second signal line (e.g., lead wire No. 8 of harness D in FIG. 111) and the third signal line (e.g., lead wire No. 3 of harness D in FIG. 111) are both A signal line different from the signal line for starting a game,
the first signal line and the second signal line have substantially the same diameter,
The first signal line and the third signal line have different diameters.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 15 According to the original invention, it is possible to make it difficult to specify which signal line is the signal line related to starting. As a result, it is possible to suppress tampering with the signal line related to starting.

16. original invention 16
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 16 The original invention relates to a game machine capable of outputting a setting change end sound.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known in which any one of a plurality of setting values can be set.
In the prior art, for example, when the setting key is turned off, the setting change process ends, and it was not possible to easily grasp the timing at which the setting change process ended from the outside.
Therefore, it is conceivable to notify the user when the setting change process is completed.
However, in the case where the game is started immediately after the setting change process is completed, if the completion of the setting change process is notified, the notification of the completion of the setting change process and the notification output in the game are the same. There is a risk that it will be output (overlapping) at the same time, and there is a risk that it will be difficult to understand the important information that is output in the game.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately output an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 16 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (19th embodiment) is
A gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) capable of changing the degree of advantage for a player,
Specific operation detecting means for detecting that a specific operation is performed in order to control either a setting change state in which the advantage can be changed or a normal state in which the advantage cannot be changed and a game can be started. (setting key switches 152, 535);
a speaker (22, 542);
In the setting change state, when the condition for shifting to the normal state is satisfied, an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended can be output for a time T1 ("T01" in FIG. 96) from the speaker. and
The game start condition (in the case of the slot machine 10, the specified number has been bet and the start switch 41 has been operated. In the case of the pachinko game machine 500, the game ball has entered the start port 532). In one game that is satisfied, it is possible to end the game at time T2 (“T12” or “T22” in FIG. 96),
In the setting change state, at least time T3 (“T11” or “T12” in FIG. 96) is required until the game start condition is satisfied after shifting to the normal state,
When one game is started immediately after shifting from the setting change state to the normal state, the following equation is established: T1<T2+T3 (T1>0, T2>0, T3>0) )
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 16 According to the original invention, even if the game is started at the same time as the setting change state ends, the end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended is played before the game ends. Since the output is finished, the effect output at the end of the game does not overlap with the end sound indicating the end of the setting change state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect output at the end of the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the end sound indicating the end of the setting change state.

17. original invention 17
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 17 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of setting the net increase and the base value to appropriate values.
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which both non-AT and AT are inside 1BB (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-029839).
However, in the 1BB internal medium specs as described above, the ball output rate cannot exceed "1" even when the game is played in the order that is most advantageous to the player, so the net increase during AT is increased. There is a problem that it is difficult to
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to achieve a high net increase during AT without increasing the base value.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 17 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In the advantageous section, it is possible to execute an information game state (AT) that can notify the operation information (correct order of pressing) of the stop switch,
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed,
The first situation (inside 1BB) in which the winning information of the special combination is carried over in the advantageous section,
and a second situation (1BB in operation) in which it is an advantageous section and a special game is in progress,
In the first situation, there is no case of executing the information game state,
In the second situation, there is a case where the information game state is executed,
Let α be the ball payout rate in the first situation (refers to the value obtained by dividing the number of game media awarded by the number of bets; the same shall apply hereinafter), let β be the ball payout rate in the second situation and non-notification gaming state, and Let γ be the ball payout rate in the state of 2 and the notification game state (in a game in which the operation information of the stop switch is notified, the ball payout rate when the stop switch is operated according to the notified operation information). when
α<β<1<γ
and
Let the probability of deciding to execute the information game state in the non-information game state of the second situation be x (a value greater than "0"),
When the probability of deciding to execute the information game state in the non-information game state of the first situation is y ("0" in the twenty-third embodiment),
x < y
and
The second situation is characterized in that the predetermined value (advantage zone clear counter value) relating to the advantageous zone can be updated according to the execution of the game even in the non-reporting game state.

(c) Effect of the original invention 17 According to the original invention, in the special game, the ball payout rate increases more than in the non-special game. rate can be increased. Also, since the information game state is not executed in the non-special game, the base value can be lowered.
Furthermore, when the transition to the special game is made in the non-informative game state, the payout rate does not exceed "1" and the predetermined value regarding the advantageous section is updated. Even if it shifts to a game, it can be made so that a player does not have a merit. In particular, when transitioning to the special game in the non-informative game state, the probability of being determined to be in the informing game state is set lower than during the non-special game, so as to check the shift to the special game in the non-informative game state. can do.

18. original invention 18
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 18 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that outputs a test signal.
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which both non-AT and AT are inside 1BB (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-029839).
However, in the 1BB internal medium specs as described above, the ball output rate cannot exceed "1" even when the game is played in the order that is most advantageous to the player, so the net increase during AT is increased. hard to let
Here, various specifications have been proposed that realize a low base and achieve a high net increase during AT.
The problem is what kind of test signal should be output in such low-base and purely increased AT specs.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to enable the output of an appropriate test signal even with a low-base specification and a high-medium-to-high AT net addition.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 18 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
A game in which the winning information of the special role (1BB) is carried over and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role can be stopped and displayed (the accessory condition device number is "1" and the winning and replay condition device number is "0 ”),
When the predetermined conditions are satisfied (main game state "3" and AT standby counter "0"), a test signal (" 0, 16, 7, 2") can be executed,
If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, processing for outputting a test signal ("0, 6, 127, 127") including stop switch operation information that does not stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination can be executed. It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 18 According to the original invention, when the predetermined conditions are satisfied, a test signal capable of stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination can be output, and when the predetermined conditions are not satisfied, the special symbol combination can be output. Since it is possible to output a test signal that does not stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, a gaming machine with specs that induces a special game when executing the notification game state (AT) can be used in the same manner as a player (market). It is possible to conduct a test in a different way of hitting.

19. original invention 19
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 19 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that prevents erroneous winning of a special combination.
Conventionally, gaming machines are known that execute non-AT and AT in a state inside an MB. In this case, in order to avoid the winning of the MB that carries over the winning, it is known to inform the target symbol to avoid the winning of the MB (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-147537).
However, there is a problem that the above notification may mislead the player. Also, even if the notification is given after the MB has been tempered, if the time between the second stop and the third stop of the stop switch is short, the notification may not be in time and the MB may win.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent the winning of a special role from being erroneously won when the winning is carried over and the special role that should be avoided from winning a prize is tense.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 19 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed,
In a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a special combination can be stopped and displayed, a special reel is played under a situation where a predetermined reel (third reel 31) is rotating and the other reels (first and second reels 31) are stopped. When the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the role are stopped and displayed (so-called special role is tenpai), until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until the waiting time elapses), the predetermined The predetermined reel is not stopped even if a stop switch corresponding to one of the reels is operated.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 19 According to the original invention, until a predetermined condition is met, even if the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined reel is operated, the predetermined reel does not stop, thereby preventing an erroneous winning of the special combination. be able to.

20. original invention 20
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 20 Same as original invention 19.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 20 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed,
In the special game, an information game state (AT) capable of informing operation information (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) can be executed,
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination can be stopped and displayed, the stop switch corresponding to the reel other than the predetermined reel (the third reel 31) is operated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination can be stopped and displayed. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied (when the waiting time has not passed) in the case of becoming (so-called, when the special combination is tenpai), the stop switch corresponding to the reel other than the predetermined reel is operated. From the subsequent predetermined timing (initially, when the standby time is saved in step S810 in FIG. 147) until at least one rotation of the predetermined reel (at least 750.624 ms from the time of step S810 (one rotation time of reel 31) ), the predetermined reel is not stopped even if the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined reel is operated.
(c) Effect of original invention 20 Same as original invention 19.

21. Original invention 21
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 21 The original invention is intended to make it possible to realize a ceiling function in a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section.
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that is provided with a ceiling counter and counts the number of games played without shifting to AT (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-061760).
However, there are cases where the advantageous section ends while the number of games is being counted by the ceiling counter. Here, since the ceiling counter is data relating to the indicating function, it is considered to be subject to data that is cleared when the advantageous section ends. Therefore, there is a problem that the ceiling counter is cleared when the advantageous section ends while the number of games is being counted by the ceiling counter.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to enable the ceiling function to be realized even when the advantageous section is provided.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 21 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
a first lottery state (RT1) and a second lottery state (non-RT);
An advantageous section capable of executing an informing game state (AT) capable of informing the operation information of the stop switch,
When the number of games played in the first lottery state satisfies a predetermined condition (when 1400 games are played), it is possible to shift to the second lottery state,
In the first lottery state, which is the advantageous section, when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, it is possible to shift to the first lottery state, which is the non-advantageous section,
The number of games played in the first lottery state is continuously counted even when the first lottery state, which is the advantageous section, shifts to the first lottery state, which is the non-advantageous section.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 21 According to the original invention, even if the advantageous section ends in the middle, the number of games in the first lottery state is continued to be counted. It becomes possible to provide a ceiling function.

22. original invention 22
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 22 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a reel effect.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that carries out a reel effect of temporarily stopping reels in a pseudo game (for example, Japanese Patent No. 5709176).
However, the pseudo game in the prior art was a reel performance based on the operation of the stop switch by the player.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to execute a reel effect without being based on the operation of a stop switch by a player, and to give regularity to the stop timing of the reels.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 22 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
Each reel (31) is stopped at a predetermined stop position, and a reel effect (standby effect) of stopping and displaying a predetermined symbol combination is executable (standby effect start (M_TARPIC_EXE)),
When executing the reel effect, for each reel, information on the expected stop position (information in the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT)) and a timer value until the reel can be stopped (reel effect execution timer table (TBL_TARPIC_TM# ) information) can be stored,
The timer value corresponding to the predetermined reel is a value that allows the predetermined reel to be stopped even when the predetermined reel can be stopped at the predetermined stop position during the execution of the reel effect. When not, the predetermined reel is not stopped.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 22 According to the original invention, it is possible to impart regularity to the timing at which each reel stops by a simple method in the reel effect.

23. original invention 23
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 23 The original invention relates to a game machine that outputs information on prevention of addiction.
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine that outputs information on prevention of addiction when AT ends (for example, Japanese Patent No. 6288357).
However, the conventional output of information on prevention of penetration is uniform.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately output information related to immersion prevention.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 23 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) capable of informing operation information (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) can be executed,
In the case where it is determined that a plurality of sets of information game states can be executed, there is a case where it is notified that the next set of information game states will be executed during the execution of one set of information game states,
In a situation where multiple sets of information game states can be executed, when it is notified that the next set of information game states will be executed during the execution of one set of information game states, one set of information game states After executing the state and before the next set of information game states are executed, the information regarding the prevention of addiction is not output ("Yes" in step S975 in FIG. 160),
In a situation where multiple sets of the information game state can be executed, if it is not notified that the next set of information game states will be executed during the execution of one set of information game states, one set of information game states After executing the information game state, before the information game state of the next set is executed, it is possible to output information on prevention of immersion (in FIG. 160, if "No" in step S975, step S978 is executed do)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 23 According to the original invention, the output of information on prevention of addiction can be made to correspond to the information content in one set of information game states. In addition, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether or not the next set of information game states will be executed depending on whether or not the information regarding prevention of addiction is output.

24. original invention 24
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 24 The original invention relates to a game machine capable of outputting a continuation effect based on the operation of a stop switch.
In the conventional technology, when a production message is transmitted from the control device to the production device,
It is known to include a message with a delay function that delays the execution of the effect message after a set time has elapsed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-042759).
In the prior art, if the effect is to be delayed during the third stop, it is necessary to transmit a command indicating the delay during the third stop.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to delay the output timing of the effect without transmitting a command indicating delay at the time of the third stop.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 24 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
A timer value from a predetermined timing after a predetermined switch (start switch 41) is operated can be stored (step S993 in FIG. 161),
In a game that outputs a specific effect (end of effect), when the last operated stop switch is turned off from on and the timer value has reached a predetermined value ("Yes" in step S995) When) can output a specific effect at the timing when the last operated stop switch turns from on to off,
In a game that outputs a specific effect, when the last operated stop switch is turned off from on and the timer value is not the predetermined value, at the timing when the timer value becomes the predetermined value (step It is characterized in that it is possible to output a specific effect (when "Yes" in S995).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 24 According to the original invention, it is possible to delay the timing of outputting a specific effect. Also, a player who does not want to output a specific effect immediately can delay the output timing of the specific effect at his/her own will.

25. original invention 25
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 25 The original invention relates to a game machine in which the output sound volume can be set.
In the prior art, it is known that the administrator (store side) sets the standard for the volume of the effect, and the player can set the volume (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074301). .
However, in the above conventional technology, the volume is often set to a high value on the store side. There is a problem that it is not possible to
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to enable a player who desires a low volume to reduce the volume regardless of the store's settings.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 25 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
As modes for setting the volume, a first volume setting mode (administrator mode in FIG. 162 (A)) and a second volume setting mode (player mode in FIG. 162 (B)) are provided,
The first volume setting mode is executable when a predetermined condition is satisfied (at power on/off, in setting change state, or in setting confirmation state),
A second volume setting mode is executable by the player,
The output volume is determined based on the volume set in the first volume setting mode and the volume set in the second volume setting mode,
A predetermined effect sound (for example, start The volume of the operation sound of the switch 41, the operation sound of the stop switch 42, the tenpai sound, the winning sound of the role, GBM during AT, etc.) (“20” in FIG. 162 (C)) and the first volume setting mode the volume of a predetermined effect sound (“20” in FIG. 162(C)) output when the volume is set to a specific volume (for example, “small”) and the minimum volume is set in the second volume setting mode; are substantially the same.

(c) Effect of the original invention 25 According to the original invention, when the volume is set to a predetermined volume in the first volume setting mode and when the volume is set to a specific volume, the volume is changed in the second volume setting mode. If the volume is set to the minimum volume, the predetermined effect sound is output with substantially the same volume. Thereby, the volume can be set to the minimum volume in the second volume setting mode without being affected by the volume setting in the first volume setting mode.

26. original invention 26
The original invention relates to a game machine in which the output sound volume can be set.
In the prior art, it is known that the administrator (store side) sets the standard for the volume of the effect, and the player can set the volume (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074301). .
However, in the conventional technology described above, since it is not possible to grasp the specific volume level on the volume setting screen, the administrator cannot try the game after setting the volume. was necessary.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to know a concrete guideline of the volume when setting the volume.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 26 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
As modes for setting the volume, a first volume setting mode (administrator mode in FIG. 162 (A)) and a second volume setting mode (player mode in FIG. 162 (B)) are provided,
The first volume setting mode is executable when a predetermined condition is satisfied (at power on/off, in setting change state, or in setting confirmation state),
A second volume setting mode is executable by the player,
The output volume is determined based on the volume set in the first volume setting mode and the volume set in the second volume setting mode,
In the first volume setting mode, icons corresponding to a plurality of selectable levels of volume are displayed as images, and when any icon is selected, a predetermined sound can be output at the volume corresponding to the selected icon. It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 26 According to the original invention, when setting the volume in the first volume setting mode, it is possible to grasp the level of the set volume.

10 slot machine (gaming machine)
11 Power switch 12 Front door 12a Second closing part 12b Third closing part 12c Control panel 12d Index 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c First closing part 14 Symbol display device 14a Reel frame 15 Medal payout device 16 Medal payout port 17 Door Switch 18 Display window 21 Production lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Operation button 25 Operation instruction lamp 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 38a Fixed shaft 38b Movable shaft 39a Movable piece 39b Spring 40a 1 Bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 42a Stop button 42b Stopper 42c Coil spring 42d Moving piece 42e Detection sensor 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Medal slot 47a Medal guard 47b Medal holder Part 48 Chute Passage 49 Chute Sensor 50 Main Control Board (Main Control Means)
50a screw hole 51 input port 52 output port 53 RWM
54 ROMs
55 Main CPU
56 board case (main board case)
57 Upper cover 57a Crimped portion 57b Gate mark 57c Hollow portion 57d Projection 57e Projection 58 Lower cover 58a Crimped portion 58b Gate mark 58c Boss 61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Effect group number selection means 65 reel control means 66 winning judgment means 67 payout means 71 control command transmission means 73 set value display LED
74 management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 display substrate 76 credit number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2bet indicator LED
79c 3bet indicator LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Input indicator LED
79f Replay display LED
80 sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROMs
85 Sub CPU
86 electrolytic capacitor 87 sub board case 91 performance output control means 101 hopper disc 102 holding section 103 discharge section 110 reel base 120 reel control board 121 reel board case 130 passage forming member 131 upper medal receiving opening 132 returning medal passage 133 lower medal receiving opening 134 payout medal passage 151 setting key insertion slot 152 setting key switch 153 setting change (reset) switch 500 pachinko game machine 501 outer frame 502 front frame 503 hinge mechanism 504 game board 505 glass door 506 upper tray 507 lower tray 508 firing handle 510 power supply Board 511 Power switch 512 Launch board 513 Launch device 520 Payout control board 521 Key insertion slot 522 Door open switch 523 Frame open switch 524 Payout device 525 External terminal board 530 Main control board 530a Hole 531 Special symbol display device 532 Start port 533 Start port Switch 534 Setting key insertion slot 535 Setting key switch 536 Setting change (reset) switch 537 Setting value display LED
538 management information display LED (performance display monitor)
539a-539h Connectors 539b'-539h' Connector legs 540 Sub-control board 541 Effect lamp 542 Speaker 543 Image display device 550 Board case 560 Upper case 560a Lower edge 561 Cover 562 Crimped part 563a-563g Opening 564 Boss 565 Side wall 570 Lower case 570a Outer edge 571 Side wall 572 Crimped part BH Harness

Claims (1)

Having a first display capable of displaying character ratio information,
having a start switch,
having "N" reels,
having "N" stop switches,
Having a second display capable of displaying information about an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Having a third display capable of displaying information about an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch,
In a predetermined game in which the operation of the start switch is accepted at the first timing before the minimum game time elapses and the result of the specific lottery is determined, the second display device displays information on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. After that, it is configured to be able to display information about an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch on the third display,
In the specific game in which the operation of the start switch is accepted at the second timing after the minimum game time has passed and the result of the specific lottery is determined, the third display device displays information on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. After that, the second display is configured to be able to display information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
The first display has a first display, a second display, a third display, and a fourth display,
The first display has a plurality of segments including a DP segment,
The second display has a plurality of segments including a DP segment,
The third display has a plurality of segments including a DP segment,
The fourth display has a plurality of segments including a DP segment,
A test pattern can be displayed on the first display,
The test pattern consists of a first situation in which all of the plurality of segments of the first display section, the second display section, the third display section, and the fourth display section are turned on; 2, a third display unit, and a second state in which all of the plurality of segments of the fourth display unit are turned off.

Images